JP6875315B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in Patent Document 1, a gaming machine has been proposed in which the reserved information expands while moving toward the center of the screen, and the mode of the reserved information changes from a normal mode to a special mode.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-084863 (FIGS. 33 and 34)

In a gaming machine as described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improving the interest of the production using the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display such as the hold information.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine for improving the interest of a production using a corresponding display corresponding to a variable display.

Means VA gaming machine
A gaming machine that executes variable display
Display means and
Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production,
The effect executing means can execute a specific effect that suggests that the player is controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player by displaying a predetermined character.
In the display means, when the predetermined character is displayed, it is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.
Corresponding displays include a hold display corresponding to a variable display that has not been executed and a variable display compatible display corresponding to a variable display that has been executed.
In the display means, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first effect identification information and the second effect identification information corresponding to the variable display being executed.
As the period of the specific effect, the first period corresponding to the start of the specific effect, the second period after the first period, and the second period after the second period corresponding to the end of the specific effect. There are 3 periods,
The effect executing means can execute an action effect that acts on the variable display compatible display when the specific effect is being executed.
As the action effect, there are a first action effect and a second action effect .
The effect executing means is
In the second period, while reducing the visibility of the first effect identification information, the visibility of the second effect identification information is not reduced, and the visibility of the predetermined character is reduced, so that the first action is performed. Perform the production,
Wherein without reducing the visibility of a predetermined character to perform the second action effect in the second period,
When the first action effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the second action effect is executed .
In addition, as a gaming machine of means V1,
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that executes variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols).
When a specific effect display (reach effect image (image related to battle effect)) is displayed, a corresponding display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (hold display, active display) corresponding to variable display. ,
It is provided with an action effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an action effect (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect) acting on the corresponding display.
When the action effect is executed, the visibility of the specific effect display can be changed (as shown in FIGS. 14-5 (8) to (10), the first change suggestion effect is executed. Along with this, a blackout effect is executed, and the movable body 01TM050 is operated while the reach effect image (image related to the battle effect) is in a difficult-to-see state.)
It may be characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, by changing the visibility of the specific effect display when the action effect is executed, it is possible to generate unexpectedness and improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means V2 is
Means V1 gaming machine
A change that changes the display mode of the corresponding display (hold display, active display) that is the target of the action effect (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect) from the display mode before the action effect is executed. Equipped with a change effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the effect
When the action effect is executed after the visibility of the specific effect display is reduced (when the first change suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 14-5 (8) to (10) is executed), the specific effect display is displayed. When the action effect is executed without lowering the visibility (when the second change suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 14-5 (13) to (15) is executed), the rate at which the change effect is executed is Different (as shown in FIGS. 14-2 (D) and (E), when the first change suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the active display always changes, but the second change suggestion effect is executed. In some cases, the display mode of the active display may not change)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player becomes interested in the visibility of the specific effect display when the action effect is executed, and can improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means V3 is
A gaming machine of means V1 or means V2.
The specific effect display (reach effect image (image related to the battle effect)) is a playback display of the effect video (FIGS. 14-4 (6) and (7), and the battle shown in FIGS. 14-5 (13) to (17). A series of images about the production)
The playback display period of the effect effect is the same regardless of whether or not the action effect is executed (as shown in FIG. 14-3, the period from T6 to T12 during which the battle effect is executed is the th. 1 change suggestion effect and 2 change suggestion effect are common),
The execution period of the action effect is shorter than the playback display period of the effect movie, and the action effect ends before the play display period of the effect movie ends (as shown in FIG. 14-3, the first The execution period of the change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect is T8 to T11, which is shorter than the period of T6 to T12 in which the battle effect is executed, and the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect are performed before the battle effect ends. Change suggestion production ends)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to adjust the reproduction display period of the effect effect and the execution period of the action effect, and the display control of the effect effect can be simplified.

The gaming machine of means V4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means V1 to means V3.
It is possible to execute variable display of production identification information (decorative symbol, small symbol) corresponding to variable display of special identification information (special symbol).
As the effect identification information, there are a first effect identification information (decorative pattern) and a second effect identification information (small pattern).
When the action effect is executed, the visibility of the specific effect display is reduced, so that the visibility of the first effect identification information is reduced, while the visibility of the second effect identification information is reduced. (As shown in FIGS. 14-5 (8) to (10), the blackout effect is executed along with the execution of the first change suggestion effect to make the decorative symbol difficult to see, while the small symbol is not allowed to be displayed. Does not reduce the visibility of
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player appropriately grasp that the variable display of the special identification information is continued while enhancing the effect by reducing the visibility of the specific effect display. ..

The gaming machine of means V5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means V1 to means V4.
The action effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) is an operation promotion display (operation promotion display 01TM031A in a special mode) that prompts the player to operate at a specific timing (timing of T7 after the development of super reach shown in FIG. 14-3). Is performed, and one of a plurality of types of specific effects (first change suggestion effect and second change suggestion effect) is performed according to the operation of the player (first change suggestion effect or second change suggestion effect). Can be executed as the above-mentioned action effect,
The operation promotion display (operation promotion display 01TM031 in the normal mode) is performed at a predetermined timing different from the specific timing (the timing of T2 immediately after the start of the fluctuation shown in FIG. 14-3), and a predetermined effect is performed according to the operation of the player. Equipped with a predetermined effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a cut-in notice effect).
When the specific effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher than when the predetermined effect is executed and the specific effect is not executed (first change suggestion effect). Alternatively, if any of the second change suggestion effects is executed and the cut-in notice effect is not executed, neither the first change suggestion effect nor the second change suggestion effect is executed and the cut-in notice effect is executed. The rate of big hits is higher than if it was done)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when the player operates according to the operation promotion display, he / she becomes interested in whether a specific effect is executed or a predetermined effect is executed, and the interest is improved. be able to.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-084863 (FIGS. 33 and 34), the reserved information expands while moving toward the center of the screen, and the mode of the reserved information changes from a normal mode to a special mode. A game machine has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-084863 (FIGS. 33 and 34), there is room for improving the interest of the production using the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display such as the hold information. The invention according to the means W1 to the means W6 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine for improving the interest of a production using a corresponding display corresponding to a variable display.

The gaming machine of means W1 is
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that executes variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols).
When a specific effect display (reach effect image (image related to battle effect)) is displayed, a corresponding display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (hold display, active display) corresponding to variable display. ,
It is provided with a change effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change effect (effect of changing the display mode of the active display 01TM001) that changes the display mode of the corresponding display.
When the change effect is executed, the visibility of the corresponding display that is the target of the change effect can be made higher than the visibility of the specific effect display (FIGS. 14-7 (18) to (19). As shown in the above, the visibility of the active display 01TM001 is enhanced by enlarging the active display 01TM001 in the center of the screen while the reach effect image (image related to the battle effect) is difficult to see due to the blackout effect. (Image related to battle effect) Make it higher than the visibility, and execute the effect to change the display mode of the active display 01TM001 in that state)
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the corresponding display that is the target of the change effect rather than the specific effect display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the change effect.

The gaming machine of means W2 is
Means W1 gaming machine
It is characterized by comprising an action effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an action effect (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect) acting on the corresponding display (hold display, active display).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the change effect by executing the action effect.

The gaming machine of means W3 is
Means W2 gaming machine
In the change effect (effect that changes the display mode of the active display 01TM001), the display mode of the corresponding display (hold display, active display) that is the target of the action effect (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect). Is changed from the display mode before the action effect is executed (as shown in FIGS. 14-5 (8) to (10), the active display 01TM001 (white circle display) in the normal mode is changed to the red mode. Active display 01TM001 (changed to red circle display),
When the action effect is executed, the visibility of the specific effect display can be changed (as shown in FIGS. 14-5 (8) to (10), the first change suggestion effect is executed. Along with this, a blackout effect is executed, and the movable body 01TM050 is operated while keeping the reach effect image (image related to the battle effect) in a difficult-to-see state),
When the action effect is executed after the visibility of the specific effect display is reduced (when the first change suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 14-5 (8) to (10) is executed), the specific effect display is displayed. When the action effect is executed without lowering the visibility (when the second change suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 14-5 (13) to (15) is executed), the rate at which the change effect is executed is Different (as shown in FIGS. 14-2 (D) and (E), when the first change suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the active display always changes, but the second change suggestion effect is executed. In some cases, the display mode of the active display may not change)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player becomes interested in the visibility of the specific effect display when the action effect is executed, and can improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means W4 is
A gaming machine of means W2 or means W3,
The specific effect display (reach effect image (image related to the battle effect)) is a playback display of the effect video (FIGS. 14-4 (6) and (7), and the battle shown in FIGS. 14-5 (13) to (17). A series of images about the production)
The playback display period of the effect effect is the same regardless of whether or not the action effect is executed (as shown in FIG. 14-3, the period from T6 to T12 during which the battle effect is executed is the th. 1 change suggestion effect and 2 change suggestion effect are common),
The execution period of the action effect is shorter than the playback display period of the effect movie, and the action effect ends before the play display period of the effect movie ends (as shown in FIG. 14-3, the first The execution period of the change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect is T8 to T11, which is shorter than the period of T6 to T12 in which the battle effect is executed, and the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect are performed before the battle effect ends. Change suggestion production ends)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to adjust the playback display period of the production moving image and the execution period of the action effect, and the display control of the production moving image can be simplified.

The gaming machine of means W5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means W2 to means W4.
It is possible to execute variable display of production identification information (decorative symbol, small symbol) corresponding to variable display of special identification information (special symbol).
As the effect identification information, there are a first effect identification information (decorative pattern) and a second effect identification information (small pattern).
When the action effect is executed, the visibility of the specific effect display is reduced, so that the visibility of the first effect identification information is reduced, while the visibility of the second effect identification information is reduced. (As shown in FIGS. 14-5 (8) to (10), the blackout effect is executed along with the execution of the first change suggestion effect to make the decorative symbol difficult to see, while the small symbol is not allowed to be displayed. Does not change the visibility of
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player appropriately grasp that the variable display of the special identification information is continued while enhancing the effect by reducing the visibility of the specific effect display. ..

The gaming machine of means W6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means W2 to means W5.
The action effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) is an operation promotion display (operation promotion display 01TM031A in a special mode) that prompts the player to operate at a specific timing (timing of T7 after the development of super reach shown in FIG. 14-3). Is performed, and one of a plurality of types of specific effects (first change suggestion effect and second change suggestion effect) is performed according to the operation of the player (first change suggestion effect or second change suggestion effect). Can be executed as the above-mentioned action effect,
The operation promotion display (operation promotion display 01TM031 in the normal mode) is performed at a predetermined timing different from the specific timing (the timing of T2 immediately after the start of the fluctuation shown in FIG. 14-3), and a predetermined effect is performed according to the operation of the player. Equipped with a predetermined effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a cut-in notice effect).
When the specific effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher than when the predetermined effect is executed and the specific effect is not executed (first change suggestion effect). Alternatively, if any of the second change suggestion effects is executed and the cut-in notice effect is not executed, neither the first change suggestion effect nor the second change suggestion effect is executed and the cut-in notice effect is executed. The rate of big hits is higher than if it was done)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when the player operates according to the operation promotion display, he / she becomes interested in whether a specific effect is executed or a predetermined effect is executed, and the interest is improved. be able to.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-109081 (FIG. 12), the probability setting has been changed (setting change) as a pachinko machine in which the probability setting for determining the winning probability in the winning / failing determination of the special figure is performed. A gaming machine has been proposed in which a setting change effect suggesting is performed. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-5614 (FIG. 52), there has been proposed a gaming machine that wins a fall lottery by a fall lottery means in a high probability state and shifts to a normal probability state. As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-109081 (FIG. 12), for a gaming machine that executes control according to a set value among a plurality of set values having different advantages, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-5614 As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 52 (FIG. 52), there is room for improving the interest of such a gaming machine when a configuration in which a state transition lottery for transitioning a gaming state is executed is applied. The invention according to the means X1 to the means X6 is made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and is to improve the interest of the gaming machine in which the control according to the set value is executed and the state transition lottery is executed.

The gaming machine of means X1
A gaming machine that can execute control according to the set values among a plurality of set values (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) having different advantages (big hit probabilities) for the player. Pachinko game machine 1)
A game state control means (for game control) that can be controlled to a special state (high accuracy state) in which the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) in which the game medium easily enters the variable device (special variable winning ball device 7) is high. Microcomputer 100) and
A state transition lottery execution means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing a state transition lottery (probability change / fall determination) for shifting the game state in the special state (high probability state), and
Setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value based on the result of the state transition lottery (it was determined that there is "probability change fall" in the probability change fall judgment) (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect) It is characterized in that it is provided with a setting suggestion effect executing means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing the above.
According to such a configuration, the setting suggestion effect is executed based on the result of the state transition lottery, so that the control according to the set value is executed and the interest of the gaming machine in which the state transition lottery is executed is improved. be able to. In particular, even when the result of the state transition lottery is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to play by executing the setting suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means X2 is
Means X1 gaming machine
The probability of the state transition lottery (probability change fall determination) is common regardless of the set value (as shown in FIG. 14-10, a common probability change fall determination table is referred to regardless of the currently set set value. Therefore, the probability of ending the high-accuracy state is 1/80, regardless of the set value.)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the probability of the state transition lottery is common regardless of the set value, when the set value has a high advantage, it becomes easy to continuously control the advantageous state, and the game Can improve the interest of.

The gaming machine of means X3 is
A gaming machine of means X1 or means X2.
The setting suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) has a set value suggested in the setting suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect) and a set setting value (currently set setting). Multiple types of setting suggestion effects (value) and the first setting suggestion effect that displays the characters "Reach !!" or "REACH", "Full moon background", "Half moon background", or "Crescent background" 2nd setting suggestion effect) can be executed.
Depending on the timing determined to shift the game state in the state transition lottery (the number of fluctuation display times when it is determined that there is a "probability change fall" in the probability change fall determination), any of the plurality of types of setting suggestion effects The ratio of whether to execute the setting suggestion effect of the type is different (in the first setting suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 14-14 (A), when the number of times is 50 or less, the characters "reach !!" are displayed. If the number of times is 51 or more, the character "REACH" is displayed. In the second setting suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 14-14 (B), the "full moon background" is displayed if the number of times is 30 or less. If it is 31 times or more and 60 times or less, the "half moon background" is displayed, and if it is 61 times or more, the "crescent background" is displayed).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the interest can be improved by associating the timing determined to shift the gaming state in the state transition lottery with the type of setting suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means X4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means X1 to means X3.
One of multiple production modes (normal mode (low accuracy low base state), battle RUSH mode (high accuracy high base state or low accuracy high base state), chance time (low accuracy high base state)) It is equipped with an effect mode control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that can control the mode.
The effect mode control means (effect control CPU 120) can be controlled to a predetermined effect mode based on the determination in the state transition lottery (probability change / fall determination) to shift the game state (FIG. 14-). As shown in 23, the battle RUSH mode (high accuracy high base state) is controlled from the control to the high accuracy high base state to the 19th fluctuation display, and the probability change fall judgment corresponding to the 20th fluctuation display is "probability change". Based on the judgment that "there is a fall", the battle RUSH mode is terminated at the 20th fluctuation display, and the fluctuation display after the 21st time (up to the 100th time) is controlled by the chance time).
The setting suggestion effect executing means can execute the setting suggestion effect based on the decision to shift the gaming state in the state transition lottery (as shown in FIG. 14-23, the 20th variation. Based on the fact that the probability variation fall judgment corresponding to the display determines that "there is a probability variation fall", the battle RUSH mode (low accuracy high base state) is terminated at the 20th variation display, and the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting are set. After executing the suggestion effect, the fluctuation display after the 21st time (up to the 100th time) is controlled to the chance time)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, by associating the effect mode with the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to improve the interest when shifting the game state. In particular, even when the result of the state transition lottery is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to play.

The gaming machine of means X5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means X1 to means X4.
The game state control means (microcomputer 100 for game control) can be controlled to a specific state (high base state), which is a game state in which variable display is easily executed, and in the state transition lottery executed in the specific state. It is possible to continue the specific state on condition that it is not decided to shift the game state (as shown in FIG. 14-19, the 100th variation display after controlling to the high accuracy and high base state). When it is executed, if it is not determined that "there is a probable change fall" in any of the probable change fall judgments executed in response to the previous change display including the 100th change display, the 101st change. (Continue high accuracy and high base state after display),
As shown in the continuation suggestion effect (Fig. 14-17 (12)) that suggests that the specific state (high base state) will continue, the battle corresponding to the 100th fluctuation display that is displayed as "If it is a draw, RUSH continues". A continuation suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing the effect) is provided.
If it is determined in the state transition lottery to shift the gaming state by the time the variable display of a predetermined number of times (100 times) is executed in the specific state, the variable display of the predetermined number of times in the specific state is executed. The specific state is continued until the specific state is executed, and when the variable display of the predetermined number of times in the specific state is executed, the continuation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed (as shown in FIGS. 14-17, high accuracy is achieved. When the 100th variation display is executed after controlling to the high base state, "probability variation fall" is determined by any of the probability variation fall determinations executed in response to the previous variation display including the 100th variation display. If it is determined that there is, the effect control CPU 120 executes the battle effect corresponding to the 100th variation display, and also executes the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when the variable display of the predetermined number of times is executed, both the continuous suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect may be executed. Therefore, the variable display of the predetermined number of times is supported. It is possible to pay particular attention to the production that is performed.

The gaming machine of means X6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means X1 to means X5.
The ratio at which the specific effect is executed corresponding to the variable display executed when the advantageous state is controlled is such that the specific effect is executed corresponding to the variable display executed when the advantageous state is not controlled. (As shown in FIGS. 14-12 (A) and (B), when the display result is "big hit", the battle effect is executed more than when the display result is "missing". The ratio is high),
Percentage of the specific effect being executed in response to the variable display executed when it is decided to shift the gaming state in the state transition lottery (when it is determined that there is a "probability change fall" in the probability change fall determination). Is executed in response to the variable display executed when it is determined not to shift the game state in the state transition lottery (when it is determined in the probability variation fall determination that there is no probability variation fall). (As shown in FIGS. 14-12 (A) to (D), when it is determined that there is a probable change fall in the probable change fall judgment, it is determined that there is no probable change fall in the probable change fall judgment. The rate at which battle effects are performed is higher than when
The setting suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) can execute the setting suggestion effect during execution of the variable display accompanied by the specific effect (variation display determined to be "probability change fall" in the probability change fall determination). The battle effect is executed and the first setting suggestion effect is executed in response to the above, and the battle effect is executed in response to the 100th variation display, and the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are executed. Setting suggestion effect is executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since there is a possibility that the setting suggestion effect is also executed during the execution of the variable display accompanied by the specific effect, it is possible to improve the interest when the variable display accompanied by the specific effect is executed. .. Further, even when the advantageous state is not controlled and the result of the state transition lottery is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to play by executing the setting suggestion effect.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately control the addition of the gaming medium when the set value is changed. The inventions according to the means A1 to the means A9 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control regarding the addition of a gaming medium.

The gaming machine of means A1
A gaming device capable of performing processing related to valuable value (prepaid balance, ball lending, ball storage, etc.) (processing related to ball lending that consumes the prepaid balance, ball lending that consumes the ball, ball lending that consumes the ball storage, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from (card unit 21TM050).
The granting means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that controls the payout motor 21TM289) that grants the game medium based on the signal output from the game device, and
A game that executes a process such as step S21TM1690 that can execute specific control (big hit determination process in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different). Control microcomputer 100) and
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a changeable setting change mode, and
With
When the setting change mode is controlled, the addition of the game medium based on the signal output from the game device is restricted (1. The game control microcomputer 100 when the setting change mode is controlled). Does not turn on the connection confirmation signal (does not output to the payout control board 21TM037). 2. The payout control microcomputer 100 does not send the connection confirmation command when the setting change mode is controlled. Computer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal 3. When the game machine frame open sensor detects that the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal. No. 4. For payout control, because the game control microcomputer 100 does not send the connection confirmation command when the setting change mode is controlled (because the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not receive the connection confirmation command). Even if the microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the BRQ signal is on, it does not turn on the EXS signal.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when it is controlled to the setting change mode, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the addition of the game medium.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, when the power switch 21TM055 is operated and the operating voltage is supplied to the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is in the ON state of the lock switch 21TM051. And, based on the fact that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, the setting value is controlled to the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed. During the period controlled to the setting change mode, the connection confirmation signal is not output to the payout control board 21TM037 because the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 is not executed, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 Do not execute ball lending.

The gaming machine of means A2 is
It is a gaming machine of means A1 and
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means and controlling the progress of the game in the game machine is provided.
The game control means has a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed.
The granting means (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) can grant a game medium when a special signal (connection confirmation signal) is input from the game control means.
When the game control means is controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game control means does not output the special signal (the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 for outputting the connection confirmation signal changes the setting. Executed after the mode ends, after the setting confirmation mode ends),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible not to give the game medium when controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means A3 is
It is a gaming machine of means A1 and
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The granting means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) outputs a first predetermined signal (PRDY signal) to the gaming device, and the gaming device is based on the input of the first predetermined signal. It is possible to add a game medium based on the input of the second predetermined signal (BRDY signal) output from.
When controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the first predetermined signal is not output (1. When the connection confirmation signal is not input, the PRDY signal is not turned on. 2. Connection confirmation. Do not turn on the PRDY signal when no command is received),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible not to give the game medium when controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means A4 is
It is a gaming machine of means A1 and
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means and controlling the progress of the game in the game machine is provided.
At least one of the game control means and the granting means (for example, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) has an open state detecting means (for example, an open state detecting means for detecting an open state in which the game machine frame or the door frame corresponding to the game machine is opened. A gaming machine frame equipped with a gaming machine frame opening sensor that can detect that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and a door frame opening sensor that can detect that the glass door frame 3a is in the open state. Door frame opening sensor 21TM300) is provided,
Regardless of whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, the addition of the game medium is restricted when the open state is detected (when the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the glass door frame 3a Does not turn on the PRDY signal when is open),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the gaming machine frame or the door frame is opened in order to control the setting change mode, it is possible to limit the addition of the gaming medium.

The gaming machine of means A5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A4.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The granting means outputs a grant preparation signal (turns on the EXS signal) in response to the input of the grant request signal from the game device (the BRQ signal is turned on), and the grant preparation signal of the grant preparation signal. When the grant command signal output from the gaming device is input in response to the input (when the card unit 21TM050 that detects the ON of the EXS signal turns off the BRQ signal), the gaming medium is fed.
When controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the grant preparation signal is not output even if the grant request signal is input (the EXE signal is turned on even if the BRQ signal is detected to be on). do not),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible not to give the game medium when controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means A6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A5.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The setting change mode control means is used when the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch). ) When 21TM052 is on), control to the above setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means is used when the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch). ) When 21TM052 is off), the setting confirmation mode is controlled.
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The gaming machine of means A7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A6.
When controlled to the setting change mode, the game state is initialized (RAM clear in step S21TM1410 is executed), and the game state is executed.
Based on the end of the control of the setting change mode, the gaming state is initialized after executing the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode (after blinking the set value on the display monitor 21TM029). Notify that (display the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk of the game hall or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode is finished and the game state is initialized.

The gaming machine of means A8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A7.
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) that has the specific control means and the setting change mode control means and controls the progress of the game in the game machine.
It is equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that controls the execution of the effect.
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) that can control the set value in a setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed.
The game control means outputs commands (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means as it is controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.
The effect control means executes control related to notification according to the command (when receiving a setting confirmation mode command that displays "setting change in progress" on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode command is received. "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it can be grasped that the clerk of the amusement park or the like is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means A9 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A8.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (the operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on).
Along with being controlled to the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (when controlled to the setting change mode, the RAM clear process of step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is set. Due to the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clear processing in step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330. Is executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk of the game hall can select whether to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also can select whether to initialize the game state.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing a set value, it is necessary to appropriately execute control based on a signal output from the gaming device. The invention according to the means B1 to the means B7 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control based on a signal output from a gaming device.

The gaming machine of means B1
A gaming device capable of performing processing related to valuable value (prepaid balance, ball lending, ball storage, etc.) (processing related to ball lending that consumes the prepaid balance, ball lending that consumes the ball, ball lending that consumes the ball storage, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from (card unit 21TM050).
A predetermined control means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that controls the payout motor 21TM289) that executes a predetermined control (ball lending) based on a signal output from the game device, and
A game that executes a process such as step S21TM1690 that can execute specific control (big hit determination process in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different). Control microcomputer 100) and
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed is provided.
Regardless of whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, predetermined control based on the signal output from the game device can be executed (the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode). Even during the period, the connection confirmation signal can be turned on and the connection confirmation command and the number of prize balls command can be transmitted, and the connection confirmation command and the number of prize balls command are received while the connection confirmation signal is ON for payout control. Microcomputer 21TM370 can perform ball lending regardless of whether it is in the setting change mode or not),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the predetermined control based on the signal output from the gaming device can be appropriately executed, and the control burden when the predetermined control is not executed while being controlled in the setting change mode can be avoided. ..

The gaming machine of means B2 is
It is a gaming machine of means B1 and
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
When the predetermined control is interrupted based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (power failure, etc.) while the predetermined control is being executed, and then the predetermined control is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting is performed. After the change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the predetermined control is restarted (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 interrupts the ball lending if the power is cut off during the execution of the ball lending, and after the power supply is restarted. When the game control microcomputer 100 shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball lending is resumed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed without immediately resuming the ball lending).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, even when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the predetermined event occurs, the predetermined control can be appropriately executed.

The gaming machine of means B3 is
It is a gaming machine of means B1 and
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
When the predetermined control is being executed and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the predetermined control is terminated (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is powered off during the execution of ball lending. When it occurs, the ball lending is forcibly terminated (cancelled), and when the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode at the time of the subsequent power restoration, the ball lending is not restarted and the setting is changed. Ball lending will not resume even after the mode or setting confirmation mode ends),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the control for restarting the predetermined control after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode becomes unnecessary, and the predetermined control can be simplified.

The gaming machine of means B4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B3.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The setting change mode control means is in the case where the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is also in the ON state. If), control to the above setting change mode,
When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state and the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), the setting confirmation mode control means is in the OFF state. In the case of), control to the above setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode according to the conditions that are satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The gaming machine of means B5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B4.
When controlled to the setting change mode, the game information is initialized (when controlled to the setting change mode, RAM clear in step S21TM1410 is executed).
When the set value is changed in the setting change mode, after notifying the change of the set value (after blinking the set value on the display monitor 21TM029), it notifies that the game state has been initialized (display). Display the letter "C" on monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk of the game hall or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode is finished and the game state is initialized.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B5.
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) that has the specific control means and the setting change mode control means and controls the progress of the game in the game machine.
It is equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that controls the execution of the effect.
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) that can control the set value in a setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed.
The game control means outputs commands (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means as it is controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.
The effect control means executes control related to notification according to the command (when receiving a setting confirmation mode command that displays "setting change in progress" on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode command is received. "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it can be grasped that the clerk of the amusement park or the like is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means B7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B6.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (the operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on).
Along with being controlled to the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (when controlled to the setting change mode, the RAM clear process of step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is set. Due to the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clear processing in step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330. Is executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk of the game hall can select whether to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also can select whether to initialize the game state.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing a set value, it is necessary to appropriately perform control when the gaming medium passes through a specific area. The invention according to the means C1 to the means C6 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control when a gaming medium passes through a specific region.

The gaming machine of means C1
Specific control (special) according to the set value (set values 1 to 6 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different) based on the game medium passing through the specific area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening). Specific control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes processing such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing big hit determination processing in symbol process processing, and
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed is provided.
When controlled to the setting change mode, the specific control is not executed even if the game medium passes through the specific area (the setting change mode is controlled before the timer interrupt setting (step S21TM1500)). Therefore, during the period controlled to the setting change mode, the special symbol process process (big hit determination process) of step S21TM1690 is not executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed when the set value may be changed.

The gaming machine of means C2 is
Means C1 gaming machine
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The setting change mode control means is in the case where the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is also in the ON state. If), control to the above setting change mode,
When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state and the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), the setting confirmation mode control means is in the OFF state. In the case of), control to the above setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode according to the conditions that are satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The gaming machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2.
When controlled to the setting change mode, the gaming state is initialized (when controlled to the setting change mode, RAM clear in step S21TM1410 is executed).
Based on the end of the control of the setting change mode, the gaming state is initialized after executing the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode (after blinking the set value on the display monitor 21TM029). Notify that (display the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk of the game hall or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode is finished and the game state is initialized.

The gaming machine of means C4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means C1 to means C3.
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) that has the specific control means and the setting change mode control means and controls the progress of the game in the game machine.
It is equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that controls the execution of the effect.
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) that can control the set value in a setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed.
The game control means outputs commands (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means as it is controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.
The effect control means executes control related to notification according to the command (when receiving a setting confirmation mode command that displays "setting change in progress" on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode command is received. "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it can be grasped that the clerk of the amusement park or the like is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means C5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means C1 to means C4.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
When controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the specific control is not executed even if the game medium passes through the specific area (the setting confirmation mode is controlled before the timer interrupt setting (step S21TM1500)). Therefore, during the period controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the special symbol process process (big hit determination process) of step S21TM1690 is not executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed when the set value is confirmed.

The gaming machine of means C6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means C1 to means C5.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (the operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on).
Along with being controlled to the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (when controlled to the setting change mode, the RAM clear process of step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is set. Due to the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clear processing in step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330. Is executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk of the game hall can select whether to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also can select whether to initialize the game state.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to execute an appropriate process when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. The invention according to the means D1 to the means D5 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that executes an appropriate process when the power supply is stopped.

The gaming machine of means D1
A game that executes a process such as step S21TM1690 that can execute specific control (big hit determination process in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different). Control microcomputer 100) and
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a changeable setting change mode, and
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode for notifying the set value so that it can be confirmed.
A set value storage means (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 for storing the set value) for storing the set value is provided.
In the setting change mode control means, the first condition is satisfied (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and the second condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (clear switch (clear switch (clear switch)). Control to the setting change mode based on the setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state),
In the setting confirmation mode control means, the first condition is satisfied (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and the second condition is not satisfied (clear) when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. Based on the switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state), the setting confirmation mode is controlled.
The set value is determined based on the specific operation in the setting change mode (the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state).
The set value storage means stores the set value before being controlled by the setting change mode when controlled by the setting change mode (stores in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 before the transition to the setting change mode). The set values that have been set are continuously memorized without being changed with the transition to the setting change mode),
In the setting change mode, the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation (the power is cut off without performing the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state), and then. When the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted, the setting value stored in the setting value storage means is notified (controlled to the setting confirmation mode after the power is turned on). If this is the case, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 before the transition to the setting confirmation mode).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk of the amusement park or the like can appropriately set the set value when the power supply is stopped while the setting change mode is controlled.

The gaming machine of means D2 is
Means D1 gaming machine
The setting change mode control means performs a transition operation (operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051) and an initialization operation (turns the clear switch 21TM052 to the ON state) when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. When the operation) is performed, it is controlled to the above setting change mode, and
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode when the transition operation is performed and the initialization operation is not performed when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk of the amusement park or the like can select whether to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means D3 is
A gaming machine of means D1 or means D2.
When controlled to the setting change mode, the game state is initialized (RAM clear in step S21TM1410 is executed), and the game state is executed.
Based on the end of the control of the setting change mode, the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is executed (the display monitor 21TM029 blinks the set value).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk of the amusement park or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode has been completed.

The gaming machine of means D4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means D1 to means D3.
A game control means (a game control microcomputer that executes a game control timer interrupt process) that has the specific control means, the setting change mode control means, and the setting confirmation mode control means, and controls the progress of the game in the game machine. Computer 100) and
It is equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that executes the control of the effect.
The game control means outputs commands (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means as it is controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.
The effect control means executes notification according to the command (displays "setting change in progress" on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode command is received, and displays an image when the setting confirmation mode command is received. "Setting confirmation" is displayed on the device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it can be grasped that the clerk of the amusement park or the like is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means D5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means D1 to means D4.
Timing after the power supply to the game machine is started (timing after the game control microcomputer 100 can execute the game control timer interrupt process after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends) When the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, a predetermined notification is given (the effect control CPU 120 is a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated, and a clear switch (setting changeover switch). ) When the setting changeover switch operation command indicating that 21TM052 was operated was received from the game control microcomputer 100, "the operation of the lock switch was detected" and "the operation of the setting changeover switch was detected." Is displayed on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk of the amusement park or the like can grasp that the first condition or the second condition is satisfied at the timing after the power supply is started.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device to grasp the status of processing related to the change of the set value. Even if the signal output technique of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp the signal output technique. The inventions relating to the means E1 to the means E8 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and the present invention provides a gaming machine capable of grasping the status of processing related to the change of the set value on the external device side. is there.

The gaming machine of means E1
A gaming machine capable of executing specific control (big hit judgment processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 in which the range of random numbers for big hit judgment is different).
The set value can be changed (it can be changed based on the operation in the setting change mode).
A specific signal (security signal) can be output from the 1st terminal (10th terminal) in response to a predetermined event (abnormal prize, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) that occurs in the gaming machine.
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change compatible signal) from the second terminal (7th terminal) in response to the processing related to the change of the set value (shift to the setting change mode, transition to the setting confirmation mode). ,
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside in a distinguishable manner that the occurrence of a predetermined event and the processing related to the change of the set value have been executed.

The gaming machine of means E2 is
It is a gaming machine of means E1 and
The specific signal can be output in response to the start of power supply to the gaming machine (a security signal is output when RAM clear is executed).
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed when the power supply to the game machine is started. Prepare,
When controlled to the setting change mode, both the specific signal and the special signal can be output (the security signal and the setting correspondence change signal are output at the same time).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, since it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that the setting change mode is at least controlled by the specific signal, the setting is changed by the specific signal even in the conventional external device which is not supposed to input the special signal. It is possible to grasp that the mode may have been controlled.

The gaming machine of means E3 is
It is a gaming machine of means E2,
When both the specific signal and the special signal are output based on the control to the setting change mode, the output period of the specific signal is longer than the output period of the special signal (output of the setting correspondence change signal). The security signal is continuously output for 30 seconds after the end of),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, since it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that the setting change mode is at least controlled by the specific signal, even in the conventional external device that does not assume the input of the special signal, the setting is made by the specific signal. It is possible to understand that the change mode may be controlled.

The gaming machine of means E4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means E1 to means E3.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The special signal can be output based on the control in the setting confirmation mode (the setting correspondence change signal is output during the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside that the setting confirmation mode may have been controlled.

The gaming machine of means E5 is
It is a gaming machine of means E4,
The setting confirmation mode can be controlled when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state. Controlled to setting confirmation mode based on),
It is possible to output both the specific signal and the special signal based on the control in the setting confirmation mode (the security signal and the setting correspondence change signal are output at the same time).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, since it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that the setting confirmation mode is at least controlled by the specific signal, the setting confirmation is performed by the specific signal even in the conventional external device that does not assume the input of the special signal. It is possible to grasp that the mode may have been controlled.

The gaming machine of means E6 is
It is a gaming machine of means E1 and
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed when the power supply to the game machine is started. Prepare,
The special signal can be output when the setting change mode is controlled (the setting change corresponding signal is output when the setting change mode is controlled), and the specific signal can be output when the setting change mode ends. (If RAM clear is executed, a security signal is output when the setting change mode ends).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the occurrence of a predetermined event to the outside while simplifying the signal output processing when the setting change mode is controlled.

The gaming machine of means E7 is
A gaming machine of means E1 or means E6.
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed when the power supply to the game machine is started. Prepare,
The special signal can be output when controlled in the setting confirmation mode (the signal corresponding to the setting change is output when controlled in the setting confirmation mode), and the specific signal can be output when the setting confirmation mode ends. (If RAM clear is executed, a security signal is output when the setting confirmation mode ends).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the occurrence of a predetermined event to the outside while simplifying the signal output processing when the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

The gaming machine of means E8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means E1 to means E7.
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a changeable setting change mode, and
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
In the setting change mode, the setting value can be changed according to the setting change operation (the setting value can be changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 and the lock switch 21TM051).
When the setting change operation is performed when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, a predetermined notification is performed (the lock switch 21TM051 is operated in the effect control CPU 120). When a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch was operated and a setting changeover switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 was operated were received from the game control microcomputer 100, "the operation of the lock switch was detected. , "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." Is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk of the amusement park or the like can grasp that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for an external device to grasp information related to the set value, but Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 Even if the signal output technique of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp the signal output technique. The invention according to the means F1 to the means F11 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping information related to a set value on the external device side.

The gaming machine of means F1
A gaming machine capable of executing specific control (big hit judgment processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 in which the range of random numbers for big hit judgment is different).
The set value can be changed to any one of a plurality of values (it can be changed based on the operation in the setting change mode).
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change compatible signal) in response to the processing related to the change of the setting value (shift to the setting change mode, transition to the setting confirmation mode).
The special signal can be output in a special mode in which the set value can be specified (the number of pulses corresponding to the set value is output).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the set value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The gaming machine of means F2 is
Means F1 gaming machine
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed is provided.
When the setting change mode ends, the special signal of the special mode is output (when the setting change mode ends, a number of pulses corresponding to the fixed set value are output).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, a signal for notifying whether or not the setting change mode is controlled and a signal for notifying the setting value of the gaming machine can be output from a common terminal.

The gaming machine of means F3 is
Means F2 gaming machine
When controlled to the setting change mode, a special signal of a non-special mode (a setting change corresponding signal that is turned on during the period controlled by the setting change mode) is output, and when the setting change mode ends. After temporarily stopping the output of the special signal (after turning off the setting change corresponding signal once when the setting change mode ends), the special signal of the special mode (the number of pulse-shaped settings corresponding to the fixed set value) is set. Output the change response signal),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside whether or not the setting change mode is controlled by a special signal, and it is also possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The gaming machine of means F4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means F1 to means F3.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
When the setting confirmation mode ends, a special signal of the special mode is output (when the setting confirmation mode ends, a number of pulses corresponding to the displayed set value are output).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to output a signal for notifying whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled and a signal for notifying the setting value of the gaming machine from a common terminal.

The gaming machine of means F5 is
Means F4 gaming machine
When controlled to the setting confirmation mode, a special signal of a non-special mode (a signal corresponding to a setting change that is ON during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode) is output, and when the setting confirmation mode ends. After temporarily stopping the output of the special signal (after turning off the setting change corresponding signal once when the setting confirmation mode ends), the special signal of the special aspect (the number of pulses corresponding to the displayed setting value) Output the setting change correspondence signal),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled by a special signal, and it is also possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The gaming machine of means F6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means F1 to means F5.
In the special signal of the special aspect, the set value can be specified by the number of pulses (the set value can be specified by an external device by setting the number of times of output of the pulse-shaped setting change corresponding signal to the same number as the set value. is there),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the set value can be easily specified in the external device.

The gaming machine of means F7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means F1 to means F6.
It is possible to output a specific signal (security signal) in response to a predetermined event (abnormal winning, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) that occurs in the gaming machine.
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the occurrence of a predetermined event can be notified to the outside.

The gaming machine of means F8 is
Means F7 gaming machine
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from a common terminal (for example, output from the tenth terminal).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the occurrence of a predetermined event and the set value can be notified to the outside by a simple configuration.

The gaming machine of means F9 is
Means F7 gaming machine
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from different terminals (for example, the security signal is output from the 10th terminal and the setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the occurrence of a predetermined event and the set value can be notified to the outside in a clearly distinguishable manner.

The gaming machine of means F10 is
Any gaming machine selected from means F1 to means F9.
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed is provided.
In the setting change mode, the setting value can be changed according to the setting change operation (the setting value can be changed according to the operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052).
Regardless of whether or not the setting change operation is performed in the setting change mode, a special signal of the special mode is output upon termination of the setting change mode (when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, it is output. Regardless of whether the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated before, the number of pulses corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is output as the setting change corresponding signal). ,
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the signal output processing by executing the common signal output processing regardless of whether or not the setting change operation is actually performed.

The gaming machine of means F11 is
Any gaming machine selected from means F1 to means F10.
A special signal of the special aspect is output with the end of the process related to the change of the set value (a pulse shape of a number corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 with the end of the setting change mode). Outputs the setting change corresponding signal of, and outputs the pulsed setting change corresponding signal of the number corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 with the end of the setting confirmation mode), and the special signal After the output is completed, the special signal of the special mode is output (stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) by a predetermined trigger (for example, the end of the jackpot game state) different from the process related to the change of the set value. Outputs the number of pulsed setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the set value),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, since it is possible to notify the set value to the outside at a predetermined opportunity, it is possible to increase the chance that the set value can be specified in the external device.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately control the addition of the gaming medium when the set value is changed. The invention according to the means G1 to the means G10 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control regarding the addition of a gaming medium.

The gaming machine of means G1 is
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) provided with a granting means (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of imparting game value (pachinko balls) (pachinko gaming machine 21TM370 for controlling payout motor 21TM289).
A game that executes a process such as step S21TM1690 that can execute specific control (big hit determination process in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different). Control microcomputer 100) and
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and a game control microcomputer 100.
Open state detection capable of detecting an open state in which at least one of the game machine frame (game machine frame 3) and the door frame (glass door frame 3a) corresponding to the game machine (for example, the game machine frame 3) is opened. A game provided with means (a gaming machine frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, and a door frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is in an open state). It is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370) having a machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300).
Regardless of whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, when the open state is detected, the addition of the game value is restricted (when the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the glass door frame When 3a is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 to execute the payout of the game medium in the ball lending process and the prize ball process).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when the setting change mode is controlled, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the addition of the game value.

The gaming machine of means G2 is
Means G1 gaming machine
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) is a game machine capable of detecting that the open state detecting means (game machine frame 3 is in the open state). The payout control microcomputer 21TM370) having a gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 equipped with a frame opening sensor and a door frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is in the open state) When (a state in which the gaming machine frame 3 is open) is detected, the setting change mode can be controlled (if YES in step S21TM3520, the processes after step S21TM3530 are executed).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting change mode from being controlled in a state where the open state of the gaming machine frame or the door frame is not detected.

The gaming machine of means G3 is
A gaming machine of means G1 or means G2,
It has a specific information storage means (RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100) that stores specific information (value of the setting changing flag) that can be specified to be controlled in the setting change mode.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.
The setting change mode control means can be put into a game stop state when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means after the power supply to the game machine is restarted (game). In the control microcomputer 100, when the setting changing flag is set after the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is in the ON state. , If the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode and shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied, the normal game processing is not performed and the power is turned off.)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, after the power supply is restarted, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, the game can be stopped.

The gaming machine of means G4 is
Means G3 gaming machine
Corresponding to the end of the setting change mode, the specific information (value of the setting changing flag) is erased (based on the operation of turning off the lock switch 21TM051), YES is determined in step S21TM3530, and the setting change mode is set. Finished, and the setting changing flag is cleared in step S21TM3710),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to shift to the normal game processing after the setting change mode is finished.

The gaming machine of means G5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means G1 to G4.
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) for controlling the progress of a game is provided.
The granting means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that controls the payout motor 21TM289) has the open state detecting means, and determines whether or not to execute the game value granting based on the detection of the open state. (When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming medium is not paid out. When neither the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a is detected, the gaming medium is paid out),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the giving means for controlling the giving of the game value has the open state detecting means, it is easy to determine whether or not to execute the giving of the game value, and the processing load can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means G6 is
Means G5 gaming machine
The granting means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that controls the payout motor 21TM289) is
Based on the reception of the information (number of payouts) related to the addition of the game value from the game control means (the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the game control timer interrupt processing), the game value is added.
It has a storage means (RAM 21TM302 having an unpaid number storage buffer formed in a backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) that can store the given information (unpaid number) regarding the game value to be given.
The storage means can store the given information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.
After the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted, the granting means adds the game value according to the granting information stored in the storage means (the power is turned off while the game medium is being paid out). If it occurs, the payout of the game media is interrupted, the payout that was interrupted after the power is turned on is restarted, and the unpaid number of game media is paid out),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to store the given information regarding the game value to be given after the power supply to the game machine is stopped, and it is stored after the power supply to the game machine is restarted. Since it is possible to add the game value corresponding to the given information, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of disadvantages for the player.

The gaming machine of means G7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means G1 to means G6.
It can be connected to a game device (card unit 21TM050) and can be connected.
The giving means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that controls the payout motor 21TM289) adds the game value based on the signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from the game device.
When the open state is detected, the addition of the game value based on the signal output from the game device is restricted (the game machine frame door frame open sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is used for the game machine. When the opening of the frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, the card unit 21TM050 does not transmit the BRDY signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the game medium is paid out. Not done),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the granting of the game value while the gaming machine frame or the door frame is open is restricted, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems associated with the granting operation while the gaming machine frame or the door frame is open. It is possible to smoothly proceed with maintenance work while the gaming machine frame or door frame is open.

The gaming machine of means G8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means G1 to means G7.
A game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing the setting confirmation mode control means (step S21TM3540 to step S21TM3580) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (the operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on).
As the setting change mode is controlled, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized.
The gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized due to the control to the setting confirmation mode (when controlled to the setting change mode, the clear switch 21TM052 is in the ON state, and in step S21TM3040. If YES is determined, RAM clear is executed in step S21TM3050, or if YES is determined in step S21TM3140, RAM clear is executed in step S21TM3150. When the setting confirmation mode is executed. The step S21TM3150 is determined to be NO in step S21TM3040 based on the fact that the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state, so that the process does not proceed to step S21TM3050, or NO is determined in step S21TM3140. Does not migrate to),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the clerk of the game hall can select whether to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also can select whether to initialize the game state.

The gaming machine of means G9 is
Means G8 gaming machine
It is provided with a storage means (RAM 21TM302 having an unpaid number storage buffer formed in a backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) that can store the given information (data of the unpaid number) regarding the game value to be given.
The given information is initialized as the game state of the game machine is initialized (the RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 for initializing the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed. Along with this, the RAM clear of step S21TM1880 for initializing the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is also executed. Therefore, the unpaid amount storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not paid out. The number of data is initialized),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized including the granting information regarding the gaming value to be imparted, so that the management in the gaming store can be facilitated.

The gaming machine of means G10 is
Means G8 gaming machine
It is provided with a storage means (RAM 21TM302 having an unpaid number storage buffer formed in a backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) that can store the given information (data of the unpaid number) regarding the game value to be given.
The given information is not initialized regardless of whether or not the game state of the game machine is initialized (RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 for initializing the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed. However, since the RAM clear in step S21TM1880 for initializing the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed, the unpaid number of the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed. Data is not initialized),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, even if the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized, the grant information is not initialized, so that the information regarding the gaming value to be granted can be appropriately protected.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), the occurrence status of a predetermined event in the gaming machine and the execution status of the processing related to the change of the set value are determined on the external device side. Although it may be necessary to distinguish and recognize both, even if the signal output technology of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-2000506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, both are recognized on the external device side. There is a problem that it is difficult to distinguish and recognize them. The inventions according to the means H1 to H5 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and the occurrence status of a predetermined event in the gaming machine and the execution status of the processing related to the change of the set value are divided on the external device side. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can be recognized separately.

The gaming machine of means H1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing specific control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination).
The setting value can be changed,
A specific signal (security signal) can be output in response to a predetermined event (RAM clear, game machine frame / door frame open detection, etc.) that occurs in the gaming machine, and processing related to changing the set value (setting change). It is possible to output a specific signal corresponding to the mode),
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the predetermined event and the output period of the specific signal corresponding to the process related to the change of the set value are different (the security signal is not controlled to the setting change mode by executing RAM clear). If it is, it is output for 30 seconds, and if RAM clear is executed and it is controlled to the setting change mode, it is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the period controlled to the setting change mode).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the outside in a distinguishable manner that the occurrence of a predetermined event and the processing related to the change of the set value have been executed.

The gaming machine of means H2 is
Means H1 gaming machine
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and a game control microcomputer 100.
It is provided with a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed.
The output period of the specific signal differs depending on whether it is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode when it is controlled to the setting change mode). It is output for a period in which 30 seconds are added to the specified period, and when it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode, it is output for a period in which 50 ms is added to the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between being controlled in the setting change mode and being controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means H3 is
A gaming machine of means H1 or means H2,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and a game control microcomputer 100.
It is provided with a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed.
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (the operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on).
When at least one of the transition operation and the initialization operation is performed when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled (the effect control CPU 120 provides the effect control CPU 120). When a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated and a setting changeover switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated are received from the game control microcomputer 100, the "lock switch" is displayed. The warning "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." Is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible for a clerk of the amusement park or the like to know that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

The gaming machine of means H4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means H1 to means H3.
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change compatible signal) corresponding to the processing related to the setting value change (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode).
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from different terminals (for example, the security signal is output from the 10th terminal and the setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal). ),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the occurrence of a predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be distinguished externally, and the process related to the change of the set value is executed. Can be notified to the outside in a clearer manner.

The gaming machine of means H5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means H1 to means H4.
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change compatible signal) corresponding to the processing related to the setting value change (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode).
The special signal can be output in a special mode in which the set value can be specified (the number of pulses corresponding to the set value is output).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the set value of the gaming machine to the outside.

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device to grasp the execution status of the processing related to the set value. Even if the signal output technique of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp the signal output technique. The inventions according to the means I1 to I6 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping the execution status of processing related to a set value on the external device side. ..

The gaming machine of means I1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing specific control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination).
The setting value can be changed,
The output of a specific signal (security signal) is started in response to the start of control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value.
The output of a specific signal (security signal) is stopped in response to the end of the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value.
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the control related to the set value is longer than the predetermined period (when controlled in the setting change mode, the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, and when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. , The output period of the security signal is 50 ms or more),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the control state related to the set value can be appropriately notified to the outside of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine of means I2 is
It is a gaming machine of means I1 and
It is possible to output a specific signal (security signal) in response to a predetermined event (RAM clear, game machine frame / door frame open detection, etc.) that occurs in the game machine.
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the predetermined event and the output period of the specific signal corresponding to the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value are different (RAM clear is executed for the security signal). If it is not controlled to the setting change mode, it is output for 30 seconds, and if RAM clear is executed and it is controlled to the setting change mode, it is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the period controlled to the setting change mode. ),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the outside in a distinguishable manner that the occurrence of a predetermined event and the processing related to the change of the set value have been executed.

The gaming machine of means I3
A gaming machine of means I1 or means I2.
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and a game control microcomputer 100.
It is provided with a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed.
The output period of the specific signal differs depending on whether it is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode when it is controlled to the setting change mode). It is output for a period in which 30 seconds are added to the specified period, and when it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode, it is output for a period in which 50 ms is added to the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between being controlled in the setting change mode and being controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means I4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means I1 to means I3.
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and a game control microcomputer 100.
It is provided with a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed.
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (the operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on).
When at least one of the transition operation and the initialization operation is performed when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled (the effect control CPU 120 provides the effect control CPU 120). When a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated and a setting changeover switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated are received from the game control microcomputer 100, the "lock switch" is displayed. The warning "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." Is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible for a clerk of the amusement park or the like to know that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

The gaming machine of means I5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means I1 to means I4.
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change corresponding signal) corresponding to the control related to the setting value (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode).
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from different terminals (for example, the security signal is output from the 10th terminal and the setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal). ),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the occurrence of a predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be distinguished externally, and the process related to the change of the set value is executed. Can be notified to the outside in a clearer manner.

The gaming machine of means I6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means I1 to means I5.
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change corresponding signal) corresponding to the control related to the setting value (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode).
The special signal can be output in a special mode in which the set value can be specified (the number of pulses corresponding to the set value is output).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the set value of the gaming machine to the outside.

Further, a gaming machine that displays a title that notifies the type of reach effect at the start of the reach effect has been proposed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-101428). In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-101428, it is desired to enhance the effect of production. The inventions according to the means J1 to the means J8 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine having an enhanced effect.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the means J1 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the control is performed in the advantageous state, and
A title notification means (for example, a production control CPU 120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect is provided.
The title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)).
According to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of means J2 is the gaming machine of means J1.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of the suggestion effect, and
In the plurality of types of the suggestion effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be feasible in a common manner (for example, FIG. 8-2 (C)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which suggestive effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means J3 is the gaming machine of means J1 or means J2.
At a plurality of execution timings during the execution of the suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a notice effect) that suggests that the effect is controlled to the advantageous state.
The execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the title is notified.

The gaming machine of the means J4 is a gaming machine of any of the means J1 to the means J3.
The suggestion effect execution means executes at least the first suggestion effect (for example, the reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestion effect. It is possible
In the second suggestion effect, the title notification means may notify the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.
According to such a configuration, the notification of the title according to the suggestion effect can be executed, so that the effect of the effect is improved.

The gaming machine of means J5 is the gaming machine of means J4.
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state may be higher when the first suggestion effect is executed than when the second suggestion effect is executed.
According to such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

The gaming machine of means J6 is a gaming machine of any of means J1 to means J5.
The suggestion effect execution means may enable the suggestion effect to be executed in an effect mode related to the title notified in the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

The gaming machine of the means J7 is the gaming machine of any of the means J1 to the means J6.
Detection means (for example, stick controller 31A or push button 31B) capable of detecting the movement of the player, and
A specific display execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) for performing a specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection means is further provided.
The specific display execution means is
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) that are more advantageous to the player than the first specific display are displayed. It is possible and
During the non-valid period of detection by the detection means, after displaying the first specific display, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 8-10 (E), FIG. 8-11 (I). )),
During the valid period of detection by the detection means, the operation effect using the second specific display after the change may be executed (for example, FIGS. 8-11 (J) and (K)).
According to such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

The gaming machine of the means J8 is the gaming machine of any of the means J1 to the means J7.
As a suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, the first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (first size shutter image 31AK061 displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. 8-12 (a)). Display by) and the second suggestion display whose display size is the second size (second size reach title image 31AK062, etc. displayed at the time of the reach title production shown in FIG. 8-12 (d)) can be displayed. Further provided with means (for example, an image display device 5 and a CPU 120 for effect control),
The display means
Multiple types of elements having different aspects (element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry) shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and 8-12 (d). Etc.), and it is possible to display a specific image (fruit pattern, etc. shown in FIGS.
When either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display is displayed in the pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. (The shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and 8-12 (d) are displayed so that the elements E1 to E5 are included in the display, etc.).
According to such a configuration, a specific image can be preferably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. This makes it possible to accurately convey that a specific image has been displayed.

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), a gaming machine capable of displaying a hold icon in various display modes has been proposed as information corresponding to variable display. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), there is room for improving the interest in information corresponding to variable display. The invention according to the means K1 to the means K7 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine for improving the interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of means K1
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols).
A display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that executes display control of information corresponding to variable display (first hold display 30TM001, second hold display 30TM002, active display 30TM003, sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) is provided. ,
The display control means executes display control of the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) corresponding to variable display in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). In addition to being possible, in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105) different from the first information display area, the variable display corresponding to the first information and the common variable display are supported. The display control of the second information (secondary hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) can be executed.
The rate at which the mode of the first information changes is different from the rate at which the mode of the second information changes (as shown in FIG. 11-3, the sub-active display 30TM005 is usually the final display mode rather than the active display 30TM003. The rate at which a mode different from the mode is selected is low, and the display mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 is less likely to change than that of the first hold display 30TM001).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display a plurality of types of information, that is, the first information and the second information as the information corresponding to the common variable display, thereby improving the interest in the information corresponding to the variable display. At the same time, it is possible to make people interested in the aspects of the first information and the second information.

The gaming machine of means K2 is
Means K1 gaming machine
The mode of the first information after the change and the mode of the second information after the change are different (as shown in FIG. 11-8 (6), the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode is a blue round display. , Sub-hold display 30TM004b in blue mode is a blue star display)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the first information and the second information have different modes after the change, the respective information can be clearly distinguished and grasped.

The gaming machine of means K3 is
A gaming machine of means K1 or means K2.
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) can simultaneously display the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) and the second information (sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display). (As shown in FIG. 11-8 (2), the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 can be displayed at the same time).
Depending on the mode of the first information after the change and the mode of the second information after the change, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state favorable to the player differs (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-3, active). The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a golden mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is higher than the case where the final display mode of the display 30TM003 is the normal mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is the normal mode. The jackpot expectation is higher when is in the red mode)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the combination of the aspect of the first information and the aspect of the second information, and it is possible to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means K4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means K1 to means K3.
The display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) is
The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as the first information is displayed in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and the first corresponding display (active) corresponding to the variable display during execution is displayed. Display 30TM003) is displayed in the first information display area (active display area 30TM103).
When starting the variable display corresponding to the first hold display, it is possible to display the first corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in the same manner as the first hold display (FIG. 11-9 (FIG. 11-9). As shown in 9) and (10), when the first hold display 30TM001c (red circle display) in the red mode shifts to the active display area 30TM103, the active display 30TM003c (red circle) in the red mode having the same display color Shape display) is displayed),
The second hold display (sub-hold display 30TM004) as the second information is displayed in the second information display area (secondary hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105), and the second is corresponding to the variable display during execution. The corresponding display (sub-active display 30TM005) is displayed in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105).
When starting the variable display corresponding to the second hold display, it is possible to display the second corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in the same manner as the second hold display (FIG. 11-9 (FIG. 11-9). As shown in 9) and (10), when the sub-hold display 30TM004c (red star-shaped display) in the red mode shifts to the sub-active display area 30TM105, the sub-active display 30TM005c (red) in the red mode, which has the same display color, is displayed. Star-shaped display) is displayed)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display a plurality of types of information, that is, the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information as the information corresponding to the variable display during execution, so that the information related to the variable display can be displayed. It can be improved and the mode of the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information can be interested.

The gaming machine of means K5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means K1 to means K4.
It is provided with a notification effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (reach effect) for notifying whether or not the player is controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player.
At least a part of the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103) is included in the area where the notification effect is executed.
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) can hide the first information as the notification effect is executed, while the second information is also displayed when the notification effect is executed. The information is visible (as shown in FIG. 11-9 (11), when the reach state is established, the characters "reach !!" are displayed at the bottom of the screen, and the first hold display 30TM001 and active. While the display 30TM003 is hidden, the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are continuously displayed).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the first information is hidden to raise the attention to the notification effect, and the second information is continuously displayed to confirm the information for the variable display even during the execution of the notification effect. It can be possible.

The gaming machine of means K6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means K1 to means K5.
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) shifts the first corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display during execution to the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). The second corresponding display (secondary active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display during execution is displayed in the second information display area (secondary hold display area 30TM104, secondary active display area 30TM105).
The mode of the effect is different between the first action effect executed when the mode of the first correspondence display changes and the second action effect executed when the mode of the second correspondence display changes (for example, active). The active action effect that changes the display mode of the display 30TM003 is a mode in which the character A appears and executes an action of throwing a ball, and the subactive action effect that changes the display mode of the subactive display 30TM005 is a mode in which the character a appears. It is a mode to execute the action of flying a balloon)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the first action effect and the second action effect are different in mode, so that the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means K7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means K1 to means K6.
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) displays the first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as the first information in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and displays the second information. The second hold display (secondary hold display 30TM004) is displayed in the second information display area (secondary hold display area 30TM104).
When the mode of the first hold display is changed and when the mode of the second hold display is changed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state favorable to the player is different (as shown in FIG. 11-3, active). The jackpot expectation is higher when the display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is changed than when the display mode of the display 30TM003 is changed, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 is higher than when the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is changed. The jackpot expectation is higher when the display mode changes)
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which mode of the first hold display and the second hold display has changed.

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), a gaming machine capable of displaying a hold icon in various display modes has been proposed as information corresponding to variable display. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), there is room for improving the interest in information corresponding to variable display. The invention according to the means L1 to the means L7 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine for improving the interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of means L1
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols).
A display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that executes display control of information corresponding to variable display (first hold display 30TM001, second hold display 30TM002, active display 30TM003, sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) is provided. ,
The display control means executes display control of the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) corresponding to variable display in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). In addition to being possible, in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105) different from the first information display area, the variable display corresponding to the first information and the common variable display are supported. The display control of the second information (secondary hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) can be executed.
When the mode of the first information changes, at least a part of the advance notice effect in the display area different from the first information display area is not executed (as shown in FIGS. 11-11, the mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is When changed, the sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104, and the sub-active display 30TM005 is not displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105.)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine capable of displaying a plurality of types of information, that is, first information and second information as information corresponding to a common variable display, the complexity of the production is suppressed and the interest is improved. be able to.

The gaming machine of means L2 is
Means L1 gaming machine
The mode of the first information after the change and the mode of the second information after the change are different (as shown in FIG. 11-8 (6), the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode is a blue round display. , Sub-hold display 30TM004b in blue mode is a blue star display)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the first information and the second information have different modes after the change, the respective information can be clearly distinguished and grasped.

The gaming machine of means L3 is
A gaming machine of means L1 or means L2.
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) can simultaneously display the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) and the second information (sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display). (As shown in FIG. 11-8 (2), the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 can be displayed at the same time).
Depending on the mode of the first information after the change and the mode of the second information after the change, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state favorable to the player differs (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-3, active). The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a golden mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is higher than the case where the final display mode of the display 30TM003 is the normal mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is the normal mode. The jackpot expectation is higher when is in the red mode)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the combination of the aspect of the first information and the aspect of the second information, and it is possible to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means L4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means L1 to means L3.
The display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) is
The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as the first information is displayed in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and the first corresponding display (active) corresponding to the variable display during execution is displayed. Display 30TM003) is displayed in the first information display area (active display area 30TM103).
When starting the variable display corresponding to the first hold display, it is possible to display the first corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in the same manner as the first hold display (FIG. 11-9 (FIG. 11-9). As shown in 9) and (10), when the first hold display 30TM001c (red circle display) in the red mode shifts to the active display area 30TM103, the active display 30TM003c (red circle) in the red mode having the same display color Shape display) is displayed),
The second hold display (sub-hold display 30TM004) as the second information is displayed in the second information display area (secondary hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105), and the second is corresponding to the variable display during execution. The corresponding display (sub-active display 30TM005) is displayed in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105).
When starting the variable display corresponding to the second hold display, it is possible to display the second corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in the same manner as the second hold display (FIG. 11-9 (FIG. 11-9). As shown in 9) and (10), when the sub-hold display 30TM004c (red star-shaped display) in the red mode shifts to the sub-active display area 30TM105, the sub-active display 30TM005c (red) in the red mode, which has the same display color, is displayed. Star-shaped display) is displayed)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display a plurality of types of information, that is, the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information as the information corresponding to the variable display during execution, so that the information related to the variable display can be displayed. It can be improved and the mode of the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information can be interested.

The gaming machine of means L5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means L1 to means L4.
It is provided with a notification effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (reach effect) for notifying whether or not the player is controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player.
At least a part of the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103) is included in the area where the notification effect is executed.
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) can hide the first information as the notification effect is executed, while the second information is also displayed when the notification effect is executed. The information is visible (as shown in FIG. 11-9 (11), when the reach state is established, the characters "reach !!" are displayed at the bottom of the screen, and the first hold display 30TM001 and active. While the display 30TM003 is hidden, the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are continuously displayed).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the first information is hidden to raise the attention to the notification effect, and the second information is continuously displayed to confirm the information for the variable display even during the execution of the notification effect. It can be possible.

The gaming machine of means L6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means L1 to means L5.
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) shifts the first corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display during execution to the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). The second corresponding display (secondary active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display during execution is displayed in the second information display area (secondary hold display area 30TM104, secondary active display area 30TM105).
The mode of the effect is different between the first action effect executed when the mode of the first correspondence display changes and the second action effect executed when the mode of the second correspondence display changes (for example, active). The active action effect that changes the display mode of the display 30TM003 is a mode in which the character A appears and executes an action of throwing a ball, and the subactive action effect that changes the display mode of the subactive display 30TM005 is a mode in which the character a appears. It is a mode to execute the action of flying a balloon)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the first action effect and the second action effect are different in mode, so that the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means L7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means L1 to means L6.
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) displays the first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as the first information in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and displays the second information. The second hold display (secondary hold display 30TM004) is displayed in the second information display area (secondary hold display area 30TM104).
When the mode of the first hold display is changed and when the mode of the second hold display is changed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state favorable to the player is different (as shown in FIG. 11-3, active). The jackpot expectation is higher when the display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is changed than when the display mode of the display 30TM003 is changed, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 is higher than when the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is changed. The jackpot expectation is higher when the display mode changes)
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which mode of the first hold display and the second hold display has changed.

As shown in JP-A-2016-144583 (FIG. 36), a gaming machine has been proposed in which an active display is displayed as information corresponding to a variable display and the display mode of the active display is changed each time a pseudo-continuous variation is executed. Has been done. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-144583 (FIG. 36), there is room for improving the interest in information corresponding to variable display. The inventions according to the means M1 to M6 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine for improving the interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of means M1
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols).
A display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to a variable display, and
It is provided with a change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the corresponding display changes.
As the change suggestion effect, the change suggestion effect execution means displays the ball thrown by the character hitting the active display 30TM003 as shown in the change suggestion effect of the success mode (FIGS. 11-18 (1) and (2)). The effect of changing the mode) and the effect of suggesting the change of the failure mode (as shown in FIGS. 11-19 (10) and (20), the ball thrown by the character is repelled by the active display 30TM003 and does not change the display mode. ) Is feasible,
Depending on the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode, a decorative symbol (re-variation (pseudo-ream) is performed after the temporary stop) within a predetermined period (for example, within the period from the start of the fluctuation to the establishment of the reach state). The next change suggestion effect will be displayed during the period until the combination of decorative symbols or the pseudo-continuous symbol) temporarily stops, and within the period from the start of fluctuation to the first stop of any of the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right. The execution rate is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-16, when the second change suggestion effect is executed, if both are successful modes, the third change is performed at a rate of 100%. If the suggestion effect is executed and one is a success mode and one is a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed.)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means M2 is
Means M1 gaming machine
Depending on the mode of the corresponding display (active display 30TM003), the ratio controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player differs (as shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), the final display of the active display). Expectations for big hits differ depending on the mode),
Depending on the number of times the success mode change suggestion effect is continuous, the ratio of which mode the corresponding display is is different (as shown in FIG. 11-16 (A), the number of times the success mode change suggestion effect is continuous. The higher the number of hits, the higher the expectation of big hits. Even if the active display has the same display color, the higher the number of consecutive changes suggestion effects of the success mode, the higher the expectation of big hits.)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the number of times in which the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuous, and it is possible to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means M3 is
A gaming machine of means M1 or means M2.
Variable display of decorative patterns is possible,
When the change suggestion effect is executed, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not change (as shown in FIGS. 11-18, when the change suggestion effect is executed, the temporary stop is not performed for the variable display of the decorative symbol. The direction of fluctuation does not change either)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the change suggestion effect can be further focused on because the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not change.

The gaming machine of means M4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means M1 to means M3.
The change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which character A appears and a change suggestion effect in which character B appears).
After executing one type of change suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a different type of change suggestion effect (for example, after executing the change suggestion effect in which the character A appears, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (1)). , As shown in FIG. 11-18 (4), the change suggestion effect in which the character B appears is executed.)
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the change suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means M5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means M1 to means M4.
The change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) includes a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which character A appears, a change suggestion effect in which character B appears, and a change suggestion effect in which character C appears. It is possible to perform a change suggestion effect in which character D appears,
Depending on the type of change suggestion effect, the rate at which the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed is different, and the rate of change to the corresponding display of the specific mode is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-17, the rate is higher than that of the character A. Character D has a higher rate of executing the change suggestion effect of the success mode, and a higher rate of changing the display mode of the active display).
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to be interested in which kind of change suggestion effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means M6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means M1 to means M5.
The change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) includes a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (change suggestion effect in which character A appears, change suggestion effect in which character B appears, change suggestion effect in which character C appears, and character D. Is possible to perform a change suggestion effect)
The rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of change suggestion effect (as shown in FIGS. 11-17, character A executes the next change suggestion effect more than character D). High percentage)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to be interested in which kind of change suggestion effect is executed.

As shown in JP-A-2016-144583 (FIG. 36), a gaming machine has been proposed in which an active display is displayed as information corresponding to a variable display and the display mode of the active display is changed each time a pseudo-continuous variation is executed. Has been done. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-144583 (FIG. 36), there is room for improving the interest in information corresponding to variable display. The inventions according to the means N1 to N6 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine for improving the interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of means N1
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols).
A display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to a variable display, and
It is provided with a change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the corresponding display changes.
In the change suggestion effect execution means, as the change suggestion effect, the ball thrown by the character A hits the active display 30TM003 as shown in the change suggestion effect of the success mode (FIGS. 11-18 (1) and (2)). The effect of changing the display mode) and the effect of suggesting a change of the failure mode (as shown in FIGS. 11-19 (10) and (20), the ball thrown by the character D is repelled by the active display 30TM003 to change the display mode. It is possible to perform a production that does not let you
A predetermined period (for example, within the period from the start of fluctuation to the establishment of the reach state, the decorative symbol (combination of decorative symbols or pseudo-ream symbol in which re-variation (pseudo-ream) is performed after the temporary stop) is provisional. In the period until the stop, the number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the success mode with respect to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the period from the start of the fluctuation to the time when any of the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right stops first) Correspondingly, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state favorable to the player is different (as shown in FIG. 11-16 (A), the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode] with respect to the [number of executions of the change suggestion effect]. The higher the ratio of, the higher the expectation of a big hit is likely to be. For example, when [the number of times the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed / the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed] is 2/3, the display mode is blue. And when it is 4/5, the display mode is a red mode with a higher expectation of a big hit.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means N2 is
Means N1 gaming machine
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) differs depending on the mode of the corresponding display (active display 30TM003) (as shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), the jackpot expectation degree depends on the final display mode of the active display. Different),
Depending on the number of times the success mode change suggestion effect is continuous, the ratio of which mode the corresponding display is is different (as shown in FIG. 11-16 (A), the number of times the success mode change suggestion effect is continuous. The higher the number of hits, the higher the expectation of big hits. Even if the active display has the same display color, the higher the number of consecutive changes suggestion effects of the success mode, the higher the expectation of big hits.)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the number of times in which the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuous, and it is possible to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means N3 is
A gaming machine of means N1 or means N2.
Variable display of decorative patterns is possible,
When the change suggestion effect is executed, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not change (as shown in FIGS. 11-18, when the change suggestion effect is executed, the temporary stop is not performed for the variable display of the decorative symbol. The direction of fluctuation does not change either)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the change suggestion effect can be further focused on because the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not change.

The gaming machine of means N4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means N1 to means N3.
The change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which character A appears and a change suggestion effect in which character B appears).
After executing one type of change suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a different type of change suggestion effect (for example, after executing the change suggestion effect in which the character A appears, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (1)). , As shown in FIG. 11-18 (4), the change suggestion effect in which the character B appears is executed.)
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the change suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means N5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means N1 to means N4.
The change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) includes a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which character A appears, a change suggestion effect in which character B appears, and a change suggestion effect in which character C appears. It is possible to perform a change suggestion effect in which character D appears,
Depending on the type of change suggestion effect, the rate at which the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed is different, and the rate of change to the corresponding display of the specific mode is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-17, the rate is higher than that of the character A. Character D has a higher rate of executing the change suggestion effect of the success mode, and a higher rate of changing the display mode of the active display).
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to be interested in which kind of change suggestion effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means N6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means N1 to means N5.
The change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) includes a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (change suggestion effect in which character A appears, change suggestion effect in which character B appears, change suggestion effect in which character C appears, and character D. Is possible to perform a change suggestion effect)
The rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of change suggestion effect (as shown in FIGS. 11-17, character A executes the next change suggestion effect more than character D). High percentage)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to be interested in which kind of change suggestion effect is executed.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when it is necessary for an external device to grasp the control state related to the setting when changing the setting value or the like. However, even if the signal output technique of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-250066 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp the signal output technique. is there. The invention according to the means O1 to the means O4 is made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately notifying the outside of the gaming machine of a control state related to the setting.

The gaming machine of means O1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different). ,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and a game control microcomputer 100.
Setting confirmation mode control means (step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 capable of executing the game control microcomputer 100) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed, and
With a specific signal output means (game control microcomputer 100 that outputs a security signal in step S21TM4560) that outputs a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. ,
A setting means (a game control microcomputer 100 for setting a value of a security signal timer) for setting a value (value of a security signal timer) for a period during which a specific signal is output is provided.
The setting means can set a predetermined value common to the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710). ),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal in response to the end of control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode until at least a period corresponding to the predetermined value elapses (in the setting confirmation mode). With the end, the security signal is continuously output until 1 second elapses from the end of the setting confirmation mode, and with the end of the setting change mode, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds elapse from the end of the setting change mode. To do)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the setting can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The gaming machine of means O2 is
It is a gaming machine of means O1 and
It is provided with an initialization means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is set in step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150) for initializing the game state.
The initialization means initializes the game state according to the control of the setting change mode (when controlled to the setting change mode, RAM clear is executed after being controlled to the setting change mode).
After setting the predetermined value (after setting 1 second as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710), the setting means can set a specific value corresponding to a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. (When RAM clear is executed, 30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465).
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal until a period corresponding to the specific value elapses in response to the end of the control of the setting change mode (from the end of the setting change mode with the end of the setting change mode). Continuously output security signals until 30 seconds have passed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, in both cases when the control of the setting change mode is finished and when the control of the setting confirmation mode is finished, a specific signal is output at least for a period corresponding to a predetermined value, and the setting is changed. When controlled to a mode, a specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. Therefore, the setting process by the setting means is standardized and the output is different between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to set the period.

The gaming machine of means O3 is
A gaming machine of means O1 or means O2,
In the setting change mode, when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (detection that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). The setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting changing mode in the backup area of the specific information storage means (RAM 102 in the backup area) for storing the specific information (setting changing flag), and the setting changing mode ends. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 is provided.
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), the game is stopped and a specific signal is output (the processing of steps S21TM420 to S21TM4220 is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off based on the fact that the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied). Is possible.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped during the control of the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the external device when the power supply is restarted.

The gaming machine of means O4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means O1 to means O3.
A game control means for controlling the progress of the game (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) and
It is equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that controls the execution of the effect.
The game control means
Display means (display monitor 21TM029) and
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) and
In the setting change mode, power is supplied to the gaming machine without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (without detecting an operation in which the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). Specific information storage means for storing specific information when stopped (in the backup area of the RAM 102, the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on the game control microcomputer 100), which clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720, and
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), it is possible to execute an error notification in the display means and send an error command to the effect control means (a set value abnormality error command is sent in step S21TM4190, and a display monitor is displayed in the error display in step S21TM4210. It is possible to display the letter "E" on 21TM029),
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 to prompt an operation for changing the set value (“The power is turned on again after the power is turned off to switch to the setting change mode”. Display the message "Please migrate")
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified to the clerk of the game hall, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. The inventions relating to the means P1 to the means P4 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and provide a gaming machine that appropriately notifies the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. To provide.

The gaming machine of means P1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different). ,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and a game control microcomputer 100.
Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can be identified as being controlled in the setting change mode (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 is provided.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102).
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). In some cases), it is further provided with an error notification means capable of executing error notification (a game control microcomputer 100 that displays an error in step S21TM4210 when the transition condition to the setting change mode is not satisfied). ..
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified.

The gaming machine of means P2 is
It is a gaming machine of means P1 and
The setting change mode control means satisfies the setting change condition (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting). It is possible to control the setting change mode based on the changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state).
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied, it is possible to control the setting change mode without executing the error notification (at the time of turning on the power, all in steps S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140). Based on the determination of YES, the mode shifts to the setting change mode without shifting to the loop processing of steps S21TM420 to step S21TM4220).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the condition to be controlled in the setting change mode is satisfied, the setting change mode is controlled without executing the error notification, and unnecessary error notification is avoided and the set value is appropriately set. You can encourage changes.

The gaming machine of means P3 is
A gaming machine of means P1 or means P2.
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). If the error notification is executed and the game is stopped (when the power is turned on, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140). If NO is determined in (), the process proceeds to the loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 without shifting to the setting change mode).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in a state where the set value is unstable, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

The gaming machine of means P4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means P1 to means P3.
A game control means for controlling the progress of the game (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) and
It is equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that controls the execution of the effect.
The game control means
Display means (display monitor 21TM029) and
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) and
With the specific information storage means,
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), it is possible to execute the error notification in the display means and send an error command to the effect control means (a set value abnormality error command is sent in step S21TM4190 and displayed in the error display in step S21TM4210). It is possible to display the letter "E" on the monitor 21TM029),
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 to prompt an operation for changing the set value (“The power is turned on again after the power is turned off to switch to the setting change mode”. Display the message "Please migrate")
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified to the clerk of the game hall, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. The inventions according to the means Q1 to the means Q5 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and provide a gaming machine that appropriately determines the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. To do.

The gaming machine of means Q1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different). ,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and a game control microcomputer 100.
Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can be identified as being controlled in the setting change mode (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 is provided.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102).
The setting change mode control means sets the setting changing flag in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. When it is determined that it is set), it is controlled to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch is set. (Setting changeover switch) Automatically controls to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change mode that 21TM052 is in the ON state is satisfied.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately determined when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode accompanied by the initialization of the gaming state.
The RAM is set based on the initialization means (for example, step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150) in which the gaming machine of means Q1 initializes the gaming state in response to the control of the setting change mode. A game control microcomputer 100) that executes clearing (step S21TM1410) may be further provided.

The gaming machine of means Q2 is
It is a gaming machine of means Q1 and
The setting change mode control means is based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied when the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. Controlled to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, if the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. To shift to the setting change mode in which the RAM clear flag is 1 (RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode ends because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state). (The mode shifts to the setting change mode based on the condition being satisfied), and when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, the setting change condition is not satisfied or not. Controlling to the setting change mode (when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether or not the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. Automatically control to change setting mode)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power is cut off during the setting change mode control, the setting change mode is set even when the setting change condition is not satisfied based on the specific information stored at the time of power restoration. Since it will be controlled, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q3 is
A gaming machine of means Q1 or means Q2.
The setting change mode control means is a transition operation when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when the power is turned on, when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 Is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1. (The clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, so that the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends. Is executed), it is possible to control to the setting change mode based on the condition for shifting to the setting change mode), and when the setting change mode is controlled. It is possible to terminate the setting change mode based on a specific operation (it was confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 was turned off in step S21TM4680).
The specific information storage means stores the specific information when it is controlled to the setting change mode (sets the setting changing flag at the timing of step S21TM4580 when the control of the setting change mode is started), and the specific operation. When the setting change mode ends, the specific information is deleted (the setting changing flag is cleared at the timing of step S21TM4720 when the control of the setting change mode ends).
The setting change mode control means said, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, regardless of whether or not the transition operation is performed. Controlled to the setting change mode (when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether or not the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. The setting change mode is automatically controlled), and the setting change mode is terminated based on the specific operation (the setting change mode is terminated based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680. Let)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the conditions for terminating the control of the setting change mode can be appropriately determined.

The gaming machine of means Q4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Q1 to means Q3.
It is equipped with a set value storage means (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the set value is stored) for storing the set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different).
It is possible to execute control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (big hit determination process in the special symbol process process, etc.).
The set value stored in the set value storage means is changed based on the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610). Change the setting value stored in the setting value storage area),
The setting change mode control means terminates the setting change mode based on a specific operation when the setting change mode is controlled (it was confirmed in step S21TM4680 that the lock switch 21TM051 was turned off. Exit the setting change mode based on),
The set value storage means is changed by the change operation in the setting change mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation when controlled in the setting change mode. The set value is continuously stored (the set value storage area is formed in the backup area of the RAM 102, and when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the setting value storage area is stored. Since the setting value itself stored in is changed, the setting value after being changed by the change operation is retained even if the power is cut off during the setting change mode.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power supply is restarted, the set value after being changed by the change operation in the setting change mode before the power failure occurs is stored in the set value storage means, and the set value corresponds to the set value. Workability can be improved because control is executed.

The gaming machine of means Q5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Q1 to means Q3.
It is equipped with a set value storage means (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the set value is stored) for storing the set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different).
It is possible to execute control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (big hit determination process in the special symbol process process, etc.).
The setting change mode control means is stored in the setting value storage area when the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled and (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode). (Change only the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area, not the existing setting value), and change the setting value stored in the setting value storage means based on the specific operation after the change operation. The setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area at that time is stored in the setting value storage area based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode. To confirm it as a valid setting value and exit the setting change mode),
When the setting value storage means is controlled in the setting change mode and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation, the change operation is performed in the setting change mode. Stores the set value before it is set (even if the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, if the lock switch 21TM051 is not switched off, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area Is not changed, so if a power failure occurs during the setting change mode, the setting value before being controlled to the setting change mode is retained.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode is not ended, the change of the setting value can be restricted.

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-10508 (FIG. 38), a gaming machine that executes an effect of counting down the remaining time until the reach effect is started is disclosed. In a gaming machine that performs a predetermined operation such as the countdown described in JP-A-2016-10508 (FIG. 38), there is room for enhancing the effect of the effect. The invention according to the means R1 to the means R7 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of a production that performs a predetermined operation.

The gaming machine of means R1
It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
A suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (pseudo continuous effect, expectation notice effect) suggesting that the control is performed in the advantageous state
A predetermined effect (countdown effect, countup effect) that changes the display mode of the effect display by performing a predetermined operation (countdown operation for subtracting numerical values, countup operation for adding numerical values) corresponding to the execution of the suggested effect is performed. A predetermined effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) that can be executed is provided.
The predetermined effect executing means is used as the predetermined effect.
In the first predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5)), a predetermined operation (subtraction, countdown operation) is performed after displaying the effect display (“3” defined as the initial value) according to the first special aspect. As shown, after displaying "3" as the initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a countdown operation is performed to perform a countdown effect of subtracting a numerical value).
A second predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17)) in which a predetermined operation (addition, count-up operation) is performed after displaying the effect display (“70” defined as the initial value) according to the second special mode. As shown in the above, after displaying "70" as the initial value on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300, the count-up operation is performed to add the numerical values.
A predetermined operation can be executed in a predetermined display area common to the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5), and FIGS. 13-11 (14) to 13-11 (14). As shown in (17), numerical value subtraction or numerical value addition can be executed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 which is common to the countdown effect and the countup effect).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the effect executed in the predetermined display area and improve the interest of the effect executed in the predetermined display area.

The gaming machine of means R2 is
Means R1 gaming machine
As the suggestion effect, there are a first suggestion effect (pseudo continuous effect) and a second suggestion effect (expectation notice effect).
The predetermined effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) is
The first predetermined effect is executed in response to the execution of the first suggestion effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5), the countdown effect is executed in response to the execution of the pseudo continuous effect. ),
The second predetermined effect is executed in response to the execution of the second suggestion effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17), the count-up effect is performed in response to the execution of the expectation notice effect. Execute)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect correspond to different types of suggestive effects, the correspondence between the predetermined effects and the suggested effects can be clarified.

The gaming machine of means R3 is
A gaming machine of means R1 or means R2.
The predetermined operation includes a first predetermined operation (countdown operation for subtraction) and a second predetermined operation (countup operation for addition) having different operation modes.
When the first predetermined effect is executed, the first predetermined operation is performed in the predetermined display area (when the countdown effect is executed, a numerical value is subtracted on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300), and the second predetermined effect is performed. When the effect is executed, the second predetermined operation is performed in the predetermined display area (when the count-up effect is executed, a numerical value is added on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the difference between the first predetermined operation and the second predetermined operation can be clarified, so that the player can clearly distinguish between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect.

The gaming machine of means R4
Any gaming machine selected from means R1 to means R3.
The display mode of the predetermined display area differs between when the first predetermined effect is executed and when the second predetermined effect is executed (shown in FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5). As described above, when the countdown effect is executed, the numerical value is displayed in a white mode, and as shown in FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17), the numerical value is displayed when the countup effect is executed. (Displayed in blue or red)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, the difference between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be clarified.

The gaming machine of means R5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means R1 to means R4.
The display mode of the predetermined display area when the first predetermined effect is executed is different from the display mode of the predetermined display area when the second predetermined effect is executed (FIGS. 13-9 (2) and As shown in FIG. 13-11 (14), "3" as an initial value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 when the countdown effect is executed, and the sub liquid crystal display when the countup effect is executed. (Different from "70" as the initial value of the countup display displayed on the device 35TM300)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, the difference between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be clarified.

The gaming machine of means R6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means R1 to means R5.
Regarding at least one of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, there are a plurality of display modes of the predetermined display area when the predetermined effect is executed (the initial value of the count-up effect is the expectation notice effect). As shown in FIGS. 13-6 (F) and 13-6 (G), the initial values of the count-up effect are "50", "60", "70", "80", and Any of "90" can be determined),
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the display mode of the predetermined display area when the predetermined effect is executed (as shown in FIGS. 13-6 (F) and 13-6 (G), the same final value and the same final value. In that case, the jackpot expectation is higher when the initial value of the count-up effect is small than when the initial value of the count-up effect is large).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the display mode of the predetermined display area when the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means R7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means R1 to means R6.
In a special display area (main liquid crystal display 35TM200) different from the predetermined display area, it is possible to execute the first predetermined effect or the effect corresponding to the second predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17). ), The initial value, change pattern, and final value of the numerical value bar 35TM610 shown in the expectation notice effect of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 are the initial values shown in the count-up effect of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Matches the value, change pattern, and final value)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the effect of the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect can be enhanced by being able to execute the effect related to the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect in the special display area. ..

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-10508 (FIG. 38), a gaming machine that executes an effect of counting down the remaining time until the reach effect is started is disclosed. In a gaming machine that performs a predetermined operation such as the countdown described in JP-A-2016-10508 (FIG. 38), there is room for enhancing the effect of the effect. The invention according to the means S1 to the means S5 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of a production that performs a predetermined operation.

The gaming machine of means S1
It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
A suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (pseudo continuous effect, expectation notice effect) suggesting that the control is performed in the advantageous state
A predetermined effect (countdown effect, countup effect) that changes the display mode of the effect display by performing a predetermined operation (countdown operation for subtracting numerical values, countup operation for adding numerical values) corresponding to the execution of the suggested effect is performed. A predetermined effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) that can be executed is provided.
The predetermined effect executing means is used as the predetermined effect.
In the first predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5)), a predetermined operation (subtraction, countdown operation) is performed after displaying the effect display (“3” defined as the initial value) according to the first special aspect. As shown, after displaying "3" defined as the initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a countdown operation is performed to perform a countdown effect of subtracting a numerical value).
A second predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17)) in which a predetermined operation (addition, count-up operation) is performed after displaying the effect display (“70” defined as the initial value) according to the second special mode. As shown in the above, after displaying "70" defined as the initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a count-up operation is performed to add a numerical value. Yes,
The ratio of control to the advantageous state differs between when the first predetermined effect is executed and when the second predetermined effect is executed (as shown in FIGS. 13-7 (H) and 13-7 (I)). The jackpot expectation is higher when the count-up effect is executed than when the count-down effect is executed.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which predetermined effect is executed in the predetermined display area, and to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means S2 is
It is a gaming machine of means S1 and
As the suggestion effect, there are a first suggestion effect (pseudo continuous effect) and a second suggestion effect (expectation notice effect).
The predetermined effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) is
The first predetermined effect is executed in response to the execution of the first suggestion effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5), the countdown effect is executed in response to the execution of the pseudo continuous effect. ),
The second predetermined effect is executed in response to the execution of the second suggestion effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17), the count-up effect is performed in response to the execution of the expectation notice effect. Execute)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect correspond to different types of suggestive effects, the correspondence between the predetermined effects and the suggested effects can be clarified.

The gaming machine of means S3
A gaming machine of means S1 or means S2.
The predetermined operation includes a first predetermined operation (subtraction, countdown operation) and a second predetermined operation (addition, countup operation) having different operation modes.
When the first predetermined effect is executed, the first predetermined operation is performed in the predetermined display area (when the countdown effect is executed, a numerical value is subtracted on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300), and the second predetermined effect is performed. Is executed, the second predetermined operation is performed in the predetermined display area (when the count-up effect is executed, the numerical value is added on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, the difference between the first predetermined operation and the second predetermined operation can be clarified, so that the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be clearly distinguished.

The gaming machine of means S4
Any gaming machine selected from means S1 to means S3.
The display mode of the predetermined display area differs between when the first predetermined effect is executed and when the second predetermined effect is executed (shown in FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5). As described above, when the countdown effect is executed, the numerical value is displayed in a white mode, and as shown in FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17), the numerical value is displayed when the countup effect is executed. (Displayed in blue or red)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, the difference between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be clarified.

The gaming machine of means S5
Any gaming machine selected from means S1 to means S4.
In a special display area (main liquid crystal display 35TM200) different from the predetermined display area, it is possible to execute the first predetermined effect or the effect corresponding to the second predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17). ), The initial value, change pattern, and final value of the numerical value bar 35TM610 shown in the expectation notice effect on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 are the initial value, change pattern, and the numerical value shown in the count-up effect. , Matches the final value)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the effect of the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect can be enhanced by being able to execute the effect related to the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect in the special display area. ..

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-99801 (FIG. 32), the timer effect is started in parallel with the progress of the battle effect (super reach effect), and when the display of the timer effect eventually reaches 0, the battle effect ( A gaming machine from which the result of (super reach production) is derived is disclosed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-99801 (FIG. 32), a related effect (timer effect) related to the execution status of a suggestion effect (battle effect) suggesting that the gaming machine is controlled in an advantageous state. There is room to improve the interest. The invention according to the means T1 to the means T6 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine for improving the interest of related production.

The gaming machine of means T1 is
It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
A suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (music reach effect, cut-in notice effect) suggesting that the control is performed in the advantageous state, and
A related effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a related effect (counting display effect) related to the execution status of the suggested effect is provided.
The execution status of the suggested effect is the first stage (a period of 1 to 15 seconds in the music reach effect as shown in FIG. 13-15 (3)) and the second stage after the first stage (FIG. 13). As shown in -15 (4), there is a period of 16 to 30 seconds in the music reach production).
When the suggestion effect of the second stage is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the suggestion effect of the first stage is executed and the suggestion effect of the second stage is not executed (FIG. 13). As shown in -13 (A) to (D), the jackpot expectation is higher when the music reach production is executed up to the second stage than when the music reach production ends in the first stage). ,
It is easier to recognize the related effect when the suggestion effect is in the second stage than when the suggestion effect is in the first stage (as shown in FIGS. 13-15 (3) and (4), music reach. When the effect is in the first stage, since the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are at the origin position, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is lowered, and the count display effect on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is produced. While the visibility is reduced, when the music reach effect is in the second stage, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved because the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are in the effect position. However, the visibility of the counting display effect on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when the suggestion effect is in the first stage, it is difficult to recognize the related effect as compared with the case where the suggestion effect is in the second stage, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

The gaming machine of means T2 is
It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
A suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (music reach effect, cut-in notice effect) suggesting that the control is performed in the advantageous state, and
A related effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a related effect (counting display effect) related to the execution status of the suggested effect is provided.
The execution status of the suggested effect is the first stage (a period of 1 to 15 seconds in the music reach effect as shown in FIG. 13-19 (3)) and the second stage after the first stage (FIG. 13). As shown in -19 (4), there is a period of 16 to 30 seconds in the music reach production).
When the suggestion effect of the second stage is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the suggestion effect of the first stage is executed and the suggestion effect of the second stage is not executed (FIG. 13). As shown in -13 (C) and (D), the jackpot expectation is higher when the music reach production is executed up to the second stage than when the music reach production ends in the first stage). ,
The ratio of the related effect being executed is higher when the suggestion effect is in the second stage than when the suggestion effect is in the first stage (as shown in FIG. 13-17 (G), the music reach effect). Is more likely to perform the count display effect when the music reach effect is in the second stage than when it is in the first stage)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when the suggestion effect is in the first stage, the execution rate of the related effect is lower than that in the case where the suggestion effect is in the second stage, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

The gaming machine of means T3 is
Means T1 gaming machine
The related effect (counting display effect) is an effect of performing a predetermined operation (update of the effect execution period) in a predetermined display area (sub liquid crystal display 35TM300).
By changing the visibility of the predetermined display area, it is possible to change the visibility of the related effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-15 (3) and (4), the music reach effect is the first stage. In this case, since the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are at the origin positions, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is lowered, and the visibility of the counting display effect on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is lowered. On the other hand, when the music reach effect is in the second stage, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are in the effect position, so that the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved. Improves the visibility of the counting display effect in
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the visibility of the related effect while trying to standardize the effect information to be displayed in the predetermined display area.

The gaming machine of means T4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means T1 to means T3.
The related effect is an effect of updating the display corresponding to the execution period of the suggestion effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-14, the execution period of the count display effect executed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is music. It matches the execution period (the period from T3 to T7B) from the start of the reach production to the end of the music reach production)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the period during which the suggestion effect is being executed.

The gaming machine of means T5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means T1 to means T4.
The related effect (counting display effect) is an effect of performing a predetermined operation (update of the effect execution period) in a predetermined display area (sub liquid crystal display 35TM300).
As an effect different from the related effect, a predetermined effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined effect (timer effect) that performs a specific operation (timer subtraction) different from the predetermined operation is provided.
When the related effect is executed, the rate at which the predetermined effect is executed is lower than when the related effect is not executed (as shown in FIG. 13-13 (E), when the count display effect is executed). The execution rate of the cut-in notice effect is lower than that when the count display effect is not executed, and the execution rate of the cut-in notice effect matches the execution rate of the timer effect, so that the count display effect is executed. If so, the execution rate of the timer effect is lower than when the count display effect is not executed.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of effects such as related effects and predetermined effects as the effects to be performed, and it is possible to suppress the complexity of the effects while diversifying the effects.

The gaming machine of means T6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means T1 to means T5.
The related effect (counting display effect) is an effect of performing a predetermined operation (update of the effect execution period) in a predetermined display area (sub liquid crystal display 35TM300).
As an effect different from the suggestion effect (music reach effect), a special effect (pseudo) is performed in an area different from the predetermined display area (the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200). (Continuous production) can be executed,
When the special effect is executed, the ratio of the suggestion effect to the second stage is higher than when the special effect is not executed (when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed). Music reach production is more likely to be the second stage than in the case)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not a special effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest.

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-99801 (FIG. 32), the timer effect is started in parallel with the progress of the battle effect (super reach effect), and when the display of the timer effect eventually reaches 0, the battle effect ( A gaming machine from which the result of (super reach production) is derived is disclosed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-99801 (FIG. 32), a related effect (timer effect) related to the execution status of a suggestion effect (battle effect) suggesting that the gaming machine is controlled in an advantageous state. There is room to improve the interest. The invention according to the means U1 to the means U6 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine for improving the interest of related production.

The gaming machine of means U1
It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
A suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (music reach effect, cut-in notice effect) suggesting that the control is performed in the advantageous state, and
A related effect executing means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a related effect (counting display effect) related to the execution status of the suggested effect, and
As an effect different from the related effect, a predetermined effect execution means (for effect control) capable of executing a predetermined effect (timer effect) that performs a specific operation (subtraction operation) in response to the execution of the suggestion effect (cut-in notice effect). With CPU120)
The rate at which the related effect is executed differs depending on the execution status of the suggestion effect (as shown in FIG. 13-17 (G), the music reach effect is higher than that in the case where the music reach effect is the first stage. In the case of the second stage, the rate at which the counting display effect is executed is higher),
The rate at which the predetermined effect is executed differs depending on whether or not the related effect is executed (as shown in FIG. 13-17 (H), when the count display effect is executed, the count display is displayed. The execution rate of the cut-in notice effect is higher than when the effect is not executed, and the execution rate of the cut-in notice effect matches the execution rate of the timer effect, so the count display effect is executed. If so, the execution rate of the timer effect is higher than when the count display effect is not executed.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by making the related production and the predetermined production related to each other.

The gaming machine of means U2 is
Means U1 gaming machine
As the execution status of the suggestion effect (music reach effect), the first stage (a period of 1 to 15 seconds of the music reach effect as shown in FIG. 13-19 (3)) and the first stage after the first stage. There are two stages (a period of 16 to 30 seconds for music reach production, as shown in Fig. 13-19 (4)).
When the suggestion effect of the second stage is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the suggestion effect of the first stage is executed and the suggestion effect of the second stage is not executed (FIG. 13). As shown in -13 (A) to (D), the jackpot expectation is higher when the music reach production is executed up to the second stage than when the music reach production ends in the first stage).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the suggestion effect of the second stage is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means U3 is
Means U2 gaming machine
The ratio of the related effect being executed is higher when the suggestion effect is in the second stage than when the suggestion effect is in the first stage (as shown in FIG. 13-17 (G), the music reach effect). The rate at which the count display effect is executed is higher when the music reach effect is the second stage than when is the first stage).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when the suggestion effect is in the first stage, the execution rate of the related effect is lower than when the suggestion effect is in the second stage, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

The gaming machine of means U4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means U1 to means U3.
The related effect is an effect of updating the display corresponding to the execution period of the suggestion effect (as shown in FIG. 13-18, the execution period of the counting display effect executed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is music. It matches the execution period (the period from T3 to T14B) from the start of the reach production to the end of the music reach production)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the period during which the suggestion effect is being executed.

The gaming machine of means U5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means U1 to means U4.
The related effect (counting display effect) is an effect of performing a predetermined operation (update of the effect execution period) in a predetermined display area (sub liquid crystal display 35TM300).
The predetermined effect (timer effect) is an effect that performs an operation different from the predetermined operation as the specific operation (the timer effect is an effect that performs timer subtraction different from the update of the effect execution period).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the production and improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means U6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means U1 to means U5.
The related effect (counting display effect) is an effect of performing a predetermined operation (update of the effect execution period) in a predetermined display area (sub liquid crystal display 35TM300).
As an effect different from the suggestion effect (music reach effect), a special effect (pseudo) is performed in an area different from the predetermined display area (the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200). (Continuous production) can be executed,
When the special effect is executed, the ratio of the suggestion effect to the second stage is higher than when the special effect is not executed (when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed). Music reach production is more likely to be the second stage than in the case)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not a special effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern and the type of reach. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advance notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the decision ratio in the advance notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the payout control board. It is a rear view which shows the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. (A) is a simplified front view of the main board, and (B) is an explanatory view for explaining the display contents of the display monitor. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a part of the storage area in the RAM of a main board. It is a figure which showed the memory map of the CPU in the main board. It is a figure which showed the RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the main board RAM. (A) is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the display monitor, and (B-1) to (B-6) are explanatory diagrams for explaining changes in the display contents of the display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the movement of the data stored in the storage area of a ring buffer. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt process for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in a setting change mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in a setting confirmation mode. (1) is a diagram showing information displayed on the image display device when controlled in the setting change mode, and (2) is a diagram showing information displayed on the image display device when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. It is a figure. (1) to (3) are explanatory views showing the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect, and (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control signal output from the game control board to the payout control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control command sent and received between a game control board and a payout control board. It is a block diagram which shows the signal line which is used for transmission / reception of a control signal and a control command. It is a sequence diagram which shows the transmission and reception of the signal between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer at the time of a normal operation. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which a CPU for payout control executes. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which the CPU for payout control executes. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of the ball lending restriction method in this embodiment. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a timing diagram which shows the 1st ball lending restriction method. It is a timing diagram which shows the 2nd ball lending restriction method. It is a timing diagram which shows the 3rd ball lending restriction method. It is a timing diagram which shows the 4th ball lending restriction method. It is a timing diagram which shows the example that the ball lending is not restricted in the setting change mode. It is a timing diagram which shows the example which restarts the payout after the setting change mode ends. It is a timing diagram which shows the example of forcibly terminating the payout with the transition to the setting change mode. It is a timing diagram which shows the transmission and reception of the signal between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer at the time of a normal operation. It is a timing diagram which shows the transmission and reception of the signal between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer in the period controlled in the setting change mode. It is a timing diagram which shows the transmission and reception of the signal between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer in the period when the game machine frame or the glass door frame is open. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power cut occurs before the set value is fixed, and (2) shows control when a power cut occurs after the set value is fixed. It is a figure which shows the warning screen when the setting change operation is performed during a game. It is explanatory drawing of the signal output from each output terminal. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of the security signal and the setting change correspondence signal. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the set value and the output mode of the setting change correspondence signal. It is a timing diagram which shows the output mode and output period of the setting change correspondence signal. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. (1) A diagram showing a value displayed on the display monitor when the set value is not a regular value, and (2) a diagram showing a value displayed on the display monitor when the set value is a regular value. .. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of restricting the ball lending based on the open state detection of the frame for a game machine. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of resuming the ball lending after the opening state detection of the gaming machine frame is completed. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of resuming ball lending without shifting to a setting change mode after a power-off. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of shifting to the setting change mode after turning off the power and forcibly terminating the ball lending. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of shifting to the setting change mode and restarting the ball lending after the power is turned off. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of limiting the prize ball payout based on the open state detection of the frame for a game machine. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of resuming the prize ball payout after the opening state detection of the gaming machine frame is completed. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of restarting the prize ball payout without shifting to a setting change mode after a power-off. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of shifting to the setting change mode after power-off and forcibly terminating the prize ball payout. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of shifting to the setting change mode after power-off and restarting the prize ball payout. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of the security signal and the setting change correspondence signal. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of the security signal and the setting change correspondence signal. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of hold display and active display. It is a flowchart which shows the change effect determination process. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a final display mode determination table for determining a first change effect, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a final display mode determination table for determining a second change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hold change pattern in the 1st change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hold change pattern in the 1st change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hold change pattern in the 2nd change production. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each effect in the 1st change effect and the 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode concerning the 1st change effect and the 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode concerning the 1st change effect and the 2nd change effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each effect in the 1st change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode concerning the 1st change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode concerning the 1st change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the effect mode concerning the 1st change effect and the 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the effect mode concerning the 1st change effect and the 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the effect mode concerning the 1st change effect and the 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change pattern of an active display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the type of change suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example about the production mode of the change suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example about the production mode of the change suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example about the production mode of the change suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification example when the setting changing flag is set at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power cut occurs before the set value is fixed, and (2) shows control when a power cut occurs after the set value is fixed. It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. The logo panel drive mechanism of this embodiment is shown, (a) is a front view of the logo panel drive mechanism, and (b) is a P arrow view of FIG. 13-2 (a). It is a Q arrow view of FIG. 13-2 (a). It is a front view which shows the state which both the 1st logo panel and the 2nd logo panel are moved to the position which overlaps with the main liquid crystal display in the front-rear view. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing at the start of fluctuation. (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a fluctuation pattern determination table, (C) and (D) are explanatory diagrams showing an execution rate determination table of the expectation degree advance notice effect, and (E) is an expectation degree advance notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the final display mode determination table of an effect, and (F) and (G) are explanatory views which show the display mode change pattern determination table of the expectation degree notice effect. (H) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not the count-up effect is executed, and (I) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not the count-down effect is executed. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of the countdown effect and the countup effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode concerning the count-down effect and the count-up effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode concerning the count-down effect and the count-up effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode concerning the count-down effect and the count-up effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing at the start of fluctuation. (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a fluctuation pattern determination table, (C) and (D) are explanatory diagrams showing a final stage determination table of a music reach effect, and (E) is a cut-in notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution ratio determination table of, and (F) is the explanatory diagram which shows the effect mode determination table of the cut-in notice effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of the count display effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode concerning the count display effect. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the effect determination processing at the start of fluctuation. (G) is an explanatory diagram showing an execution start stage determination table of the count display effect, and (H) is an explanatory diagram showing an execution rate determination table of the cut-in notice effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of the count display effect and the timer effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode concerning a count display effect and a timer effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the form of the effect aspect concerning the count display effect and the timer effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing at the start of fluctuation. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a final display mode determination table of active display, (B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing a change pattern determination table of active display, and (D) and (E) are changes. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect production decision table, and (F) is the explanatory diagram which shows the cut-in advance notice effect decision table. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of the 1st change suggestion effect and the 2nd change suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode concerning the 1st change suggestion effect, the 2nd change suggestion effect, and the 3rd change suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode concerning the 1st change suggestion effect and the 2nd change suggestion effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of the 3rd change suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode regarding the 3rd change suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table at the time of non-probability change (at the time of low probability). It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table at the time of probability change (at the time of high probability). It is explanatory drawing which shows the probability change fall determination table. (A) An explanatory diagram showing a game flow in the case of a probable change and falling within 100 rotations after the end of the big hit game state, and (B) an explanatory diagram showing a game flow in the case of a probable change and fall after 101 rotations after the end of the big hit game state. is there. (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a fluctuation pattern determination table in a high accuracy and high base state (within 99 rotations), and (C) and (D) are fluctuation patterns at the time of winning a probability variation fall (within 99 rotations). It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination table, (E), (F) is the explanatory diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table in the low accuracy high base state (within 99 rotations), (G), (H) is the 100th rotation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for use. (I) and (J) are explanatory diagrams showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for the 100th rotation, and (K) and (L) are explanations showing a fluctuation pattern determination table in a high accuracy and high base state (101 rotations or later). It is a figure, (M) and (N) are explanatory views which show the fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of a probable change fall winning (after 101 rotations). (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode of the first setting suggestion effect, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode of the second setting suggestion effect. It is a time chart which shows an example of the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect in the case of probable change fall within 100 rotations. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode in the case of probable change fall within 100 rotations. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode in the case of probable change fall within 100 rotations. It is a time chart which shows an example of the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect in the case of probable change fall after 101 rotations. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode in the case of probable change fall after 101 rotations. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode in the case of probable change fall after 101 rotations. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the game flow in the case of probable change fall within 100 rotations. It is a time chart which shows the modification about the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect in the case of probable change fall within 100 rotations. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the effect mode in the case of probable change fall within 100 rotations. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the effect mode in the case of probable change fall within 100 rotations.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area), a variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A general winning opening 10 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the lower left and right sides of the game area), which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, stick controller 31A and push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called the low accuracy high base state, the probability variation state is called the high accuracy high base state, and the normal state is also called the low accuracy low base state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like, turning off the light, operating the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability change symbol becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). (A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, thereby causing the image display device 5 to display the effect image. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, the effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and the effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, refer to the details. See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning prize determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a jackpot game state when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature 31AK)
Next, the feature portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-1 is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern and a type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8-1 (A), in the present embodiment, the non-reach loss variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode and the display result is “loss”. -2, The variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode, and the display result is "loss". The variation pattern of reach loss is PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., and the display result is "big hit". , PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that suggests that the jackpot state is controlled. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 8-1 (B). Normal reach <Super reach E <Super reach D <Super reach C <Super The order is higher in the order of reach B <super reach A. In addition, a reach that is determined to be a big hit may be provided.

In this embodiment, the super reach is performed via the normal reach. In addition, during the reach production of Super Reach, a development production that develops (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. The fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like shown in FIG. 8-1 (A) and the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like are fluctuation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. In addition, although FIG. 8-1 (A) shows a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops to a super reach one step higher, a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops by two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

In this embodiment, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, Super Reach E, which has the lowest reliability among Super Reach, is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and other Super Reach is notified of the title by display and voice. In this way, the title notification is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than in the reach with low reliability. As a result, the player's expectation can be effectively fueled, and the effect of the effect is improved. The mode of notification of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be different depending on the actual display result and the like. In addition, the font (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) and typeface (Semi-cursive, regular script, etc.) of the title characters may be different depending on the type of reach.

The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the one indicating the title itself such as the name of the reach, and may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach production, the production content of the reach production, and the like.

(Example of production operation of feature section 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following effect operation is executed by the effect control CPU 120 executing the effect control process process based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. 8-2 and 8-3 are diagrams showing an example of a super reach effect operation according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8-2 (A) shows that the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. ing. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (B), the decorative symbols showing the numbers 7 on the “left” and “right” stop, and the reach mode is established. After that, the production branches according to the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (C), the character 31AK001, which is a ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction portion of the super reach effect (also referred to as the super reach effect), the image display device 5 has the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-2 (D). The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the character "SP Reach A") is displayed on the entire screen, and the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach (here, "Super Reach A") is output from the speaker 8. As a result, the title of Super Reach A is notified. After that, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, and as shown in FIG. 8-2 (E), the character 31AK003, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the characters 31AK001 and 31AK003 are displayed. The subsequent part of the reach production of Super Reach A, which is confronted by, is executed. The production in which the characters confront each other is also called a battle production, and in the battle production, if the ally character wins, it becomes a big hit, and if the ally character loses, it becomes a loss.

When displaying the dialogue on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the sound corresponding to the dialogue may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 8-2 (E), and may be displayed in subtitles at the lower part of the image display device 5.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of super reach B, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (C), the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period has passed since the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-2 (F). (Here, the character "SP reach B") is displayed, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "super reach B") is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of super reach B is changed. Be notified. After that, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 8-2 (G), the character 31AK006, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the characters 31AK001 and 31AK006 are displayed. The subsequent part of the reach production of Super Reach B, which is confronted by, is executed.

As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title of the reach is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the super reach effect. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction portion of the super reach effect is shown to the player, so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

In addition, Super Reach A (Fig. 8-2 (C) → (D) → (E) ...) and Super Reach B (Fig. 8-2 (C) → (F) → (G) ...) Then, in the introduction part until the title is notified, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 8-2 (C)). By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which super reach will be achieved after the super reach production is started and which title will be notified. Super Reach A and Super Reach B are not limited to completely sharing the production mode until the title is notified, and it is possible to determine which Super Reach will be achieved by paying close attention to the production. The parts may be made to have a common production mode. For example, in the introduction part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect of displaying an enemy character or suggesting an enemy character) is executed in a manner related to the title notified thereafter. It may be. By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be executed after making it possible to identify which super reach will be achieved.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the character “SP Reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, the title of Super Reach D is notified by outputting the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach (here, "defeat the enemy") from the speaker 8. In this way, in Super Reach D, the title is notified at the start of the Super Reach effect. Further, under the title 31AK007, an expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 that suggests the expectation degree of the reach is displayed. Expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H). Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation that is a big hit, but it does not have to be completely in agreement with the degree of jackpot reliability of reach.

It should be noted that the voice notification of Super Reach D does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the content of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is different depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification becomes various and the interest is improved.

After the title is notified in Super Reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-2 (I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of the reach even during the reach production. Although FIG. 8-2 (I) shows the same production contents as those in FIG. 8-2 (C) (Super Reach A, Super Reach B), the Super Reach production dedicated to Super Reach D is executed. You may.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (J), the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is displayed. Will be executed.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (A), the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the character "SP Reach E") is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. By doing so, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to displaying the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the enemy character 31AK011 are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is displayed. Will be executed. In this way, in Super Reach E, the title is notified along with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach production.

In the reach production of Super Reach E, which has low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of expectation by notifying the title without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach production of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach production is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)). , (H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, even in the super reach production such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach. Further, contrary to this embodiment, in the reach production of the super reach having high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach production of super reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped to notify the title.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach production is performed. The title is notified at the start. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has passed after the start of the super reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach having low jackpot reliability are notified. In E, the title was notified at the start of the super reach production, but in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, the title is notified at the start of super reach production, and in the case of reach with low jackpot reliability, super The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is notified. The title is notified in a part of the screen (second area) of. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification becomes possible. The title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be one in which the title is displayed in a size that fits in the entire screen, or the title is displayed there with the entire background as the background for title notification. It may be something (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display areas for performing title notification may be different between Super Reach A and Super Reach B, and the display areas for performing title notification may be different between Super Reach D and Super Reach E.

The method of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be arbitrarily changed according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of reach with low reliability. Further, when the display area for performing the title notification is different according to the reach effect, the display area may be different or the display place may be different as in this embodiment.

(Expectation suggestion display)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the expectation suggestion display is not displayed, and Super Reach D having a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach A and Super Reach B is displayed. In the title notification in, the expectation degree suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming dull. Further, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation degree suggestion display is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the sense of expectation by displaying the expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. In addition, the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed in at least a part of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach E.

As shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the expected degree suggestion display is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars, and the expected degree may be suggested by a meter or a gauge, or the expected degree may be suggested. The numerical value corresponding to may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) and the like, when the number of black stars is used, half of the black stars may be displayed so that the number of stages of expectation may be increased. ..

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is deleted and the super reach effect is executed. As a result, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, attention can be paid to the reach effect. Further, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until the determined effect described later is executed. As a result, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during the super reach production. Further, by doing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed in order to improve the effect of the effect.

Although the production operation of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted here, for example, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decisive production)
After each reach effect is executed, when the timing for deriving the display result (the final stage of the variable display) is reached, a determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed. The deciding effect includes a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "big hit" and a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "missing". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (B), a determination effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. After that, if the display result is "big hit", the image 31AK013 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-3 (C), and as shown in FIG. 8-3 (D), the image 31AK013 is displayed. A definite decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination is derived. If the display result is "missing", an image showing that the ally character has been defeated is displayed, and a definite decorative pattern that is a reach loss combination is derived.

In this embodiment, even if the title is continuously notified even during the reach production, the notification of the title is terminated before the determined production is executed. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the determined production, and it is possible to execute a sharp title notification.

In the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the decorative pattern is reduced in the lower right portion of the image display device 5 to execute the variable display during the reach effect of the super reach. , The method of displaying the decorative pattern during the reach production may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative pattern may not be displayed during the reach effect, or the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be different depending on the type of reach effect.

When the image display device 5 displays the hold display, the active display, the character that is residently displayed during the variable display, and the display related to mobile interlocking, it is appropriately hidden during the reach effect of the super reach in order to pay attention to the reach effect. May be. At that time, these displays may be left displayed during a low-reliability reach effect such as Super Reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly expected by the low-reliability reach production, and it is possible to draw attention to the reach production in the high-reliability reach production.

(Development production)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when the development effect is executed while the reach effect of Super Reach D is being executed (the title notification of Super Reach D is being executed), FIG. 8-4 As shown in (B), the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn. After that, when developing into Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (C), the title of Super Reach A is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. When developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (D), the title of Super Reach B is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 8-4, when the reach of the development destination is the reach of performing title notification by display and voice, the title notification by display and voice is executed again.

The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), and may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked and cracked, or a sandstorm (display as if it has failed) is displayed. It may be displayed. By making such an effect, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect. In addition, there may be a development effect of Gase, such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion production)
In the production operation example shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 was designed to display the black star indicating the expectation degree from the beginning, but first five white stars are displayed, and the stage It is also possible to execute the expectation suggestion effect that suggests the expectation by becoming a black star.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), when notifying the title of Super Reach D, the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 of five white stars is displayed first. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (C), the black star 31AK022 is expected to move. The effect of fitting into one of the white stars of the degree suggestion display 31AK021 is executed. At this time, a voice "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (D) and 8-5 (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise each time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the expectation is settled in the expectation suggestion display 31AK021, the black stars are highlighted as shown in FIG. 8-5 (F). By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion effect has been completed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) to 8-5, black stars are displayed one by one, and the degree of expectation indicated by the expectation suggestion display is increased by one step, but the number of black stars is two. One or more may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be raised by two or more steps. Also, a half black star may be displayed to raise the degree of expectation by half a step. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output depending on the number of displayed stars (the number of steps of the rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when a half black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three and a half black stars are displayed. In addition, audio may not be output in some cases. By doing so, the expectation suggestion effect becomes various and the effect is improved. In addition, regardless of the number of steps of expectation that increases at one time, the same image of the black star is displayed, it fits in the white star of the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of steps of expectation that increases. You may try to perform such an effect.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command for designating a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, the effect based on the command is executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, characters, motifs, sounds output from the speaker 8 and the like displayed on the image display device 5 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of variable displays and the game state, or may be changed by the operation of the player.

8-5 (G) to 8-5 (L) are examples of the effect operation of the title notification and the expectation suggestion effect when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes. In the normal mode, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) to 8-5 (F). In the special mode, the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2, which is different from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-5 (G). At this time, the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but the sound different from the normal mode (for example, the sound having a different voice color) is output. Further, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024 in Super Reach D2 is not a star shape but a rhombus shape.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (H), a black rhombus 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (I), the black rhombus 31AK025 moves and is expected. The effect of fitting into one of the white rhombuses of the degree suggestion display 31AK024 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a voice "pon" indicating that the black rhombus indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (J) and 8-5 (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the expectation is settled in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombuses are highlighted as shown in FIG. 8-5 (L). In this way, depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the game state, etc., the effect of the effect is diversified by changing the notification mode of the title. improves.

FIG. 8-5 shows an example of the effect operation when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, but other reach effects (title notification, expectation degree) depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed). (Including suggestive effect) may be made different in the effect mode. Depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not to notify the reach title and the execution rate of the title notification may be different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect according to the player's preference, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation degree suggestion display, and the expectation degree suggestion effect that gradually increases the number of black stars is executed. It is also possible to execute an expectation suggestion effect that gradually reduces the number of indications suggesting. Such an expectation degree suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the expectation degree suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other examples of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect for gradually increasing the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, when the display showing the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, the image is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-6 (B). A development effect in which the button image 31AK031 is displayed on the device 5 is executed. Here, when the operation to the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (C), the title 31AK032 of Super Reach C (here, the character "SP Reach C") is displayed. , The title of Super Reach C is notified. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has been developed. Further, under the title 31AK032, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, the development effect in which the title and the expectation degree suggestion display change may be executed.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to a title notification mode (for example, the display color of the title). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the title 31AK036 of the super reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach A is displayed. Is notified, and as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), the title notice in which the display color of the title 31AK030 changes to red is executed. In this way, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title notice shown in FIG. 8-7, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display.

Further, when the title notice in which the display mode (display color) of the title changes is executed, the sound may be output according to the display mode after the change in the title display mode. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. Further, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, the sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change.

(Execution timing of title notification)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) such as the advance notice effect or the development effect, which is controlled to the jackpot advantageous state and improves the expectation. By doing so, once the title is notified, an effect of improving the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

FIG. 8-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice effect determination process for determining whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect mode. The advance notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 of FIG. 7. In the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is the variation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of the superreach (whether or not the title notice is executed) is determined (step 31AKS002).

In step 31AKS002, the display color of the super reach title is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A), depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "missing". As shown in Fig. 8-9 (A), the display color of the Super Reach title changes from "black", "red", "black" to "red", and from "black" to "fruit pattern". Those that change, those that change from "red" to "fruit pattern" are provided, and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing of the change in the display color of the title. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In the "fruit pattern", the characters of the title may be displayed in bold and the characters themselves may be the "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the display area of the title may be the "fruit pattern". .. There may be a pattern displayed as a "fruit pattern" from the beginning. For those whose display color changes, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the display color may change after the title notification is executed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the title display period differs depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may differ depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach (for example, super reach D or super reach E) in which the title display period is long, a plurality of change timings may be provided and the change timing may be determined as one of them. Then, in the case of a super reach with a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or less than the number of super reach with a long title display period.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the title is determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A) in the normal mode, and as shown in FIG. 8-9 (B) in the special mode. The display color of the title is determined at a rate different from that of the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by making the execution mode (display color and change timing of the display color) of the title notice different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a line notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed depending on the display mode of the character's lines (for example, the display color of the lines) in the reach effect of the super reach.

After determining the display color of the title of the super reach, the display color of the character's dialogue (whether or not the dialogue notice is executed) in the reach production of the super reach is determined (step 31AKS003).

In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (C), depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "missing". As shown in Fig. 8-9 (C), the display colors of the lines in the reach production are provided to change from "white", "red", and "white" to "red", and in this order (ascending order). ), The reliability of the jackpot is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the dialogue. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the effect is improved. If the display color changes, the display color may change after the dialogue is displayed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes.

In addition, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the title notice and the dialogue notice include the same effect mode (display color), the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same effect mode is used. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the change timing of the production mode between the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the change timings are the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be different depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the timing of each change between the title notice and the dialogue notice.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the dialogue may be determined in the special mode at a ratio different from that in the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

In addition, instead of the dialogue notice, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability may be executed by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the advance notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the jackpot reliability differs according to the change timing.

After determining the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect, or when it is determined that the pattern is not the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), whether or not to execute the other advance notice effect and the effect mode are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the advance notice effect determination process is completed.

In this embodiment, the title notice and the dialogue notice can be executed in the case of super reach, but the title notice is given in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the unreliable super reach). And at least one of the dialogue notices may be executable. Further, although the title notice and the dialogue notice are explained as being decided by the decision ratio shown in FIG. 8-9, the decision ratio is arbitrary, and for example, the decision ratio may be different depending on the type of super reach. Good. By doing so, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect according to the type of reach, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the number of executable production modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing so, the production becomes diverse and the production effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of feasible production modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of feasible production modes may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute a unified notice effect, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action production)
When the effect mode of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect mode changes may be executed. For example, the action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the action effect that the image acts on at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or dialogue may be changed. The effect mode (action effect image, etc.) of the action effect may be the same regardless of whether it acts on the title or the dialogue. In addition, there may be a case where the effect mode of the title and the dialogue does not change even though the action effect is executed. When executing the action effect, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination results related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be executed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different depending on the effect mode of the action effect, or may be different from the title notice. The rate of change in which production mode (ratio of action) may be different from that of the dialogue notice, or the rate of change in what color (in what stage) may be different. .. By executing such an action effect, the player will eventually pay attention to whether the action effect image is displayed, the title or the dialogue, and the effect effect will be improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect and the effect mode may be determined at different ratios depending on the effect mode. By doing so, it is possible to execute the action effect according to the effect mode, and the effect effect is improved.

As another example of such an action effect, at least one of the title and the dialogue is produced (display color) according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action content of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May change. By doing so, the player pays attention to the production content of the reach production.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the feature section 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention. For example, all of the feature portions described in the above embodiment are not essential configurations and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub liquid crystal)
As a sub-display device different from the image display device 5, a sub-liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Although expressed as a sub liquid crystal here, the sub display device may be composed of an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed in the vicinity of the image display device 5, for example, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal. When the title is continuously displayed even after the title is notified as in the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after notifying the title on the image display device 5, the title and the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. By doing so, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display can be displayed without disturbing the super reach effect in the image display device 5, and the title and the expectation degree suggestion display can be easily understood.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestion effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the title notification (mainly the notification for displaying characters) related to other effects. You may. For example, as a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect), when a look-ahead zone effect for shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) in which the background image and the effect mode are different in the image display device 5 is executed, the shifted zone The present invention may be applied to the title notification of. When presenting a mission ("Reach with 7", "Eliminate enemies with a stick controller", etc.) and perform a mission production that will be in an advantageous state for the player when the mission is completed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of a mission.

(Modification example 1 of feature portion 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a deciding effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed, and then the display result is shown (). 8-3 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect for prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and when the predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the victory or defeat of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, since the display result is displayed according to the operation of the player, the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest is improved.

8-10 and 8-11 are diagrams showing an example of a super reach effect operation in a modified example in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), after the reach mode is set in the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), the ally character 31AK041 and the enemy character character 31AK041. 31AK042 is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 8-10 (C) to (F) and 8-11 (G) to (I), a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

Along with the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (C), a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. As a result, the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the reception of the operation is currently restricted.

In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that the operation effect is executed are prepared. Then, the jackpot reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, the image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a more reliable mode.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (D), the praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-10 (E), the praying character 31AK045 changes to the happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 is displayed. The large button image changes to 31AK047.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-11 (I), the effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the large button image 31AK047 is displayed. The effect 31AK050 that the bullet hits is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

As described above, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, the action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. In addition, the operation effect image may change without the action effect. In addition, the operation effect image may not change even though the action effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

Then, before the predetermined time from which the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 8-11 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is centered as shown in FIG. 8-11 (K). Is enlarged and displayed to prompt the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A. Further, at this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A becomes an effective operation valid period.

Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-11 (L). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (M), a definite decorative symbol to be a jackpot combination is derived. If the operation is not detected within the predetermined operation valid period, the image shown in FIG. 8-11 (L) is automatically displayed.

In this modification, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as operation effect images, and when an operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability of is high. Even if an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, it may change to a highly reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so that the effect is improved and the player's expectation is increased. Can be maintained.

In the production operation examples shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11, the reach title notification and the expectation suggestion display are omitted, but the reach production shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11 is omitted. Or may be appropriately executed in parallel with the operation effect. The determination regarding the operation effect and the operation effect image (presence / absence of operation effect, display of operation effect image, presence / absence of action effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8.

(Modification example 2 of feature portion 31AK)
A suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state may be performed. For example, the shutter effect of performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect of performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with the shutter display is executed after the variable display is started. Further, in the reach title production, the production of displaying the reach title indicating the development destination of the reach production is executed after the reach. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title notice of the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

The specific image is an image with high jackpot reliability that is displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. A fruit pattern image composed of these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in each of the shutter display and the reach title display.

When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the reach effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include each element E1 to E5 is displayed. An image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image showing the reliability of the jackpot when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach title in red letters). Then, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

When the shutter display and the reach title are displayed, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 notifies the speaker 8 to output a common sound (melody), and the game effect lamp 9 emits the light. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. Further, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output periods of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

FIG. 8-12 is a display screen view when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (a), when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display on the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (b), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. The downward arrows indicate the variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the reach state is reached as shown in FIG. 8-12 (c).

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (d), the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed small, for example, in the upper right corner of the screen, and the character is displayed on the left side of the screen. The reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the content of the super reach to be executed is shown as the reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "battle reach" indicating that the reach effect accompanied by the battle effect is executed are displayed.

Further, when the reach title effect is executed, the speaker 8 executes a notification to output a common sound (melody), and the game effect lamp 9 executes a notification to emit light. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect of emitting a specific sound (voice) indicating that the character has high jackpot reliability such as "hot" is executed. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title production, by outputting a specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the case where the output periods of the common sound and the specific sound are completely separated has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

After that, the battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 8-12 (e) is executed. Enemy characters are displayed on the left side of the screen, and ally characters are displayed on the right side of the screen. When a friendly character wins a battle with an enemy character, the characters "Battle win!" Are displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is notified that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect is completed, the screen returns to the variable display screen with the original number pattern. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (f), all the symbols are stopped and the jackpot symbol of "777" is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and 8-12 (d), both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 include all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image and are displayed. In this way, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. As a result, it is possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image with high jackpot reliability is displayed.

Further, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d). Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d) are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is a specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

The determination regarding the shutter effect (presence / absence of shutter effect and effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8. In that case, the determination related to the shutter effect may be made based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. 8-8. For example, when the display color of the title is determined to be a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily executed. Further, the determination related to the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8 together with the determination related to the shutter effect.

[Explanation of feature 21TM]
Next, the feature unit 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. 9-1. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko game machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes a first start port switch 22A, a second start port switch 22B, a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. Various parts are connected, and various effect devices such as speakers 8L, 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 are connected to the effect control board 12, but these are omitted in FIG. 9-1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and as shown in FIG. 9-3, is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 21TM201, and allows the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Various circuits for control are installed. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to the hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-5 (A), the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 that can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 21TM029 is provided with the display monitor 21TM029. , It also has a function to display various winning information related to winning. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be switched by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

In addition to the detection signals from the game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for detecting the game ball, various signals such as a power cutoff signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal are taken into the main board 11 to capture the game control microcomputer. The switch circuit 110 to be transmitted to the 100 and the information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as security signals from the terminal board 21TM016 are mounted.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-5 (A), the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 9-1 is enclosed in a substrate case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and is a main substrate. A display monitor 21TM029 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged in the center of 11, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 9-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided in the lower center of the back surface of the main board 11. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, the main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) has each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings, hereinafter, "entrance area". The number of game balls entering the (also referred to as) is totaled, and various prize information such as the ratio and the combination ratio based on the total is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and these prize information is displayed. As a result, various winning information such as the ratio and the role ratio after installation in the amusement park can be confirmed. That is, on the manufacturer side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming ball enters the general winning opening (passing the test) at a predetermined frequency. In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment is being made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the gaming ball has entered the general winning opening at the frequency as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made in the pachinko gaming machine 1 after installation.

In addition, the power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a permeable synthetic resin material, and set values such as a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), which will be described later, are changed in the lower right side of the back surface of the power supply board. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and a power supply switch 21TM055 that function as setting switches for the purpose are provided. By operating the power switch 21TM055 while the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a clerk at the game hall or the like operates the power switch 21TM055 to determine the main board 11, the effect control board 12, the payout control board 21TM037, and the like. Operating voltage is supplied. Further, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and the initialization process (RAM clear) described later is performed. Will be executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, it is easy to perform the power-on operation and the initialization operation.

The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the clerk who has the specified key can operate it. Further, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires key operation, only the clerk who has the key to operate the lock switch 21TM051 can operate the lock switch 21TM051 among the clerk of the game store. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation by a predetermined key, but the switching operation can be executed and an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation) is executed. It may be a possible switch.

The lock switch 21TM051 can maintain an ON state or an OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state even if no force is applied by the clerk of the amusement park or the like. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 has a configuration in which the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the clerk of the game hall must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key, so that the clerk of the game hall or the like leaves the lock switch 21TM051 in the ON state. It can be prevented from being lost.

As shown in FIG. 9-3, in the lower part on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming balls that have won the winning openings and the gaming balls that have entered the out openings are discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a launched game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. As shown in FIG. 2, the outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110 described above.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs and the like are included.

FIG. 9-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21TM037 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer, and has at least a built-in RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, RAM (not shown), ROM (not shown) containing the payout control program, the I / O port, and the like constitute the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by the payout control CPU 21TM371, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having RAM and ROM, and the I / O port. Further, the I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

The detection signals from the ball-out switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and then output to the main board 11 via the I / O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21TM037 has a gaming machine frame opening sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2, and can open and close the front surface of the gaming board 2. A pachinko / pachislot machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 equipped with a door frame opening sensor that detects the opening of the glass door frame 3a covering the pachinko / pachislot machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is connected. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that the payout control microcomputer is used. The 21TM370 can distinguish between the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

Further, the detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor consisting of a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect that the game ball is clogged, that is, so-called ball biting. .. In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037, the detection signal from the ball out switch 21TM187 indicates the ball out state, or the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank state. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is at a low level with respect to the launch board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball launch from the ball launcher. Outputs a full tank signal. The launch motor signal to the launch motor 21TM094 output by the AND circuit 21TM091 of the launch board 21TM090 is transmitted from the launch board 21TM090 to the launch motor 21TM094. The full tank signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the launch board 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the launch motor 21TM094). The signal, which serves to supply power from the power supply board), is input to the other side of the input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the launch motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the launch motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting the full tank signal, the output of the launch motor signal to the launch motor 21TM094 is stopped.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 includes a serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) a signal by serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are connected to each other via the serial communication circuit 21TM505 and 21TM380 between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. In order to confirm, signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted / received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal for confirming the connection (a prize ball request signal in this embodiment) at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When receiving the prize ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100, transmits a signal (received ACK signal) notifying the fact to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, by superimposing specific data on the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are performed at the timing of transmitting and receiving the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal. It is configured to exchange specific data with and from. For example, when a prize is won, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by differently setting a predetermined bit of the prize ball request signal, and the prize for which the setting is made. The ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes the prize ball payout operation, the data indicating the end of the prize ball is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the received ACK signal with the setting is played. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100. In addition, when a predetermined error (error such as ball lending, full tank, out of ball, etc.) occurs, the data indicating the content of the error is set by changing the predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is set. The received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Specific signal exchanges by serial communication between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 will be described in detail in FIGS. 9-22 and 9-34 to 36.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls paid out and a ball rental number signal indicating the number of balls to be rented to a terminal board (external terminal board for frame and external terminal board for board) via the output port 21TM372b. (Including and) Output to 21TM160. A driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, but the description is omitted in FIG. 9-2.

Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 by the 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Further, a signal for instructing lighting / extinguishing is output to the prize ball LED 21TM053 and the ball out LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. A detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for canceling the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

Further, the drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. A driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, but the description is omitted in FIG. 9-3.

A microcomputer for controlling the card unit is mounted on the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connecting stand direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp, and a card insertion slot. The frequency display LED 21TM060, the ball lending LED 21TM061, the ball lending switch 21TM062, and the return switch 21TM063 are connected to the interface board (relay board) 21TM066.

From the interface board 21TM066 to the card unit 21TM050, a ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are given to the card unit 21TM050. .. Further, the card unit 21TM050 gives the interface board 21TM066 a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lending availability display signal. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal), and a pachinko machine operation signal ( The PRDY signal) is transmitted and received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9-2, signals such as the connection signal (VL signal) are transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066.

When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. Further, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connected / unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 based on the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit control microcomputer outputs the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the XS signal for the card unit 21TM050, and when it detects the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, it drives the payout motor 21TM289 and sends a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. Pay out. Then, when the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 shuts down the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. After that, on condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the ON state, the prize ball payout control is executed when the payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100.

The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in the AC24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. Is prevented.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage is.

9-4 (A) to 9-4 (F) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In each display result judgment table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value for a big hit is set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. If it is, the jackpot will be won with a lower probability (1/300) than when the set values are "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". ing. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in some cases. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than when it is "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (D), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 4 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than when the numbers are "2" and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235) than in the case of "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/235) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to any of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to 9-4 (F). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the winning of the big hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to 9-4 (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design.

Further, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to 9-4 to determine whether or not to make a big hit, but the big hit determination table is used. The jackpot is determined separately by using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. May be good.

In the present embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The set value that can be set in may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

Here, the totalization of the game balls and the display of the accessory ratio and the like on the main board 11 of this embodiment will be described.

On the main board 11, information regarding the winning of the game, for example, the number of prize balls by winning the first starting winning opening (Heso), the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), and the large winning opening The number of prize balls by winning the (attacker) and the total number of prize balls are input, the number of launched balls is totaled, and the display monitor 21TM029 shows the number of prize balls by winning the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The ratio (%), which is the ratio of the total number of prize balls, is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker). A certain role ratio (%) and the base (%), which is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched, are displayed. The ream ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls (the number of consecutive winning balls below) by winning a prize in the large winning opening (attacker). The role ratio is the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls (the number of winning balls below). Is the ratio. The base is the ratio of the number of game balls launched to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls (total number of balls won below) is the number of prize balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker), the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu), and the big winning opening. It is the sum of the number of prize balls due to winning in the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew). The large winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are variable accessories, and as the passable width of the game ball fluctuates, the expected winning ratio of the game ball fluctuates. is there. In addition, the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the large winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are fixed accessories, and the passable width of the game ball is fixed. The expected winning percentage of game balls is a certain amount.

As for the aggregation and calculation method of the information on the prizes of the game, the consecutive ratio and the role ratio are the prize balls by winning the first starting prize opening (Heso) and the general winning opening (Sode) in the number of prize balls of 6000. Number (number of general prize balls), number of ordinary electric prize balls (number of electric chew prize balls), which is the number of prize balls by winning the second starting prize opening (electric chew), by winning a prize in the large prize opening (attacker) The number of special electric prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls), which is the number of prize balls, is totaled. The total is taken as one set, and the continuous ratio (%) and the combination ratio (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60,000 pieces are calculated. In addition, the number of prize balls (general prize balls), the number of ordinary electric role prize balls (the number of electric chew prize balls), and the special electric power The number of prize balls (number of attacker prize balls) is recorded in a ring buffer provided for each set value, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated for each set. ing. That is, a considerable amount (for example, several bytes) of 6000 pieces of 11 sets are stored, and the cumulative ratio (%) and combination ratio (%) of them can be calculated. As for the base, the number of game balls launched for the number of prize balls of 60,000 is totaled. The total is set as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60,000 prize balls to the number of launched game balls is calculated.

The display monitor 21TM029 is based on a base calculated based on 6000 consecutive ratios (%), combination ratios (%), cumulative consecutive ratios (%), combination ratios (%), and the previous 60000 prize balls ( The base 1 (%)) and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60,000 prize balls can be switched and displayed at predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). That is, six displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to display all, but the number of prize balls by winning the first start winning opening (navel) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are counted as the game progresses. The number of prize balls due to winning and the number of prize balls due to winning the big winning opening (attacker) will change. Then, for example, if the number of prize balls won after displaying the continuous ratio (%) of 6000 pieces is reflected in the winning ratio (%) of 60,000 pieces displayed thereafter, it is equivalent to 6000 pieces. There is a risk that there will be a discrepancy between the ream ratio (%) and the combination ratio (%) for 60,000 pieces. Therefore, the number of prize balls by winning the first start winning opening (Heso), the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu), the number of prize balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker), the prize balls Such a discrepancy can be prevented by inputting the total number and performing the aggregation at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, the display timing of the continuous ratio (%) of 6000 pieces).

A storage area for storing information regarding the winning of the game in this embodiment is provided for each set value, and is provided for each set value, such as a general winning ball, a first starting winning opening prize ball, an ordinary electric role prize ball, and a special electric role. The prize balls, the total prize balls, and the total hits are stored in the storage area (ring buffer) according to the set value. Therefore, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base of this embodiment can be calculated individually for each set value.

As an example of the calculation method below, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the large winning opening (attacker) A method of calculating the bonus ratio (role ratio (%)) when the total number of winning balls is 42,000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls means the total total number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the number of balls acquired as a character means the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning a prize in the attacker and the electric chew. In addition, the number of consecutive winning balls is the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning a prize in the game medium to the attacker. The total number of hits is the cumulative number of game media that have been hit into the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the number of prize balls reaches 60,000. Therefore, the connection ratio can be obtained by the following equation (1). Further, the combination ratio can be obtained by the following equation (2). The base can be obtained by the following equation (3).

Ream ratio = [Number of consecutive characters acquired / Total number of acquired characters] x 100 ... (1)

Role ratio = [(Number of consecutive winning balls + Number of winning balls) / Total number of acquisitions] x 100 ... (2)

Base = [60,000 (total number of prize balls) / total number of hits] x 100 ... (3)

When the total number of prize balls is 60,000 and the number of winning balls is 42,000, the prize ratio is calculated as 0.70 (rounded down to the nearest three digits) by dividing 42000 by 60,000. However, since the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot perform the calculation after the decimal point, the calculation by the following method is required.

First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of winning balls is multiplied by 100 to obtain 4200000. Then, this 4200000 is divided by 60,000. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 70%. That is, by multiplying the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when obtaining the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, it may be multiplied by 1000.

Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then divide 42000 by this 600. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when obtaining the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, division may be performed by 1000.

In the above example, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, but a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate the accessory ratio for a long period of time. That is, in this example, it is stored as 00EA60h in the storage area of 3 bytes. Similarly, 00A410h is stored in the storage area of 3 bytes for the number of winning balls.

Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform calculations between values of up to 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

Here, a third calculation method obtained by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, the lower 1 byte 60h is rounded down to the total number of prize balls of 00EA60h so that the calculation by the microcomputer used for the pachinko game machine 1 becomes easy, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, Calculate 234 in decimal notation. Similarly, the lower 1-byte 10h is rounded down to the number of winning balls of 00A410h, and the number of winning balls of bonus is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation.

Then, in the same manner as in the second calculation method, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 (273/100) to calculate 2. Then, by dividing 156 by this 2, 78 is obtained as a quotient. From 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 78%.

In the third calculation method, the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes easy, but an error of + 12% occurs. However, if the total number of prize balls and the number of winning balls are both 10 times, the error will be + 1%. That is, the error is reduced by lengthening the period for calculating the accessory ratio, and is approximated to the original value.

Further, the substrate case 21TM201 is made of a translucent material so that the main substrate 11 and the display monitor 21TM029 can be visually recognized. The board case 21TM201 is formed with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat dissipation hole for releasing heat of an electric component of the main board 11. The display monitor 21TM029 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat dissipation hole is not directly in front of the main board 11. Therefore, the heat dissipation holes do not block the visibility of the display monitor 21TM029. The "direct front" here means a direct front with the main board 11 as a viewpoint, and means between an employee or the like who wants to visually recognize the main board 11 and the main board 11.
Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform calculations between values of up to 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

Here, a third calculation method obtained by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, the lower 1 byte 60h is rounded down to the total number of prize balls of 00EA60h so that the calculation by the microcomputer used for the pachinko game machine 1 becomes easy, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, Calculate 234 in decimal notation. Similarly, the lower 1-byte 10h is rounded down to the number of winning balls of 00A410h, and the number of winning balls of bonus is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation.

Then, in the same manner as in the second calculation method, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 (273/100) to calculate 2. Then, by dividing 156 by this 2, 78 is obtained as a quotient. From 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 78%.

In addition, a storage area in which information related to winning a game is stored (ring buffer, 10 sets total buffer (total information related to winning a game stored in a ring buffer having 10 counters having a maximum of 2 bytes), a prize ball. The total number buffer) is not initialized when the reset button is operated, and may be continuously stored. The ring buffer will be described further later. In addition, the checksum of the stored value is calculated, and if an abnormality is detected, it is initialized, or the value of the number of winning balls is larger than the value of the total number of stored prize balls, or the character is Initialization of the storage area where information related to winning a game is stored when an event that cannot occur in a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of consecutive winning balls is larger than the value of the number of acquired balls. Processing may be performed. Further, an error display, a warning display, or the like may be performed without performing the initialization process, an error display or a warning display may be performed, or an initialization process may be performed after the error display or the warning display is performed. The error display and warning display will be described further later.

In the calculation of the winning combination (%), for example, assuming that the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of winning balls is 19876, 34321 is divided as a divisor from 19876 to calculate the ratio. 1976/34321 = 0.57912 ..., And it is calculated that the role ratio (%) is about 57.9%. When performing calculations on the game control microcomputer 100, it is necessary to avoid calculation with a decimal point, so the calculation formula is replaced with the following formula. In the division of 1976/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100, the decimal point is rounded down, and 1976/343 = 57.9475 ... Since the part after the decimal point is rounded down, it is calculated that the role ratio (%) is 57%, and it is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. In this example, the value calculated by accurate calculation is an error on the display. Will be missing.

The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (0 except for the value of the most significant bit), and the value with the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of accessory acquired balls are 32799, respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when it is replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327 = 100.3%, which is an error of + 0.3%. When the calculation is performed with the decimal point rounded down, for example, when the accurate value is 69.9% and the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, the display value is 69% → 70%. It is conceivable that an error of% is displayed, but even on the display of an error of 1%, the combination ratio (%) (or the connection ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error.

Further, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100, so that the calculation cannot be performed when the total number of acquired balls is less than 100. Further, when it is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. If it is less than 10,000, the error may exceed 1%, resulting in a larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of acquired balls, the larger the error. Therefore, the combination ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) may not be displayed on the display monitor until the total number of acquired balls (for example, 32768, which is the minimum value of 16 bits) of a specific number or more is totaled by the counter. , Even if the display is performed, it may be notified that the error may be large by emitting a dedicated LED, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

Further, the display monitor 21TM029 displays the combination ratio (%), the continuous ratio (%), and the base (%) on 7 segments, and switches each value every predetermined period (for example, every 5 seconds). To display. In this case, for example, while the combination ratio (%) is displayed for 5 seconds, an event occurs in which a new game medium is awarded to the electric chew or the attacker, and the value calculated accordingly is continuously compared after 5 seconds ( If it is displayed as a value of%), there is a risk that the value of the combination ratio (%) and the value of the consecutive combination (%) will deviate from each other. Therefore, it is preferable that the combination ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are calculated in the same interrupt and the calculated values are sequentially displayed.

Further, when the numerical value that can be displayed in the 7-segment is double-digit (for example, when two 7-segments are provided), 100% is set as 100 and the display cannot be performed. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. The display monitor 21TM029 shown in FIG. 9-5 (A) can display a numerical value in the lower two digits, but even in this case, the numerical value may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, under certain conditions, a numerical value may be displayed in a part of the upper two digits.

In this embodiment, the sensors provided for each of the attacker and the electric chew detect that the game medium has won a prize, and the number of each prize ball is individually totaled based on the detection result. The present invention is not limited to this, and the detection result is obtained by using a sensor provided after the discharge passage for discharging the game medium winning the attacker and the game medium winning the electric chew merges. Based on this, the number of balls acquired as a bonus and the number of balls acquired as a continuous bonus may be totaled.

Hereinafter, the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the display of the base will be described more specifically. In this embodiment, the main board 11 is provided on the back surface side of the game board 2 (see FIG. 9-3). On the back surface side of the game board 2, in addition to the main board 11, each peripheral board such as the effect control board 12 is also provided.

The RAM 102 in the main board 11 includes a gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, a third general winning number counter, and a fourth. A general prize counter and a large prize counter are provided. In this embodiment, a form in which the number of winnings of the large winning opening (attacker) is totaled by the large winning number counter is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these first large winnings are obtained. The number of prizes in the 1st prize opening is provided by separately providing the 1st prize counter that totals the number of prizes in the mouth and the 2nd prize counter that counts the number of prizes in the 2nd prize. And the number of winnings to the second major winning opening may be totaled individually, and the total number of each of these winnings may be used as the number of winnings to the attacker.

The gate passing number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start port switch 22A. The second start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 22B. The first general winning number counter to the fourth general winning number counter are counters for counting the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch to the fourth general winning opening switch. The large prize number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.

A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is connected to the power supply board shown in FIG. 9-3. The clear switch 21TM052 is arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 at a position where employees and the like cannot easily operate it. By operating the clear switch 21TM052, the data used for the connection ratio and the combination ratio stored in the RAM 102, which will be described later, is cleared. The clear switch is 21TM052, which is a switch that is operated when a failure occurs in the calculation of the connection ratio or the combination ratio, or when the calculation of the connection ratio or the combination ratio has to be redone. Therefore, it is a switch that does not need to be operated when collecting data for calculating a normal connection ratio or combination ratio. Further, when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated, the clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 11 in addition to clearing the data.

As described above, the main board 11 is provided with the RTC 106, and the RTC 106 can detect the current time. The RTC 106 can measure a predetermined time, an elapsed time, and the like by making initial settings, but in the present embodiment, the RTC 106 can measure the business hours of the amusement park.

As shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), the main substrate 11 is housed in the substrate case 21TM201. A caulking pin 21TM011B is attached to the board case 21TM201. By providing the caulking pin 21TM011B, the main board 11 is completely enclosed in the board case 21TM201, and fraudulent acts on the main board 11 are prevented. The substrate case 21TM201 is a crimped substrate case (hereinafter, also referred to as a “crimped substrate case”).

Further, the display monitor 21TM029 is provided on the main board 11. Further, a sealing sticker 21TM011S is attached to the substrate case 21TM201 to prove that the main substrate 11 is enclosed. The sealing sticker 21TM011S is attached, for example, across the removed portion of the substrate case 21TM201. The sealing sticker 21TM011S is arranged at a position away from the main board 11, and is arranged at a position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 21TM029 is obstructed, such as directly in front of the display monitor 21TM029. As described above, the display monitor 21TM029 is arranged at a position not hidden by the sealing sticker 21TM011S.

The display monitor 21TM029 includes a first display unit 21TM029A, a second display unit 21TM029B, a third display unit 21TM029C, a fourth display unit 21TM029D, and a fifth display unit 21TM029E. The first display unit 21TM029A to the fifth display unit 21TM029E are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 21TM029A to the fifth display unit 21TM029E can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

The display monitor 21TM029 displays each item of display Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 9-5 (B). The first display unit 21TM029A of the first digit is notified of the aggregated setting values (1 to 6) and the completion of the RAM clear executed by the CPU 103 after the processing of the setting change mode (“C””. ) Is displayed, the aggregation period is displayed on the 2nd digit 2nd display unit 21TM029B and the 3rd digit 3rd display unit 21TM029C, and the 4th digit 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th digit 5th display unit are displayed. The numerical value is displayed as a percentage on 21TM029E. The display No. 1 displays the short-term continuous ratio, and the display No. 2 displays the short-term combination ratio. Display No. 3 displays the total cumulative ratio, and display No. 4 displays the total cumulative combination ratio. Further, in the display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls is displayed, and in the display No. 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60,000 prize balls is displayed. Will be done.

The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) was 6000. The period for obtaining the total cumulative total means the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset.

In the above example, the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the continuous ratio may be the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls due to winning a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening in the high base state and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening in the big hit game state to the total number of prize balls. May be good. Further, the base may be calculated individually for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, "y6." Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the second display unit is displayed. "Y7." Is displayed on the display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. If so, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, "A7." Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E, and the total cumulative combination of display No4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, "bL." Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit is displayed. "B6." Is displayed on the 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E.

The main board 11 enters the fourth general winning opening from the large winning opening (attacker), the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening in calculating the joint ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. The number of game balls that have entered and the number of game balls that have been discharged from the outlet are totaled. In the main processing, the CPU 103 includes a gate switch 21, a first start port switch 22A, a second start port switch 22B, a count switch 23, and a first general winning opening switch to a fourth general winning opening switch, and an outlet switch 21TM070. Switch processing is performed to check the status of each switch (presence / absence of detection signal).

In this switch processing, it is specified which approach area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. Then, when the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passing number counter is added, and when the detection signal is output from the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the detection signal is output. The values of the first start winning number counter and the second starting winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 23, the value of the large winning number counter is added, and the first general winning opening switch, When the detection signal is output from the 2nd general winning opening switch, the 3rd general winning opening switch, and the 4th general winning opening switch, the 1st general winning number counter, the 2nd general winning number counter, and the 3rd general winning number counter. When the values of the counter and the 4th general winning number counter are added and the detection signal is output from the outlet switch 21TM070, the value of the driving number counter is added to enter the game ball into each approach area. The number (the number of game balls won in each winning opening) is totaled. The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102.

In this way, the step for totaling the number of game balls entering each approach area is executed together in a series of processes for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each approach area (switch state confirmation process). By including it in the switch processing), the number of game balls entering each entry area can be counted without executing a separate counting program, that is, without causing the problem of capacity shortage due to the increase in the number of execution programs. It has become.

The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of winning balls by winning each winning opening based on the total number of winning balls to each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning opening. Let me. The number of prize balls for winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out by one prize for the winning opening by the number of winnings for the winning opening. The number of prize balls for winning a game ball is predetermined for each winning opening.

As shown in Fig. 9-6, the number of prize balls for each winning opening classified here is the prize balls by winning the general winning opening (1st general winning opening to 4th general winning opening (sode)). ), 1st start winning prize ball (prize ball by winning the 1st starting winning opening (heso)), ordinary electric prize ball (prize ball by winning the electric chew), special electric prize ball (to attacker) The number of prize balls (prize balls by winning a prize). The RAM 102 also stores the total number of prize balls and the number of game balls hit. In the CPU 103, the number of game balls won in the general winning opening and the number of game balls won in the first start winning opening are individually totaled, but the number of winning balls in the general winning opening and the first start are calculated individually. The number of game ball winnings to the winning opening may be aggregated. In addition, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the number of prize balls of the first starting winning opening prize ball are calculated separately, but the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the first starting winning opening The number of prize balls may be calculated together with the number of prize balls.

The RAM 102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of prize balls and the number of shots. The ring buffer includes ten first storage areas to tenth storage areas including a counter of a maximum of 2 bytes for storing the number of prize balls by winning a prize in each winning opening for each number of 6000 prize balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). Further, the active buffer includes a 0th storage area including a counter of up to 2 bytes for storing the number of prize balls by winning a prize in each winning opening for each number of 6000 prize balls. The number of prize balls for each winning opening, which increases as the game progresses, is added to the 0th storage area. The 11 storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin.

Further, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area of the total number of prize balls (for 10 sets) and the number of hits stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area and the total cumulative total for each winning opening. There is. The total storage area for 10 sets and the total storage area are composed of a counter of up to 3 bytes. Therefore, 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60,000 data can be stored with a margin. I can remember.

Further, in the RAM 102, a continuous ratio combination storage area for storing 10 sets and the total cumulative combination ratio and the connection ratio, a base for 10 sets (base 2), and a base for the previous 10 sets (base 1). It has a base storage area for storing. In the CPU 103 of the main board 11, the winning ratios and consecutive ratios of 10 sets and the total cumulative total are calculated based on the number of prize balls based on the number of winning games to each winning opening for 10 sets and the total cumulative total, and the 10 sets worth. And the total cumulative combination ratio and connection ratio are stored in the connection ratio combination storage area. The ratio-combination ratio storage area for storing the combination ratio and the combination ratio for 10 sets and the total cumulative total is composed of a counter of a maximum of 1 byte. The winning ratios and linkage ratios for 10 sets and the total cumulative total can be stored with a margin at a counter of up to 1 byte, for example, when storing them as integers.

Further, in the CPU 103 of the main board 11, the base for 10 sets is calculated based on the number of hits for the number of winnings of the game ball into each winning opening for 10 sets, and the base for 10 sets (base 2) and the previous time are calculated. The base (base 1) calculated by the number of hits for the number of winnings of the game ball into each winning opening for 10 sets of the above is stored in the base storage area. When the base 1 and the base 2 are stored as integers, for example, they can be stored with a margin by a counter having a maximum of 1 byte.

Here, the memory space of the CPU 103 of the main board 11 will be described. FIG. 9-7 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU in the main board. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing the above-mentioned built-in registers, ROM 101, RAM 102, and the like. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 9-7, the address / data signal line of the ROM 101 is a ROM area of the memory space (in this embodiment, 0000H to 2FFFH (H indicates a hexadecimal number; hereinafter, Of the same), 0000H to 2FBFH. 2FC0H to 2FFFH are assigned to the program management area), and the CPU 103 specifies this ROM area to read data from the ROM 101. Further, in this embodiment, the ROM area is divided into eight areas from the first area to the eighth area for management, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H.

Further, the address / data signal line of the built-in register is assigned to the register area (FE00H to FEBFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads data from the built-in register or goes to the register via this register area. Write the data of.

Further, the address / data signal line of the RAM 102 is assigned to the RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 specifies this RWM area to read data from the RAM 102 or to the RAM 102. Write data. The other areas of the memory space (3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH in this embodiment) are regarded as unused areas.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-8, the RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 (16 Kbyte area of 0000H to 2FFFH in this embodiment) is a RAM control area, an unused area, a RAM data area, and other areas. It is composed of. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area, instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operator) required for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction are used. Data for the configured control program (sometimes simply referred to as control program data) is temporarily stored, and reference data referred to by the above control program is stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area. (For example, the above-mentioned various lottery data) is temporarily stored.

Further, data used for displaying the connection ratio and the combination ratio is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area is provided with a storage area for storing the total number of prize balls for each winning opening and a storage area for the total cumulative total. The storage areas of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas include an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having 1st to 10th storage areas, and the number of winning balls for each winning opening (10 sets). A storage area for the sum of minutes) and a storage area for 10 sets of ratio combinations are provided. Data having different starting addresses of subroutines are stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area.

In the present embodiment, 1 byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and each of the above-mentioned data (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data) can be stored. , Management data) is data with a number of bytes exceeding 1 byte (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. doing.

Further, the main board 11 controls the display monitor 21TM029 to display the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. Here, the main board 11 controls to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 9-9 (A) is a time chart showing the display time of the items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 9-9 (A), when the display on the display monitor 21TM029 is started, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is first displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-1), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and "y" is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character "1." is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the display of display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-2), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and "y" is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the short-term combination ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the short-term combination ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character "3." is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the display of display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-3), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and "A" is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the total cumulative ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the total cumulative ratio is 58%, the character "5." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the display of display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-4), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and "A" is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character "6." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-5). The display of the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 1 of the display No. 5, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-5), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and the set value "1" is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. The characters are displayed, and the characters "L." are displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E display the base 1 calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character "0." is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-6). The display of the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 2 of the display No. 6, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-6), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and the set value "1" is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. The characters are displayed, and the characters "6." are displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E may be used.
The base 2 calculated based on the immediately preceding 60,000 prize balls is displayed. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character "2" is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

Then, when the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-1). The short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. After that, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 to the display of base 2 of display No. 6 are sequentially displayed every 5 seconds. Further, as for the display color, only the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is green, and the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 to the base 2 of the display No. 5 is red. In this way, the display monitor 21TM029 switches between the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 every 5 seconds for display.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 18A to 18B, the display of the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 is displayed by the display changeover switch 21TM030. Based on the operation of, the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 display when the set value is "1", and when the set value is "2" Short-term ream ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative rendezvous, total cumulative role ratio, display of base 1 and base 2, short-term ream ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative ream ratio, total cumulative total when the set value is "3" It is possible to sequentially change the display of the role ratio, base 1, and base 2. If the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "1", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to "2", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E are updated. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "2".

If the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "2", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to "3", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E are updated. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "3".

If the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "3", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to "4", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E are updated. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "4".

In addition, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "4", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to "5", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E are updated. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "5".

If the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "5", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to "6", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E are updated. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "6".

Then, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "6", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to "1", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E are updated. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "1".

In the display monitor 21TM029 of the present embodiment, a mode in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at each set value can be displayed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 21TM029 is not limited thereto. In, among these ratios, combination ratios, and bases, only one numerical value or only any two numerical values may be displayed.

Further, in this embodiment, a mode in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of prize balls given, is calculated and the combination ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 21TM029 may display the history of the number of prize balls given without calculating the joint ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. ..

Further, in this embodiment, on the display monitor 21TM029, only the short-term continuous ratio is displayed in red, and the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed in green. The present invention is not limited to this, and the short-term continuous ratio and the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio and the total cumulative combination ratio are displayed in the same color, and the base 1 and the base 2 are the short-term continuous ratio and the short-term. It may be displayed in the same color different from the combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, and the total cumulative combination ratio.

Further, in the main board 11, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the storage in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is updated. Further, the storage area of the total sum and the total total of 10 sets and the storage area of the continuous ratio combination storage area for storing the combination ratio and the connection ratio of the 10 sets and the total total are updated, respectively.

In the update in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer. Further, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area is "27", "81", "120", "36", "225", and "87", respectively. It is assumed that the numbers are "66", "117", "45", and "21". At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 100 million area to the 10th storage area is changed to "27", "81", and "", respectively. Update to 120, "36", "225", "87", "66", "117", "45", and "21". Further, the number of prize balls in the 0th storage area is set to "0", and the number of prize balls in the 10th storage area is erased.

When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area, the stored number of prize balls may be erased once and then a new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new number of prize balls may be stored by overwriting the stored number of prize balls.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. When the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. As shown in FIG. 9-11, when the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 executes a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, and then the game control main process after step S21TM1010. Start processing. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S21TM1010). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1020), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step S21TM1030). Next, weighting is performed until the effect control board 12 starts operation (step S21TM1040).

Then, the CPU 103 initializes the built-in device (initialization of the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), etc.) (step S21TM1050), and then performs the RAM 102. Set to the accessible state (step S21TM1060). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is This mode indicates the interrupt address.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-12, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM1110). If the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM1110; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM1310. When the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM1110; YES), the CPU 103 outputs a clear switch (setting changeover switch mounted on the power supply board) 21TM052 (clear signal) input via the input port. ) Is confirmed (step S21TM1120).

When the ON state is detected in the status check of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 shifts to the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed. .. That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The processing status is controlled to the setting change mode based on the setting change mode.

As the CPU 103 shifts to the setting change mode, the information output circuit 112 outputs a setting change corresponding signal and also outputs a security signal (step S21TM1130). As a result, the game machine, which is the output source of these signals, changes the settings based on the input of the setting change correspondence signal and the security signal in the external device such as the hall computer that manages the game information of each game machine. It is possible to identify that the mode is controlled by the mode or the setting confirmation mode described later. Therefore, in the display device included in the external device, it is possible to identifiable and notify the gaming machine (for example, the machine number) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command for designating that the setting change mode has been controlled as an effect control command for the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1140). The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode.

Then, the CPU 103 reads the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and displays it on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1150). Then, the operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is waited for (step S21TM1160), and the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 is waited for (step S21TM1180).

In the operation standby state of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the CPU 103 changes the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 each time the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM1160). (Step S21TM1170). For example, as will be described later, each time a setting change operation is received, the displayed setting value is incremented by 1, and after reaching 6, the display control is executed to return to 1.

Further, when the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 in the state of waiting for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (YES in step S21TM1180), the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is set. The setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed (step S21TM1190). That is, the set value is fixed by overwriting the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 with the displayed set value. Then, the fixed set value (set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1190).

In step S21TM1160, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated (without determining YES in step S21TM1160), the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (YES in step S21TM1180). If it is determined), the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 match, and as a result, the set value of the RAM 102 is stored. The setting value stored in the area is not changed.

When the process of step S21TM1200 is executed, the setting change mode ends, and the CPU 103 shifts to the initialization process of step S21TM1410 shown in FIG. 9-13 described later.

When the OFF state is detected in the status confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 in step S21TM1120 described above (NO in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 is set so that the set value can be confirmed. Move to confirmation mode. That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, but does not satisfy the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Based on this, the processing status is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

As the CPU 103 shifts to the setting confirmation mode, the information output circuit 112 outputs a setting change corresponding signal and also outputs a security signal (step S21TM1210). As a result, the game machine, which is the output source of these signals, changes the settings based on the input of the setting change correspondence signal and the security signal in the external device such as the hall computer that manages the game information of each game machine. It is possible to identify that the mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, in the display device included in the external device, it is possible to identifiable and notify the gaming machine (for example, the machine number) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command for designating the control to the setting confirmation mode as an effect control command for the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1220). The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

Then, the CPU 103 reads the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and displays it on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1230). Then, the lock switch 21TM051 is put on standby for an OFF operation (step S21TM1240).

Further, when the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 in the state of waiting for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (YES in step S21TM1240), the setting confirmation mode is terminated, and the CPU 103 is described in FIG. 9- The process proceeds to the process of determining whether or not the power failure detection process has been executed in step S21TM1320 shown in 13.

When it is determined in step S21TM1110 described above that the lock switch is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM1110), the CPU 103 is a clear switch input via the input port as shown in FIG. 9-13. (Setting changeover switch mounted on the power supply board) The state of the output signal (clear signal) of 21TM052 is confirmed (step S21TM1310).

In the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, if it is not in the ON state (NO in step S21TM1310), the CPU 103 executes the power failure detection process (see FIG. 9-14). Whether or not the check data is stored in the predetermined backup area is determined (step S21TM1320).

In this example, as a case where the process of step S21TM1320 is executed, the setting is changed based on (1) that the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also OFF when the power is turned on. When the process of step S21TM1320 is executed immediately without shifting to either the mode or the setting confirmation mode, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF when the power is turned on. There is a case where the process shifts to the setting confirmation mode and the process of step S21TM1320 is executed after the end of the setting confirmation mode.

When the backup data is stored, the CPU 103 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S21TM1330). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S21TM1330, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and saved by the same process in the power failure detection process. If the data is restored after the power supply is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process executed when the power is turned on, which is not the time when the power supply is stopped, is executed (NO in step S21TM1330). It is determined and the process proceeds to step S21TM1410).

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM1330), the CPU 103 performs a game state recovery process (processes of step S21TM1340 and step S21TM1350) for returning the game control microcomputer 100 to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (step S21TM1340), the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 102), and step S21TM1360. (Step S21TM1350). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing of step S21TM1340 and step S21TM1350, the saved contents remain as they are for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, hold storage, restricting member state specification flag, initialized flag, etc.), output. The area where the output status of the port is saved (output port buffer), the part where the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set, and so on. The setting value storage area (the area where the fixed setting value is stored) is also included in the part that should not be initialized. In addition, an area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is stored for each set value is also included in the portion that should not be initialized.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1360). In the game control timer interrupt process described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command at the time of restoration) as a command at the time of power supply restoration (step S21TM1370). Based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of restoration), the effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the restoration from the power failure has been performed based on the data at the time of power supply stop. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, the effect device recovers from the power failure based on the data when the power supply is stopped. It is possible to notify that. Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting command transmission process of step S21TM1470.

In step S21TM1310, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is on (step S21TM1310; YES), or when backup data is not stored in step S21TM1320 (step S21TM1320; NO), in step S21TM1330. If the result of the parity check is not normal (step S21TM1330; NO), the initialization process is executed (step S21TM1410).

In this example, as a case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. When the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed immediately without shifting to either the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 Is also OFF, and on condition that NO is determined in either step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330, the initialization of step S21TM1410 is immediately performed without shifting to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Based on the case where the process is executed and (3) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also ON when the power is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode and the setting is changed. The setting is based on the case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed after the end of the mode and (4) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF when the power is turned on. There is a case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed on condition that the mode shifts to the confirmation mode and NO is determined in either step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330 after the setting confirmation mode is completed.

In the initialization process, the CPU 103 first performs a RAM clear process (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear processing, the data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, hold storage, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the initial value is obtained. Is set, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear process. In addition, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated value for each set value is not cleared. The value does not change before the RAM clearing process. Then, by displaying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029 or the like, it is notified that the game state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). By the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) is initialized to 0, but is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. It may be initialized to. Further, the entire area of the RAM 102 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set in the pointer (step S21TM1430), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S21TM1440).

Further, by the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. are selectively processed according to the control state. The initial value is set in the flag.

In this embodiment, a mode of shifting to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode on the condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Further, the setting change mode, provided that the gaming machine frame 3 is open (the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 has detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state). It may be possible to shift to the setting confirmation mode.

After executing step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the game control timer interrupt process described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command that specifies that the initialization process has been performed when the power is turned on (or at the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode) (step S21TM1460). The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the initialization process has been performed based on the reception of this initialization command. Upon receiving the initialization command, the effect control CPU 120 may notify that the game state and the like have been initialized in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. It is possible. Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting command transmission process of step S21TM1470.

The CPU 103 transmits a setting command for specifying the setting value read in step S21TM1360 or step S21TM1450 to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM1470). The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value.

Then, the CPU 103 executes the setting process of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037 (see FIGS. 9-19 and 9-21). Further, the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are set in a state in which communication can be executed.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). The CPU 103 makes settings for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, for example, by executing the process according to the random number circuit setting program.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every 2 ms.

Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S21TM1520) and the initial value random number update process (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt prohibition state is set (step S21TM1510), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enable state is set. Set (step S21TM1540). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when it is not a big hit, and is for display. The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number for display. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number determines the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter). It is a random number to do. Game control processing that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also called the game device control process), the count value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number is one lap (normal symbol hit judgment random number taking). The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, when the setting change mode is controlled, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command (step S21TM1140) and then a power-on initialization command. (Step S21TM1460), the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM1470). When controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM1220), and then transmits a backup command at power-off recovery or an initialization command at power-on (step S21TM1370 or step). S21TM1460), the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM1470). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting change mode based on the reception of the initialization command after receiving the setting change mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect. It is possible to notify the end of the setting change mode by an effect device such as a lamp 9. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the backup command or the initialization command after receiving the setting confirmation mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, and 8R can be specified. , It is possible to notify the end of the setting confirmation mode by an effect device such as the game effect lamp 9.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 9-14. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9-14 is started, the CPU 103 first executes the power failure detection process (step S21TM1610). Then, it is determined whether or not a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615), and on condition that no game stop error has occurred (NO in step S21TM1615), a predetermined switch process is executed to switch. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the discharge port switch 21TM070 is determined via the circuit 110 (step S21TM1620). On the other hand, if a game stop error has occurred (YES in step S21TM1615), the switch process in step S21TM1620 is not executed, and as a result, the game is stopped.

For example, the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, and an abnormality is detected by a magnetic sensor (not shown). The level of magnetism to be determined is detected, the level of vibration determined to be abnormal by the vibration sensor (not shown) is detected, and the level and frequency band determined to be abnormal by the radio wave sensor (not shown). Based on the detection of radio waves, it is determined that a game stop error has occurred.

Subsequently, when the game ball wins in any of the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the large winning opening, and the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, that is, the first starting opening switch 22A. , 2nd start port switch 22B, count switch 23, 1st general winning opening switch to 4th general winning opening switch When a detection signal is input, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning by each detection signal The prize ball processing (step S21TM1630) for setting and the like is executed.

Next, the CPU 103 displays and monitors the winning information processing (step S21TM1640) for calculating the winning information such as the winning combination, the continuous ratio, and the base, and the winning information such as the winning combination, the continuous ratio, and the base calculated by the winning information processing. The winning information display control process (step S21TM1650) to be displayed on 21TM029 is performed. After that, by executing the predetermined main side error processing (step S21TM1660), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed with an abnormality, and a warning can be executed if necessary according to the diagnosis result. In step S21TM1660, an abnormality (game stop error) is detected by the various sensors described in the description of step S1615, and if an abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection flag is set and a step in the next timer interrupt is performed. The game may be stopped (switch processing is not executed) in S21TM1615. After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability fluctuation information, and payout information supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output. (Step S21TM1670).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number value MR1 and the random number values MR1 to MR4 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S21TM1680). ). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S21TM1690). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display are displayed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation in the device 4B and set the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 according to a predetermined procedure.

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S21TM1700). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off of the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process processing, and changes the display of the normal symbol and the movable wings in the variable winning ball device 6B. It enables the tilting motion setting of one side.

After executing the normal symbol process process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S21TM1710). As an example of these, in the command control process, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, the effect is produced in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the control board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. It is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table by turning it off after that. After executing the command control process, the interrupt enable state is set, and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

In the command control process of step S21TM1710, a command for notifying the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is transmitted, or a command for notifying that the fluctuation pattern or the fluctuation display is completed is completed. The set value may be periodically notified to the effect control board 12 by including the information of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the existing command such as the above and transmitting the command. Further, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) receives these commands from the main board 11 to execute an effect suggesting a set value at various timings such as during variable display or during a big hit game. You may.

As shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the RAM clear (step S21TM1410) is always executed when the setting change mode is controlled. This is because, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the range of random numbers determined to be big hits differs depending on the set value. For example, an event in which the big hit judgment random number extracted at the time of starting prize before the setting change is judged to be a big hit in relation to the setting value before the change, but is judged to be out of order in relation to the setting value after the change. On the contrary, although it is determined to be out of order in relation to the set value before the change, an event may occur in which it is determined to be a big hit in relation to the set value after the change. In such a case, the game after the setting change is continued based on the big hit judgment random number extracted at the time of the start winning before the setting change (the game control timer interrupt processing including the special symbol process process is executed). Since this is inappropriate, the hold memory (hold memory of special symbol, hold memory of normal symbol) is cleared by initializing the game state, and the number of hold memory is set to the initial value (0). There is.

Further, during the period controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, as a result of the interruption permission of step S21TM1540 being not performed, the switch processing (step S21TM1620) in the game control timer interrupt processing is not performed, and the start winning prize is given. Passing through the gate is invalid. This is because the random number circuit setting process (step S21TM1490) and the like have not yet been executed during the period controlled by the setting change mode, and the random numbers have not been updated. If a random number is extracted based on the start winning prize during the period controlled by the setting change mode, the same random number value will be obtained regardless of the start winning timing, and the game will be played based on such a random number value. Since it is inappropriate to proceed, the start prize and gate passage are invalidated.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the processing related to the setting change mode (steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200 of the main process) and the RAM clear (steps S21TM1410 to S21TM1420 of the main process) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (A), when the power is turned off (power is turned off) by the operation of a clerk at the game hall or the like, the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, so that the display monitor is displayed. The display at 21TM029 ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (B), on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main process), a clerk at the amusement park or the like performs a clear switch (setting changeover switch). ) When the power is turned on while operating 21TM052 (in the case of Y in step S21TM1120 of the main process), the processing of steps S21TM1130 and S21TM1140 is executed by the CPU 103, and the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (this setting value). In the example, the setting value "1") is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and is stored in the setting information temporary storage area on the display monitor 21TM029 (more accurately, the first display unit 21TM029A). (In this example, the set value "1") is displayed (step S21TM1150).

In the state where the set value is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (C), the CPU 103 is a clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 by a clerk of the amusement park or the like. Every time an operation is detected, the numerical value (set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is sequentially updated and displayed (step S21TM1170). For example, every time the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value (set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is changed from 1 → 2 → 3 → Updates are displayed as 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → ... Here, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the setting value (setting value "1" in this example) itself stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed by the operation. When the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 described later is executed, the set value (set value "1" in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A. It is changed (overwritten) to the numerical value (in this example, the setting value "2" stored in the setting information temporary storage area).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (D), the CPU 103 enters the set value storage area of the RAM 102 based on the detection of the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 by the clerk of the amusement park or the like (YES in step S21TM1180). The stored setting value (setting value "1" in this example) is a numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, setting value "2" stored in the setting information temporary storage area). ) Is changed (overwritten), and the set value (set value “2” in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is determined (step S21TM1190). At this time, the CPU 103 blinks the first display unit 21TM029A to notify the clerk of the game hall that the new set value is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and that the control of the setting change mode is completed. (Notification of completion of setting) (step S21TM1200).

After the lock switch 21TM051 is once turned off, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting information temporary storage area). Neither the stored setting value "2") nor the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (setting value "2" in this example) is changed. If the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A can be changed even after the set value is fixed, it may be misunderstood that the set value can be changed even when the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF. Therefore, in the present embodiment, once the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is not changed.

Then, the setting change mode (step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) is terminated, and the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear process (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear process, the data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, hold storage, etc.) indicating the game state at the time of power failure stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the initial value is obtained. Is set to initialize the game state, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear process. If the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the hold storage is cleared. After the RAM clear processing is completed, the CPU 103 notifies the clerk of the amusement park that the RAM clear processing has been executed (RAM clear notification) by displaying "C" on the first display unit 21TM029A. (Step S21TM1420). As a result, the clerk of the amusement park or the like knows that the setting change mode is finished (the setting value is fixed) and the initialization process is executed. Then, by executing the processing after step S21TM1430, the game can be played, that is, the variable display result, the jackpot type, the lottery for determining the variable pattern, the payout of the prize ball, and the like can be executed.

In the setting change mode of the present embodiment, a mode in which the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is illustrated. The initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the setting change mode is not limited to the setting value, which is the most advantageous setting value for the player (“6” in this embodiment), or the most disadvantageous for the player. The set value (“1” in this embodiment) may be displayed.

Further, the CPU 103 is associated with the end of the setting change mode, and after the RAM clear notification, the display monitor 21TM029 has a set value (setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102) corresponding to the fixed ratio and the combination. Each aggregated value such as ratio and base may be displayed. Further, for each set value, each aggregated value such as the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base corresponding to each set value may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in order (ascending or descending order of the set value).

If the power is cut off without turning off the lock switch 21TM051 while being controlled to the setting change mode, the set value of the RAM 102 is due to the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off. The setting value stored in the storage area has not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is deleted.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the processing of the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 9-16 (A), when the power is turned off (power is turned off) by the operation of a clerk at the game hall or the like, the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, so that the display monitor is displayed. The display at 21TM029 ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-16 (B), the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main process). When the power is turned on (when N is set in step S21TM1120 of the main process), the processes of steps S21TM1210 and S21TM1220 are executed by the CPU 103, and the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (in this example, the set value). “1”) is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and is stored in the setting information temporary storage area on the display monitor 21TM029 (more accurately, the first display unit 21TM029A) (in this example, the setting value). The set value "1") is displayed (step S21TM1230).

Note that, unlike when the setting change mode is controlled, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated by a clerk at the amusement park, the first display unit is displayed. The numerical value displayed on 21TM029A (in this example, the setting value "1" stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is not updated and displayed. If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated by a clerk at the amusement park while being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (this example). Then, if the set value "1") stored in the setting information temporary storage area is updated and displayed, it may be misunderstood that the set value can be changed in the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting). The setting value "1") stored in the information temporary storage area is not updated and displayed.

Then, the CPU 103 ends the setting confirmation mode based on the detection of the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 by the clerk of the amusement park or the like (YES in step S21TM1240). By executing the process of step S21TM1320 or later, the game can be played, that is, the variable display result, the jackpot type, the lottery for determining the variable pattern, the payout of the prize ball, and the like can be executed. That is, when the process of the setting confirmation mode is executed, the CPU 103 does not execute the process related to RAM clear unless it is determined as NO in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330.

After the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, as described above, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting information). Neither the set value "1" stored in the temporary storage area nor the set value (set value "1" in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed.

As shown above, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also in the ON state. When the condition for controlling to the setting change mode is satisfied, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) is satisfied. ) When the condition for controlling the setting confirmation mode that the 21TM052 is in the OFF state is satisfied, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

In order to change or display the set value (to shift to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode), the clerk of the amusement park turns on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on. At this time, the setting change mode is set. In order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, an operation for further executing the initialization process (operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052) is performed, and in order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, the initialization process is executed. Do not perform the operation of. In this way, the pachinko / pachislot clerk can select whether to control the gaming machine in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on (or not to control any of them), and also perform the initialization process. It is also possible to select whether or not to execute it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the initialization process is not required to shift the gaming machine to the setting confirmation mode (RAM clear is not executed except when it is determined as NO in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Therefore, when the clerk of the game hall wants to check the set value while the player is playing a game, even if the power is turned off and then the power is turned on to shift to the setting confirmation mode, the game state remains. It is not initialized and does not disadvantage the player. On the amusement park side, it is possible to confirm the set value without any trouble by the setting confirmation mode.

Further, the CPU 103 has a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, a base, etc. corresponding to the set value (set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 when the setting confirmation mode ends. It is also possible to display each aggregated value of. Further, for each set value, each aggregated value such as the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base corresponding to each set value may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in order (ascending or descending order of the set value).

FIG. 9-17 shows the setting change mode by the effect devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, and game effect lamp 9) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. An example is shown in which notification of the transition to the setting confirmation mode is performed. FIG. 9-17 (1) shows an example of an image displayed on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode is controlled, and FIG. 9-17 (2) shows an image display when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Examples of images displayed on the device 5 are shown.

As shown in (A) of FIG. 9-17 (1), the activation of the effect control board 12 is not completed when the power is turned on (particularly before the weight waiting for the effect control board operation in step S21TM1040 is completed). Therefore, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is not emitting light.

Next, as shown in (B) of FIG. 9-17 (1), for effect control based on the reception of the setting change mode command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM1140 in the main process. The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode and notify that fact. For example, the image display device 5 displays the characters "settings are being changed" and outputs a voice (for example, a voice saying "settings are being changed") notifying the speaker 8L, 8R that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode. By causing the effect lamp 9 to emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white blinking mode), it is notified that the setting change mode has been started. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been shifted to the setting change mode, so that the setting can be changed. It becomes possible to clearly grasp that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in (B) of FIG. 9-17 (1), other display information (for example, effect symbol, small symbol, fourth symbol, right-handed display, etc.) on the image display device 5 is not displayed.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting change mode command, if the video signal cannot be supplied to the image display device 5 by the VDP (Video Display Processor) (that is, the display control unit 123). Until the image display device 5 can be controlled) until the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). , The image display device 5 does not perform the notification, but the voice notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. That is, a voice notifying that the setting change mode has been entered from the speakers 8L and 8R (for example, a voice saying "setting is being changed") is output, and the game effect lamp 9 is set to a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white blinking mode). By emitting light, it is notified that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode. After that, when the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, when the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5), the voice notification and the light emission notification are performed. In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the character "setting is being changed" is displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in (C) of FIG. 9-17 (1), based on the reception of the setting command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM1470 in the main process (or CPU103 in step S21TM1460). (Based on receiving the power-on initialization command transmitted from the effect control board 12), the effect control CPU 120 identifies that the game control microcomputer 100 has terminated the setting change mode. It is possible to notify that fact. For example, a voice that displays the characters "setting change completed" on the image display device 5 and notifies that the setting change mode has been output from the speakers 8L and 8R (for example, a voice saying "setting is being changed"). By stopping the output and stopping the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white blinking mode), the setting change mode is notified that the setting change mode has ended. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to notify that the setting change mode has ended, so that the setting change mode can be set. It becomes possible to clearly grasp that it has ended.

Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 9-17 (1), the CPU 103 executes the processing after step S21TM1480 of the main processing, and the game is ready to be played (the game control timer interrupt processing is performed). Along with (execution), the image display device 5 transmits an effect control command for displaying the demo screen, and the effect control CPU 120 that receives the command displays the demo screen on the image display device 5.

As shown in (A) of FIG. 9-17 (2), the activation of the effect control board 12 is not completed when the power is turned on (particularly before the weight waiting for the effect control board operation in step S21TM1040 is completed). Therefore, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is not emitting light.

Next, as shown in (B) of FIG. 9-17 (2), for effect control based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM1220 in the main process. The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode and notify that fact. For example, the image display device 5 displays the characters "settings are being confirmed" and outputs a voice (for example, a voice saying "settings are being confirmed") indicating that the speakers 8L and 8R have shifted to the setting confirmation mode. By causing the effect lamp 9 to emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white blinking mode), it is notified that the setting confirmation mode has been started. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been shifted to the setting confirmation mode, so that the setting confirmation can be performed. It becomes possible to clearly grasp that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in (B) of FIG. 9-17 (2), other display information (for example, effect symbol, small symbol, fourth symbol, right-handed display, etc.) on the image display device 5 is not displayed.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting confirmation mode command, if the video signal cannot be supplied to the image display device 5 by the VDP (Video Display Processor) (that is, the display control unit 123). Until the image display device 5 can be controlled (when the image display device 5 cannot be controlled) until the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). , The image display device 5 does not perform the notification, but the voice notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. That is, the speakers 8L and 8R output a voice notifying that the mode has been changed to the setting confirmation mode (for example, a voice saying "setting is being changed"), and the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white blinking mode). By emitting light, it is notified that the setting confirmation mode has been entered. After that, when the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, when the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5), the voice notification and the light emission notification are performed. In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the character "setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in (C) of FIG. 9-17 (2), based on the reception of the setting command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM1470 in the main process (or step S21TM1370 or step S21TM1370). The effect control CPU 120 is set by the game control microcomputer 100 based on the reception of the backup command at the time of power failure recovery or the initialization command at the time of power on, which is transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in S21TM1460). It is possible to specify that the confirmation mode has been completed and notify the fact. For example, a voice that displays the characters "setting confirmation completed" on the image display device 5 and notifies that the setting confirmation mode has been output from the speakers 8L and 8R (for example, a voice saying "setting is being confirmed"). By stopping the output and stopping the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white blinking mode), the setting confirmation mode is notified that the setting confirmation mode has ended. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to notify that the setting confirmation mode has ended, so that the setting confirmation mode can be set. It becomes possible to clearly grasp that it has ended.

Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 9-17 (2), the CPU 103 executes the processing after step S21TM1480 of the main processing, and the game is ready to be played (the game control timer interrupt processing is performed). Along with (execution), the image display device 5 transmits an effect control command for displaying the demo screen, and the effect control CPU 120 that receives the command displays the demo screen on the image display device 5.

The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value. 9-18 (1), (2), and (3) show an example of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 9-18 (1) shows an example in which the ending image in the "sunny" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen, and FIG. 9-18 (2) shows an example in which the ending screen in the "cloudy" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. For example, FIG. 9-18 (3) shows an example in which the ending image of the "rain" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. Further, FIG. 9-18 (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the set value specified by the setting command.

In step S21TM1470 of the main process, the CPU 103 transmits a setting command for specifying a set value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when the jackpot game state ends, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing the ending effect on the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120. By storing the set value specified by the received setting command in the RAM 102, the effect control CPU 120 can determine the mode of the ending effect based on the stored set value. For example, based on the effect control command transmitted when the jackpot game state ends, the image display device 5 stores the characters (“BONUS end” character) notifying that the jackpot game state has ended. It is possible to display the ending image of the mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rain mode) determined based on the set value.

In the table shown in FIG. 9-18 (4), the setting values specified by the setting command are "1, 2", "3, 4", and "5, 6". When the mode of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be the "sunny" mode shown in FIG. 9-18 (1), the mode is determined to be the "cloudy" mode shown in FIG. 9-18 (2), and FIG. When determining the "rain" mode shown in 18 (3), the determination value of is assigned.

When the set value specified by the received setting command is "1" or "2", the effect control CPU 120 suggests the setting of the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). Decided to execute the effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a medium ratio (for example, 40%), and medium. (For example, 40%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3). Further, when the set value specified by the received setting command is "3" or "4", the effect control CPU 120 has a low ratio (for example, 20%) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%). (For example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3). Further, when the set value specified by the received setting command is "5" or "6", the effect control CPU 120 has a high ratio (for example, 50%) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%). (For example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3).

In this way, by making the determination ratio of each mode of the setting suggestion effect different according to the set value, the player becomes interested in how the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the setting suggestion is performed. It is possible to improve the interest of the production. In this example, the player becomes interested in how the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends is executed, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the "sunny" mode. You will expect it to be done.

Next, the prize ball processing (step S21TM1630) in the main processing will be described. First, a payout control signal (connection confirmation signal) and a prize ball request signal (payout control command) transmitted and received between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 will be described.

FIG. 9-19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the control signal output from the game control microcomputer 100 to the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, a connection confirmation signal is transmitted and received as a control signal between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various controls related to payout control and the like. As shown in FIG. 9-19, the connection confirmation signal is output when the main board 11 starts up (when the game control microcomputer 100 starts the game control process), and the main board 11 is output to the payout control board 21TM037. Is a signal (connection confirmation signal of the main board 11) for notifying that has started. In addition, the connection confirmation signal indicates that the prize ball can be paid out. The connection confirmation signal is output via the I / O port 21TM057 and the output circuit 21TM067 of the game control microcomputer 100, and the payout control is performed via the input circuit 21TM373A and the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. It is input to the microcomputer 21TM370. Each connection confirmation signal is 1-bit data and is transmitted by one signal line. The connection confirmation signal can be output by setting an initial value in the bit corresponding to the connection confirmation signal of the output port 0 by the processing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440 executed when the power is turned on (specifically). Is output by the processing of step S21TM2080, but may be output at the timing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440).

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 incorporates a serial communication circuit 21TM380, similarly to the game control microcomputer 100. Further, various payout control commands are transmitted and received between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built in the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is the same as the configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built in the game control microcomputer 100.

FIG. 9-20 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of control commands transmitted and received between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, various control commands (prize ball request signals) are transmitted and received between the microcomputers of the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various controls related to payout control and the like.

As described above, the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal are composed of 8-bit data (binary 8-digit data), and are output as control commands indicating predetermined contents according to the set 8-bit data contents. Will be done.

The connection confirmation command is issued from the game control microcomputer 100 at regular intervals (1s) in order to confirm whether or not the connection state between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal. This is the control command to be sent. The content of the data of the connection confirmation command is "A0 (H)", that is, "1010000".

The connection OK command is a control command for notifying that the connection state between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a connection confirmation command. This is a control command that is transmitted as a response signal in response to the reception of. The content of the data of the connection OK command is "8x (H)", that is, "10000xxx". Here, if a prize ball error (an abnormal state in which the prize ball payout operation based on the winning or the ball lending operation based on the ball lending request cannot be performed normally) occurs, the first bit "x" Is set to "1". Further, when a full tank error occurs, "1" is set in "x" of the second bit. When a ball-out error occurs, "1" is set in the "x" of the third bit. When a door opening error occurs, "1" is set in "x" of the 4th bit. In this way, while confirming the connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the game control microcomputer causes a predetermined error to occur in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. You can notify 100.

The prize ball number command is a control command for notifying the number of game balls (0 to 14) for which a payout request is made, and is a control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100 based on the occurrence of a prize. .. The content of the data of the prize ball number command is "5x (H)", that is, "0101xxxxxx". In this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, three prize balls are paid out, and the game ball is played by the prize opening switch corresponding to the general prize opening 10. When detected, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a game ball is detected by the count switch 23, 14 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the prize ball number command "0100111" for notifying the number of prize balls is transmitted to the general prize opening 10. When a game ball is detected by the corresponding winning opening switch, the prize ball number command "01011010" for notifying the number of prize balls is transmitted, and when the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, the number of prize balls. The prize ball number command "01011110" for notifying 14 pieces is transmitted. The connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command are configured so that either of them is transmitted as a prize ball request signal. The prize ball number command is transmitted instead of the connection confirmation command at the timing when the connection confirmation command is transmitted based on the fact that the prize ball payout condition (occurrence of winning or the like) is satisfied. In this embodiment, as described above, the data corresponding to the number of prize balls is set in the upper 4 bits, but the upper 4 bits are shared and the data corresponding to the number of prize balls is set in the lower 4 bits. You may do so.

The prize ball end command is a control command indicating that the prize ball operation (prize ball payout operation) has ended, and is a control command transmitted by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the end of the prize ball operation. The content of the data of the prize ball end command is "50 (H)", that is, "01010000". The prize ball end command is transmitted in place of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is transmitted based on the end of the prize ball operation. In this embodiment, the prize ball end command is not configured to set data indicating error information. This is because the prize ball end command is sent only once when the prize ball operation ends, so even if the error information is not sent at that timing, the data indicating the error information is set and sent to the next connection OK command. Because it is possible to do so. In addition, data indicating error information may be set in the lower 4 bits of the prize ball end command.

The prize ball preparation command is a control command for notifying that a predetermined error has occurred and the prize ball operation has not ended, and a predetermined error occurs while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executing the prize ball operation. It is a control command to be sent based on what you have done. The content of the data of the connection OK command is "8x (H)", that is, "10000xxx". Here, when a prize ball error occurs, "1" is set in "x" of the first bit. Further, when a full tank error occurs, "1" is set in "x" of the second bit. When a ball-out error occurs, "1" is set in the "x" of the third bit. When a door opening error occurs, "1" is set in "x" of the 4th bit. In this way, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that a predetermined error has occurred during the execution of the prize ball operation and the prize ball operation has not been completed. At the same time, the content of the error can be notified to the game control microcomputer 100. Similar to the connection OK command, the prize ball preparing command notifies that a predetermined error has occurred by making the contents of the lower 4 bits different according to the error state (different predetermined bits). Further, the connection OK command, the prize ball preparing command, and the prize ball end command are configured so that any command is transmitted as a received ACK signal. The prize ball preparation command is a command (signal) that is output not only in a state in which an error occurs and the prize ball operation cannot be executed, but also in a state in which the prize ball operation is being executed.

The command for preparing the prize ball is sent in place of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is transmitted based on the fact that an error has occurred and the prize ball operation cannot be performed. is there.

FIG. 9-21 is a block diagram showing a control signal shown in FIG. 9-19, a signal line used for transmitting and receiving a control command shown in FIG. 9-20, and the like. As shown in FIG. 9-21, the connection confirmation signal is output by the game control microcomputer 100 via the output circuit 21TM067, and is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the input circuit 21TM373A. Further, the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command among the control commands are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built in the game control microcomputer 100 and input to the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. To. Among the control commands, the connection OK command, the prize ball end command, and the prize ball preparation command are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the game control microcomputer 100. It is input to 21TM505. Note that FIG. 9-21 shows two signal lines (a signal line for transmitting the prize ball request signal and a signal line for transmitting the received ACK signal) as signal lines for performing serial communication. However, in reality, the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal are transmitted and received by one signal line.

Next, transmission and reception of signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal; control command) between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation will be described. The prize ball request signal consists of a connection confirmation command and a prize ball count command, and the received ACK signal consists of a connection OK command, a prize ball end command, and a prize ball preparation command.

FIG. 9-22 is a sequence diagram showing the transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIG. 9-22, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the connection of the signal line with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not broken via the serial communication circuit 21TM505. , A connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal via the serial communication circuit 21TM380, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal 1 s (1 second) after the reception time. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-mentioned connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

Next, the operation of the payout control board 21TM037 will be described. FIG. 9-23 is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the main process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 first performs necessary initial settings. That is, the payout control CPU 21TM371 is first set to prohibit interrupts (step S21TM1810). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1820), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step S21TM1830). Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets the built-in device register (step S21TM1840), sets the CTC and PIO (step S21TM1850), and then sets the RAM in an accessible state (step S21TM1860). Further, 0000 (H) is set as the initial value of the prize ball unpaid number counter (step S21TM1870).

In this embodiment, one channel of the built-in CTC is used in timer mode. Therefore, in the internal device register setting process of step S21TM1840 and the process of step S21TM1850, a register setting for setting the channel to be used in the timer mode, a register setting for permitting interrupt generation, and an interrupt vector are set. Register is set. Then, the interrupt by the channel is used as a timer interrupt. When it is desired to generate a timer interrupt every 2 ms, for example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value.

The interrupt vector set in the channel set in the timer mode (channel 3 in this embodiment) corresponds to the start address of the timer interrupt process. Specifically, the start address of the timer interrupt process is specified by the value set in the I register and the interrupt vector. The timer interrupt process includes a payout control process that controls the payout means (at least a process of driving the payout motor 21TM289 in response to a command signal regarding prize ball payout from the main board, and drives the payout motor 21TM289 in response to a ball lending request. Processing may be included.) Is executed.

In this embodiment, the interrupt mode 2 is also set in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, the interrupt process based on the count-up of the built-in CTC can be used. Further, the interrupt processing start address can be set according to the interrupt vector sent by the CTC. The interrupt based on the count-up of channel 3 (CH3) of the CTC is an interrupt that occurs when the internal clock (system clock) of the CPU is counted down and the register value becomes "0", and is used as a timer interrupt. ..

Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 first performs a RAM clear process (step S21TM1880). In addition, initial values are set in the flags and counters in the RAM area (step S21TM1890). The process of step S21TM1890 includes a process of setting the initial value of the prize ball unpaid number counter in the prize ball unpaid number counter.

Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a serial communication circuit setting process for initializing the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1900). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 causes the serial communication circuit 21TM380 to serially communicate with the game control microcomputer 100 according to the same process as the serial communication circuit setting process (see step S21TM2560) performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100. Make the settings for.

When the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is initially set, the payout control CPU 21TM371 initially sets the priority of the interrupt process to be executed in response to the interrupt request of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1910). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 initializes the priority of the interrupt process according to the same process as the priority initial setting process performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100.

Then, the CTC register provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied (step S21TM1920). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to the timer interrupt occurrence interval is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). Since interrupting is prohibited in step S21TM1810 of the initial setting process, interrupting is permitted before the initialization process is completed (step S21TM1930). After that, a loop process for monitoring the occurrence of timer interrupt is started.

As described above, in this embodiment, the built-in CTC of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to repeatedly generate a timer interrupt. Then, when the timer interrupt occurs, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 9-24 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interrupt process executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the timer interrupt process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the following process as the payout control process. First, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs an input determination process (step S21TM2010). The input determination process is a process of detecting the states of bits 4 to 6 of input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of input port 1 and reflecting the detection result in a predetermined 1 byte (called an input state flag) of the RAM. is there. In the payout control process, when the control is performed based on the states of bits 4 to 6 of the input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of the input port 1, the state of the input port is not checked directly, but the input state. Check the status of the flag.

Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes the payout motor control process (step S21TM2020). In the payout motor control process, when the payout motor 21TM289 should be driven, a process for outputting the pattern of the payout motors φ1 to φ4 to the output port 0 is performed.

Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a prepaid card unit control process that communicates with the card unit 21TM050 (step S21TM2030). Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a main control communication process described later (step S21TM2035). Further, a prize ball lending control process that controls to pay out the loaned balls in response to the ball lending request from the card unit 21TM050, and controls to pay out the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command from the main board. Is executed (step S21TM2040).

Then, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes error processing for detecting various errors (step S21TM2050). In addition, information output processing for outputting prize ball information and ball lending information output to the outside of the gaming machine is executed (step S21TM2060). Further, a predetermined display is performed on the error display LED 21TM374 according to the result of the error processing, and a display control process for lighting the prize ball LED21TM053 and the ball-out LED21TM054 is executed (step S21TM2070).

In the present embodiment, when various errors (for example, full tank error, out-of-ball error, prepaid card unit unconnected error) are detected in the error processing described later, an error bit corresponding to the detected error is set. Then, in the display control process of step S21TM2070, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs a predetermined display on the error display LED 21TM374 based on the fact that the error bit is set. Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 controls in the display control process to light the prize ball LED21TM053 when the prize ball is being paid out. Further, when the prize ball payout is completed, the control for turning off the prize ball LED21TM053 is performed.

Further, in this embodiment, a RAM area (output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, output port 2 buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the payout control CPU 21TM371 outputs. The contents of the port 0 buffer, the output port 1 buffer, and the output port 2 buffer are output to the output port (step S760: output processing). The output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, and output port 2 buffer include payout motor control processing (step S21TM2020), prepaid card control processing (step S21TM2030), main control communication processing (step S21TM2035), and information output processing (step S21TM2060). And is updated in the display control process (step S21TM2070).

Next, in the main control communication process of step S21TM2035, the operation of the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to send and receive various commands will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-21, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 that serially communicates various commands with the game control microcomputer 100. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 uses the serial communication circuit 21TM380 to receive the prize ball number command shown in FIG. 9-20 from the game control microcomputer 100. When the prize ball number command is received, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits the prize ball ACK command "D2" as a reception confirmation signal using the serial communication circuit 21TM380.

Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371, like the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, receives an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 while the interrupt is enabled, and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 makes an interrupt request. Execute interrupt processing according to the cause. In this embodiment, when the payout control CPU 21TM371 identifies that the cause of the interrupt is that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 has received the received data, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes the reception interrupt processing. In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets a reception interrupt flag indicating that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is receiving the received data. The payout control CPU 21TM371 may read data from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 instead of setting the reception interrupt flag in the reception interrupt processing. In this case, for example, the payout control CPU 21TM371 determines whether or not the read received data is a prize ball number command in the interrupt processing at the time of reception. When the received data is a prize ball number command, the payout control CPU 21TM371 may add the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number command to the prize ball unpaid number counter. By doing so, in the main control communication process described later, it is determined whether or not the received data is a prize ball number command based on the reception interrupt flag being set, and the number of prize balls is determined. It is not necessary to execute the process of adding to the unpaid quantity counter.

FIG. 9-25 shows the ball lending executed between the main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control), the payout control board 21TM037 (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control), the payout motor 21TM289, and the card unit 21TM050. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the communication process of. Here, as will be described later, as a method of restricting ball lending by the payout motor 21TM289, there are the first ball lending restriction method to the fourth ball lending restriction method shown below.

First, (1) The first ball lending restriction method is a payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer) from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. This is a method of stopping the output of the connection confirmation signal to the computer 21TM370). Further, (2) the second ball lending restriction method is a PRDY from the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the card unit 21TM050 during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. This is a method of stopping the output of a signal. (3) In the third ball lending restriction method, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 equipped with the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. During this period, the output of the signal for driving the payout motor 21TM289 from the payout control board 21TM037 (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped. Further, (4) the fourth ball lending restriction method is the EXS from the payout control board 21TM037 (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) to the card unit 21TM050 during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. This is a method of stopping the output of a signal.

The transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involve power off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power on, so the state of the gaming machine is unstable. If the payout control corresponding to the ball lending process is executed in such an unstable state, it may not be possible to pay out an appropriate amount of game media corresponding to the lending request. In order to prevent the disadvantage of the player in such a situation, in the following embodiment, the ball lending in the gaming machine controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is restricted. Hereinafter, the first ball lending restriction method to the fourth ball lending restriction method will be specifically described.

FIG. 9-26 is a timing diagram for explaining communication between the main board 11 of the gaming machine, the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. Based on the fact that the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the payout control board 21TM037 turns the PRDY signal in the ON state when the payout operation is possible. The connection confirmation signal is turned on by the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 9-13 (see FIG. 9-19). When the power supply is started, the card unit 21TM050 turns on the VL signal as the connection signal.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 transmits the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control board 21TM037 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the ON state and both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, and the card unit 21TM050 starts from the card unit 21TM050. When the falling edge (OFF) of the BRQ signal is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls to the player. Then, the payout control board 21TM037 lowers the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050. That is, the EXS signal is turned off.

(First ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
As a method of restricting ball lending during the period controlled by the setting change mode, there are the first ball lending restriction method to the fourth ball lending restriction method described above. First, the first ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 9-27.

9-27 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. When the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state, so that the CPU 103 changes the setting. While the mode or setting confirmation mode process is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

Since the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state but turns it into the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 into the ON state, but maintains it in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXE signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. While the process is being executed, the ball lending (payment of the game medium) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

In this way, during the period controlled by the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 does not turn on the connection confirmation signal, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 controls the payout of the game medium. You can prevent it from running. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not executed (a ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the PRDY signal is not turned on.

Based on the fact that when the CPU 103 ends the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being ON. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, and executes the subsequent payout control of the ball lending.

During the game (when the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated to control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the first ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 9-27 can be applied. That is, the game control microcomputer 100 stops the output of the connection confirmation signal (switches from the ON state to the OFF state) based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the ball lending by turning the PRDY signal into the OFF state or by not turning the EXS signal into the ON state. Prevent it from being done.

(Second ball lending restriction method in the setting change mode)
Next, the second ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 9-28. In the example shown in FIGS. 9-28, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period controlled in the setting change mode, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode. It shall be. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and the ON state is maintained even during the setting change mode period. Shall be. Further, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the ON state is maintained even during the setting confirmation mode period. Shall be.

9-28 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. When the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

In the example of FIGS. 9-28, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state even while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops the transmission of the connection confirmation command based on the control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As described above, the connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication status with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation command has not been received from the game control microcomputer 100. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, the state is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, the game control microcomputer). Even if it is electrically connected to 100), the PRDY signal is turned on while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (while the connection confirmation command is not received). It is not in the state, but in the OFF state.

As a result, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 into the ON state, but maintains it in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, when the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXE signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball lending (payment of the game medium) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

In this way, during the period controlled by the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send the connection confirmation command, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side does not receive the connection confirmation command. Therefore, the PRDY signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control of the game medium from being executed by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not executed (a ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the PRDY signal is not turned on.

When the CPU 103 finishes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the transmission of the connection confirmation command is restarted. Based on the resumption of reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being ON. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, and executes the subsequent payout control of the ball lending.

During the game (when the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated to control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the second ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 9-28 can be applied. Further, it is possible to output (turn on) the PRDY signal regardless of whether or not the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether it is in the ON state or the OFF state). Even when the above configuration is adopted, the second ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 9-28 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is in the ON state based on the fact that the connection confirmation command is not received from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. To the OFF state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Third ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the third ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 9-29. In the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and do not open the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation. Since it is said that the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be operated as long as possible, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened in order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. That is, the gaming machine frame 3 is usually open during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. That is, during the period controlled by the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3. Become. As described above, the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected includes the period controlled by the setting change mode and the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode.

FIG. 9-29 shows the main substrate when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). 11. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370), and the card unit 21TM050.

The example of FIG. 9-29 is based on the fact that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Therefore, the PRDY signal is not turned on. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, the state is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, the game control microcomputer). Even if it is electrically connected to 100), while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the period during which the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state), The PRDY signal is not turned on, but is turned off.

As a result, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 into the ON state, but maintains it in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, when the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a), the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ Since both the signal and the EXE signal are in the OFF state and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, the ball is played even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Lending (payment of game media) is not executed.

In this way, during the period controlled by the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). By detecting the open state of, the PRDY signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control of the game medium from being executed by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not executed (a ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the PRDY signal is not turned on.

Then, when the clerk of the amusement park or the like performs an operation of turning off the lock switch 21TM051, the CPU 103 ends the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, the clerk of the game hall closes the game machine frame 3 in order to make the pachinko game machine 1 playable, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a game machine frame / door frame opening sensor. The 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3. With the closing of the gaming machine frame 3, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being ON. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, and executes the subsequent payout control of the ball lending.

During the game (when the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated to control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the third ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 9-29 can be applied. Further, it is possible to output the PRDY signal (turn it on) regardless of whether or not the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether it is in the ON state or the OFF state). Even when a different configuration is adopted, the third ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 9-29 can be applied. That is, during the period when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is used as the gaming machine frame 3 ( Alternatively, the PRDY signal is not turned on based on the detection of the open state of the glass door frame 3a). As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the open state detection signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 may be provided on the main board 11 (a detection signal in the open state is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In such a configuration, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is based on the fact that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Then, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped (switched from the ON state to the OFF state). As a result, based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the ball lending by turning the PRDY signal into the OFF state or by not turning the EXS signal into the ON state. Prevent it from being done.

(Fourth ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the fourth ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 9-30. In the example shown in FIG. 9-30, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period controlled in the setting change mode, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode. It shall be. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and the ON state is maintained even during the setting change mode period. Shall be. Further, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the ON state is maintained even during the setting confirmation mode period. Shall be.

FIG. 9-30 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. When the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

In the example of FIG. 9-30, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state even while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops the transmission of the connection confirmation command based on the control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As described above, the connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication status with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal into the ON state based on the connection confirmation signal being in the ON state. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is maintained in the ON state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, the state is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, the game control microcomputer). When it is electrically connected to 100), the PRDY signal is turned on regardless of whether the CPU 103 is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 causes the card unit 21TM050 to operate. The BRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the ON state. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Here, the payout control board 21TM037 has the PRDY signal in the ON state and both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal in the ON state, but has not received the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100. Based on this, the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 is not turned on. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, the state is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, the game control microcomputer). The state of being electrically connected to 100), the PRDY signal is in the ON state (that is, the payout operation is possible by the payout control board 21TM037), and the BRDY signal is in the ON state (that is, the ball rental switch 21TM062). Is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input), and the CPU 103 is set even when the BRQ signal is ON (that is, a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the BRDY signal was turned ON). While the process of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed (while the connection confirmation command is not received), the EXS signal is not turned on but is turned off. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, when the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the EXS signal is in the OFF state and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, so that the CPU 103 While the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the ball lending (payment of the game medium) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

In this way, during the period controlled by the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send the connection confirmation command, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side does not receive the connection confirmation command. Therefore, the EXS signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control of the game medium from being executed by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not executed (a ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the EXS signal is not turned on.

Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops the output of the BRQ signal when a predetermined time elapses (when the timer set to the predetermined value times out) while the EXS signal is in the OFF state after the BRQ signal is turned ON. To do. That is, the BRQ signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops the output of the BRDY signal based on the fact that the BRQ signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off.

When the CPU 103 finishes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the transmission of the connection confirmation command is restarted. At this time, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the PRDY signal in the ON state.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being ON. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 resumes receiving the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the ON state. The XS signal for the unit 21TM050 is turned ON, and the subsequent payout control of the ball lending is executed.

During the game (when the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated to control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the fourth ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-30 can be applied. Further, it is possible to output (turn on) the PRDY signal regardless of whether or not the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether it is in the ON state or the OFF state). Even when a different configuration is adopted, the fourth ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-30 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the EXS signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation command has not been received from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Further, in FIG. 9-30, when a predetermined time elapses while the EXS signal is in the OFF state after the BRQ signal is turned ON (when the timer set to a predetermined value times out), the card unit 21TM050 Shows an example in which the BRQ signal is returned to the OFF state, and the BRDY signal is also returned to the OFF state. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and the EXS signal remains in the OFF state after the BRQ signal is turned ON. Even if a predetermined time elapses, the BRQ signal may be maintained in the ON state, and the BRDY signal may also be maintained in the ON state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 resumes receiving the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 (the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended), and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal. The XS signal may be turned on based on the fact that all of them are in the ON state. Here, when the EXS signal is turned on, (1) the ball lending switch 21TM062 is not operated again, the BRQ signal is turned off, and the ball lending is automatically executed (that is, the setting change mode or When the setting confirmation mode ends, the ball lending process according to the ball lending operation received within the period of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be executed). (2) Ball lending When the switch 21TM062 is operated again, the BRQ signal may be turned off and the ball lending may be executed.

(How to not execute ball lending restriction during setting change mode)
Next, a method of not executing the ball lending restriction during the setting change mode will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 9-31. In the example shown in FIGS. 9-31, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period controlled in the setting change mode, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode. It shall be. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and the ON state is maintained even during the setting change mode period. Shall be. Further, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the ON state is maintained even during the setting confirmation mode period. Shall be.

9-31 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. When the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

In the example of FIGS. 9-31, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state even while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 continues to transmit the connection confirmation command even during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As described above, the connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication status with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal into the ON state based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state and that the connection confirmation command is received. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is maintained in the ON state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is in the ON state of the VL signal (that is, in a state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, with the game control microcomputer 100). When the computer is electrically connected) and the connection confirmation command is being received, the PRDY signal is displayed regardless of whether the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Is turned on.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 causes the card unit 21TM050 to operate. The BRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the ON state. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control board 21TM037 has an EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are all ON and the connection confirmation command is being received. When the BRQ signal falling (OFF) from the card unit 21TM050 is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of game media to the player.

In this way, even during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 continuously transmits the connection confirmation command, so that the connection confirmation command is continuously received. The PRDY signal and the EXE signal are turned on on the control microcomputer 21TM370 side. In this way, even during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can execute the payout control of the game medium, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be set. It is possible to reduce the control burden for preventing the payout control from being executed during the controlled period. In addition, during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to check the communication function between the card unit 21TM050 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the same time, which can improve workability. it can.

The CPU 103 continues to transmit the connection confirmation command even after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. Based on the fact that the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 is continuously received, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the PRDY signal ON state when the payout operation is possible.

When the payout of a predetermined number of game media is completed and the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control board 21TM037 stops the output of the EXS signal. .. That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops the output of the BRDY signal based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off. In this way, during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the EXS signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state, and the BRDY signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state accordingly. Further, when the payout of a predetermined number of game media is finished and the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the payout control board 21TM037 stops the output of the EXE signal. That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops the output of the BRDY signal based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state. As described above, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the EXS signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state, and the BRDY signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state accordingly.

(How to resume ball lending after the setting change mode ends)
Next, regarding the processing when the payout is interrupted due to the power failure occurring during the ball lending execution and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on thereafter, FIG. 9-32 is shown. It will be specifically described using. In the example shown in FIGS. 9-32, the payout of the game medium is interrupted based on the power failure occurring during the payout of the game medium, and after the power is turned on, the setting is controlled and set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Resume the withdrawal that was suspended after the end of the change mode or setting confirmation mode.

9-32 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) is executing the payout of the game medium. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXE signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

If a power failure occurs during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. To. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

The unpaid number is updated based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the unpaid number is a payout number count switch from a predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25). It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

After that, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state, so that the CPU 103 changes the setting. While the mode or setting confirmation mode process is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

Since the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state but turns it into the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 controls payout even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. The BRDY signal is not output to the board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 into the ON state, but maintains it in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXE signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. While the process is being executed, the game medium is not paid out.

Based on the fact that when the CPU 103 ends the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

Then, the payout control is performed based on the fact that the power supply is restarted and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode controlled at the time of turning on the power is terminated (the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state and the PRDY signal is in the ON state). The payout microcomputer 21TM370 drives the payout motor 21TM289 based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and one by one until the unpaid number data becomes 0. Perform payout operation. As a result, the payout of the game medium, which has been interrupted due to the power off and the subsequent transition to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, is completed. In this way, when the power is cut off during the execution of ball lending and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the setting is set even if the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled at the time of the subsequent power restoration. After the end of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to resume the suspended payout of the game medium and complete the ball lending.

Here, in the example shown in FIGS. 9-32, the payout process is interrupted due to a power failure occurring during the payout process, and is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is restored, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is used. An example was shown in which the suspended payout process is resumed after the end of the operation, but this power off is caused by the clerk of the amusement park turning off the power switch 21TM055 in order to change or confirm the set value. It may be a power cut that occurs, or it may be a power cut that occurs when the power switch 21TM055 is turned off when the amusement park is closed. Further, not only when the power is cut off, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 during the payout process, or the glass door frame 3a is opened. Depending on the state detected, the payout process that is being executed is interrupted, and then it is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the interrupted payout process is performed. It may be restarted.

(How to forcibly terminate ball lending due to power failure)
Next, with reference to FIG. 9-33, the processing when the payout is forcibly terminated (cancelled) when the power supply is cut off while the ball lending is being executed and the payout is not restarted after the power is restored is concretely explain. In the example shown in FIGS. 9-33, when the power is cut off during the payout of the game medium, the payout during execution is stopped, and when the game medium is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored. The payout is not restarted, and the payout is not restarted even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends.

9-33 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) is executing the payout of the game medium. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXE signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

If a power failure occurs during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. To. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 based on the EXS signal being turned off, and forcibly terminates (stops) the payout of the game medium. At this time, the unpaid quantity data is not stored in the unpaid quantity storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (or the unpaid quantity storage buffer itself is not provided). Therefore, as shown below, after the power is restored, the game media corresponding to the unpaid number is not paid out.

After that, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state, so that the CPU 103 changes the setting. While the mode or setting confirmation mode process is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

After that, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state but turns it into the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 controls payout even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. The BRDY signal is not output to the board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 into the ON state, but maintains it in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXE signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. While the process is being executed, the game medium is not paid out.

Based on the fact that when the CPU 103 ends the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible. Since the data of the unpaid number is not backed up, the predetermined number to be paid out in the ball lending process that was executed before the power failure occurred (before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode due to the power restoration). Of the number of game media (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the number of unpaid pieces that were not paid out due to the cancellation (forced termination) of the payout is paid out. Not done. In this way, if the power is cut off during the execution of ball lending, the payout is forcibly terminated (cancelled), and then when the power is restored, the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change mode or the setting By not executing the payout for the number of unpaid pieces after the confirmation mode ends, the control of backing up the data of the number of unpaid pieces and restarting the payout becomes unnecessary, and the ball lending process can be simplified.

In the example shown in FIGS. 9-33, when the power is cut off during the payout, the data of the number of unpaid pieces is not backed up, so that the payout being executed is forcibly terminated (stopped) in the middle. Not limited to such a form, as shown in the example shown in FIGS. 9-32, when the power is cut off, the data of the number of unpaid data is backed up, and after the power is restored, the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are set. On condition that it is not controlled by any of them, the game medium equivalent to the unpaid number is paid out based on the backed up unpaid number data (the payout is restarted based on the backup data), while after the power is restored. When controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game medium equivalent to the number of unpaid pieces is not paid out (the payout based on the backup data is not restarted), and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is not completed. It is also possible not to pay out the game medium equivalent to the number of payouts.

During the game (when the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated to control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the method of forcibly terminating the ball lending accompanying the transition to the setting change mode shown in FIGS. 9-33 can be applied. Further, it is possible to output the PRDY signal (turn it on) regardless of whether or not the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether it is in the ON state or the OFF state). Even when a different configuration is adopted, the method of forcibly terminating the ball lending accompanying the transition to the setting change mode shown in FIGS. 9-33 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is not received from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the payout (ball lending) from being executed during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Prize ball payout control)
FIG. 9-34 is a timing diagram showing the transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIGS. 9-34, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the received ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is transmitted. Receives the connection OK command as. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 retransmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal 1 s (1 second) after the reception time. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-mentioned connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), the game The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, it pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command, and pays out the prize balls (prize ball payout operation). When finished, the prize ball end command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the prize ball end command as a reception ACK signal, it transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal 1 s (1 second) after the reception time.

Although not shown, there is a prize during execution of the connection confirmation communication process (between the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal and the reception of the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal). In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and issues the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. After receiving the connection OK command as a reception ACK signal, it is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, it pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command, and pays out the prize balls (prize ball payout operation). When finished, the prize ball end command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. During the execution of the prize ball payout (prize ball payout operation), the prize ball preparation command as the received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

(No prizes in setting change mode or setting confirmation mode)
FIG. 9-35 is a timing diagram showing the transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. When the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process.

As described above, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the first general winning port switch to the fourth until the CPU 103 executes the interrupt permission (step S21TM1540) shown in FIG. 9-13. The switch process (step S21TM1620 shown in FIGS. 9-14) for confirming the status (presence / absence of detection signal) of the general winning opening switch and each switch of the count switch 23 is not executed, and a special symbol process including a jackpot determination process and the like is not executed. The process (step S21TM1690 shown in FIG. 9-14) and the like are not executed either. Therefore, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the detection signal output from each switch is not detected, and the big hit determination process or the like is not executed. That is, during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the winning is invalid even if the game medium passes through each winning opening. Further, since the switch processing is not executed, the detection of the game ball by the outlet switch 21TM070 is not executed, and the base aggregation is not executed. That is, until the interrupt permission is executed, it is not necessary to aggregate each item such as the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. Therefore, during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, each item is used. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 because it is out of the aggregation period.

During the period controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 invalidates the winning based on the game medium passing through each winning opening by not executing the switch processing and the special symbol process processing. And. That is, the prize ball number command is not transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the jackpot determination process or the like is not executed. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 based on the fact that the prize ball number command from the game control microcomputer 100 has not been received. That is, even if the game medium passes through each winning opening during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the prize ball payout control is not executed.

When the CPU 103 finishes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first general winning opening switch to the fourth general winning opening switch, and the count switch 23 It is possible to execute switch processing to check the status of each switch (presence or absence of detection signal), it is possible to detect that the game medium has passed through each winning opening, and it is possible to send a prize ball number command (and connection confirmation command). Become. In addition, special symbol process processing including jackpot determination processing can be executed.

The game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that receives the connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal receives ACK. A connection OK command as a signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. At this time, when the game medium passes through any of the winning openings (when winning occurs), the CPU 103 detects the winning by executing the switch process, and the game control microcomputer 100 serves as a prize ball request signal. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 which transmitted the prize ball number command to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and received the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal drives the payout motor 21TM289 to drive a predetermined number (for example, three) Pay out the game medium. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out a predetermined number of game media transmits a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal.

If the switch processing is executed within the setting change mode period in which the set value may be changed, the big hit judgment random number is extracted, and the big hit judgment is executed based on the big hit judgment random number. And, the set value before the change will be a big hit, but the set value after the change (the set value after confirmation) will not be a big hit. In some cases, the big hit judgment will be executed based on the random number for big hit judgment, or conversely, before the change. The set value of is not a big hit, but the changed set value (set value after confirmation) may be a big hit. In some cases, the big hit determination is executed based on the big hit determination random number. That is, in these cases, the relationship between the execution timing of the jackpot determination and the set value becomes complicated, and the player or the game hall may suffer a disadvantage.

In the present embodiment, when the setting change mode is controlled, the prize ball is not paid out based on the game ball passing through each winning opening, and the big hit determination process is not executed, so that the big hit determination is performed. In addition to preventing the relationship between the execution timing and the set value from becoming complicated, the disadvantage of the player or the amusement park is prevented.

Further, in the present embodiment, not only in the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed, but also in the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value is displayed but cannot be changed, the winning is invalidated and the jackpot determination process is not executed. I have to. Assuming that the setting confirmation mode is different from the setting change mode, it can be controlled not when the power is turned on but when the game control timer interrupt process is being executed, and the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode is also switch processing. If the special symbol process processing can be executed, a control completely different from the setting change mode is required, which causes a problem that the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 increases.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, even in the setting confirmation mode, control is possible only when the power is turned on as in the setting change mode, and the prize ball is not paid out based on the passing of the game ball through each winning opening, and the jackpot determination is made. By not executing the processing, the processing is standardized and the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 is reduced.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the timer interrupt is set after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed (step S21TM1500). .. Therefore, since the game control timer interrupt process itself is not executed, the switch process and the special symbol process process in the game control timer interrupt process are not executed, and the period is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The prize in is invalidated. On the other hand, when the game is stopped due to a magnetic error, a radio wave error, a vibration error, etc., is the game stop error occurring during the period during which the game control timer interrupt process is being executed, that is, during the game? When it is determined whether or not (step S21TM1615) and a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615), subsequent switch processing (step S21TM1620) and special symbol process processing (step) in the same interrupt processing. Since S21TM1690) is not executed, the winning is invalidated. As described above, the method of invalidating the winning (stopping the game) differs depending on whether the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and the game stop error occurs.

By stopping the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the period when the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not transmit the connection OK command as the received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 100 sends the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 as a prize ball request signal based on the fact that the connection OK command is not received during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By not transmitting the prize ball number command of, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the payout control of the game medium. As described above, based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 100 does not output the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed. It is possible to invalidate the prize.

It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt processing can be executed). .. Even when such a configuration is adopted, the method shown in FIGS. 9-35 can be applied, and the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. , Switch processing and special symbol process processing should not be executed.

Further, a configuration in which the game control microcomputer 100 can execute switch processing when controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (a configuration in which it is possible to detect that the game medium has passed through each winning opening). May be. When such a configuration is adopted, as described above, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the transmission of the prize ball number command and the connection confirmation command is stopped to control the payout. The microcomputer 21TM370 is not allowed to execute the payout control, the winning is invalidated, and the special symbol process processing is not executed. Then, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the transmission of the prize ball number command and the connection confirmation command is restarted in a state in which the switch processing can be executed, and the special symbol process processing is executed.

(Pachinko machine frame / door frame opening detection method)
FIG. 9-36 is a timing diagram showing the transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the detection of opening of the game machine frame / door frame. As described above, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. Receive the connection OK command as a signal. At this time, when a clerk of the game hall opens the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the game machine frame 3 or the glass door. The open state of the frame 3a is detected.

In the state where the game machine frame 3 is open (and the glass door frame 3a is open if the glass door frame 3a and the upper plate are integrated), the prize ball to be paid out. Since the path through which the prize balls flow down and the upper plate on which the prize balls that have flowed down are stored are not physically connected, if the prize balls are paid out in this state, the game medium reaches the upper plate. It falls without doing it. Here, with the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a open, the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, and the large winning opening. When the passage of the game medium is detected at any of the winning openings, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a prize ball number command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, but for the game machine. In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that detects the open state of the frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control of the game medium is not executed, and the prize ball preparing command as the received ACK signal is issued to the game control microcomputer 100. Send to. This prize ball preparation command is issued until the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. The transmission is continued to the game control microcomputer 100 until the closed state is reached.

In this way, during the period when the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, even if the gaming medium passes through each winning opening and detects a winning, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 still uses the payout motor 21TM289. The prize ball payout control is not executed without driving. Then, the prize ball preparing command as the received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

When the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the payout motor 21TM289. Drive and execute control of payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (the number specified by the prize ball number command) according to the winning within the period in which the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected. .. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out a predetermined number of game media transmits a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal.

If the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected during the payout of the prize ball, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 interrupts the payout of the prize ball and the prize ball is paid out. Of the number specified by the number command, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the backup area in the RAM. Then, the prize ball preparing command as the received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. When the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the payout motor 21TM289. It is driven and the payout control of the game medium corresponding to the unpaid number is executed. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out the game medium transmits a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal.

During the game (when the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated to control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the payout restriction method during detection of opening of the gaming machine frame / door frame shown in FIGS. 9-36 can be applied. In the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and are operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. It is said to be impossible. Therefore, in order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened, and the game is played during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The machine frame 3 is usually open. During the period when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the payout motor 21TM289 is restricted from being driven so that the prize balls are not paid out. As a result, the payout of prize balls is restricted during the period controlled by the setting change mode and the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode.

Next, control when a power failure occurs during the setting change mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-37 (1) and (2).

9-37 (1) and (2) show the patterns related to the power outage in separate charts based on the difference in the situation when the power outage occurs. The pattern related to the power failure shown in FIG. 9-37 (1) shows the control when the power is cut off in the situation where the "setting value is not confirmed" is not performed while the "setting value is being changed", and the power is turned off and restored. The set value at the time is the set value at the time of the previous power-on. Further, the pattern related to the power failure shown in FIG. 9-37 (2) shows the control when the power supply is cut off in the situation where the "setting value is confirmed" is performed while the "setting value is being changed". The set value at the time of power failure is the set value at the time of power failure.

That is, FIG. 9-37 (1) shows a setting when the power is cut off in a state where the lock switch 21TM051 is operated in the OFF state and there is no “setting value confirmation” operation (the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state). The control regarding the value is shown, and FIG. 9-37 (2) shows the control regarding the set value when the power is cut off after the operation of "determine the set value" in which the lock switch 21TM051 is operated to the OFF state. Shown.

Further, FIGS. 9-37 (1) and 9-37 (2) show various situations in the work of changing the settings from the upper row to the lower row in the order of occurrence (see "Order" column and "Status" column). ). Further, in FIGS. 9-37 (1) and 9-37 (2), the ON / OFF state of the lock switch 21TM051 in each situation (orders 1 to 8) is shown in the "lock switch" column. In the "setting value" column, the setting value data (setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102) in each situation is shown. Further, in the "setting value display" column in the figure, the display contents (setting values stored in the setting information temporary storage area) of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) in each situation are shown. There is.

When the setting change work is performed, as shown at the top of the "Status" column in FIG. 9-37 (1), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (order 1), and the right side of the figure is on the right side. As shown in the column of "lock switch", the state of the lock switch 21TM051 at this time is the ON state. Further, in FIG. 9-37 (1), the "set value" at the time of "power on" in order 1 is because the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 at this time is "1". , "1".

Further, the display content of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) shown in the "set value display" column is blank at this stage because the power has just been turned on and the RAM 102 Since it is before the process of reading and displaying the set value stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM1150) is performed, it indicates that the display of the set value has not been started.

After the "power on" status, the "setting change mode start" status (order 2) is displayed. Then, in this "setting change mode start", as shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), the "lock switch" column is "ON", and the "setting value" column is RAM 102. It is set to "1" based on the fact that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of is not changed, and the "setting value display" column is the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 as described above. It is set to "1" based on the fact that the setting value read from and stored in the setting information temporary storage area is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A).

Subsequently, when the status of "setting value is being changed" (order 3) is reached, the "lock switch" column remains "ON" and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated. , As shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed, so that the "setting value" column remains "1", but the setting information is temporarily stored. By changing the setting value stored in the area from "1" to "2", the column of "setting value display" (setting value to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) is displayed. It changes to the new selected value "2".

Furthermore, when the status of "setting value is being changed" (order 4) is reached, the "lock switch" column remains "ON", and when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, As shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed, so that the “setting value” column remains “1”, but the setting information temporary storage area. By changing the setting value stored in to "2" to "3", the "setting value display" column (setting value to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) is selected. It changes to the new value "3".

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), when the power is cut off during "changing the set value" (order 5), the operation for fixing the set value is not performed, and the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is stored. Since the process of overwriting the set value stored in (the process of step S21TM1190 for determining the set value) has not been executed, the "set value" column remains "1". That is, when the power is turned off, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 maintains the state of "1" when the power is turned on. Here, when the power is cut off, the set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is erased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), when the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON and the power is turned on (order 6), then. In the "setting change mode start" situation (order 7), the setting value ("1" in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out and stored in the setting information temporary storage area. , Since it is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A), the "set value" column remains "1", and the "set value display" column also becomes "1". The same applies when the order 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation mode instead of the setting change mode.

In this way, when the power is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode, and when the power is cut off without completing the setting change operation (without switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state), the set value of the RAM 102 is set. Since the setting value stored in the storage area has not been changed, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is This is the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on last time (before the power is turned off). In this way, it is possible to appropriately set the setting value when the power is cut off while the setting change mode is controlled.

Next, control when a power failure occurs after the set value is determined will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-37 (2). The description of the processing part common to the case where the power is cut off before the set value is confirmed will be omitted. When the power is cut off after the set value is confirmed, the "set value is confirmed" shown in the order 5 is performed after the "setting value is being changed" shown in the order 4. Here, immediately before the operation for fixing the set value is performed, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is "1", and the set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area ( The set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) is in the state of "3". Then, in the setting change mode, the "lock switch" column is set to "OFF" based on turning the lock switch 21TM051 into the OFF state.

That is, when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (YES in step S21TM1180) in the setting change mode, the setting value "1" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 becomes the setting information temporary storage area. It is overwritten by "3" which is a stored set value (set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)), whereby the set value is determined (step S21TM1190). As a result, "3" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102.

Then, when the power is cut off in this state (order 6), the process of overwriting the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (the process of step S21TM1190 for determining the set value) is executed. The "set value" column is "3". That is, when the power is turned off, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed to "3", which is different from that when the power is turned on. Here, when the power is cut off, the set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is erased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (2), when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state and the power is turned on (order 7), the subsequent “setting change mode start” status ( In order 8), the set value (“3” in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out and stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and is stored in the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A). ), The "set value" column is also "3", and the "set value display" column is also "3". The same applies when the order 8 is controlled not in the setting change mode but in the setting confirmation mode.

As described above, when the power is cut off without turning off the lock switch 21TM051 while being controlled to the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off. , The setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 has not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is deleted. Therefore, if the clerk of the amusement park mistakenly shifts the gaming machine to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, and further performs the setting change operation (operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052). However, by turning off the power switch 21TM055 after that, the change of the set value can be stopped and the state before the shift to the setting change mode can be restored.

The transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involve power off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power on, so the state of the gaming machine is unstable. However, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), the power supply is performed without turning off the lock switch 21TM051. When a disconnection occurs, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed from the time the power is turned on, so that the set value can be set appropriately and the control regarding the set value is unstable. It is possible to avoid the change and execute appropriate control regarding the set value.

FIG. 9-38 shows the effect device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the lock switch 21TM051 or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated during the game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed). (Image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, and game effect lamp 9) shows an example in which notification that an operation for changing a set value has been performed is executed.

FIG. 9-38 (1) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the image display device 5 during the game. At this time, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the game control timer interrupt process. When the main board 11 (CPU103) detects that the lock switch 21TM051 is operated (switched from the OFF state to the ON state) during the game (for example, while executing the variable display of the special symbol) (game control). The timer interrupt processing step S21TM1660) and the lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated are transmitted to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) (game control timer interrupt process step S21TM1710). ), When it is detected that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM1660 of the timer interrupt processing for game control), the setting changeover switch operation indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated The command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) (game control timer interrupt process step S21TM1710). That is, a lock switch operation command and / or a setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted in order to notify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed.

As shown in FIG. 9-38 (2), the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) receives the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command, and the setting change mode and Even though it is not controlled by any of the setting confirmation modes, it is possible to identify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed and notify the fact. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "lock switch operation has been detected." In addition, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." Is executed.

In this example, the effect control CPU 120 "detects the operation of the lock switch and the setting changeover switch" as an abnormal operation warning notification based on the reception of both the lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command. Is displayed on the image display device 5. Since the display priority of the abnormal operation warning notification is higher than that of the background image and the decorative symbol (the displayed layer is higher than the background image and the decorative symbol), the decoration is as shown in FIG. 9-38 (2). Even during the variable display of the symbol, the clerk of the amusement park, etc., has performed an operation to change the set value even though it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to clearly grasp and confirm whether or not fraud has been committed. In addition, a voice notifying that an operation for changing the set value has been detected from the speakers 8L and 8R (for example, a voice saying "the operation of the lock switch and the setting changeover switch has been detected") is output, and the game effect lamp 9 May emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a red blinking mode) to notify that an operation for changing a set value has been detected.

In the present embodiment, the configuration can be controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode only when the power is turned on (before the game control timer interrupt processing is executed). Normally, the setting value is changed or confirmed. The operation for performing the operation (operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052) is not performed within the period during which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed. Therefore, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are operated during the period when the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is executed, or during the period when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. If so, there is a possibility that the set value is about to be changed illegally.

In the present embodiment, when the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at a timing other than the time when the power is turned on or the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Notifies that the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value have been performed in the image display device 5, which is the largest display device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and performs fraud. I try to deter it.

Further, as described above, when the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the gaming machine frame 3 is normally opened, so that the gaming machine frame / door frame is opened. The sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and notifies that fact. Further, as described above, the ball lending is suspended or suspended, and the prize ball payout is also suspended or suspended. However, with respect to the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at a predetermined position on the gaming island, the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at a position facing the predetermined position on the gaming island is in an open state. Thereby, it is possible to see the back side surface of the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at the predetermined position from the position facing the predetermined position, and the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch) on the back surface side thereof. Setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated. That is, even when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the predetermined position does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, the lock switch 21TM051 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the predetermined position / Or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 may be able to be operated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is used regardless of whether or not the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300. When it is operated, the deterrence of fraud is strengthened by notifying that the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value have been performed.

(Signal for setting change)
Next, various signals output from the information output terminal of the main board 11 will be specifically described. As shown in FIGS. 9-39, the information output circuit 112 in the present embodiment is provided with 10 information output terminals from the first terminal to the tenth terminal, and signals corresponding to the respective information output terminals are output. Will be done.

In the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), a prize ball signal is output from the first terminal. The prize ball signal is a pulse-shaped signal output every time 10 prize balls are paid out, and the pulse width is 0.1 seconds. A game machine frame / door frame opening signal is output from the second terminal. The game machine frame / door frame open signal is turned on when the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3, and the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. It will be ON even when it is.

A signal for the number of times all symbols are confirmed is output from the third terminal. The all symbol confirmation count signal is output when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the display result is derived and displayed (when confirmed), and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the display result is derived. It is a pulse-like signal that is output when it is displayed (when it is confirmed), and the pulse width is 0.5 seconds. All start port signals are output from the fourth terminal. The all start port signals are pulse signals that are output when a game ball is won in the first start winning opening and are also output when a game ball is won in the second start winning opening. Yes, the pulse width is 0.1 seconds.

One jackpot signal is output from the fifth terminal. The jackpot 1 signal is turned on when the jackpot game state is controlled. Two jackpot signals are output from the sixth terminal. The jackpot 2 signal is turned on when it is controlled in the jackpot gaming state, and is also turned on when it is controlled in the high base state. That is, the period during which the jackpot 1 signal is in the OFF state and the jackpot 2 signal is in the ON state can be specified as a high base state.

A setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is a signal that is turned on during the period controlled by the setting change mode and is also turned on during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode. Further, as will be described later, the setting change corresponding signal can be output in a pulse shape (special mode) after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, and the set value is specified on the external device side by the number of pulses at that time. It is possible.

An out signal is output from the eighth terminal. The out signal is a pulse-like signal output every time 10 out balls (game balls launched into the game area and guided to the discharge port) are detected by the discharge port switch 21TM070, and the pulse width is 0. It is .1 second. A winning signal is output from the 9th terminal. The winning signal is sent every time a game ball wins a prize at each winning opening (1st starting winning opening, 2nd starting winning opening, large winning opening, 1st general winning opening to 4th general winning opening) (corresponding to each winning opening). It is a pulsed signal that is output every time a prize is detected by the switch) and is output every time 10 prize balls are paid out. The pulse width of the winning signal is 0.1 seconds.

A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that turns on for 30 seconds when the initialization process (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is executed when the power is turned on. In addition, when fraudulent activity is detected, it is turned on for 4 minutes. When fraudulent activity is detected, for example, an abnormal winning case is included, and each winning opening has an abnormal frequency (for example, a game ball is played at the first starting winning opening at a frequency of 15 times or more per 30 seconds. Based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize (such as when a prize is won), it is judged as an abnormal prize. In addition, the case where a switch abnormality detection occurs is also included, and the period during which the switch corresponding to each winning opening is in the winning detection state is abnormal (for example, the game control timer interrupt processing is performed 10 times or more continuously. 1 It is determined that the switch abnormality is detected based on (such as when the start port switch is in the ON state). When abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor, the ON state continues until the power is turned off based on the error of the game stop target, and when the abnormal magnetism is no longer detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is cleared), it will be ON for 4 minutes.

Further, in the example of the pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), the security signal is turned on during the period controlled by the setting change mode, and is also turned on during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode. ..

In this way, the security signal can be output from the 10th terminal, and the setting change corresponding signal can be output from the 7th terminal, so that the possibility of fraudulent activity can be notified to the outside. It is possible to notify the outside that the control has been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (processing related to the setting change has been executed). Further, upon termination of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal output from the 7th terminal is temporarily turned off, and then stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 from the same 7th terminal. Since the number of pulse-shaped setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the current set value is output, the set value can be notified to the outside.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (1), when the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on, a setting correspondence change signal is output from the 7th terminal, and at the same time, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the 10th terminal. Outputs a security signal. Then, based on the execution of RAM clearing, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off with the end of the setting change mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (2), when the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on, a setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the 10th terminal. Is output. Then, based on the fact that the RAM clear is not executed, the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are simultaneously turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode. Here, when the RAM clear is executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM1320 or NO in step S21TM1330), the example shown in FIG. 9-40 (1). Similarly, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode.

If the RAM is cleared without shifting to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the security signal will be ON for 30 seconds from the time the power is turned on, but the setting change compatible signal. Is not turned on.

In this way, the security signal is also in the ON state during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, even if the external device is configured not to assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and the processing based on the setting change corresponding signal input is not executed, it is at least based on the security signal input. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the mode may have been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The setting change compatible signal is turned off when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, but the security signal is parity in the setting change mode (or the setting confirmation mode) based on the RAM clear being executed. Even after the check result is not normal), it remains ON for 30 seconds. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds from the time when the power is turned on. Therefore, on the external device side where the security signal is input, when the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is recognizable that there is a possibility. On the other hand, if the security signal input period exceeds 30 seconds, it is possible to recognize that the control may have been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal input period reaches 30 seconds. If not, it is possible to recognize that the RAM clear may not have been executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode. That is, when the input period of the security signal is about 30 seconds, it is possible that the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. If it is recognizable by the device and the security signal input period is less than 30 seconds, it is possible for the management device to recognize that it may have been temporarily controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal is input. If the period exceeds 30 seconds, the management device can recognize that the setting change mode may have been controlled. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish what kind of control the gaming machine has executed on the external side depending on the output period of the security signal of the gaming machine.

Therefore, even if the external device is configured not to assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and the processing based on the setting change corresponding signal input is not executed, it is at least based on the security signal input. Therefore, the possibility that the RAM clear is executed and the possibility that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled can be recognized separately.

As shown in FIG. 9-40 (3), the security signal may not be output during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode. In this configuration, a security signal is output during the period controlled in the setting change mode, but no security signal is output during the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode, and a period controlled in the setting change mode. Includes a configuration that does not output a security signal and does not output a security signal even during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode. Specifically, when the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the 7th terminal, but the security signal is not output from the 10th terminal. Then, when the setting change corresponding signal is turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is maintained in the OFF state based on the fact that the RAM clear is not executed. That is, when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is not output on condition that the RAM clear is not executed.

In this way, in a configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode, RAM clear is executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (5). In this case (NO in step S21TM1320 or NO in step S21TM1330), the security signal is turned ON for 30 seconds from the end of the setting confirmation mode (OFF state of the setting change corresponding signal).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (4), the security signal may not be output during the period controlled by the setting change mode. That is, when the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the 7th terminal, but the security signal is not output from the 10th terminal. Then, based on the fact that the RAM clear is executed with the end of the setting change mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off. If the security signal is not output during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the RAM is cleared without shifting to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on. The security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on, but the setting change corresponding signal is not turned on.

In this way, during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal is set to the ON state, while the security signal is set to the OFF state, and when the RAM clear is executed, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. By turning on the security signal for 30 seconds after the setting confirmation mode ends (after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off), when one signal is on, the other signal is turned off. It becomes a relationship. Due to such a relationship, the signal output control is simplified (the output control is simplified because both signals are not turned on at the same time), and the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is clarified in the external device. It is possible to clearly recognize that the initialization process has been executed when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (6), when the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, the game is played from the second terminal. A machine frame / door frame opening signal is output, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Then, with the closing of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the game is completed based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. Even after the machine frame / door frame opening signal is turned off, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds.

Here, in the example of the pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), the setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal and the security signal is output from the 10th terminal. It may be difficult to assign an output terminal dedicated to a signal that supports setting changes because there are restrictions on the allocation of. In the example of pattern 2 shown in FIG. 9-39 (2), an example in which a setting change corresponding signal is also output from the tenth terminal from which the security signal is output is shown.

In the pattern 2, the first terminal to the sixth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the ninth terminal are the same as the signal allocation in the pattern 1. In the pattern 2, unlike the pattern 1, a high base signal is output from the seventh terminal. The high base signal is turned on when it is controlled to the high base state. A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that turns on for 30 seconds when the initialization process (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is executed when the power is turned on. In addition, when fraudulent activity is detected, it is turned on for 4 minutes. When fraudulent activity is detected, for example, an abnormal winning case is included, and each winning opening has an abnormal frequency (for example, a game ball is played at the first starting winning opening at a frequency of 15 times or more per 30 seconds. Based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize (such as when a prize is won), it is judged as an abnormal prize. In addition, the case where a switch abnormality detection occurs is also included, and the period during which the switch corresponding to each winning opening is in the winning detection state is abnormal (for example, the game control timer interrupt processing is performed 10 times or more continuously. 1 It is determined that the switch abnormality is detected based on (such as when the start port switch is in the ON state). When abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor, the ON state continues until the power is turned off based on the error of the game stop target, and when the abnormal magnetism is no longer detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is cleared), it will be ON for 4 minutes.

Further, in the example of FIG. 9-39 (2), a setting change corresponding signal is output from the tenth terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is a signal that is turned on during the period controlled by the setting change mode and is also turned on during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode. Further, as will be described later, the setting change corresponding signal can be output in a pulse shape (special mode) after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, and the set value is specified on the external device side by the number of pulses at that time. It is possible. Therefore, a security signal and a setting change corresponding signal are output from the tenth terminal. That is, the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal are output from the common terminal.

By being able to output the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal from the tenth terminal in this way, it is possible to notify the outside of the possibility of fraudulent activity, and an output terminal dedicated to the setting change corresponding signal is provided. It is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that the mode has been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the processing related to the setting change may have been executed). In addition, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the setting change corresponding signal output from the 10th terminal is temporarily turned off (when the RAM clear is executed, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. The signal output from the 10th terminal turns off 30 seconds after the end), and then from the same 10th terminal, the number of pulses corresponding to the current setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 Since the setting change correspondence signal is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside. Then, since the setting change corresponding signal is transmitted to the management device together with the game machine number (unit number) via the relay device provided on the gaming machine island, the setting value based on the unit number and the setting change corresponding signal in the management device. By displaying in association with the preset value determined in advance, it is possible to perform a process of displaying in a contrastable manner. As a result, the manager of the game store can easily manage the actual setting values of the plurality of gaming machines via the management device, and the setting values determined in advance by the administrator and the settings changed in the setting change work. The administrator can understand the inconsistency with the value. When such inconsistency occurs, it is possible to optimize the management of the settings of a plurality of gaming machines in the gaming store by confirming the settings of the gaming machine or changing the settings again. it can.

As described above, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off when the setting change mode ends and the setting confirmation mode ends, but then corresponds to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102. It is output in a special mode. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-41, a number of pulses corresponding to the set value is output as a signal corresponding to the setting change of the special mode. In this example, the same number of pulses as the number of set values are output. The pulse width is, for example, 0.1 seconds. For example, when the set value is 3, pulses having a width of 0.1 seconds are output three times at predetermined intervals (for example, 0.5 second intervals). As a result, the set value of each gaming machine can be easily specified in an external device such as a hall computer.

As shown in FIG. 9-42 (1), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on as the setting change mode is controlled when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the setting change mode is completed without changing the setting value. With the end of the setting change mode, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off, but based on the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 being 1, the setting change corresponding signal of a special mode is used. 1 pulse is output as.

In this way, it is possible to notify the outside whether or not the setting change mode is controlled by the setting change corresponding signal, and the setting value at the end of the setting change mode (when the setting value is changed). It is possible to notify the outside of the changed setting value), and the signal notifying whether or not the setting change mode is controlled and the signal notifying the setting value are output from the common information output terminal. Is possible.

Further, in the present embodiment, not only when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are terminated, a number of pulses corresponding to the set value are output as a setting change corresponding signal of the special mode at a predetermined predetermined trigger. To. Specifically, events related to the gaming state, such as being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, ending the jackpot gaming state, ending the high base state, and increasing the number of prize balls paid out by 1000. At that time (predetermined event), triggered by an event related to the gaming machine error, such as the detection of the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, the detection of the opening of the glass door frame 3a, or the detection of a magnetic anomaly. (When it occurs), a special mode setting change corresponding signal corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is output. In the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (1), one pulse is output as a setting change corresponding signal of a special mode triggered by the occurrence of a big hit.

This makes it possible to secure an opportunity for the external device to grasp the set value of each gaming machine. For example, the external device may not properly input the setting change corresponding signal at the end of the setting change mode. Even if the set value cannot be specified on the side, the set value can be specified at a predetermined opportunity thereafter, and the prevention of fraud in which the set value is changed by an inappropriate method can be strengthened.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (2), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on because the setting change mode is controlled when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, as a result of changing the set value in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed from 1 to 3. In this case, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off with the end of the setting change mode, and the setting change is supported based on the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 being 3. 3 pulses are output as a signal. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (2), 3 pulses are output as a setting change corresponding signal of a special mode triggered by the occurrence of a big hit.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (1), the operation of changing the set value (operation of the setting changeover switch 21TM052) was not performed while the setting change mode was controlled, and the set value was not changed. In the case and as shown in FIG. 9-41 (2), an operation of changing the set value (operation of the setting changeover switch 21TM052) was performed while the setting change mode was controlled, and the set value was changed. In either case, after the setting change mode ends, the number of pulse-shaped setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is output. There is. In this way, when the setting change mode is controlled, a common signal output process is executed at the end of the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the setting change operation or the setting value is actually changed. , Signal output processing can be simplified.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (3), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on because the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Since the set value is not changed in the setting confirmation mode, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 remains 1. In this case, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode, and the setting change corresponding signal is based on the fact that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is 1. 1 pulse is output as. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (3), one pulse is output as a setting change corresponding signal of a special mode triggered by the occurrence of a big hit.

In this way, it is possible to notify the outside whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled by the setting change corresponding signal, and the setting value notified in the setting confirmation mode (the setting value of the RAM 102 is stored when the power is turned on). It is possible to notify the outside of the setting value (the setting value stored in the area and displayed on the display monitor 21TM029), and the signal notifying whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled and the setting value. It is possible to output a signal notifying the above from a common information output terminal.

In the information terminal allocation pattern 2 shown in FIG. 9-39 (2) described above, when the RAM clear is executed with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the signal output from the tenth terminal is output. , It turns off 30 seconds after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and then from the same 10th terminal, the number of pulses corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (special mode). ) Setting change correspondence signal will be output.

(Modification example of game control main processing)
Next, other modes related to the game control main processing of FIGS. 9-11 to 9-13 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-43 and 9-44. Although FIGS. 9-11 to 9-13 show an example in which the initialization process (RAM clear) is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and FIG. 9- As shown in 43 and FIG. 9-44, after the initialization process (RAM clear) is executed, the mode may shift to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 9-11, when the CPU 103 sets the RAM 102 to the accessible state (step S21TM1060), the process proceeds to step S21TM2110 in FIG. 9-43, and the clear input is input via the input port. The state of the output signal (clear signal) of the switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is confirmed (step S21TM2110).

When the ON state is detected in the status check of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM2110), the CPU 103 has the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. The RAM clear flag indicating that the operation has been performed is set (step S21TM2210), and the initialization process is executed (step S21TM2220). The series of processes associated with the initialization process (processes shown in steps S21TM2220 to S21TM2270) are the same as the processes shown in steps S21TM141-10 and S21TM1460 shown in FIGS. 9-13, and description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, when the OFF state is detected in the status confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 in step S21TM2110 (NO in step S21TM2110), the CPU 103 executes the processes after step S21TM2120. To do. The process shown in step S21TM2120 to step S2170 is the same as the process shown in step S21TM1320 to step S21TM1370 shown in FIG. 9-13, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON after transmitting the backup command at the time of power-off recovery in step S21TM2170 or after transmitting the initialization command at the time of power-on in step S21TM2270. (Step S21TM2310 in FIG. 9-44). If the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM2310; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM2550. When the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM2310; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on. (Step S21TM2320).

When the RAM clear flag is set, that is, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed. (Step S21TM2330 to step S21TM2400). That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The processing status is controlled to the setting change mode based on the setting change mode. The processes shown in steps S21TM2330 to S21TM2400 related to the setting change mode are the same as the processes shown in steps S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200 in FIG. 9-12, and the description thereof will be omitted. Then, after executing the process of step S21TM2400, the set RAM clear flag is erased (step S21TM2410), and the process proceeds to step S21TM2550.

If the RAM clear flag is not set, that is, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 confirms the setting so that the set value can be confirmed. The mode shifts to (step S21TM251-10 to step S21TM2540). That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, but does not satisfy the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Based on this, the processing status is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. The process shown in step S21TM251-10 to step S21TM2540 related to the setting confirmation mode is the same as the process shown in step S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240 of FIG. Then, when it is confirmed in step S21TM2540 that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (YES in step S21TM2540), the process proceeds to step S21TM2550.

Here, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on, it is assumed that NO is determined in step S21TM2120 or step S21TM2130 in FIGS. 9-43, and the initialization process (step S21TM2220 or later) is performed. The RAM clear flag is not set even when the process of) is executed. As a result, it is determined as NO in step S21TM2320, and the mode does not shift to the setting change mode. In this way, even when the initialization process (initialization of the game state by clearing the RAM) is executed, when the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on is not satisfied. Is not controlled in the setting change mode.

After the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is completed, or when the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state when the power is turned on, a series of processes related to steps S21TM2550 to S21TM2620 are performed in steps S21TM1470 to 1470 shown in FIGS. 9-13. This is the same as the series of processes shown in step S21TM1540, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-43 and 9-44, when the setting change mode is controlled, the CPU 103 transmits a power-on initialization command (step S21TM2270) and then a setting change mode command (step S21TM2340). ) Is transmitted, and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM2550). When controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command after transmitting a backup command at the time of power failure recovery or an initialization command at the time of power on (step S21TM2170 or step S21TM2270) (step). S21TM2520) is transmitted, and a setting command is transmitted (step S21TM2550). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command after receiving the setting change mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp. It is possible to notify the end of the setting change mode by an effect device such as 9. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command after receiving the setting confirmation mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp. It is possible to notify the end of the setting confirmation mode by an effect device such as 9. According to such a configuration, by receiving the setting command without providing a dedicated command (setting change mode end command or setting confirmation mode end command) for designating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended. Since it is possible to specify that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended on the effect control CPU 120 side, the number of commands can be suppressed. That is, the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 can be reduced, and the capacity for storing the number of commands can be suppressed.

(Another variant of the feature 21TM)
In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the switch for changing the set value is common to the clear switch for initializing the gaming machine (RAM clear), but the setting value is not limited to such a form. The switch for changing the above is provided on the main board 11 (the operation can be detected by the game control microcomputer 100), and is different from the clear switch for initializing the game machine (RAM clear). It may be. With such a configuration, the positions of the switch for switching the set value and the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) are compared with the case where the switch for switching the set value is provided on the power supply board. When changing the set value, the confirmation of the set value and the switching operation according to the confirmation of the set value become easy, and the workability can be improved.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the set value is displayed in a partial display area (first display unit 21TM029A) of the display monitor 21TM029 on which the aggregated game information such as the base is displayed is shown. Not limited to such a form, a display device different from the display monitor 21TM029 that displays the total game status, for example, a dedicated display device for displaying a set value, which is provided on the main board 11. The set value may be displayed on a 7-segment display or the like. According to such a configuration, the aggregated game information and the set value can be grasped individually and more clearly, so that the work of changing the set value according to the aggregated game information can be easily performed. Therefore, workability can be improved.

Further, while a clear switch for initializing the gaming machine (RAM clear) is provided, a switch for changing the set value may not be provided. In such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 automatically changes the setting values to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) in order when the setting change mode is controlled (for example,). (Change every 5 seconds in the order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6), and when the lock switch 21TM051 changes from the ON state to the OFF state, it is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A). The set value (setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is stored in the setting value storage area (the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is stored in the setting information temporary storage area). The set value may be fixed by overwriting with the set value. The clerk at the amusement park switched the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state at the timing when the set value to be confirmed was displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A), and was displayed at that time. The set value can be fixed as the set value of the gaming machine.

In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine 1 that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media to the upper plate or the lower plate based on the occurrence of winning, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. It may be an enclosed gaming machine in which a gaming medium is enclosed in the gaming machine and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. In this enclosed gaming machine, the information periodically transmitted from the main board 11 to the card unit 21TM050 via the payout control board 21TM037 may include information regarding the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. For example, it is controlled to the setting change mode, it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, it is within the period controlled to the setting change mode, it is within the period controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the setting value. Information indicating that an operation for changing the above has been performed, that the setting change mode has ended, that the setting confirmation mode has ended, and the like may be included. Further, the information output circuit 112 may transmit such information to a management device such as a hall computer so that the hall computer can specify that each gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. ..

In the above embodiment, the period is controlled by the image display device 5 or the like connected to the effect control board 12, the setting change mode is controlled, the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and the like. However, the game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a form, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special are based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode. The symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20, etc. may be used to notify that the setting change mode is controlled (for example, the 7-segment display is made to emit light in the first notification mode), and the setting confirmation mode may be used. The first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20, etc. notify that the setting confirmation mode is controlled (for example, 7). The segment display may emit light in a second notification mode different from the first notification mode). Further, the pachinko game machine 1 is instructed to display the number of rounds during the big hit game (round number display) and to instruct the player to launch the game ball into a specific area of the game area (for example, the game area on the right side). When a display (right-handed display) or the like is provided, these displays indicate that the processing of the setting change mode is being executed and that the processing of the setting confirmation mode is being executed. It may be made to emit light according to the mode.

In the above embodiment, when the security signal is turned on when controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and then the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the security is secured. An example is shown in which the security signal is continuously turned on for 30 seconds after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode without the signal being turned off, but the setting change mode is not limited to this mode. Or, when the security signal is turned on when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and then the RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. As a result, the security signal may be temporarily turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then the security signal may be turned on for a specific period (for example, 30 seconds). By adopting such a signal output method, it is possible to clearly specify the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in an external device such as a hall computer, and it is clear that the RAM clear has been executed. Can be specified.

Regarding the expectation degree suggestion effect shown in FIG. 8-5, each effect mode (black star) depends on the set value of the gaming machine (set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) and the jackpot expectation degree. The selection ratio of) may be changed. For example, even when the jackpot expectation is low, when the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high (for example, in the case of 5 or 6), the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is low (for example, in the case of 5 or 6). An expectation suggestion effect in which the number of black stars is 3 or more may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of 1 or 2). With such an effect configuration, even if the display result is lost, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high because the expected degree suggestion effect with 3 or more black stars is executed. Can be expected from the player, and the player can be made to pay attention to the effect mode (the number of black stars) when the expectation degree suggestion effect is executed. Further, even if the reach has a low expectation of a big hit, the player can perform the expectation suggestion effect with a large number of black stars (for example, 3 or more), so that the player can use the pachinko gaming machine 1 to perform the effect. Since it can be expected that the set value is high, it is possible to improve the interest even when the jackpot expectation is low.

In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a medal is inserted to set a predetermined number of bets, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player to play the game. When a player stops a symbol in response to an operation of a stop button and the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, big) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of a bonus, a regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.). In such a slot machine, the rate at which the bonus is established differs depending on the set value, and the set value can be changed by controlling the slot machine to the setting change mode, and the set value can be changed by controlling the setting confirmation mode. It can be confirmed.

[Details and other forms of the feature 21TM]
Next, details regarding the above-mentioned feature unit 21TM and other forms will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a gaming machine frame. The gaming machine frame includes a gaming machine frame 3, a glass door frame 3a, and an outer frame (not shown). Further, the gaming machine frame is provided with a hinge mechanism portion (not shown) on one end side (for example, the left side when viewed from the player) in the left-right direction, and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a each have a hinge mechanism portion as a fulcrum. The other end side in the left-right direction (for example, the right side when viewed from the player) is rotatably connected in the direction away from the outer frame. By rotating the glass door frame 3a like a door with the hinge mechanism portion as a fulcrum, the inner portion of the outer frame including the game area of the game board 2 can be opened. On the other end side (for example, the right side when viewed from the player) of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, a lock mechanism for fixing the other end side to the outer frame is provided.

Further, the outer frame is made of metal and is a frame body that serves as an outer shell portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is a frame made of synthetic resin to which the gaming board 2 is attached, and has a substantially rectangular frame shape in which the center is penetrated when viewed from the front. The game board 2 is attached to the game machine frame 3 from the front. The gaming board 2 attached to the gaming machine frame 3 is locked by a fixing device so as not to come off from the gaming machine frame 3. The gaming machine frame 3 is a frame in which speakers 8L, 8R, a gaming effect lamp 9, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, and the like are arranged. The glass door frame 3a is provided with a glass plate (corresponding to a window portion) as a see-through window that protects the game board surface and allows the game area on the front surface of the game board 2 to be visually recognized.

When a clerk at the game hall performs maintenance on the surface of the game board (for example, measures to clear the ball jam), the glass door frame 3a is hinged from the closed state where the other end is fixed (locked) to the outer frame. It is necessary to open the other end side away from the outer frame by rotating the mechanism portion (one end side) toward the front side like a door with the mechanism portion (one end side) as a fulcrum. In order for the clerk of the game hall to operate the power switch 21TM055, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the display changeover switch 21TM030, etc. arranged on the back side of the game board 2, and to visually recognize the display monitor 21TM029. By rotating the gaming machine frame 3 from the closed state in which the other end side is fixed (locked) to the outer frame to the front side like a door with the hinge mechanism portion (one end side) as a fulcrum. It is necessary to open the other end side away from the outer frame.

When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can identify that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, a detection signal capable of identifying that the glass door frame 3a is in the open state is output to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. On the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be recognized separately.

(Processing when power is turned on)
10-1 and 10-2 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed by the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. This is a process corresponding to the processes shown in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-43 to 9-44. However, among the processes shown in FIGS. 9-11 and the like, some processes (for example, the processes shown in FIG. 9-11) are not shown.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM3010). This process is the same as the process shown in step S21TM1330 of FIG. 9-13 and step S21TM2130 of FIG. 9-43, and performs a parity check as a data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM3020). The setting changing flag is set when the process shifts to the setting change / confirmation process described later (step S21TM3510), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM3710).

If the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM3020), the CPU 103 matches the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 with a regular value, for example, 1 to 6. It is confirmed whether or not (step S21TM3030). Here, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shipped from the gaming machine manufacturer (before it is installed in the game hall), a value different from the above regular value (for example, 0) is stored in the set value storage area. There may be. Also, if the data in the set value storage area is corrupted, it may not be a regular value. If the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM3030), it is confirmed whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM3040).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3040), the CPU 103 clears the area excluding the set value storage area and sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM3050). In the RAM clear process in step S21TM3050, the data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, hold storage, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared. , The initial value is set, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear process. In addition, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated value for each set value is not cleared. The value does not change before the RAM clearing process. Then, by displaying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029 or the like, it is notified that the game state has been initialized. Note that the notification that the game state has been initialized may be performed before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and as described above, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. It may be done.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command specifying that the initialization process has been performed (step S21TM3055), and proceeds to step S21TM3060. The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the initialization process has been performed based on the reception of this initialization command. Upon receiving the initialization command, the effect control CPU 120 may notify that the game state and the like have been initialized in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. It is possible.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3040), the CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command at the time of restoration) as a command at the time of power supply restoration (step S21TM3045). The process proceeds to step S21TM3060. Based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of restoration), the effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the restoration from the power failure has been performed based on the data at the time of power supply stop. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, the effect device recovers from the power failure based on the data when the power supply is stopped. It is possible to notify that.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM3060). Here, as described above, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening. A detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected are output from the sensor 21TM300 to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected. When it recognizes that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, the game control microcomputer 100 is notified that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, so that the game control microcomputer 100 side. , The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

The gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opening state of the glass door frame 3a, which is a detection signal indicating that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, for the game control microcomputer 100. When the configuration is such that a detection signal indicating that is output (that is, when the game control microcomputer 100 includes the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300), the game control microcomputer 100 has these. By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3060), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM3070). .. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3070), the process proceeds to the process after step S21TM3510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 10-2. When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the set value can be confirmed and changed, and when the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode, the set value can be confirmed.

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), the power is not cut off during the setting change (NO in step S21TM3020), and the set value is a normal value (step). S21TM3030 YES), the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM3060), and the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM3070), and the set value is changed and / or It becomes possible to confirm, and the process proceeds to the normal game process on condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM3060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3070). ..

In the present embodiment, although the change of the set value is not permitted, in order to make it possible to confirm the set value (setting confirmation mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (1) 2) Two conditions are required that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. When it is confirmed by the determination process of step S21TM3060 and step S21TM3070 that all of the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, the CPU 103 is in a state where the set value can be confirmed (setting confirmation). It is possible to shift to mode). Further, in addition to these conditions (1) and (2), further, on the condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is determined to be in the ON state (YES) in step S21TM3040 (3). As will be described later, it is possible to shift to a state in which the set value can be changed (setting change mode).

As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the gaming board 2, and must be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. I can't. If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, there is an abnormality in the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, or something is wrong. There is a possibility that the set value is being confirmed or changed by means. In such a state, it is inappropriate to allow confirmation or change of the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode. And it is not controlled by any of the setting change modes.

In the present embodiment, as the condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although it is controllable, it is not limited to such a form, and even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode It may not be controlled by any of the above.

On the other hand, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM3060 (NO in step S21TM3060), that is, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. If it is in the closed state, it shifts to the normal game processing. Further, when it is confirmed in step S21TM3070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3070), the process proceeds to the normal game process. With the transition to the normal game processing, the processing corresponding to steps S21TM1470 to S21TM1540 shown in FIG. 9-13 or steps S21TM2550 to S21TM2620 shown in FIG. 9-44 can be executed, and FIG. 9-14 shows. The indicated game control timer interrupt process can be executed (special symbol process process, etc. can be executed).

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM3010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM3010), the CPU 103 indicates that the set value stored in the set value storage area may be abnormal. The indicated set value abnormality error command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). Here, even if a regular value (1 to 6) is stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is damaged, step S21TM3110 is executed. The CPU 103 and the effect control CPU 120 recognize that the value stored in the set value storage area may be inappropriate.

If it is confirmed in step S21TM3020 that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM3020), the CPU 103 transmits a setting value abnormality error command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). ).

Further, in step S21TM3030, when the regular value (1 to 6) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM3030), the CPU 103 stores 0 in the set value storage area (step S21TM3100). ), The setting value abnormality error command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). Even if the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM3010) in the data check of the backup RAM area (YES in step S21TM3010), if the regular value (1 to 6) is not stored in the set value storage area. , 0 is set as the setting value, and the setting value error error command is transmitted.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value abnormality error command, the image display device 5 notifies that the setting value may be abnormal (for example, displays a message "The setting value is abnormal"). To do). Further, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the set value should be changed (for example, displays a message "Please change the set value"). The speakers 8L and 8R may be used to notify that the set value may be abnormal (for example, a voice saying "the set value is abnormal" is output), and the set value is changed. It is also possible to notify that the state should be (for example, output a voice saying "Please change the set value").

When the CPU 103 transmits the set value abnormality error command, it confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM3120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3120), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM3130). ..

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3130), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM3140).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3140), the CPU 103 clears the area including the set value storage area and sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM3150). In the RAM clear process in step S21TM3150, the data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, hold storage, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared. , The initial value is set, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is also cleared, and 0 is stored in the set value storage area. On the other hand, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each of these set values is not cleared. The aggregated value is unchanged from before the RAM clearing process. Then, by displaying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029 or the like, it is notified that the game state has been initialized.

Then, after executing the RAM clear (step S21TM3150), the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command (step S21TM3160), and the processing after step S21TM3510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 10-2. Move to. The backup command (step S21TM3045) at the time of power-off recovery and the initialization command (step S21TM3055 or step S21TM3160) at the time of power-on are commands that are transmitted only once when the power is turned on. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits these power-on commands, it is possible to identify that the power-on commands have been transmitted, and set a command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. , The command transmission flag may be cleared when the process shifts to the normal game process (step S21TM1470 to). Then, only when the command transmission flag is not set, the backup command at the time of power failure recovery (step S21TM3045) and the initialization command at the time of power on (step S21TM3055 or step S21TM3160) may be transmitted.

On the other hand, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM3120 (NO in step S21TM3120), that is, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. If it is in the closed state, the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200). If it is confirmed in step S21TM3130 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3130), the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200). If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3140), the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200).

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM3010), when the power is cut off during the setting change (that is, when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on). If either YES is determined in step S21TM3020) or the set value is not a regular value (NO in step S21TM3030), the game should not be played in this state. Before shifting to the normal game processing, it is necessary to fix the set value of the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the area including the set value storage area is cleared by clearing the RAM (step S21TM3150), and the mode is shifted to the setting change mode.

In the present embodiment, in order to make the set value changeable (setting change mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. (3) Three conditions are required that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. The CPU 103 is in a state where the set value can be changed when it is confirmed by the determination processing of step S21TM3120, step S21TM3130, and step S21TM3140 that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied. It is possible to shift to the setting change mode).

If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value of the set value storage area can be fixed to a regular value. Therefore, it is not possible to shift to normal game processing. Therefore, if NO is determined in any of the determination processes of step S21TM3120, step S21TM3130, and step S21TM3140, the power is temporarily turned off and the next power is turned on (1) to (3). All the conditions of are satisfied, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the setting value of the setting value storage area is fixed to a regular value.

If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 transmits a command to notify the effect control CPU 120 that the power supply should be turned off. You may try to do it. Then, the effect control CPU 120 that has received this command may display a message (for example, the characters "Please turn off the power") prompting the image display device 5 to turn off the power. .. Further, when any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 predetermined the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also possible to urge the power to be turned off by emitting light in the power off instruction mode.

Next, the processes related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIG. 10-2. In the process of FIG. 10-2, the CPU 103 sets a setting changing flag indicating that the setting value may have been changed (step S21TM3510). Since the area in which the value of the setting changing flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting changing flag is retained even when the power is turned off.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM3520). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3520), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (step S21TM3530). .. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM3530), the CPU 103 outputs a setting change corresponding signal and a security signal (step S21TM3540), and displays the set value stored in the set value storage area. It is displayed on the monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM3550).

Further, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM3570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3570), that is, if RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has not been executed, the CPU 103 specifies that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled. A command is transmitted (step S21TM3580), and the process proceeds to step S21TM3520. The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM3570), that is, if RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the CPU 103 is set to specify that the setting change mode has been controlled. A change mode command is transmitted (step S21TM3585), and it is confirmed whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM3590). The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

If the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM3590), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM3520. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM3590), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM3600), and moves to step S21TM3520. Transition.

Here, the output of the security signal (step S21TM3540), the display of the current setting value (step S3550), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM3580) can be executed, but the setting change mode command is transmitted (step S21TM3585). ) And the state in which the update of the set value (step S21TM3600) cannot be executed corresponds to the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed or the set value cannot be changed. That is, in the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM3530), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO is determined in step S21TM3040, and the RAM clear flag is flagged. Is still 0).

In addition, the security signal can be output (step S21TM3540) and the current set value can be displayed (step S3550), and the setting change mode command can be transmitted (step S21TM3585) and the set value can be updated (step S21TM3600). The state corresponds to the setting change mode in which the setting value can be confirmed and changed. That is, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM3530), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3040 or step S21TM3140). It is controlled based on (the RAM clear flag is set to 1).

The setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits the setting confirmation mode command, it is possible to identify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted, and the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off should be set. , When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM3710), the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once when the setting change mode is controlled. Therefore, the CPU 103 should set the setting change mode command transmission flag which can identify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted when the setting change mode command is transmitted and which does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. , When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM3710), the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

In step S21TM3530, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (YES in step S21TM3530), the CPU 103 clears the setting changing flag (step S21TM3710). Here, since the setting changing flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not set (NO) in the processing of step S21TM3020 executed thereafter, so that it is possible to shift to the normal game processing. Become.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting command for designating the set value stored in the set value storage area to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3720). As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. In addition, it is possible to suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value.

Next, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM3730), and confirms whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM3740).

Here, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3740), the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), and the power is cut off during the setting change. It is determined that there is no (NO in step S21TM3020) and the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM3030), and further, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (step S21TM3040). Since NO) and RAM clear (step S21TM3050) have not been executed, it is sufficient to execute the normal process at the time of power restoration, and both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. When it is confirmed that this (NO in step S21TM3060), the normal game processing may be started.

On the other hand, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM3740), it means that RAM clear was executed in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150, and the lock switch 21TM051 is temporarily turned off. If the regular set value (1 to 6) is not stored in the set value storage area before (before it is determined as YES in step S21TM3530) (for example, in the setting change mode while the set value remains 0). (When the operation of changing the set value is not performed, etc.), it is necessary to shift to the setting change mode and store the regular set value (1 to 6) in the set value storage area. Therefore, the CPU 103 shifts to the power-on processing again, and executes the processing after step S21TM3010.

As shown above, the clerk of the amusement park puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 into the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. It is possible to control and initialize the gaming state and the like (execute the RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). Further, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming state, etc. Is not initialized (NO is determined in step S21TM3040 or step S21TM3140, and RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 is not executed). In this way, the clerk of the game hall can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also can select whether to initialize the game state or the like. There is.

In the control shown in FIG. 10-2, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off (NO in step S21TM3530) in the state of being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming machine frame 3 and When all the glass door frames 3a are closed, NO is determined in step S21TM3520, and the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in a state of waiting to be opened. At this time, the game control microcomputer 100 operates a command for instructing the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a to be opened, and the lock switch 21TM051 to confirm the setting change mode or the setting. A command instructing the user to notify that the mode should be terminated may be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Then, in the effect control CPU 120 that has received these commands, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the like notify that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a should be opened, and the lock switch 21TM051 is pressed. Notify that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode should be terminated by operation. For example, the image display device 5 may display the message "Open the gaming machine frame 3 and set the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state to end the setting change mode."

Further, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game processing is started, when both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 A lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120 according to the operation (from the OFF state to the ON state), and (2) the setting changeover switch (2) Clear switch) In response to the operation of 21TM052 (from the OFF state to the ON state), the game control microcomputer 100 sends a setting changeover switch operation command to the effect control CPU 120. Become.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-38 (2), the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) is set based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command. Even though neither the change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, it is possible to identify that the operation for changing the set value has been performed and notify the fact. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "lock switch operation has been detected." In addition, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." Is executed. As a result, the clerk of the amusement park clearly understands that the operation for changing the set value has been performed even though it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and is illegal. It is possible to confirm whether or not is performed.

Not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game processing is started. The lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. In this way, during the period when the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not confirmed. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the game control microcomputer 100.

FIG. 10-3 is an explanatory diagram showing changes in the set values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. When controlled to the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed in step S21TM3550. At this time, if a value different from the normal value (0 in this example) is stored in the set value storage area, the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029 is used as shown in FIG. 10-3 (1). Is displayed with the letter "E". Therefore, the clerk of the amusement park operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (performs the setting change operation), knowing that at least the regular value is not stored in the set value storage area.

Every time the clerk of the amusement park operates the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM3590), the set value stored in the set value storage area is updated (step S21TM3600). In this example, for the sake of explanation, an example in which the normal setting value is in the range of 1 to 3 is shown. In this case, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is 0 for each setting change operation. The information is updated in the order of → 1 → 2 → 3 → 1, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is updated in the order of E → 1 → 2 → 3 → 1.

In this way, when the value stored in the set value storage area is not a regular value, information different from the number (alphabet E in this example) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as information corresponding to this. Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to clearly understand that a value different from the normal value is stored in the setting value storage area and prompt the setting change operation. If a value different from the regular value (0 in this example) is stored in the set value storage area and the value (0 in this example) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, the manager of the amusement park May misunderstand that the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 corresponds to any of the regular values, and may turn off the lock switch 21TM051 without performing the setting change operation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a value different from the normal value is stored in the set value storage area, information different from the number (alphabet E in this example) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. , We prevent such misunderstandings and make sure that the setting change operation is performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (1), when the setting change mode is controlled, if a value different from the normal value (0 in this example) is initially stored in the setting value storage area. , The character "E" is displayed on the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029, but after that, if the setting change operation is performed even once and the regular value is stored in the setting value storage area, then In addition, no matter how many times the setting change operation is performed, the setting value is updated within the range of the regular setting value during the period controlled by the setting change mode (until the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off). This is done, and a value different from the regular value (0 in this example) is not stored in the set value storage area, and information different from the regular value (character E in this example) is also stored in the display monitor 21TM029. ) Is not displayed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (2), when the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is a normal value when controlled in the setting change mode, step S21TM3550 Then, the regular setting value (2 in this example) stored in the setting value storage area is displayed. In this example, for the sake of explanation, an example in which the regular setting value is in the range of 1 to 3 is shown. The information is updated in the order of → 3 → 1 → 2 → 3, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is updated in the order of 2 → 3 → 1 → 2 → 3.

That is, when the setting change mode is controlled, if the setting value initially stored in the setting value storage area is a normal value, no matter how many times the setting change operation is performed thereafter. During the period controlled to the setting change mode (until the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off), the set value is updated within the range of the regular set value, and the set value storage area is the normal value. Different values (0 in this example) are not stored, and information different from the regular values (character E in this example) is not displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

For example, when the gaming machine maker ships the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installation in the game hall), a value different from the regular value (0 in this example) is set in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. Therefore, after that, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, if the set value is not changed to a regular value through the setting change mode, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be played. become unable. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game hall, the setting change operation can be surely performed and the set value can be fixed to a regular value.

In addition, when the pachinko machine maker ships the pachinko game machine 1 (before installation in the game hall), the setting changing flag is set in advance, and then the game hall side goes through the setting change mode. Unless the set value is changed to a regular value and the setting change mode is terminated, the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be played. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game hall, the setting change operation can be surely performed and the set value can be fixed to a regular value.

(Restriction on ball lending based on detection of open state of gaming machine frame or glass door frame)
Next, the ball lending restriction method when the glass door frame 3a is in the open state when the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 10-4. FIG. 10-4 shows the main board 11, when the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370), and the card unit 21TM050.

In the example of FIG. 10-4, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. The PRDY signal is not turned on. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, the state is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, the game control microcomputer). Even in the state of being electrically connected to the 100), the CPU 103 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state but turns it into the OFF state during the period when the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

As a result, the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, and while the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 into the ON state, but maintains it in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, Since the EXS signals are both in the OFF state and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, the ball lending (paining of the game medium) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

In this way, while the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal is turned on. It is designed not to be done. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control of the game medium from being executed by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Then, the clerk of the game hall closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a in order to make the pachinko game machine 1 playable, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can be used. The provided gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, and also does not detect the open state of the glass door frame 3a. As both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being ON. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, and executes the subsequent payout control of the ball lending.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and can be opened by a predetermined key operation. Since it is not possible to operate the pachinko game machine 1 unless the pachinko machine 1 is set to the open state, the game machine frame 3 must be set to the open state in order to control the pachinko game machine 1 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. That is, the gaming machine frame 3 is usually open during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected includes a period in which the setting change mode is controlled and a period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

Here, since the transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involve power off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power on, the state of the gaming machine. If the payout control corresponding to the ball lending process or the prize ball process is executed in such an unstable state, an appropriate amount of game media corresponding to the payout request can be paid out. May not be. In order to prevent the disadvantage of the player in such a situation, it is appropriate to limit the payout control in the gaming machine controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. However, in order for the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side to grasp the control status to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode on the game control microcomputer 100 side, commands and judgment processing for that purpose are required, and the control is complicated. There is a problem that it becomes a computer.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected during the period when the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. During this period, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is prevented from executing the ball lending process and the prize ball process. As a result, the payout control is not executed regardless of whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting change mode and whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting confirmation mode. As a result, the ball lending process and the prize ball process are restricted during the period controlled by the setting change mode and the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode without complicating the control on the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side. To. With such a configuration, appropriate payout control is realized for ball lending processing and prize ball processing.

In this way, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected. By limiting the payout control during the period, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems associated with the payout control, such as the inability to pay out an appropriate number of gaming media corresponding to the payout request, and the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is possible to smoothly proceed with the maintenance work of the gaming machine when the door is opened.

(Resuming ball lending after the open state detection is completed)
Next, the payout is interrupted because the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened while the ball lending is being executed, and then the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. The processing in the case of the above will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 10-5. In the example shown in FIG. 10-5, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state while the gaming medium is being paid out. , The payout of the gaming medium is interrupted, and the suspended payout is resumed based on the fact that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is no longer in the open state (closed).

FIG. 10-5 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) is executing the payout of the game medium. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXE signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

When the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the gaming medium, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is provided. Switches the PRDY signal from the ON state to the OFF state based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

The unpaid number is updated based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the unpaid number is a payout number count switch from a predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25). It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

During the period when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a PRDY signal. Is not turned on. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state but turns it into the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, during the period when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the card unit 21TM050 is based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, even if the ball rental switch 21TM062 is operated, the BRDY signal is not output to the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 into the ON state, but maintains it in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is in the period of detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, any of the PRDY signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, and EXE signal Is also in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, so that the game medium is not paid out.

When it is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door). (When it is detected that the open state of the frame 3a is completed), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

Then, based on the fact that both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed (the PRDY signal is turned ON), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the above, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes 0. As a result, the payout of the gaming medium, which has been interrupted by the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, is completed.

Therefore, out of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process executed before the power outage occurs (that is, the number of payouts specified from the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the payout is made. Since the payout is executed for the number of unpaid pieces that have not been paid out, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a disadvantage for the player.

(Ball lending process when power failure occurs (without shifting to setting change mode))
Next, with reference to FIG. 10-6, the processing when the payout is interrupted due to the power failure occurring during the ball lending execution and the mode is not controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is specified. To explain. In the example shown in FIG. 10-6, the payout of the game medium is interrupted based on the power failure occurring during the payout of the game medium, and the game medium is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is turned on. After the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the suspended payout is restarted.

FIG. 10-6 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) is executing the payout of the game medium. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXE signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

If a power failure occurs during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. To. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Here, the clerk of the game hall turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the game machine frame 3 in order to turn on the power. At this time, when initializing the pachinko gaming machine 1, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is further operated. After that, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes the power-on processing. In this example, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 was in the OFF state when the power was turned on, the processes after step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. 10-1 are executed without being controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It shall be. Here, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10-1.

In the payout control board 21TM037, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 is used to open the game machine frame 3. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal because the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state but turns it into the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 into the ON state, but maintains it in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXE signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, so that the period during which the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state ( During the period during which the PRDY signal is in the OFF state), the game medium is not paid out.

When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned ON. When possible, turn on the PRDY signal. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a when the connection confirmation signal is turned ON. The PRDY signal is turned on on condition that the signal is not turned on.

As described above, after the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 after the power is turned on. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not it is controlled in the setting change mode and whether or not it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode. The game medium is not paid out. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, By keeping the PRDY signal in the OFF state instead of turning it ON, the ball lending process is prevented from being executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state during the period when the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

When the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk at the amusement hall usually removes the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a after confirming that the RAM clear has been executed. Since the closed state is set, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in the open state even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON (step S21TM1480 or later). In such a case, even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON, the PRDY signal is turned OFF based on the detection that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected. ..

When the clerk of the game hall closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal ON and the game machine frame / door frame open. The PRDY signal is turned ON based on the fact that the sensor 21TM300 has not detected any of the open states of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Then, based on the fact that the PRDY signal is turned on, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the unpaid number is increased. The payout operation is performed one by one until the data becomes 0. As a result, the payout of the gaming medium, which has been interrupted due to the occurrence of the power failure and the subsequent opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, is completed. In this way, when the power supply is cut off during the execution of ball lending and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed when the power is restored thereafter. As a condition, it is possible to resume the withdrawal of the suspended game medium and complete the ball lending.

(Ball lending process when power failure occurs (shift to setting change mode))
FIG. 10-7 (1) is a block diagram showing a connection example of a RAM clear signal line on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the main board 11, and the payout control board 21TM037. In the example shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is the game control microcomputer. It is input to the I / O 105 of the computer 100 and the I / O 21TM372f of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. That is, the clerk of the game hall initializes the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 by operating the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, and initializes the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Both the RAM clear and the RAM clear will be executed.

Next, regarding the processing when the payout is interrupted due to the power failure occurring during the ball lending execution and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored, FIG. 10-7 (2) Will be specifically described with reference to. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. It shall be transmitted. In the example shown in FIG. 10-7 (2), when the power is cut off during the payout of the game medium, the payout during execution is stopped, and the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored. Occasionally, the payout is not restarted, and even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the payout is restarted based on the execution of the RAM clear targeting the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. do not.

FIG. 10-7 (2) shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXE signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

If a power failure occurs during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. To. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 based on the EXS signal being turned off, and interrupts the payout of the game medium. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Here, the clerk of the game hall turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the game machine frame 3 in order to turn on the power. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (further, to initialize the pachinko gaming machine 1), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and , Clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. Further, in order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

After that, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes the power-on processing. In this example, the lock switch 21TM051 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

In the payout control board 21TM037, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 is used to open the game machine frame 3. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

After that, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state but turns it into the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 controls payout even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. The BRDY signal is not output to the board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 into the ON state, but maintains it in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXE signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. While the process is being executed, the game medium is not paid out even if the unpaid number of data is not cleared.

After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated, and the processes after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 10-2 are executed. When the RAM clear process is executed, it is notified that the RAM clear process has been executed. Further, in this example, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is erased (cleared).

Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10-1, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned ON. When possible, turn on the PRDY signal. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a when the connection confirmation signal is turned ON. The PRDY signal is turned on on condition that the signal is not turned on.

As described above, after the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 after the power is turned on. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not it is controlled in the setting change mode and whether or not it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode. The game medium is not paid out. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, By keeping the PRDY signal in the OFF state instead of turning it ON, the ball lending process is prevented from being executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state during the period when the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk at the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. The gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is still in the ON state (step S21TM1480 or later) after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. It may be open. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. The PRDY signal is turned off based on the above.

When the clerk of the game hall closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is in the ON state of the connection confirmation signal (processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). The PRDY signal is turned on based on the fact that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 has not detected any of the opening states of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. And.

In this example, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on), the payout control is used. Since the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 has not been cleared in the microcomputer 21TM370 (because there is a remaining game medium to be paid out). Based on the fact that the PRDY signal is turned on, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the data of the unpaid number is obtained. The payout operation is performed one by one until it becomes 0. As a result, the gaming medium was interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Payment is completed. In this way, when the power is cut off during the execution of ball lending and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the data of the number of unpaid pieces is not cleared at the time of the subsequent power recovery, and the setting is also made. On condition that the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the suspended game medium payout is resumed and the ball lending is completed. Is possible.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (2), when the RAM clear targeting the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on. In the case), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has cleared the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining number to be paid out). Even when the PRDY signal is turned on (because there is no game medium), the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The data of the unpaid quantity stored in the payout quantity storage buffer is initialized. In this way, by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the data of the number of unpaid items is initialized, so that the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode before the power is cut off (when the power is restored). Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process executed in (previous) (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the number has not been paid out. No payouts will be made for the number of payouts.

Therefore, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the data of the number of unpaid numbers stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is accompanied by the execution. Is initialized, so that it is possible to simplify the management of data of a predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process or the prize ball process.

As shown above, when the payout is interrupted due to a power failure occurring during the execution of the ball lending process, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The unpaid number of data will be stored in the buffer. Here, by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the unpaid number of data is cleared, so that the suspended payout is forcibly terminated (cancelled) without being restarted. That is, when the power is restored, the number of unpaid items is not paid out during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, or after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends.

(Modified example of ball lending process (shift to setting change mode) when power failure occurs)
FIG. 10-8 (1) is a block diagram showing a connection example of a RAM clear signal line in the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and the main board 11, and the clear switch 21TM052a and the payout control board 21TM037. In the example shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), the above-mentioned clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is provided corresponding to the main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control), and corresponds to the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, another clear switch 21TM052a different from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is provided. That is, the main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) and the payout control board 21TM037 are provided with independent clear switches.

When the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is input to the I / O 105 of the game control microcomputer 100. When the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052a is input to the I / O 21TM372f of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

If the game hall clerk initializes the game control microcomputer 100 and does not initialize the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch is turned on. 21TM052a is turned off. On the contrary, when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized without initializing the game control microcomputer 100, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off and cleared when the power is turned on. The switch 21TM052a is turned on. When the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned on and the clear switch 21TM052a is also turned on when the power is turned on. And.

Next, regarding the processing when the payout is interrupted due to the power failure occurring during the ball lending execution and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored, FIG. 10-8 (2). Will be specifically described with reference to. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on to initialize the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100, and the clear switch 21TM052a is set when the power is turned on. By being operated, the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized. In the example shown in FIG. 10-8 (2), when the power is cut off during the payout of the game medium, the payout during execution is stopped, and the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored. Occasionally, the payout is restarted based on the fact that the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished without restarting the payout. ..

FIG. 10-8 (2) shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXE signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

If a power failure occurs during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. To. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 based on the EXS signal being turned off, and interrupts the payout of the game medium. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Here, the clerk of the game hall turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the game machine frame 3 in order to turn on the power. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (further, to initialize the game control microcomputer 100), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. In addition, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also set to the ON state. Further, in order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

After that, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes the power-on processing. In this example, the lock switch 21TM051 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

In the payout control board 21TM037, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 is used to open the game machine frame 3. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

After that, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state but turns it into the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 controls payout even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. The BRDY signal is not output to the board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 into the ON state, but maintains it in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXE signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. While the process is being executed, the game medium is not paid out even if the unpaid number of data is not cleared.

After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated, and the processes after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 10-2 are executed. When the RAM clearing process in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, it is notified that the RAM clearing has been executed. Further, in this example, when the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is operated at the time of turning on the power, the RAM clear signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is erased (cleared).

Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10-1, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned ON. When possible, turn on the PRDY signal. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a when the connection confirmation signal is turned ON. The PRDY signal is turned on on condition that the signal is not turned on.

As described above, after the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 after the power is turned on. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not it is controlled in the setting change mode and whether or not it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode. The game medium is not paid out. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, By keeping the PRDY signal in the OFF state instead of turning it ON, the ball lending process is prevented from being executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state during the period when the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk at the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. The gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is still in the ON state (step S21TM1480 or later) after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. It may be open. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. The PRDY signal is turned off based on the above.

When the clerk of the game hall closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal ON and the game machine frame / door frame open. The PRDY signal is turned ON based on the fact that the sensor 21TM300 has not detected any of the open states of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (2), when the RAM clear targeting the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated when the power is turned on). ), When the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on). Even if there is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not clear the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining game to be paid out). Based on the fact that the PRDY signal is turned on (because of the existence of the medium), the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. , The payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the number of unpaid pieces becomes 0. As a result, the gaming medium was interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Payment is completed. In this way, when the power is cut off during the execution of ball lending and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the data of the number of unpaid pieces is not cleared at the time of the subsequent power recovery, and the setting is also made. On condition that the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the suspended game medium payout is resumed and the ball lending is completed. Is possible.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear targeting the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 backs up in the RAM 21TM302. When the PRDY signal is turned ON because the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the area is cleared (because there is no remaining game medium to be paid out). Also, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to the game control microcomputer 100, but is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not done. Therefore, since the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated, even if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the data is paid out. If the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the control board 21TM037 is not operated, the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is displayed in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not initialized. In this way, whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed regardless of whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on. (Regardless of), if the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated, the data of the unpaid number is not initialized and is executed before the power failure occurs (before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode due to the power restoration). Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the number of unpaid games that have not been paid out is , The payout will be executed.

Therefore, regardless of whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the data of the number of unpaid numbers stored in the RAM 21TM302 is not initialized, so that the ball can be rented. It is possible to appropriately protect the data of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the processing or the prize ball processing.

As shown above, when the payout is interrupted due to a power failure occurring during the execution of the ball lending process, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The unpaid number of data will be stored in the buffer. Here, even if the clear switch 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated when the power is turned on, if the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid number of data is maintained without being cleared. Therefore, the suspended payout is resumed, and the payout of the unpaid number of game media is completed. That is, after the power is restored, after a period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the unpaid number of payouts is executed.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the open state detection signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 may be provided on the main board 11 (a detection signal in the open state is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In such a configuration, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is based on the fact that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Then, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped (switched from the ON state to the OFF state). As a result, based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the ball lending by turning the PRDY signal into the OFF state or by not turning the EXS signal into the ON state. Prevent it from being done.

(Restriction on payout of prize balls based on detection of open state of gaming machine frame or glass door frame)
Next, a method of restricting the payout of prize balls when the glass door frame 3a is in the open state when the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 10-9. FIG. 10-9 shows a game control microcomputer when the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is a timing diagram which shows the transmission / reception of the signal between the computer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. As shown in FIG. 10-9, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the received ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is transmitted. Receives the connection OK command as. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 retransmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal 1 s (1 second) after the reception time. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-mentioned connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

At this time, when a clerk of the game hall opens the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the game machine frame 3 or the glass door. The open state of the frame 3a is detected. In the state where the game machine frame 3 is open (and the glass door frame 3a is open if the glass door frame 3a and the upper plate are integrated), the prize ball to be paid out. Since the path through which the prize balls flow down and the upper plate on which the prize balls that have flowed down are stored are not physically connected, if the prize balls are paid out in this state, the game medium reaches the upper plate. It falls without doing it.

In the example of FIG. 10-9, game control is performed when the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. The microcomputer 100 has detected the passage of the game medium for any of the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, and the large winning opening. The prize ball number command as a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, but the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Then, the payout control of the game medium is not executed, and the prize ball preparing command as the received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. This prize ball preparation command is issued until the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. The transmission is continued to the game control microcomputer 100 until the closed state is reached.

In this way, while the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming medium is the winning opening. Even if the winning is detected, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not execute the payout control of the prize ball without driving the payout motor 21TM289. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control of the game medium from being executed by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, the prize ball preparing command as the received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

Then, the clerk of the game hall closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a in order to make the pachinko game machine 1 playable, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can be used. The provided gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, and also does not detect the open state of the glass door frame 3a. As both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 drives the payout motor 21TM289 when the payout operation is possible, and the game machine frame 3 or the glass. The payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls (the number specified by the prize ball number command) according to the winning within the period in which the open state of the door frame 3a is detected is executed. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out a predetermined number of game media transmits a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal.

(Resume paying out prize balls after detection of open state)
Next, the payout is interrupted because the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened while the prize ball is being paid out, and then the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened. The processing in the closed state will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 10-10. In the example shown in FIG. 10-10, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state while the gaming medium is being paid out. , The payout of the gaming medium is interrupted, and the suspended payout is resumed based on the fact that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is no longer in the open state (closed).

As shown in FIG. 10-10, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the received ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is transmitted. Receives the connection OK command as. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 retransmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal 1 s (1 second) after the reception time. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-mentioned connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), the game The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command. During the period when the number of prize balls specified by this prize ball number command is paid out, the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened, and the game machine frame / door frame provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is provided. Based on the opening sensor 21TM300 detecting the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 and interrupts the payout of the gaming medium. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

The unpaid number is updated based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the unpaid number is a payout number count switch from a predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14). It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, which detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, does not execute the payout control of the game medium, and issues a command for preparing a prize ball as a received ACK signal for game control. It is transmitted to the microcomputer 100. This prize ball preparation command is issued until the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. The transmission is continued to the game control microcomputer 100 until the closed state is reached.

As described above, during the period when the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 even during the execution of the payout of the game medium. Do not pay out game media. Then, the prize ball preparing command as the received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

When the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed (game machine frame 3 or glass door). When it is detected that the open state of the frame 3a is finished), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is connected to the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the fact that the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. Based on the contents of the stored unpaid number storage buffer, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes 0. As a result, the payout of the gaming medium, which has been interrupted by the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, is completed.

(Prize ball processing when a power failure occurs (without shifting to the setting change mode))
Next, with respect to the processing when the payout is interrupted due to the power failure occurring while the prize ball is being paid out and the mode is not controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, FIG. 10-11 is used. Will be explained concretely. In the example shown in FIG. 10-11, the payout of the game medium is interrupted based on the fact that the power is cut off during the payout of the game medium, and the game medium is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is turned on. After the connection confirmation signal is turned on and the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the suspended payout is resumed.

As shown in FIG. 10-11, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the received ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is transmitted. Receives the connection OK command as. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 retransmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal 1 s (1 second) after the reception time. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-mentioned connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), the game The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command. If a power failure occurs during the period during which the number of prize balls specified by this prize ball number command is being paid out, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so that the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the game is played. Suspend the withdrawal of media. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Here, the clerk of the game hall turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the game machine frame 3 in order to turn on the power. At this time, when initializing the pachinko gaming machine 1, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is further operated. After that, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes the power-on processing. In this example, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 was in the OFF state when the power was turned on, the processes after step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. 10-1 are executed without being controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It shall be. Here, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10-1.

In the payout control board 21TM037, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 is used to open the game machine frame 3. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

Since the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is in the OFF state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the payout motor 21TM289 in the stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, the period during which the CPU 103 is executing a predetermined process to be the power-on process (after the power is turned on, the serial is not controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode), as shown in FIG. During the communication circuit setting process (period until the execution of the communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480)), since the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, the payout of the game medium is maintained in the interrupted state.

As a result, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, so that the period during which the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state (after the power is turned on, the serial communication circuit setting process shown in FIG. 10-1 (step) During the period until S21TM1480) is executed), the game medium is not paid out.

When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned ON. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the unpaid number data becomes 0. Do. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a when the connection confirmation signal is turned ON. It is assumed that the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to perform the payout operation on condition that the payout motor 21TM289 is not used.

As described above, after the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 after the power is turned on. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not it is controlled in the setting change mode and whether or not it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode. The game medium is not paid out. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the prize ball processing is prevented from being executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven during the period when the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

When the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk at the amusement hall usually removes the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a after confirming that the RAM clear has been executed. Since the closed state is set, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in the open state even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON (step S21TM1480 or later). In such a case, even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON, the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped based on the detection that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected. The state is set and the payout of the game medium is not executed.

When the clerk of the game hall closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal ON and the game machine frame / door frame open. Based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a is detected by the sensor 21TM300, the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are added. Based on this, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the number of unpaid pieces becomes 0. As a result, the payout of the gaming medium, which has been interrupted due to the occurrence of the power failure and the subsequent opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, is completed. In this way, when the power is cut off during the payout of the prize balls and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed when the power is restored thereafter. On condition that, it is possible to resume the suspended payout of the game medium and complete the payout of the prize balls.

(Prize ball processing when power failure occurs (shift to setting change mode))
Next, regarding the processing when the payout is interrupted due to the power failure occurring while the prize ball is being paid out and the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, FIG. 10-12 is shown. It will be specifically described using. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. It shall be transmitted. In the example shown in FIG. 10-12, when the power is cut off during the payout of the game medium, the payout during execution is stopped, and when the control is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored. The payout is not restarted, and even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the payout is not restarted based on the execution of the RAM clear targeting the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

As shown in FIG. 10-12, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the received ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is transmitted. Receives the connection OK command as. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 retransmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal 1 s (1 second) after the reception time. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-mentioned connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), the game The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command. If a power failure occurs during the period during which the number of prize balls specified by this prize ball number command is being paid out, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so that the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the game is played. Suspend the withdrawal of media. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Here, the clerk of the game hall turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the game machine frame 3 in order to turn on the power. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (further, to initialize the pachinko gaming machine 1), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and , Clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. Further, in order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

After that, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes the power-on processing. In this example, the lock switch 21TM051 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

In the payout control board 21TM037, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 is used to open the game machine frame 3. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

After that, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the payout motor 21TM289 in the stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, the period during which the CPU 103 is executing a predetermined process (setting change mode or setting confirmation mode), which is the process when the power is turned on, is controlled, and the serial communication circuit setting process shown in FIG. 10-1 (step S21TM1480). ) Is stopped, so that even if the data on the number of unpaid numbers is not cleared, the state in which the payout of the game medium is interrupted is maintained. It will be.

After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated, and the processes after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 10-2 are executed. When the RAM clear process is executed, it is notified that the RAM clear process has been executed. Further, in this example, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is erased (cleared).

Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10-1, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned ON. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the unpaid number data becomes 0. I do. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a when the connection confirmation signal is turned ON. It is assumed that the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to perform the payout operation on condition that the payout motor 21TM289 is not used.

As described above, after the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 after the power is turned on. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not it is controlled in the setting change mode and whether or not it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode. The game medium is not paid out. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the prize ball processing is prevented from being executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven during the period when the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk at the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. The gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in the open state even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON (step S21TM1480 or later). In such a case, even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON, the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped based on the detection that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected. It becomes a state.

When the clerk of the game hall closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is in the ON state of the connection confirmation signal (processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). The payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. Let me.

In this example, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on), the payout control is used. Since the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 has not been cleared in the microcomputer 21TM370 (because there is a remaining game medium to be paid out). The payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the unpaid number data becomes zero. As a result, the gaming medium was interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Payment is completed. In this way, when the power is cut off during the payout of the prize balls and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the data of the number of unpaid pieces is not cleared at the time of the subsequent power restoration. On the condition that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the suspended game medium payout is resumed and the prize ball is paid out. Is possible to complete.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-12, when the RAM clear targeting the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on). This is because the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has cleared the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining game medium to be paid out is (Because it does not exist), the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The data of the unpaid quantity stored in the payout quantity storage buffer is initialized. In this way, by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the data of the number of unpaid items is initialized, so that the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode before the power is cut off (when the power is restored). Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the prize ball processing executed in (previous) (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14), the number has not been paid out. No payouts will be made for the number of payouts.

As shown above, when the payout is interrupted due to a power failure occurring during the execution of the prize ball processing, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The unpaid number of data will be stored in the buffer. Here, by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the unpaid number of data is cleared, so that the suspended payout is forcibly terminated (cancelled) without being restarted. That is, when the power is restored, the number of unpaid items is not paid out during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, or after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends.

(Modified example of prize ball processing (shift to setting change mode) when power failure occurs)
Next, regarding the processing when the payout is interrupted due to the power failure occurring while the prize ball is being paid out and the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, FIG. 10-13 is shown. It will be specifically described using. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on to initialize the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100, and the clear switch 21TM052a is set when the power is turned on. By being operated, the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized. In the example shown in FIG. 10-13, when the power is cut off during the payout of the game medium, the payout during execution is stopped, and when the control is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored. After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed without restarting the payout, the payout is restarted based on the fact that the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 10-13, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the received ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is transmitted. Receives the connection OK command as. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 retransmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal 1 s (1 second) after the reception time. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-mentioned connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), the game The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command. If a power failure occurs during the period during which the number of prize balls specified by this prize ball number command is being paid out, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so that the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the game is played. Suspend the withdrawal of media. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Here, the clerk of the game hall turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the game machine frame 3 in order to turn on the power. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (further, to initialize the game control microcomputer 100), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. In addition, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also set to the ON state. Further, in order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

After that, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes the power-on processing. In this example, the lock switch 21TM051 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

In the payout control board 21TM037, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 is used to open the game machine frame 3. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

After that, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the payout motor 21TM289 in the stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, the period during which the CPU 103 is executing a predetermined process (setting change mode or setting confirmation mode), which is the process when the power is turned on, is controlled, and the serial communication circuit setting process shown in FIG. 10-1 (step S21TM1480). ) Is stopped, so that even if the data on the number of unpaid numbers is not cleared, the state in which the payout of the game medium is interrupted is maintained. It will be.

After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated, and the processes after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 10-2 are executed. When the RAM clearing process in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, it is notified that the RAM clearing has been executed. Further, in this example, when the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is operated at the time of turning on the power, the RAM clear signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is erased (cleared).

Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10-1, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned ON. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the unpaid number data becomes 0. I do. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a when the connection confirmation signal is turned ON. It is assumed that the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to perform the payout operation on condition that the payout motor 21TM289 is not used.

As described above, after the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 after the power is turned on. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not it is controlled in the setting change mode and whether or not it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode. The game medium is not paid out. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the prize ball processing is prevented from being executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven during the period when the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk at the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. The gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is still in the ON state (step S21TM1480 or later) after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. It may be open. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. Based on the above, the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped.

When the clerk of the game hall closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal ON and the game machine frame / door frame open. The sensor 21TM300 starts driving the payout motor 21TM289 based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a is detected in the open state.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (2), when the RAM clear targeting the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated when the power is turned on). ), When the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on). Even if there is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not clear the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining game to be paid out). (Because there is a medium), the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and one piece until the unpaid number data becomes 0. The payout operation is performed one by one. As a result, the gaming medium was interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Payment is completed. In this way, when the power is cut off during the payout of the prize balls and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the data of the number of unpaid pieces is not cleared at the time of the subsequent power restoration. On the condition that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the suspended game medium payout is resumed and the prize ball is paid out. Is possible to complete.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear targeting the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 backs up in the RAM 21TM302. Since the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the area is cleared (because there is no remaining game medium to be paid out), the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout is performed. Does not work.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to the game control microcomputer 100, but is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not done. Therefore, since the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated, even if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the data is paid out. If the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the control board 21TM037 is not operated, the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is displayed in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not initialized. In this way, whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed regardless of whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on. (Regardless of), if the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated, the data of the unpaid number is not initialized and is executed before the power failure occurs (before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode due to the power restoration). Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the prize ball processing (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14), the number of unpaid games that have not been paid out is , The payout will be executed.

As shown above, when the payout is interrupted due to a power failure occurring during the execution of the prize ball processing, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The unpaid number of data will be stored in the buffer. Here, even if the clear switch 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated when the power is turned on, if the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid number of data is maintained without being cleared. Therefore, the suspended payout is resumed, and the payout of the unpaid number of game media is completed. That is, after the power is restored, after a period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the unpaid number of payouts is executed.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the open state detection signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 may be provided on the main board 11 (a detection signal in the open state is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the fact that the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Even if a prize is detected, the prize ball number command is not sent. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 based on the fact that the prize ball number command is no longer received, so that the payout of the prize balls is not executed.

(Output period of security signal and signal corresponding to setting change)
As described above, in the example of the pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), the security signal can be output from the tenth terminal. With this security signal, as described above, it is possible to notify the outside of the possibility that the initialization process (RAM clear), the detection of fraudulent activity, the detection of the game stop target error, and the like have been performed. Further, for the security signal, from the start of the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode to the end of the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and the transition to the normal game processing (for example, FIGS. 10-1 and 10-1 and FIG. It is turned on during the period from step S21TM3510 shown in 10-2 until it is determined as NO in step S21TM3060 or step S21TM3070 and the normal game process is executed).

Further, in the example of the pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), the setting change corresponding signal can be output from the seventh terminal. The setting change corresponding signal starts from the start of the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode until the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and shifts to the normal game processing (for example, FIGS. 10-1 and 10-1 and FIG. It is turned on during the period from step S21TM3510 shown in 10-2 until it is determined as NO in step S21TM3060 or step S21TM3070 and the normal game process is executed). By this setting change correspondence signal, it is possible to notify the outside that the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been executed (the processing related to the change or confirmation of the setting value has been executed). Further, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends (when shifting to the normal game processing), the setting change corresponding signal output from the 7th terminal is once turned off, and then from the same 7th terminal, the RAM 102 Since the number of pulsed setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the current set value stored in the set value storage area is output, the set value can be notified to the outside.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (1), when the mode shifts to the setting change mode accompanied by RAM clear (for example, step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 shown in FIG. 10-1) when the power is turned on, A setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the 10th terminal. Then, based on the execution of the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150), the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the setting change mode ends and the normal game processing is started. In addition, with the end of the setting change mode (to be exact, at the timing when 50 ms have passed since the setting change mode ended and the normal game processing was started), the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off. Based on the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 being 2, a pulse of 2 is output as a setting change corresponding signal of a special aspect.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (2), although the RAM clear (for example, step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 shown in FIG. 10-1) was executed when the power was turned on, the mode did not shift to the setting change mode. In this case, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds from the time when the power is turned on (when the RAM is cleared), but the setting change corresponding signal is not turned on.

In this way, the security signal is also in the ON state during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, even if the external device is configured not to assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and the processing based on the setting change corresponding signal input is not executed, it is at least based on the security signal input. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the mode may have been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

As shown in FIGS. 10-15 (3) and (4), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished. (To be exact, 50 ms has passed since the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode was completed and the normal game processing was started). The security signal is also turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, but as shown in FIG. 10-15 (3), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed. The OFF state is not immediately turned off after the setting change mode is finished, and the ON state is continued for 30 seconds even after the setting change mode is finished. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (4), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is not executed, when the setting confirmation mode ends (to be exact, the setting confirmation mode ends). Then, the OFF state is set (at the timing when 50 ms have elapsed since the transition to the normal game processing).

Further, in any of FIGS. 10-15 (3) and (4), the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends (to be exact, the setting change). The setting value of the RAM 102 is stored after 50 ms has elapsed from the end of the mode or the setting confirmation mode and the transition to the normal game processing (for example, after 50 ms or more have elapsed). Based on the setting value stored in the area being 2, 2 pulses are output as a setting change corresponding signal of a special aspect. As a result, the set value of each gaming machine can be easily specified in an external device such as a hall computer.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (2), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed and the setting change mode is not entered, the security signal is sent when the power is turned on (RAM). It will be in the ON state for 30 seconds from (when clearing is executed).

Therefore, on the external device side to which the security signal is input, when the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, but the mode does not shift to the setting change mode. It is recognizable that there is a possibility. On the other hand, if the security signal input period exceeds 30 seconds, there is a possibility that the mode has changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (in particular, it is highly possible that the mode has changed to the setting change mode accompanied by clearing the RAM. If the security signal input period does not reach 30 seconds, it is possible that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has not been executed and the mode has shifted to the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to recognize that (there is a possibility that only confirmation was performed without changing the set value).

That is, when the input period of the security signal is about 30 seconds, the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) may have been executed, but the setting change mode may not have been entered. If it is recognizable by the management device of the above and the input period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it is possible that the setting confirmation mode is entered without executing the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). If the management device can recognize that (there is a possibility that only confirmation was performed without changing the set value) and the security signal input period exceeds 30 seconds. , The management device can recognize that there is a possibility of shifting to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (particularly, there is a high possibility of shifting to the setting change mode accompanied by clearing the RAM). In this way, it is possible to distinguish what kind of control the gaming machine has executed on the external side depending on the output period of the security signal of the gaming machine.

Therefore, even if the external device is configured not to assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and the processing based on the setting change corresponding signal input is not executed, it is at least based on the security signal input. Therefore, the possibility that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has been executed and the possibility that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has been controlled and the possibility of being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be recognized separately.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state when the power is turned on, so that RAM clear is always executed (step S21TM3050). Or step S21TM3150). As a result, the output period of the security signal is about the period controlled by the setting change mode + about 30 seconds. On the other hand, when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state and the RAM clear flag is in the 0 state (YES in step S21TM3570) when the power is turned on. RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has not been executed. As a result, the output period of the security signal is the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode (more accurately, the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode + about 50 ms).

In this way, the security signal output period differs between when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode and when it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, so that each gaming machine changes the setting on the external device side. It is possible to distinguish whether it is controlled by the mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the setting change corresponding signal is turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished (to be exact, the setting change mode). Alternatively, the OFF state is set (at the timing when 50 ms has elapsed since the setting confirmation mode ends and the normal game processing is started). Therefore, on the external device side, the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be specified by the input period of the setting change corresponding signal. In addition, when the input period of the security signal is about 30 seconds longer than the input period of the signal corresponding to the setting change, it is recognized that the setting change mode has been controlled and the RAM has been cleared accordingly. It is possible, and when the input period of the setting change corresponding signal and the input period of the security signal are the same period, it is possible to recognize that the setting confirmation mode is controlled without clearing the RAM.

In this way, the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal are output from different output terminals, and on the external device side to which these signals are input, a predetermined event (RAM clear in this example) is performed in the gaming machine. Can be identified by distinguishing between the occurrence of the above and the fact that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Then, the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be clearly specified, and whether the control period is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be specified based on the input period of the security signal.

Next, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 was in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 was in the OFF state when the power was turned on, the setting was confirmed without the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). The setting confirmation mode ends because the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off within 50 ms after the mode is entered and the setting confirmation mode is started (for example, after the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM3510). Then, it is assumed that the normal game processing is started.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (5), a setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal starting from the timing when the setting confirmation mode is started, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the 10th terminal. Is output. Then, less than 50 ms after the setting confirmation mode is started, even if the setting confirmation mode ends (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off) and the normal game processing is started, the period is at least 50 ms or more. The setting change correspondence signal and the security signal are continuously output. That is, once the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are turned on, the ON state is maintained for at least 50 ms.

Assuming that the period during which the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are ON is less than the predetermined period (50 ms in this example), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation on the external device side such as the hall computer. It becomes difficult to recognize that the mode has been changed. By turning on the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal for at least a predetermined period (50 ms in this example) regardless of the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode as in the present embodiment. On the external device side, it is possible to recognize that each pachinko gaming machine 1 has shifted to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Regarding the setting change compatible signal, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the setting change compatible signal is output in a special mode with a pulse width of 100 ms, so that each pachinko machine is output on the external device side such as a hall computer. The set value of the gaming machine 1 can be specified and managed. If the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is less than 50 ms, the setting change corresponding signal is switched to the OFF state in less than 50 ms after being turned on, and then the set value is set. When the configuration is such that the number of pulses with a width of 100 ms corresponding to the set value stored in the storage area is output, the period during which the external device is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (less than 50 ms). The setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is erroneous by recognizing only the setting change corresponding signal of the special mode (pulse width is 100 ms) that cannot be recognized and is output after that. There is a risk of recognizing it. Regardless of the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode as in the present embodiment, at least for a predetermined period (50 ms in this example), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on to the external device side. Then, the set value of each pachinko gaming machine 1 can be accurately specified.

FIG. 10-16 is a diagram showing another example of the effect device included in the effect control board 12. In this example, unlike the example shown in FIG. 2, the lamp control board 14 has the game effect lamp 9, the off-screen first hold indicator 21TM101, the off-screen second hold indicator 21TM102, and the fourth symbol indicator. The 21TM103 and the setting change status indicator 21TM104 are connected to each other, and both of them are composed of a light emitting device such as an LED. Further, all of these light emitting devices are provided outside the screen frame of the image display device 5. The effect control CPU 120 controls the light emission of these light emitting devices via the lamp control board 14. In this example, it is assumed that all of these light emitting devices emit light in a common light emitting color.

The off-screen first hold display 21TM101 is composed of two light emitting devices. The effect control CPU 120 has a change in the first reserved storage number, that is, when a prize is generated in the first start winning opening (when the first reserved storage number increases), and the first special symbol. When the display result is confirmed after the variable display of the above is completed (when the first reserved storage number decreases), the first reserved storage number for which the updated first reserved storage number is specified from the game control microcomputer 100. When the designated command is received, the off-screen first hold display 21TM101 is made to emit light in a manner corresponding to the first hold storage number designated by the first hold storage number designation command.

For example, when the first hold storage number specified by the first hold storage number designation command is 1, one light emitting device is turned on and the other light emitting device is turned off. Further, when the first reserved storage number specified by the first reserved storage number designation command is 2, both light emitting devices are turned on. When the number of first reserved storages specified by the first reserved storage number designation command is 3, one light emitting device is set to the blinking state and the other light emitting device is set to the lighting state. Then, when the first hold storage number specified by the first hold storage number designation command is 4, both light emitting devices are brought into a blinking state.

The off-screen second hold display 21TM102 is composed of two light emitting devices. The effect control CPU 120 has a change in the second reserved storage number, that is, when a prize is generated in the second start winning opening (when the second reserved storage number increases), and a second special symbol. When the display result is confirmed after the variable display of the above is completed (when the second reserved storage number decreases), the second reserved storage number for which the updated second reserved storage number is specified from the game control microcomputer 100. When the designated command is received, the off-screen second hold display 21TM102 is made to emit light in a manner corresponding to the second hold storage number designated by the second hold storage number designation command.

For example, when the second hold storage number specified by the second hold storage number designation command is 1, one light emitting device is turned on and the other light emitting device is turned off. Further, when the second reserved storage number specified by the second reserved storage number designation command is 2, both light emitting devices are turned on. When the number of second reserved storages specified by the second reserved storage number designation command is 3, one light emitting device is set to the blinking state and the other light emitting device is set to the lighting state. Then, when the second hold storage number specified by the second hold storage number designation command is 4, both light emitting devices are brought into a blinking state.

The fourth symbol display 21TM103 is composed of two light emitting devices. Here, one of the light emitting devices is a fourth symbol variation display device corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A on the main board 11 side, and blinks at the timing when the variation display of the first special symbol is started (that is,). (Variation display) is started, and at the timing when the variation display of the first special symbol is completed, the light-off state or the lighting state is set (that is, the variation display is completed), and the display result is derived. The other light emitting device is a fourth symbol variation display device corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B on the main board 11 side, and blinks (that is, fluctuates) at the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol is started. (Display) is started, and at the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol is completed, the light-off state or the lighting state is set (that is, the variation display is completed), and the display result is derived.

The effect control CPU 120 receives a first hold storage number subtraction specification command that specifies that the first hold storage number has been subtracted when the variation display of the first special symbol is started, and a display result designation that specifies a display result. The variation display of the first special symbol is executed based on the reception of a set of commands, that is, a command and a variation pattern command for specifying the variation time of the special symbol, from the game control microcomputer 100. In addition, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol can be specified. Further, the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100 when the variation display of the first special symbol is completed and the display result is confirmed, and the first special symbol is used. It is possible to identify that the variable display of is completed and the display result is derived.

Here, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-mentioned one set of commands accompanying the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, one of the light emitting devices in the fourth symbol display 21TM103 blinks (that is, the variation display). Is started, and when the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command elapses, one of the light emitting devices is turned off or turned on (that is, the display result is confirmed) according to the reception of the symbol confirmation specification command. ). For example, when the display result of "missing" was specified by the display result specification command, one of the light emitting devices was turned off during the symbol confirmation period, and the display result of "big hit" was specified by the display result specification command. In that case, one of the light emitting devices is turned on during the symbol determination period.

The effect control CPU 120 receives a second hold storage number subtraction specification command that specifies that the second hold storage number has been subtracted when the variation display of the second special symbol is started, and a display result designation that specifies the display result. The second special symbol variation display is executed based on the reception of a set of commands, a command and a variation pattern command for specifying the variation time of the special symbol, from the game control microcomputer 100. In addition, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol can be specified. Further, the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100 when the variation display of the second special symbol is completed and the display result is confirmed, and the second special symbol is used. It is possible to identify that the variable display of is completed and the display result is derived.

Here, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-mentioned one set of commands accompanying the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, the other light emitting device in the fourth symbol display 21TM103 blinks (that is, the variation display). Is started, and when the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command elapses, the other light emitting device is turned off or turned on (that is, the display result is confirmed) according to the reception of the symbol confirmation specification command. ). For example, when the display result of "missing" was specified by the display result specification command, the other light emitting device was turned off during the symbol confirmation period, and the display result of "big hit" was specified by the display result specification command. In that case, the other light emitting device is turned on during the symbol determination period.

The emission color of the off-screen first hold indicator 21TM101 and the emission color of the off-screen second hold indicator 21TM102 may be different. For example, the former may be emitted in blue and the latter may be emitted in red. You may let it. Further, in the fourth symbol display 21TM103, the emission color of one light emitting device corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A and the emission color of the other light emitting device corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B are made different. For example, the former may be made to emit blue light (the same emission color as the first off-screen hold display 21TM101), and the latter may be emitted in red (the same emission color as the second off-screen hold indicator 21TM102). You may do so.

Further, an image showing the first reserved storage number (for example, an image showing the blue number "0-4") and an image showing the second reserved storage number (for example, an image showing the red number "0-4") are displayed as images. It may be displayed on the display device 5. In addition, when the image of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (for example, a square image, and the first special symbol is fluctuating and blinking (fluctuating) in white during the period when the first special symbol is fluctuating, and the display result is off Is an image that is stopped and displayed in blue during the symbol confirmation period, and if the display result is a big hit, it is stopped and displayed in red during the symbol confirmation period) and an image of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (for example, a square). The image is blinking (fluctuating) in yellow during the period when the second special symbol is fluctuating, and if the display result is off, it is stopped and displayed in blue during the symbol confirmation period, and the display result is a big hit. In this case, the image (the image stopped and displayed in red during the symbol determination period) may be displayed on the image display device 5.

The setting change status indicator 21TM104 is composed of one light emitting device. The effect control CPU 120 displays the setting change status at the timing when it receives the setting change mode command (see step S21TM3585 in FIG. 10-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the setting change mode is controlled. Turn on the device 21TM104. Then, when the setting command (see step S21TM3720 in FIG. 10-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received when the control to the setting change mode is completed, the setting change status indicator 21TM104 is turned off. To do.

The effect control CPU 120 changes the setting at the timing of receiving the setting confirmation mode command (see step S21TM3580 in FIG. 10-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. The status indicator 21TM104 is blinked. Then, when the setting command (see step S21TM3720 in FIG. 10-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received when the control to the setting confirmation mode is completed, the setting change status indicator 21TM104 is turned off. To do.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the setting change status indicator 21TM104 is controlled to the setting change mode (lighting state) and the setting confirmation mode is controlled (blinking state) by the light emitting mode of the setting change status indicator 21TM104. It has become. Here, as compared with the period from when the power is turned on until the image display control in the image display device 5 becomes possible by the display control unit 123, the lamp control board 14 emits light from each light emitting device after the power is turned on. The period until control becomes possible is extremely short. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9-17, the period during which it is not possible to notify that the image display device 5 is controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode (image by the display control unit 123). Even during the period before display control becomes possible), it is possible to notify that the setting change status indicator 21TM104 is controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode according to the light emission mode of the setting change status display 21TM104. It will be possible.

On the effect control board 12, not only the setting change status display 21TM104 but also the off-screen first hold display 21TM101, the off-screen second hold display 21TM102, and the fourth symbol display 21TM103 are played. By emitting light in a light emission pattern different from the normal light emission pattern at the time of operation, it may be notified that the setting change mode is controlled or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. For example, the setting change mode is controlled by turning on all the LEDs constituting the off-screen first hold display 21TM101, the off-screen second hold display 21TM102, and the fourth symbol display 21TM103. The setting confirmation mode is controlled by notifying and setting all the LEDs constituting the off-screen first hold display 21TM101, the off-screen second hold display 21TM102, and the fourth symbol display 21TM103 in a blinking state. May be notified.

On the other hand, on the main board 11 side, during the period controlled to the setting change mode, the CPU 103 performs the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, and the first special symbol. The display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display 20 are made to emit light in a light emission pattern different from the normal light emission pattern when the game is being performed (for example, all are turned on at the same time). ), It is possible to notify that the setting change mode is controlled. Further, during the period controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 performs the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second. The special symbol display device 4B and the normal symbol display 20 are made to emit light with a light emission pattern different from the normal light emission pattern when the game is being performed (and a light emission pattern different from that when the setting change mode is controlled). (For example, by making all of them blink at the same time), it is possible to notify that the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

[Explanation of feature 30TM]
Next, the feature unit 30TM will be described. FIG. 11-1 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the hold display and the active display. On the screen of the image display device 5, the first hold display area 30TM101 for displaying the first hold storage number (0-4 first hold display 30TM001) and the second hold storage number (0-4 second hold) are displayed. A second hold display area 30TM102 for displaying the display 30TM002) and an active display area 30TM103 for displaying the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the currently executing fluctuation display are provided. The first reserved display area 30TM101, the second reserved display area 30TM102, and the active display area 30TM103 are provided at the lower part of the screen, and the active display area 30TM103 is in the center and the left side when viewed from the player is the first reserved display area 30TM101. The right side is the second hold display area 30TM102.

When the first hold storage number is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first hold display 30TM001 in the first hold display area 30TM101 in a number corresponding to the first hold storage number. That is, in the first hold display 30TM001, the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning opening) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. Information corresponding to the variable display (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) of the first special symbol in which the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0) is not established. Is. When a plurality of first hold displays 30TM001 are displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101, the first hold display 30TM001 corresponds to the order close to the active display area 30TM103 (in order from the right when viewed from the player). The start condition of the variable display is satisfied.

Further, when the second hold storage number is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays the second hold display 30TM002 in the second hold display area 30TM102 in a number corresponding to the second hold storage number. That is, in the second hold display 30TM002, the start condition (for example, winning the second start winning opening) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. This is information corresponding to the variable display (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) of the second special symbol for which the second special symbol (the number of stored storages is not 0) is not established. When a plurality of second hold displays 30TM002 are displayed in the second hold display area 30TM102, the second hold display 30TM002 corresponds to the order closer to the active display area 30TM103 (from left to right when viewed from the player). The start condition of the variable display is satisfied.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 30TM003 in the active display area 30TM103 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed. That is, the active display 30TM003 is a big hit game because the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed) after the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning opening or the second start winning opening) is satisfied. This is information corresponding to the variable display (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) of the special symbol for which the state is not controlled and the number of reserved memories is not 0).

Further, in the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5 (on the left side when viewed from the player), an area different from the first hold display area 30TM101, and the first hold storage number (sub-hold display 30TM004 of 0 to 4) is displayed. The sub-hold display area 30TM104 to be displayed and the sub-active display area 30TM105 which is different from the active display area 30TM103 and displays the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed are provided.

In the present embodiment, based on the determination that the effect control CPU 120 displays the sub-hold display 30TM004 at the time of start winning (when a prize is generated in the first start winning opening), the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is designated. The sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the number of 1-hold storage is displayed, and the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105. That is, in the sub-hold display 30TM004, the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning opening) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. This is information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol in which the second reserved storage number is 0 and the first reserved storage number is not 0) is not established. Further, the sub-active display 30TM005 is controlled to the jackpot game state because the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed) after the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning opening) is satisfied. This is information corresponding to the variable display (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) of the first special symbol in which the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0). When a plurality of sub-hold displays 30TM004 are displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104, the variation corresponding to the sub-hold display 30TM004 is in the order closer to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (from the right when viewed from the player). The display start condition is satisfied.

Here, as shown in FIG. 11-1, the sub-hold display 30TM004 has a star-shaped contour, which is different from the first hold display 30TM001 (round display or triangular display). Since the size of the sub-hold display 30TM004 is smaller than that of the first hold display 30TM001, it is less noticeable and less visible to the player. Further, the sub-active display 30TM005 also has a star-shaped contour, which is different from the active display 30TM003 (round display or triangular display). Since the size of the sub-active display 30TM005 is smaller than that of the active display 30TM003, it is less noticeable and less visible to the player.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-1, the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and the sub-active is displayed in the active display area 30TM103 in response to the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols being executed in the image display device 5. The sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed in the display area 30TM105. As described above, as the information corresponding to the variable display (common variable display) of 1 being executed, the information of different modes of the active display 30TM003 and the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed. That is, the active display 30TM003, the variation display corresponding to the active display 30TM003, and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the common variation display are displayed on the screen at the same time.

Further, corresponding to the first hold storage number being 4, four first hold displays 30TM001 are displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101, and four sub hold displays are displayed in the sub hold display area 30TM104. 30TM004 is displayed. As described above, as the information corresponding to each of the four variable displays that have not been executed yet, information in different modes such as the first hold display 30TM001 and the sub-hold display 30TM004 is displayed. That is, the first hold display 30TM001 of 1 and the sub-hold display 30TM004 of 1 corresponding to the variable display (hold memory) corresponding to the first hold display 30TM001 and the common variable display (hold memory) are simultaneously displayed. It will be displayed on the screen.

In this way, a plurality of types of hold displays (first hold display 30TM001, sub-hold display 30TM004) corresponding to the common change display (variation display of the first special symbol) are displayed on the same screen at the same time. It is possible to diversify the production using the hold display and improve the interest. Similarly, multiple types of active displays (active display 30TM003, sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to the running variation display (variation display of the first special symbol, variation display of the decorative symbol) are displayed on the same screen at the same time. By doing so, it is possible to diversify the production using the active display and improve the interest.

Here, as will be described later, when it is decided not to display the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the determination at the time of starting winning, the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101, while the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed. The sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104. Further, while the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, the subactive display 30TM005 is not displayed in the subactive display area 30TM105, further indicating that the subactive display 30TM005 is an area to be displayed. The information (square frame shown at the top of the screen in FIG. 11-1) will not be displayed either.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, the first change effect and / or the second change effect can be executed based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The first change effect is a special mode in which the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of starting winning is different from the normal mode (in this example, the white round display). (White triangle display in this example), blue mode (blue circle display in this example), green mode (green circle display in this example), red mode (red circle display in this example) Display) or a notice effect to be displayed in a golden mode (in this example, a golden round display). Further, the second change effect is different from the normal mode (in this example, the white star-shaped display) of the sub-hold display 30TM004 or the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of starting winning. It is a notice effect to be displayed in a blue mode (in this example, a blue star shape display) or a red mode (in this example, a red star shape display).

FIG. 11-2 is a flowchart showing the change effect determination process. The effect control CPU 120 executes the change effect determination process in the pre-reading advance notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7.

In the change effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a set of start winning commands (for example, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a first) based on the occurrence of a start winning to the first starting winning opening. It is confirmed whether or not a new command (1) reserved memory number addition designation command) has been received (step S30TM1010).

The symbol designation command is an effect control command that indicates whether or not a big hit is obtained and the judgment result of the type of big hit among the judgment results at the time of winning. The CPU 103 determines whether or not a jackpot will occur and the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, and a symbol for designating the determination result. Output the specified command. Further, the variation category command is an effect control command that indicates the determination result of the variation pattern among the determination results at the time of winning. The CPU 103 determines whether or not it will be normal reach, whether or not it will be super reach, etc. based on the random number for determining the variation pattern type extracted at the time of starting winning, and outputs a variation category command that specifies the determination result. To do. Further, the first hold storage number addition designation command is an effect control command for designating that the first hold storage number has been increased by 1.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a set of symbol designation commands, variable category commands, and first hold storage number addition designation commands) is newly stored in the start winning command storage area. To do. If a new command for starting a set of winning prizes has not been received (NO in step S30TM1010), the process ends as it is.

If a new command for starting a set of winning prizes is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the change prohibition flag is set (step S30TM1020). If the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S30TM1020), the process ends as it is. As will be described later, the change prohibition flag is set based on the determination that at least the first change effect is executed. If the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S30TM1020), the process ends as it is.

If the change prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S30TM1020), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first change effect is executed and the final display mode, and whether or not the second change effect is executed and the final display mode, which will be described later. It is determined based on the display mode determination table (see FIG. 11-3) (step S30TM1030).

By executing the processes of steps S30TM1010 and S30TM1020, in this embodiment, the processes after step S30TM1030 are executed only when the first change effect is not executed, and the first change effect is executed. Alternatively, it is configured so that the second change effect can be executed.

FIG. 11-3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table. As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), in this embodiment, the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a "normal mode", a "special mode", a "blue mode", a "green mode", and a "red mode". It is possible to determine either "golden mode" or "golden mode", and a determination value is assigned to each of these modes. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), in this embodiment, the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is "no display", "normal mode", "blue mode", and "red mode". Any of these can be determined, and a determination value is assigned to each of these modes. Among them, "no display" means that the sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 and the sub-active display 30TM005 is not displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105.

As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the starting winning is said. The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display based on (new first hold storage) is the normal mode (white round display) at a rate of 31% and the special mode (white circle display) at a rate of 4%. (Triangle display), 18% of the blue mode (blue circle display), 21% of the green mode (green circle display), and 16% of the red mode (red circle display). ), And it becomes a golden mode (golden circle display) at a rate of 10%. That is, the first change effect in which the mode of the information (hold display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of starting winning is different from the normal mode (white circle display) is 69. It will be executed at a rate of%.

On the other hand, when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), it is based on the start winning (new first hold memory). The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display is a normal mode at a rate of 2%, a special mode at a rate of 3%, a blue mode at a rate of 15%, and a green mode at a rate of 20%. At a rate of 25%, it becomes a red aspect, and at a rate of 35%, it becomes a golden aspect. That is, the first change effect in which the mode of the information (hold display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of starting winning is different from the normal mode is executed at a rate of 98%. It will be.

As described above, when the first change effect is executed, the ratio of big hits is higher than that when the first change effect is not executed. Further, when the first change effect is executed, when the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a gold mode, the ratio of big hits is the highest. As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), with respect to the display mode of the active display 30TM003, the degree of expectation of a big hit is in the relationship of normal mode <special mode <blue mode <green mode <red mode <gold mode. ..

Further, as shown in the change pattern of the first change effect described later, at the stage of the first hold display 30TM001 before the active display 30TM003, the display mode is a special mode, a blue mode, or a red mode different from the normal mode. May be. Then, when the first hold display 30TM001 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 (when it is displayed as the active display 30TM003), at least the display mode is the same as or higher than that before the active shift. It is supposed to change to. Therefore, with respect to the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001, the degree of expectation of a big hit is in the relationship of normal mode <special mode <blue mode <red mode.

As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), the ratio of selecting the special mode as the final display mode of the active display is extremely lower than the ratio of selecting the other modes. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, which will be described later, the proportion of the change pattern of the hold display including the special aspect is not so low as compared with the proportion of the other aspects. Therefore, when the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a special mode, the display mode changes at a higher rate than when the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in another mode. When the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a special mode, the player cannot expect a big hit as compared with the case where the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the blue mode or the red mode, but the display mode has a higher degree of expectation. It can be expected to change to the display mode (blue mode, red mode).

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the case is concerned. The sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning prize (new first hold storage) are not displayed at a rate of 70%, but are displayed at a rate of 30%. The ratio of the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) being displayed and the final display mode being the normal mode (white star-shaped display) is 25%, and the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed. The ratio that the final display mode is the blue mode (blue star-shaped display) is 4%, the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed, and the final display mode is the red mode (red star-shaped display). The ratio is 1%. That is, the information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of starting prize is displayed at a rate of 30%, and corresponds to the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of starting winning. The second change effect, in which the mode of the information (holding display or active display) is different from the normal mode (white star-shaped display), is executed at a rate of 5%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the case is concerned. The sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning prize (new first hold storage) are not displayed at a rate of 40%, but are displayed at a rate of 60%. The ratio of the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) being displayed and the final display mode being the normal mode (white star-shaped display) is 25%, and the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed. The ratio of the final display mode to the blue mode (blue star-shaped display) is 10%, the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed, and the final display mode is the red mode (red star-shaped display). The ratio is 25%. That is, the information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of starting prize is displayed at a rate of 60%, and corresponds to the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of starting winning. The second change effect, in which the mode of the information (holding display or active display) is different from the normal mode (white star-shaped display), is executed at a rate of 50%.

In this way, when the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, the percentage of big hits is higher than when the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed. Further, when the second change effect is executed, the ratio of big hits is higher than that when the second change effect is not executed. Further, when the second change effect is executed, when the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is the red mode, the ratio of big hits is the highest. As shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), with respect to the display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005, the degree of expectation of a big hit has a relationship of normal mode <blue mode <red mode.

Further, as shown in the change pattern of the second change effect described later, when the display mode becomes a blue mode or a red mode different from the normal mode at the stage of the sub hold display 30TM004 prior to the sub active display 30TM005. There is. Then, when the sub-hold display 30TM004 is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (when it is displayed as the sub-active display 30TM005), at least the display mode is the same as or higher than that before the active shift. It is designed to change in mode. Therefore, with respect to the display mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004, the degree of expectation of a big hit has a relationship of normal mode <blue mode <red mode.

Here, in the process of step S30TM1030, the effect control CPU 120 determines (1) to execute the first change effect (the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is different from the normal mode), and the second It may be decided to execute the change effect (the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is different from the normal mode).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 may decide to execute (2-1) the first change effect and decide not to display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005. Further, (2-2) it is decided to execute the first change effect, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, but the second change effect is not executed (the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is usually set. It may be decided (as an aspect).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines (3) not to execute the first change effect (the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a normal mode), and executes the second change effect (sub-hold display 30TM004 and). It may be determined that the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is different from the normal mode).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 may decide not to execute (4-1) the first change effect, and may decide not to display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005. Further, (4-2) it is decided not to execute the first change effect, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, but the second change effect is not executed (the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is usually set. It may be decided (as an aspect).

When the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute either the first change effect or the second change effect in the process of step S30TM1030 (NO in step S30TM1040), that is, the above (4-1) and ( If any of 4-2) is applicable, the first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the new start winning prize (first hold storage) is displayed in the normal mode. The first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the new start winning prize (first hold memory) does not change from the normal mode to another mode, and even after the variable display corresponding to the first hold memory is started, this is displayed. The active display 30TM003 corresponding to the above does not change from the normal mode to the other mode (change patterns 101, 201, when the final display mode is the "normal mode" shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5. (See 301, 401).

If the above (4-2) is applicable, the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning prize (first hold memory) is displayed, but the display mode changes from the normal mode to another mode. Even after the variable display corresponding to the first hold storage is started, the subactive display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display does not change from the normal mode to another mode (shown in FIG. 11-6). , See change patterns 601, 701, 801 and 901 when the final display mode is the "normal mode").

When the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute at least one of the first change effect and the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1040), that is, the above (1), (2-1) and (2). -2) and (3) are applicable, the change pattern of the change effect is determined as shown below.

When it is decided to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1050), that is, when the above (1) is applicable, the first updated first in step S30TM1060. The change pattern of the first change effect is determined based on the number of hold storages (the first number of hold storages after receiving the first hold storage number addition designation command) and the final display mode of the determined active display 30TM003 (). (See FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5), the updated first hold storage number (first hold storage number after receiving the first hold storage number addition designation command), and the determined subactive display 30TM005. The change pattern of the second change effect is determined based on the final display mode of (see FIG. 11-6).

When the effect control CPU 120 executes the first change effect and decides not to execute the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1110), that is, in the above (2-1) and (2-2). If any of the above is true, in step S30TM1120, the updated first hold storage number (first hold storage number after receiving the first hold storage number addition designation command) and the final determined active display 30TM003. The change pattern of the first change effect is determined based on the display mode (see FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5). If the above (2-2) is applicable, the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning prize (first hold memory) is displayed, but the display mode changes from the normal mode to another mode. Even after the variable display corresponding to the first hold storage is started, the subactive display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display does not change from the normal mode to another mode (shown in FIG. 11-6). , See change patterns 601, 701, 801 and 901 when the final display mode is the "normal mode").

When the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the second change effect without executing the first change effect (NO in step S30TM1110), that is, when the above (3) is applicable, the step In S30TM1210, the second is based on the updated first hold storage number (first hold storage number after receiving the first hold storage number addition designation command) and the final display mode of the determined subactive display 30TM005. The change pattern of the change effect is determined (see FIG. 11-6).

When the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute at least one of the first change effect and the second change effect (any of the above (1), (2-1) and (2-2), and (3)). If this is the case), a look-ahead counter is set (step S30TM1070, step S30TM1130, step S30TM1220). When neither the first change effect nor the second change effect notice effect is executed, but the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning prize (first hold memory) is displayed ((4-2) above). Also (if applicable), set the look-ahead counter.

The read-ahead counter is set with a value corresponding to the first hold storage number updated based on the start winning prize (value specified by the first hold storage number specification command), and the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. The value of the look-ahead counter is decremented by 1 each time (every time the first hold storage number subtraction specification command is received). That is, the value of the look-ahead counter is subtracted each time the first hold display 30TM001 or the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the hold storage that is the determination target at the time of starting winning is shifted. Then, when the value of the look-ahead counter becomes 0, the variation display (or the second change effect is not executed but the sub-hold display 30TM004) that is the target of the first change effect and / or the second change effect is displayed. Variable display) will be executed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the change prohibition flag when it is determined to execute the first change effect (step S30TM1080, step S30TM1140). During the period when the change prohibition flag is set, even if a new start prize is generated, it corresponds to the new start prize (new first hold memory) by determining YES in step S30TM1020 described above. Neither the first change effect nor the second change effect is executed, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the new start winning prize (new first hold memory) are not displayed. The change prohibition flag is cleared when the variation display that is the target of the first change effect ends.

11-4 and 11-5 are explanatory views showing a specific example of a change pattern determination table for determining a change pattern of the first change effect. When the first hold storage number becomes n (n: 1 to 4) due to the start winning, (i) the nth first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the start winning is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. Timing (timing at the time of start winning), (ii) The first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the start winning shifts to a higher position (active display area 30TM103 side) in the first hold display area 30TM101. Timing (when n ≧ 2) and (iii) Timing at which the first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the start winning is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 (Timing at which the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning is displayed). ), The display information (hold display or active display) corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning may be displayed in a mode different from the normal mode.

In FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, what kind of display information (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display is displayed at each timing of (i) to (iii) for each change pattern. It indicates whether the display mode is adopted. In the change patterns shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, "normal" indicates a normal mode in which a white round display is displayed, and "special" indicates a special mode in which a white triangular display is displayed. "Blue" indicates a blue aspect which is a blue round display, and "red" indicates a red aspect which is a red round display.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "1", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for one reserved storage shown in FIG. 11-4 (A). Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 101 is 100% is 100% regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by. The change pattern 101 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift.

In the description of FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, the active shift means that the first hold display 30TM001 shifts from the first hold display area 30TM101 to the active display area 30TM103 (as a result, at the time of starting winning). The active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the judgment target is displayed).

Here, when the normal mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 does not change in the normal mode.

When the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, and so on, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change patterns 103. The change pattern 102 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning a start, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to a special mode at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the active shift.

Here, when a special mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, change pattern 401, which will be described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the normal mode to the special mode. Further, when the special mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change patterns 302, and change patterns 402). ), The active display 30TM003 does not change in the special mode after the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 101, change pattern 102, and so on, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, and the change pattern 105, respectively. The change pattern 104 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode at the time of winning a start, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to a blue mode at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift.

Here, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, and change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the normal mode to the blue mode. Further, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the mode is a special mode at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change patterns 302, and change patterns 402). ), The active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the special mode to the blue mode after the active shift. Further, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, change patterns 403). In the case of (and 404), the active display 30TM003 does not change in the blue mode after the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 101, change pattern 102, and so on, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, and the change pattern 105, respectively.

Here, when the green mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, and change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the normal mode to the green mode. Further, when the green mode is determined as the final display mode and the mode is a special mode at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change patterns 302, and change patterns 402). ), The active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the special mode to the green mode after the active shift. Further, when the green mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, change patterns 403). And 404), the active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the blue mode to the green mode after the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, and the change pattern 101 Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, the change pattern 105, the change pattern 106, and the change pattern 107, respectively. The change pattern 106 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the red mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift.

Here, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, and change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the normal mode to the red mode. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the mode is a special mode at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change patterns 302, and change patterns 402). ), The active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the special mode to the red mode after the active shift. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, change patterns 403). And 404), the active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the blue mode to the red mode after the active shift. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the red mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 106 and 107, change patterns 209 to 212 described later, change patterns 306 to 310, change pattern 405). In the case of ~ 412), the active display 30TM003 does not change in the red mode after the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 101, change pattern 102, and so on, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, the change pattern 105, the change pattern 106, and the change pattern 107, respectively.

Here, when the gold mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, and change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the normal mode to the golden mode. Further, when the golden mode is determined as the final display mode and the mode is a special mode at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change patterns 302, and change patterns 402). ), The active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the special aspect to the golden aspect after the active shift. Further, when the golden mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, change patterns 403). And 404), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the blue mode to the golden mode. Further, when the golden mode is determined as the final display mode and the red mode is displayed at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 106 and 107, change patterns 209 to 212 described later, change patterns 306 to 310, change pattern 405). In the case of ~ 412), the active display 30TM003 will finally change from the red mode to the golden mode after the active shift.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "2", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the two reserved storages shown in FIG. 11-4 (B). Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 201 is 100% is 100% regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by. In the change pattern 201, after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the active shift is performed. It is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display to be notified in the normal mode even at the timing.

When the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 203 and the change pattern 204, respectively. In the change pattern 202, after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the active shift is performed. It is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing, and the change pattern 203 is the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning. It is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode and does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the special mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the first hold display in a special mode, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is special even at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change as it is.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 201, change pattern 202, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, and the change pattern 208, respectively. The change pattern 205 changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning, and at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the notice target to a blue mode, and the change pattern 206 is a notice at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in a special mode at the time of starting winning. It is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the target is not changed in the special mode and the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. 1 After displaying the hold display in a special mode, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target remains in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change, and in the change pattern 208, after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice target remains in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change and does not change the first hold display to be announced in the blue mode even at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, and the change pattern 208, respectively.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, the change pattern 208, the change pattern 209, the change pattern 210, the change pattern 211, and the change pattern 212, respectively. ing. In the change pattern 209, after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in a special mode at the time of starting winning, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the notice target to the red mode, and the change pattern 210 is a notice at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of starting winning. It is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the target is not changed in the blue mode and the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. 1 After displaying the hold display in the blue mode, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target remains in the red mode at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change, and the change pattern 212 displays the first hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target remains in the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change and does not change the first hold display to be announced in the red mode even at the timing of the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 201, change pattern 202, and so on, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, the change pattern 208, the change pattern 209, the change pattern 210, the change pattern 211, and the change pattern 212, respectively. ing.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "3", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the three reserved storages shown in FIG. 11-5 (C). Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 301 is 100% is 100% regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by. In the change pattern 301, after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold display is not changed. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode even at the timing of the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 301 and the change pattern are determined according to the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to each of the 302. The change pattern 302 changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the second hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode even at the timing of the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, and so on, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, and the change pattern 305, respectively. The change pattern 303 changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the special mode at the timing of, but changes the first hold display of the notice target to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed at the timing of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the hold display to the blue mode and does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 305 changes the first hold display of the notice target to blue when the start prize is won. After displaying in the mode, the first hold display of the notice target remains in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target remains in the blue mode even at the timing of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change and does not change the first hold display to be announced in the blue mode even at the timing of the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, and so on, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, and the change pattern 305, respectively.

When the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, and so on, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, the change pattern 305, the change pattern 306, the change pattern 307, the change pattern 308, the change pattern 309, and the change pattern 310, respectively. The change pattern 306 changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and changes the first hold display of the notice target to the special mode, and the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the notice target to the blue mode at the timing of, and changes the first hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the first hold display of the above in the blue mode, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is also displayed at the timing of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the active shift without changing the hold display in the blue mode, and the change pattern 308 changes the first hold display of the notice target at the start winning. After displaying in the blue mode, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes and does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 309 is after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of starting winning. At the timing of the first hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode, and at the timing of the second hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode, and the timing of the active shift. However, it is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the red mode, and the change pattern 310 is the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the time of starting winning. The first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode even at the timing of the second hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed even at the timing of the active shift. 1 It is a change pattern that does not change the hold display in the red mode.

When the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, and so on, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, the change pattern 305, the change pattern 306, the change pattern 307, the change pattern 308, the change pattern 309, and the change pattern 310, respectively.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "4", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the four reserved storages shown in FIG. 11-5 (D). Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 401 is 100% is 100% regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by. The change pattern 401 does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the second hold display is not changed. The first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the third hold shift, even at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display to be announced in the normal mode.

When the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 401 and the change pattern are determined according to the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to each of the 402. The change pattern 402 changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the second hold shift. The first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode even at the timing of the third hold shift, and the notice target is also at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display of the above in a special mode.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 403 and the change pattern 404, respectively. The change pattern 403 changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning, and the second hold shift. The first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed to the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is also changed at the timing of the active shift. 1 It is a change pattern that does not change the hold display in the blue mode, and the change pattern 404 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target is displayed at the timing of the first hold shift. 1 The hold display is not changed in the blue mode, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode even at the timing of the second hold shift, and the first hold of the notice target is not changed even at the timing of the third hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the display in the blue mode and does not change the first hold display to be announced in the blue mode even at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 403 and the change pattern 404, respectively.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 403, the change pattern 404, and the change pattern 405 to the change pattern 412, respectively. The change pattern 405 changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning, and the second hold shift. The first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of, but the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed at the timing of the active shift. 1 It is a change pattern that changes the hold display to a red mode, and the change pattern 406 is a change pattern 406 that displays the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then displays the first hold display of the notice target at the timing of the first hold shift. The hold display is changed to a special mode, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the active shift without changing it as it is, and the change pattern 407 is after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning. At the timing of the first hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to a special mode, and at the timing of the second hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode, and the third hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the target first hold display in the blue mode, the first hold display of the target is not changed in the blue mode even at the timing of the first, second, and third hold shifts, and the notice is given at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the target to the red mode, and the change pattern 409 is the timing of the first hold shift and the second hold shift after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of starting winning. The first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the first hold of the notice target is changed at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the display in the red mode, and the change pattern 410 displays the first hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first hold of the notice target at the timing of the first hold shift. The display changes in blue mode Instead, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target remains in the red mode even at the timing of the third hold shift and the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change, and the change pattern 411 changes the first hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of starting winning. It is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the red mode even at the timing of the second and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 412 is the first notice target at the time of starting winning. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display to be notified is not changed in the red mode even at the timing of the first, second, and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift after the hold display is displayed in the red mode.

When the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to change pattern 403, change pattern 404, change pattern 405, change pattern 406, change pattern 407, change pattern 408, change pattern 409, change pattern 410, change pattern 411, and change pattern 412, respectively. ing.

FIG. 11-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the change pattern determination table for determining the change pattern of the second change effect. When the first hold storage number becomes n (n: 1 to 4) due to the start winning, and it is decided to display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005, (i). ) The 1st to nth sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the first hold storage number n at that time is displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104, and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display being executed at that time is sub. The timing displayed in the active display area 30TM105 (timing at the time of starting prize), (ii) the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the start winning is in a higher position in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 (secondary active display area 30TM105). Timing to shift to (side) (when n ≧ 2) and (iii) Timing to shift the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the start winning to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (sub-active display corresponding to the start winning) At the timing when 30TM005 is displayed), the display information (hold display or active display) corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning may be displayed in a mode different from the normal mode.

In FIG. 11-6, what kind of display mode the display information (sub-hold display 30TM004 or sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display becomes at each timing of (i) to (iii) for each change pattern. Is shown. In the change pattern shown in FIG. 11-6, "normal" indicates a normal mode in which a white star is displayed, and "blue" indicates a blue mode in which a blue star is displayed. "Red" indicates a red aspect which is a red star-shaped display.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "1", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for one reserved storage shown in FIG. 11-6 (A). Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 601 is 100% is 100% regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by. The change pattern 601 is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift.

In the description of FIG. 11-6, the active shift means that the sub-hold display 30TM004 shifts from the sub-hold display area 30TM104 to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (as a result, the fluctuation that is the judgment target at the time of starting winning). The sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the display is displayed).

Here, when the normal mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 601, change pattern 701, change pattern 801 and change pattern 901 described later), After the active shift, the sub-active display 30TM005 does not change in the normal mode.

When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 601 and the change pattern 602 are set according to the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of the change patterns 603. The change pattern 602 is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 603 is the start. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift.

Here, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 601, change pattern 701, change pattern 801 and change pattern 901 described later), After the active shift, the sub-active display 30TM005 will eventually change from the normal mode to the blue mode. Further, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 602 and 603, change patterns 702 to 704 described later, change patterns 802 to 804, change patterns 902). In the case of ~ 905), the sub-active display 30TM005 does not change in the blue mode after the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 601 and the change pattern 602 are set according to the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 603, the change pattern 604, and the change pattern 605, respectively. The change pattern 604 is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 605 is the start. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the red mode at the time of winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift.

Here, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 601, change pattern 701, change pattern 801 and change pattern 901 described later), After the active shift, the sub-active display 30TM005 will eventually change from the normal mode to the red mode. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 602 and 603, change patterns 702 to 704, change patterns 802 to 804, and change patterns 902, which will be described later). In the case of ~ 905), the sub-active display 30TM005 changes from the blue mode to the red mode after the active shift. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the red mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 604 and 605, change patterns 705 to 708, change patterns 805 to 808, and change patterns 906, which will be described later). In the case of ~ 912), the sub-active display 30TM005 does not change in the red mode after the active shift.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "2", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the two reserved storages shown in FIG. 11-6 (B). Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 701 is 100% is 100% regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by. The change pattern 701 does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and also at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display to be announced in the normal mode.

When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 702, and the change pattern 701 are used according to the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 703 and the change pattern 704, respectively. The change pattern 702 does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning, and at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that changes the sub-hold display of the notice target to the blue mode, and the change pattern 703 displays the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then the notice target at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the sub-hold display to the blue mode and does not change the sub-hold display to be announced in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display to be announced in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift and the timing of the active shift after displaying with.

When the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 702, and the change pattern 701 are used according to the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 703, the change pattern 704, and the change pattern 705 to the change pattern 708, respectively. In the change pattern 705, after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the notice target is at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern that changes the sub-hold display of the above to a red mode, and the change pattern 706 displays the sub-hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of starting winning, and then the sub-hold of the notice target at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the sub-hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the active shift without changing the display in the blue mode, and the change pattern 707 is the sub-hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of starting winning. After the display, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift. 708 is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the red mode at the time of starting winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift and the timing of the active shift. ..

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "3", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the three reserved storages shown in FIG. 11-6 (C). Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 801 is 100% is 100% regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by. In the change pattern 801, after the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the advance notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of, and the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode even at the timing of the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 801 and the change pattern are determined according to the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to each of the 802 to change patterns 804. The change pattern 802 does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the sub-hold display of the notice target to the blue mode at the timing of, and does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the sub-hold display in the normal mode, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-hold of the notice target is changed at the timing of the second hold shift and the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the display in the blue mode, and the change pattern 804 displays the sub-hold display to be notified in the blue mode at the time of starting winning, and then the timing of the first and second hold shifts and the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display to be announced in the blue mode.

When the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 801 and the change pattern 802 are determined according to the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 803, the change pattern 804, and the change patterns 805 to 808, respectively. The change pattern 805 changes the sub-hold display of the notice target to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the timing of the second hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode and the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 806 is the sub-hold display of the notice target at the time of starting winning. Is displayed in the blue mode, and the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 807 is the first time after the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of starting winning. It is a change pattern that changes the sub-hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the hold shift and does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift and the timing of the active shift. The pattern 808 does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the timing of the first and second hold shifts and the timing of the active shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the time of starting winning. It is a change pattern.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "4", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the four reserved storages shown in FIG. 11-6 (D). Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 901 is 100% is 100% regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by. In the change pattern 901, after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the timing of the first, second, and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change as it is.

When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 901 and the change pattern are determined according to the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to each of the 902 to change patterns 905. In the change pattern 902, after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first and second hold shifts, and the third time. It is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the hold shift of, and the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode, the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-hold of the notice target is displayed at the timing of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern in which the display is changed to the blue mode and the sub-hold display to be notified is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift and the timing of the active shift. After displaying the sub-hold display in the normal mode, the sub-hold display to be announced is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the notice target is set at the timing of the second and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display of the above in the blue mode, and the change pattern 905 is the first, second, and third hold shifts after displaying the sub-hold display to be announced in the blue mode at the time of starting winning. It is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display to be announced in the blue mode at the timing and the timing of the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 901 to the change pattern 905, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit), And, the determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 906 to the change pattern 912. The change pattern 906 does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the second hold shift. The sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to red at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change as it is, and the change pattern 907 displays the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then changes the sub-hold display of the notice target to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift. At the timing of the second hold shift, the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode, but at the timing of the third hold shift, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode, and the active shift It is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the timing, and the change pattern 908 is the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning. The sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the notice target is changed at the timing of the third hold shift and the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display in the red mode, and the change pattern 909 is a notice target at the timing of the first and second hold shifts after displaying the sub-hold display to be notified in the blue mode at the time of starting winning. The sub-hold display of is not changed in the blue mode, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the sub-hold display of the notice target remains in the red mode at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change, and the change pattern 910 changes the sub-hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of starting winning. Instead, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift and the active shift. The change pattern 911 is a pattern, in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in blue at the start winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in red at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes to the mode and does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the timing of the second and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display to be announced is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the first, second, and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift after the sub-hold display is displayed in the red mode.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the rate at which the first change effect of displaying the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 in a display mode different from the normal mode is executed is the sub-hold display 30TM004 or the sub-active display 30TM005. Is higher than the rate at which the second change effect is executed, in which is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-3, when the second change effect is executed, the ratio of big hits is higher than when the first change effect is executed.

In this way, at the lower part of the screen, the player performs the first change effect that changes the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003, which has high visibility, at a high frequency. Can sustain your interest. On the other hand, with respect to the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005, which have low visibility, the percentage of big hits differs depending on whether or not they are displayed at the top of the screen. Attention will be paid to whether or not the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed. Further, since the jackpot expectation when the second change effect is executed is higher than that of the first change effect, whether or not the display mode changes when the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed. Will also pay attention to.

Further, in the present embodiment, a round or triangular icon (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) displayed at the lower part of the screen and a star-shaped icon (secondary hold display 30TM004 or subactive) displayed at the upper part of the screen. The size and shape are different from the display 30TM005). That is, a plurality of types of icons corresponding to the common hold storage and the common variable display are simultaneously displayed at different display positions on the same screen. In this example, one of the two types of icons (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) is displayed as a circle, and the other icon (secondary hold display 30TM004 or subactive display 30TM005) is displayed as a star. By doing so, the characteristics of each icon are clarified so that the player can easily grasp the difference (different types of display information). In addition, it is possible to improve the interest by diversifying the production by the icon corresponding to the variable display.

In addition, a common display color corresponding to a common variable display, such as the relationship between the red-shaped first hold display 30TM001 displayed at the bottom of the screen and the red-shaped sub-hold display 30TM004 displayed at the top of the screen. Icons (however, the shapes are different for round and star) may be displayed at the same time. As a result, the variable display that is the target of the first change effect and the second change effect becomes clearer in the first hold display area 30TM101 and the sub-hold display area 30TM104, and the first change effect and the second change effect It becomes easier for the player to understand the jackpot expectation regarding the target variable display.

In addition, a common display color icon corresponding to the variable display during execution, such as the relationship between the red-shaped active display 30TM003 displayed at the bottom of the screen and the red-shaped sub-active display 30TM005 displayed at the top of the screen. (However, icons with different shapes for round and star) may be displayed at the same time. This makes it easier for the player to understand the jackpot expectation regarding the variable display during execution.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 to 11-6, the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the combination of the display color of the first hold display 30TM001 and the display color of the sub-hold display 30TM004 (for example, the red aspect). The combination of the first hold display 30TM001 and the red mode sub-hold display 30TM004 has the highest expectation of a big hit), so that the player becomes interested in both hold display modes and displays the hold display. It is possible to enhance the interest of the production that changes the mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-3, the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the combination of the display color of the active display 30TM003 and the display color of the sub-active display 30TM005 (for example, the active display 30TM003 in the gold mode and the red mode). The combination of the sub-active display 30TM005 has the highest expectation of a big hit), so that the player becomes interested in both active display modes and enhances the interest of the production that changes the display mode of the active display. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, when the first hold display 30TM001 shifts to the active display area 30TM103 (the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variation display targeted for the first change effect is displayed. (When displayed), the display color is at least the same (that is, the display color is inherited at the time of active shift), or the display color changes to a higher expectation. This makes it possible for the player to be interested in how the first hold display 30TM001 changes.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-6, when the sub-hold display 30TM004 shifts to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (when the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variation display targeted for the second change effect is displayed). ), The display color is at least the same (that is, the display color is inherited at the time of active shift), or the display color changes to a higher expectation. This makes it possible for the player to be interested in how the sub-hold display 30TM004 changes.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-3, the active display 30TM003 with high visibility is provided with more display modes than the subactive display 30TM005 with low visibility. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 to 11-6, the change pattern when changing the mode of the first hold display 30TM001 with high visibility is when changing the mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 with low visibility. It is provided more than the change pattern of. In this way, by differentiating the types and patterns of the effects that can be executed according to the visibility of the active display and the hold display, the first change effect and the second change effect and the second effect are prevented from becoming excessively complicated. We are trying to appropriately enhance the interest of change production.

(Specific examples of the first change effect and the second change effect)
Next, specific examples of the first change effect and the second change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9. FIG. 11-7 is a time chart when both the first change effect and the second change effect are executed, and FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9 show both the first change effect and the second change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image displayed on the image display apparatus 5 at the time of execution.

First, FIG. 11-8 (1) was started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 11-7 by displaying the variation of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols on the image display device 5 in the state where the first reserved storage number is 3. It shows the state in which the variable display) is being executed. At this time, the active display 30TM003 (white circle display) in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the first hold display 30TM001 (white circle display) in the normal mode is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. ) Are displayed. At this time, the sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed, and the sub-active display 30TM005 is not displayed either. Further, the guide (square frame) indicating the sub-active display area 30TM105 is not displayed.

Then, when the image display device 5 is executing the variable display of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (2) (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 11-7), a new prize is won. It is assumed that a start winning prize is generated for the ball device 6A, and the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first change effect, the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning prize that is the determination target (golden mode in this example). , And, when the change pattern of the first change effect (change pattern 407 in this example) is determined and the second change effect is decided to be executed, the sub-active display corresponding to the start winning prize that is the judgment target is displayed. The final display mode of 30TM005 (red mode in this example) and the change pattern of the second change effect (change pattern 906 in this example) are determined. Further, at this time, 4 is set as the value of the look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4. That is, the value of the look-ahead counter indicates the remaining number of variable display times until the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect is executed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the sub-active display 30TM005 (white star-shaped display) in the normal mode in the sub-active display area 30TM105 based on the determination to execute the second change effect, and also displays the sub-active display 30TM005 (white star-shaped display). A guide (square frame) indicating the active display area 30TM105 is displayed. The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed at this time corresponds to the variable display of the decorative symbol (first special symbol) currently being executed. Further, based on the first hold storage number being 4, four sub-hold displays 30TM004 (white star-shaped display) in the normal mode are displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the change prohibition flag as shown in FIGS. 11-7 (T2) and 11-8 (2) based on the decision to execute the first change effect. Then, the execution of the first change effect and the second change effect for the start winning prize (first hold memory) that occurs after this is prohibited. During the execution prohibition period of the first change effect and the second change effect, after the first hold display 30TM001 which is the target of the first change effect is displayed (the sub-hold display 30TM004 which is the target of the second change effect is displayed). From), the period until the variation display corresponding to the first hold display 30TM001 (the sub-hold display 30TM004) is completed (the period from T2 to T9 shown in FIG. 11-7).

As a result, when a new start prize is generated within the prohibition period of the change effect, the first hold display 30TM001 (white circle display) in the normal mode corresponding to the start prize is displayed, and the change effect is prohibited. Within the period, the first hold indication of the normal aspect does not change to another aspect (eg, a special aspect, a blue aspect, or a red aspect). Further, based on the change prohibition flag being set, whether or not the second change effect is executed and the final display mode are not determined (YES in step S30TM1020 and the process of step S30TM1030 is not executed). The corresponding sub-hold display 30TM004 and sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed.

Not limited to such a form, when a new start prize is generated within the prohibition period of the change effect, the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the normal mode corresponding to the new start prize can be displayed. The display mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 may not be changed.

In this example, since the first hold storage number is 4 based on the start winning, the fourth hold display 30TM001 and the sub-hold display area 30TM104 displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101 The fourth sub-hold display 30TM004 displayed is a hold display corresponding to the variable display to be notified by the first change effect and the second change effect. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (3), the image display device 5 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (4) (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-7). The first hold display 30TM001 displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the subactive display 30TM005 displayed in the subactive display area 30TM105 is deleted. , The sub-hold display 30TM004 displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is shifted and displayed one by one to the sub-active display area 30TM105, and the next variable display is started in the image display device 5.

In this shift display, the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103, is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become. Further, in this shift display, the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the sub-hold display at the position closest to the sub-active display area 30TM105, is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 and displayed as the sub-active display 30TM005. Will be.

Here, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (4), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when the variation display is started (the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-7). Therefore, the first hold display to be notified is changed from the normal mode to a special mode (first hold display 30TM001a, which is a white triangle display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (5), the image display device 5 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (6) (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-7). The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and first hold display 30TM001a in the special mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one toward the active display area 30TM103, and at the same time, at the same time. The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is erased, and the sub-hold display (sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star-shaped display) in the normal mode) displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is set to 1. The sub-active display area 30TM105 is shifted and displayed one by one, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

Here, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (6), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when the variation display is started (the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-7). Then, the first hold display to be notified is changed from a special mode to a blue mode (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001b, which is a blue round display), and the first hold display is changed based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect. The sub-hold display to be notified is changed from the normal mode to the blue mode (in this example, the sub-hold display 30TM004b, which is a blue star-shaped display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (7), the image display device 5 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (8) (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 11-7). The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one toward the active display area 30TM103, and at the same time, at the same time. The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is erased, and the sub-hold display displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 (the sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star-shaped display) in the normal mode) and the blue mode are displayed. The sub-hold display 30TM004b (blue star-shaped display)) is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 side one by one, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when the variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (8) (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 11-7). Then, the first hold display to be notified is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001c which is a red round display), and based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect, the first hold display is changed. The sub-hold display to be announced is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (in this example, the sub-hold display 30TM004c, which is a red star-shaped display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (9), the image display device 5 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (10) (timing of T6 shown in FIG. 11-7). The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001c (red circle display) in the red aspect) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub-active display area 30TM105 is displayed. The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in is erased, and the sub-hold display (sub-hold display 30TM004c in red mode (red star-shaped display)) displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is changed to the sub-active display area 30TM105. The shift display is performed, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

Then, after the variation display that is the target of the first change effect is executed (after the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variation display that is the target of the first change effect is displayed), the effect control CPU 120 is shown in the figure. Within the period shown in T7 to T8 of 11-7, the active display 30TM003c in the red mode is changed to the final display mode (gold in this example) in the active display region 30TM103. The change pattern for changing the display mode of the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 after the shift display will be described later with reference to FIGS. 11-16. Further, when changing the display mode of the active display 30TM003, a change suggestion effect described later may be executed.

If the sub-active display 30TM005 is not in the final display mode immediately after the shift display, the sub-active display 30TM005 is finally displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 within the period shown in T7 to T8 of FIG. 11-7. Change to the aspect. For example, when the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 determined at the time of starting winning is the red mode and the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed in the blue mode immediately after the shift display, the variation display of the advance notice target is displayed. The sub-active display 30TM005 is changed from the blue mode to the red mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (11) (timing shown in T8 of FIG. 11-7), the same decorative symbol (“7” in this example) stopped in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area. The reach state is established, and the reach effect in which the characters "reach !!" are displayed at the lower part of the screen, that is, the area overlapping the first reserved display area 30TM101 and the active display area 30TM103 is executed. Here, at the timing when the reach state is established, the first hold display 30TM001, the second hold display 30TM002, and the active display 30TM003 are hidden, so that it is possible to prevent the visibility of the reach effect from being lowered and the interest being lowered. can do. The first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed until the variation display of the notice target is completed (until the timing shown in T9 of FIG. 11-7).

As described above, as the reach effect is executed at the lower part of the screen, the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003, which share at least a part of the display area with the area where the reach effect is executed, are hidden. On the other hand, the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display, which are displayed in an area different from the area where the reach effect is executed, can be continuously displayed at the upper part of the screen even during the period when the reach effect is executed. , The player can see these. As a result, the player can easily grasp the number of reserved memories even during the execution period of the reach effect, and can grasp the display modes of the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display.

(Specific example of executing only the first change effect)
Next, a specific example in the case where it is decided to execute only the first change effect at the time of starting winning will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-10 to 11-12. 11-10 is a time chart when only the first change effect is executed, and FIGS. 11-11 and 11-12 are displayed on the image display device 5 when only the first change effect is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production image.

First, FIG. 11-11 (1) was started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 11-10 by displaying the variation of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols on the image display device 5 in the state where the first reserved storage number is 3. It shows the state in which the variable display) is being executed. At this time, the active display 30TM003 (white circle display) in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the first hold display 30TM001 (white circle display) in the normal mode is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. ) Are displayed.

Then, when the image display device 5 is executing the variable display of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (2) (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 11-10), a new prize is won. It is assumed that a start winning prize is generated for the ball device 6A, and the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute only the first change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first change effect, the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning prize that is the determination target (golden mode in this example). , And the change pattern of the first change effect (change pattern 407 in this example) is determined. Further, in this example, it is assumed that the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed (therefore, the second change effect is not executed). Further, at this time, 4 is set as the value of the look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4. That is, the value of the look-ahead counter indicates the remaining number of variable display times until the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect is executed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 does not display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 based on the determination that the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed based on the determination at the time of starting winning. Also, the guide (square frame) indicating the sub-active display area 30TM105 is not displayed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the change prohibition flag as shown in FIGS. 11-10 (T2) and 11-11 (2) based on the decision to execute the first change effect. Then, the execution of the first change effect and the second change effect for the start winning prize (first hold memory) that occurs after this is prohibited. The execution prohibition period of the first change effect and the second change effect is from the time when the first hold display 30TM001 which is the target of the first change effect is displayed until the end of the variation display corresponding to the first hold display 30TM001. The period (the period from T2 to T9 shown in FIG. 11-10) is used.

As a result, when a new start prize is generated within the prohibition period of the change effect, the first hold display 30TM001 (white circle display) in the normal mode corresponding to the start prize is displayed, and the change effect is prohibited. Within the period, the first hold indication of the normal aspect does not change to another aspect (eg, a special aspect, a blue aspect, or a red aspect). Further, based on the change prohibition flag being set, whether or not the second change effect is executed and the final display mode are not determined (YES in step S30TM1020 and the process of step S30TM1030 is not executed). The corresponding sub-hold display 30TM004 and sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed.

Not limited to such a form, when a new start prize is generated within the prohibition period of the change effect, the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the normal mode corresponding to the new start prize can be displayed. The display mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 may not be changed.

In this example, since the first hold storage number is 4 based on the start winning, the fourth first hold display 30TM001 displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101 is subject to advance notice by the first change effect. It is a hold display corresponding to the variable display. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (3), the image display device 5 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (4) (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-10). The first hold display 30TM001 displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one toward the active display area 30TM103, and the next variable display is started in the image display device 5.

In this shift display, the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103, is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when the variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (4) (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-10). Therefore, the first hold display to be notified is changed from the normal mode to a special mode (first hold display 30TM001a, which is a white triangle display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (5), the image display device 5 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (6) (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-10). The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and first hold display 30TM001a in the special mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one toward the active display area 30TM103, and the image display device. At 5, the next variation display is started.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when the variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (6) (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-10). Therefore, the first hold display to be notified is changed from the special mode to the blue mode (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001b, which is a blue round display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 (7), the image display device 5 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (8) (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 11-10). The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and the image display device. At 5, the next variation display is started.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when the variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (8) (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 11-10). Therefore, the first hold display to be notified is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001c, which is a red round display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (9), the image display device 5 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (10) (timing of T6 shown in FIG. 11-10). The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001c (red circle display) in the red aspect) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 side, and the following fluctuations are made in the image display device 5. Start displaying.

Then, after the variation display targeted by the first change effect is executed (after the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variation display targeted by the first change effect is displayed), the effect control CPU 120 is shown in the figure. Within the period shown in T7 to T8 of 11-10, the active display 30TM003c in the red mode is changed to the final display mode (gold in this example) in the active display region 30TM103.

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (11) (timing shown in T8 of FIG. 11-10), the same decorative symbol (“7” in this example) stopped in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area. The reach state is established, and the reach effect in which the characters "reach !!" are displayed at the lower part of the screen, that is, the area overlapping the first reserved display area 30TM101 and the active display area 30TM103 is executed. Here, at the timing when the reach state is established, the first hold display 30TM001, the second hold display 30TM002, and the active display 30TM003 are hidden. The first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed until the variable display of the notice target is completed (until the timing shown in T9 of FIG. 11-10).

As shown above, if it is decided to execute only the first change effect at the time of the start prize, a new start prize will be awarded until the variation display that is the target of the first change effect is completed. The first change effect based on is not executed, and the second change effect based on the new start prize is not executed either. In this way, after the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is once changed in the first hold display area 30TM101 with high visibility (after the mode is changed from the normal mode), a new start winning prize is subsequently generated. Even in this case, by not executing the second change effect based on the new start prize in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 with low visibility, the player is made to pay attention to the first change effect with high visibility. 1 It is designed to prevent the production from becoming complicated due to the execution of the second change effect targeting the variation display different from the variation display that is the target of the change effect.

In the present embodiment, if a new start prize is generated after the execution of the first change effect (the period during which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), the new start prize is generated. An example of prohibiting the execution of the first change effect and the second change effect corresponding to the start winning is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and after the execution of the first change effect (the first hold display 30TM001 is the normal mode). If a new start prize is generated during the period displayed in a different mode), the first change effect and the second change effect corresponding to the new start prize can be executed, but at that time. The execution ratio of the first change effect and the second change effect may be made lower than before the execution of the first change effect (the period during which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the normal mode).

In addition, if a new start prize occurs after the execution of the first change effect (the period during which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), other notices are not limited to the second change effect. The execution of the production may be restricted. For example, the remaining number of variable display times until the variable display based on the new start winning is executed is displayed on the image display device 5 each time the variable display is executed (for example, the first reserved storage number is changed from 3 to 0). It is possible not to execute the countdown effect (displayed as "3", "2", "1", "0" by subtracting 1 by 1). Further, the background change effect that changes the background image to a special mode may not be executed until the variation display based on the new start winning prize is executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, if a new start prize is generated after the execution of the first change effect (the period during which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), the new start prize is generated. An example is shown in which execution of both the first change effect and the second change effect corresponding to the start winning is prohibited, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and after the execution of the first change effect (the first hold display 30TM001 is usually used). If a new start prize occurs during the period displayed in a mode different from the mode), the first change effect corresponding to the new start prize can be executed, but the new start prize is supported. The second change effect is not executed (the sub-hold display 30TM004 itself corresponding to the new start prize is not displayed, or the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start prize is displayed, but the display mode is usually displayed. It may not be changed as it is).

(Modification example related to the first change effect and the second change effect)
In the above embodiment, the mode is changed at the timing when the first hold display 30TM001 is shift-displayed in the first change effect, and the mode is changed at the timing when the sub-hold display 30TM004 is shift-displayed in the second change effect. However, not limited to such a form, the mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is changed according to the execution of the first hold action effect that acts on the first hold display 30TM001, and acts on the sub-hold display 30TM004. The mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 may be changed according to the execution of the sub-hold action effect.

11-13, 11-14, and 11-15 are specific examples in the case where the first holding action effect is executed in the first change effect and the sub-holding action effect is executed in the second change effect.

First, FIG. 11-13 (1) shows a state in which the image display device 5 is executing the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols in the state where the first reserved storage number is 3. At this time, the active display 30TM003 (white circle display) in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the first hold display 30TM001 (white circle display) in the normal mode is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. ) Are displayed. At this time, the sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed, and the sub-active display 30TM005 is not displayed either. Further, the guide (square frame) indicating the sub-active display area 30TM105 is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (2), when the image display device 5 is executing the variable display of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right, a new start winning is generated for the winning ball device 6A. It is assumed that the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first change effect, the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning prize that is the determination target (golden mode in this example). , And, when the change pattern of the first change effect (change pattern 407 in this example) is determined and the second change effect is decided to be executed, the sub-active display corresponding to the start winning prize that is the judgment target is displayed. The final display mode of 30TM005 (red mode in this example) and the change pattern of the second change effect (change pattern 906 in this example) are determined. Further, at this time, 4 is set as the value of the look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4. That is, the value of the look-ahead counter indicates the remaining number of variable display times until the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect is executed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the sub-active display 30TM005 (white star-shaped display) in the normal mode in the sub-active display area 30TM105 based on the determination to execute the second change effect, and also displays the sub-active display 30TM005 (white star-shaped display). A guide (square frame) indicating the active display area 30TM105 is displayed. Further, based on the first hold storage number being 4, four sub-hold displays 30TM004 (white star-shaped display) in the normal mode are displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104.

In this example, since the first hold storage number is 4 based on the start winning, the fourth hold display 30TM001 and the sub-hold display area 30TM104 displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101 The fourth sub-hold display 30TM004 displayed is a hold display corresponding to the variable display to be notified by the first change effect and the second change effect. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (3), the image display device 5 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (4), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the first hold display area 30TM101 is displayed. The hold display 30TM001 is shifted and displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is erased and displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104. The sub-hold display 30TM004 is shifted and displayed one by one to the sub-active display area 30TM105, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

In this shift display, the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103, is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become. Further, in this shift display, the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the sub-hold display at the position closest to the sub-active display area 30TM105, is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 and displayed as the sub-active display 30TM005. Will be.

Here, when the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation display, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, the first hold display to be announced during the execution of the variation display is changed from the normal mode to the special mode ( In this example, it is recognized that the display is changed to the first hold display 30TM001a), which is a white triangle display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first hold action effect and the type (character type) of the first hold action effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the first holding action effect (action effect A) in which the character A appears.

The effect control CPU 120 executes the first hold action effect (action effect A) based on the determination result. In the example shown in FIG. 11-13 (4), the character A appears, and an effect of throwing a ball toward the first hold display 30TM001 to be announced is executed. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character A hits the target first hold display 30TM001, the player can be expected to change the mode of the first hold display 30TM001.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (5), the effect control CPU 120 specializes the first hold display to be notified from the normal mode in response to the execution of the first hold action effect (action effect A). The mode is changed (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001a, which is a white triangle display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (6), the image display device 5 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (7), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the first hold display area 30TM101 is displayed. The hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001a in the special mode) is shifted and displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105. While erasing the active display 30TM005, the sub-hold display (sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star-shaped display) in the normal mode) displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 one by one. Then, the image display device 5 starts the next variable display.

Here, when the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation display, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, the first hold display to be announced during the execution of the variation display is changed from a special mode to a blue mode (a blue mode). In this example, it is recognized that the display is changed to the first hold display 30TM001b), which is a blue round display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first hold action effect and the type (character type) of the first hold action effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the first holding action effect (action effect B) in which the character B appears.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation display, the sub-hold display to be notified is changed from the normal mode to the blue mode (this example) based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect while the variation display is being executed. Then, it is recognized that the display is changed to the sub-hold display 30TM004b), which is a blue star-shaped display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the sub-holding action effect and the type (character type) of the sub-holding action effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the sub-holding action effect (action effect a) in which the character a appears.

The effect control CPU 120 first executes the first hold action effect (action effect B) based on these determination results. In the example shown in FIG. 11-13 (7), the character B appears and the effect of throwing the ball toward the first hold display 30TM001a to be announced is executed. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character B hits the first hold display 30TM001a to be announced, the player can be expected to change the mode of the first hold display 30TM001a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (8), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first hold display to be notified in blue from a special aspect in response to the execution of the first hold action effect (action effect B). The mode (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001b, which is a blue round display) is changed.

The effect control CPU 120 then executes the sub-holding action effect (action effect a) within the same fluctuation display period. In the example shown in FIG. 11-14 (9), the character a appears, and an effect of flying a balloon toward the sub-hold display 30TM004 to be notified is executed. As shown in FIGS. 11-14 (10) and 11-15 (11), the balloons blown by the character a fly toward the sub-hold display 30TM004 to be notified and reach the position of the sub-hold display 30TM004. It is possible to expect the player to change the mode of the sub-holding display 30TM004 by displaying the image to be displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 11-14 (11) and 11-14, when the balloon reaches the position of the sub-hold display 30TM004 to be notified, the mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 is balloon-shaped (sub-hold display 30TM004F). ). Subsequently, an image of the balloon being broken (secondary hold display 30TM004G) is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-14 (13) and 11-14, the effect control CPU 120 normally displays the sub-hold display to be notified in response to the execution of the sub-hold action effect (action effect a). To the blue mode (in this example, the sub-hold display 30TM004b, which is a blue star-shaped display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIGS. 11-14 (15), the image display device 5 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-14 (16), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the first hold display area 30TM101 is displayed. The hold display (first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode) is shifted and displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105. While erasing the active display 30TM005, the sub-hold display displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 (the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the normal mode (white star-shaped display) and the sub-hold display 30TM004b in the blue mode (blue star-shaped display)). )) Are shifted one by one to the sub-active display area 30TM105 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

Here, when the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation display, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, the first hold display to be notified is changed from the blue mode to the red mode during the execution of the variation display. In this example, it is recognized that the display is changed to the first hold display 30TM001c), which is a red round display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first hold action effect and the type (character type) of the first hold action effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the first holding action effect (action effect C) in which the character C appears.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation display, the sub-hold display to be notified is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (this example) based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect while the variation display is being executed. Then, it is recognized that the display is changed to the sub-hold display 30TM004c), which is a red star-shaped display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the sub-holding action effect and the type (character type) of the sub-holding action effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the sub-holding action effect (action effect b) in which the character b appears.

The effect control CPU 120 first executes the first hold action effect (action effect C) based on these determination results. In the example shown in FIG. 11-15 (17), the character C appears, and an effect of throwing a ball toward the first hold display 30TM001b to be announced is executed. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character C hits the first hold display 30TM001b to be notified, the player can be expected to change the mode of the first hold display 30TM001b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (18), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first hold display to be notified in red from the blue aspect in response to the execution of the first hold action effect (action effect C). The mode (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001c, which is a red round display) is changed.

The effect control CPU 120 then executes the sub-holding action effect (action effect b) within the same fluctuation display period. In the example shown in FIG. 11-15 (19), a character b appears, and an effect of flying a balloon toward the sub-hold display 30TM004b to be notified is executed. As shown in FIGS. 11-15 (20) and 11-15 (21), the balloons blown by the character b fly toward the sub-hold display 30TM004b to be notified and reach the position of the sub-hold display 30TM004b. It is possible to expect the player to change the mode of the sub-holding display 30TM004b by displaying the image to be displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 11-15 (21) and 11-15 (22), when the balloon reaches the position of the sub-hold display 30TM004b to be notified, the mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004b is balloon-shaped (sub-hold display 30TM004F). ). Subsequently, an image of the balloon being broken (secondary hold display 30TM004G) is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-15 (23) and 11-15 (24), the effect control CPU 120 displays the sub-hold display to be notified in blue in response to the execution of the sub-hold action effect (action effect b). To the red mode (in this example, the sub-hold display 30TM004c, which is a red star-shaped display). ..

As described above, the effect mode is different between the first hold action effect executed when the mode of the first hold display is changed and the sub-hold action effect executed when the mode of the sub-hold display is changed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest due to the existence of a plurality of types of hold-corresponding displays (first hold display and sub-hold display).

As shown in FIGS. 11-13 to 11-15, the effect of the character appearing and taking an action on the icon may be executed when the display mode of the active display is changed. Further, it may be executed when the display mode of the sub-active display is changed. For example, when the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the normal mode, the display of the active display 30TM003 is performed in response to the execution of the active action effect in which the character A appears and throws a ball toward the active display 30TM003. The mode may be changed from the normal mode to another mode (special mode, blue mode, green mode, red mode, gold mode). Further, when the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed in the normal mode, the sub-active action effect is executed in response to the appearance of the character a and the action of flying a balloon toward the sub-active display 30TM005. The display mode of the display 30TM005 may be changed from the normal mode to another mode (blue mode, red mode). As described above, there are a plurality of types due to the difference in the effect mode between the active action effect executed when the mode of the active display is changed and the sub-active action effect executed when the mode of the sub-active display is changed. It is possible to further improve the interest due to the existence of the variable display (active display and sub-active display).

In the above embodiment, the execution rate of the first change effect and the execution rate of the second change effect may be different depending on the current set values (1 to 6) for the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value is high (4 to 6), the ratio of the first hold display 30TM001 being displayed in a mode different from the normal mode is higher than when the set value is low (1 to 3). Further, the ratio of the sub-hold display 30TM004 displayed in a mode different from the normal mode (or the ratio of the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 itself displayed) may be high. Further, the number of changes in the display color of the first hold display 30TM001 is larger (for example, 3 times) when the set value is high (4 to 6) than when the set value is low (1 to 3). ) The rate at which the change pattern is selected is high, and the rate at which the change pattern with a large number of changes in the display color of the sub-hold display 30TM004 (for example, twice) is selected may be high.

(Active change production and change suggestion production)
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display when the start winning is generated, but as described above, the display mode of the active display at the time of the active shift is the final display mode. If they are different, an active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display is executed.

Here, when the display mode of the active display is changed (when the active change effect is executed) and when the display mode of the active display is not changed (when the active change effect is not executed), the display mode of the active display is changed. It is possible to perform a change suggestion effect that suggests that there is a possibility of change. This change suggestion effect includes a success mode and a failure mode. In the example shown below, when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the active display is changed to change the failure mode. When the suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the active display shall not be changed.

The effect control CPU 120 is different from the display mode of the active display at the time of the active shift and the final display mode of the active display determined when the start winning is generated when the active shift accompanying the start of the variable display is performed. In this case, by executing the active change effect and the change suggestion effect during the execution of the variation display, the active display is changed from the display mode at the time of active shift to the final display mode within the period of the variation display.

In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines a change pattern that changes the active display from the display mode at the time of active shift to the final display mode when the variable display is started. FIG. 11-16 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining a change pattern of the active display. In this embodiment, determination values are assigned to the special mode, the blue mode, the green mode, the red mode, and the gold mode as the final display mode of the active display. In addition, the display of "○" in FIGS. 11-16 indicates that the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, and the display of "?" Indicates that the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed. ing.

When the active display at the time of active shift is the normal mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the active display change pattern determination table for the normal mode as shown in FIG. 11-16 (A). As shown in FIG. 11-16 (A), in the active display change pattern determination table for the normal mode, the change pattern 011 is selected with a probability of 100% when the final display mode is the special mode. Judgment values are assigned. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 011 is two, of which one is a success mode and one is a failure mode. The change pattern 011 displays the active display in the normal mode at the time of active shift, then executes the change suggestion effect of the success mode to change the active display to a special mode, and then executes the change suggestion effect of the failure mode to be active. It is a change pattern that does not change the display in a special mode.

When the final display mode is the blue mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 012 is selected with a probability of 60% and the change pattern 013 is selected with a probability of 40%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 012 and the change pattern 013 is 3, of which the success mode is 2 times and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 012, after displaying the active display in the normal mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to a special mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to be active. It is a change pattern in which the display is changed to the blue mode and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed so that the active display does not change in the blue mode. The change pattern 013 displays the active display in the normal mode during the active shift. Later, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to a special mode, and then the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed to keep the active display unchanged in the special mode, and then the success mode is changed. It is a change pattern that executes a suggestion effect and changes the active display to a blue mode.

When the final display mode is the green mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 014 is selected with a probability of 70% and the change pattern 015 is selected with a probability of 30%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 014 and the change pattern 015 is 4, of which the success mode is 3 times and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 014, after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to a special mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to be active. The display is changed to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to keep the active display unchanged from the green mode. It is a change pattern, and the change pattern 015 displays the active display in the normal mode at the time of active shift, then executes the change suggestion effect of the success mode to change the active display to a special mode, and then changes the change suggestion effect of the success mode. Is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to keep the active display unchanged in the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to perform the active display. Is a change pattern that changes to a green mode.

When the final display mode is the red mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 016 is selected with a probability of 80% and the change pattern 017 is selected with a probability of 20%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 016 and the change pattern 017 is 5, of which the success mode is 4 times and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 016, after displaying the active display in the normal mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to a special mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to be active. The display is changed to the blue mode, then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the red mode. After that, a change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed and the active display is not changed in the red mode. The change pattern 017 is a change suggestion effect of the success mode after displaying the active display in the normal mode at the time of active shift. To change the active display to a special mode, then execute a success mode change suggestion effect to change the active display to a blue mode, and then execute a success mode change suggestion effect to turn the active display green. A change pattern in which the mode is changed, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to change the active display in the green mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the red mode. Is.

Further, when the final display mode is the gold mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 018 is selected with a probability of 100%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 018 is 5, of which the success mode is 5 times and the failure mode is 0 times. In the change pattern 018, after displaying the active display in the normal mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to a special mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to be active. The display is changed to the blue mode, then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the red mode. After that, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the golden mode.

When the active display at the time of active shift is a special mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects an active display change pattern determination table for the special mode as shown in FIG. 11-16 (B). As shown in FIG. 11-16 (B), in the active display change pattern determination table for the special mode, the change pattern 021 is selected with a probability of 100% when the final display mode is the blue mode. Judgment values are assigned. The change suggestion effect is executed twice in the change pattern 021, of which the success mode is once and the failure mode is once. In the change pattern 021, after displaying the active display in a special mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to be active. It is a change pattern that does not change the display in the blue mode.

When the final display mode is the green mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 022 is selected with a probability of 70% and the change pattern 023 is selected with a probability of 30%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 022 and the change pattern 023 is three, of which the success mode is two times and the failure mode is one. In the change pattern 022, after displaying the active display in a special mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to be active. It is a change pattern in which the display is changed to the green mode and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed so that the active display does not change in the green mode. The change pattern 023 displays the active display in a special mode during the active shift. Later, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed to keep the active display in the blue mode, and then the success mode is changed. It is a change pattern that executes a suggestion effect and changes the active display to a green mode.

When the final display mode is the red mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 024 is selected with a probability of 80% and the change pattern 025 is selected with a probability of 20%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 024 and the change pattern 025 is 4, of which the success mode is 3 times and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 024, after displaying the active display in a special mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to be active. The display is changed to the green mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the red mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to keep the active display unchanged from the red mode. The change pattern 025 is a change pattern, in which the active display is displayed in a special mode at the time of active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed. Is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to keep the active display unchanged in the green mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to perform the active display. Is a change pattern that changes the color to red.

Further, when the final display mode is the gold mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 026 is selected with a probability of 100%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 026 is 4, of which the success mode is 4 times and the failure mode is 0 times. In the change pattern 026, after displaying the active display in a special mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to be active. A change that changes the display to a green mode, then executes a success mode change suggestion effect to change the active display to a red mode, and then executes a success mode change suggestion effect to change the active display to a gold mode. It is a pattern.

When the active display at the time of active shift is in the blue mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the active display change pattern determination table for the blue mode as shown in FIG. 11-16 (C). As shown in FIG. 11-16 (C), in the active display change pattern determination table for the blue mode, the change pattern 031 is selected with a 100% probability when the final display mode is the green mode. Judgment values are assigned. The change suggestion effect is executed twice in the change pattern 031, of which the success mode is once and the failure mode is once. In the change pattern 031, after the active display is displayed in the blue mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to be active. It is a change pattern that does not change the display in the green mode.

When the final display mode is the red mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 032 is selected with a probability of 80% and the change pattern 033 is selected with a probability of 20%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 032 and the change pattern 033 is 3, of which the success mode is 2 times and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 032, after the active display is displayed in the blue mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to be active. It is a change pattern in which the display is changed to the red mode and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed so that the active display does not change in the red mode. The change pattern 033 displays the active display in the blue mode during the active shift. Later, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed to keep the active display in the green mode, and then the success mode is changed. It is a change pattern that executes a suggestion effect and changes the active display to a red mode.

Further, when the final display mode is the gold mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 034 is selected with a 100% probability. The number of times the change suggestion effect is executed in the change pattern 034 is 3, of which the success mode is 3 times and the failure mode is 0 times. In the change pattern 034, after the active display is displayed in the blue mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to be active. This is a change pattern in which the display is changed to the red mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the gold mode.

When the active display at the time of active shift is in the red mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the active display change pattern determination table for the red mode as shown in FIG. 11-16 (D). As shown in FIG. 11-16 (D), in the active display change pattern determination table for the red mode, the change pattern 041 is selected with a 100% probability when the final display mode is the gold mode. Judgment values are assigned. The change suggestion effect is executed once in the change pattern 041, of which the success mode is 1 time and the failure mode is 0 times. The change pattern 041 is a change pattern in which the active display is displayed in the red mode at the time of the active shift, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the gold mode.

As shown in FIGS. 11-16, within one variation display period (in this example, since the display mode of the active display changes to the final display mode before the reach state is established, the reach is reached after the variation display is started. The more change suggestion effects are executed (within the period until the state is established), and in particular, the more success mode change suggestion effects are executed, the more the display color changes to a high hit expectation. The ratio will be high.

Here, in the present embodiment, at the stage where the nth change suggestion effect is executed, the greater the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the successful mode up to that point, the higher the ratio of the n + 1th change suggestion effect being executed. It is configured as follows. For example, at the stage where the second change suggestion effect is executed (when n = 2), if both times are successful, the third change suggestion effect is always executed. If one of the two times is a success mode and one is a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed. The same applies to the case of n = 3 and the case of n = 4. In this way, when the change suggestion effect is executed, the greater the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode executed within the period from the start of the variation display to the establishment of the reach state, the same variation. Since the ratio of the next change suggestion effect being executed within the display period (the period from the start of the variable display to the establishment of the reach state) is high, the player can execute the change suggestion effect the number of times, especially the success mode. It will be possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the higher the ratio of [the number of times the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed] to [the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed] within one variation display period, the higher the expectation of a big hit. The rate of change to a high-degree display mode is high. Specifically, [the number of times the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed / the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed] is 1/2 when the final display mode is the special mode, and the final display mode is the blue mode. In the case, it is 2/3, when the final display mode is the green mode, it is 3/4, when the final display mode is the red mode, it is 4/5, and the final display mode is the gold mode. If it becomes, it is 5/5. In this way, the larger the [number of times the success mode change suggestion effect is executed / the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed], the higher the rate at which the active display changes to the display mode with a high expectation of a big hit. Also pays attention to the relationship between the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed and the number of times the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, which can improve the interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, the more times the success mode change suggestion effect is continuously executed, the higher the rate of change to the display mode having a high expectation of big hit. Specifically, the number of continuous change suggestion effects of the success mode is 1 (not continuous) or 2 when the final display mode is the blue mode, and when the final display mode is the green mode. It is 2 or 3, 3 or 4 when the final display mode is the red mode, and 5 when the final display mode is the gold mode. As a result, the player becomes interested in whether or not the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuously executed, and how many times in succession.

Further, in this example, when the final display mode is the same display color, it is easy to select a change pattern in which the number of continuous change suggestion effects of the success mode is larger. For example, in the case of the blue mode, the change pattern 012 (2 consecutive) is selected more frequently than the change pattern 013 (not continuous), and in the green mode, the change pattern is higher than the change pattern 015 (2 consecutive). 014 (3 consecutive) is selected at a higher rate, and in the case of the red aspect, the change pattern 016 (4 consecutive) is selected at a higher rate than the change pattern 017 (3 consecutive). In this way, even if the display color is finally the same, the player's expectation can be further increased by making it easy for the change suggestion effect of the success mode to be continuous.

The effect control CPU 120 determines the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed and the mode (success mode or failure mode) of the change suggestion effect based on the change pattern shown in FIGS. 11-16 determined at the time of winning the start. Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of the change suggestion effect based on whether each change suggestion effect is a success mode or a failure mode, and whether or not to execute the next change suggestion effect. decide. The types of change suggestion effects include change suggestion effect A in which character A appears, change suggestion effect B in which character B appears, change suggestion effect C in which character C appears, change suggestion effect D in which character D appears, and character. There is a change suggestion effect E, in which E appears.

The effect control CPU 120 shows in FIG. 11-17 when the change suggestion effect executed the nth time is a successful mode and the change suggestion effect executed the n + 1th time is executed in the change pattern determined at the time of starting winning [ Select the table of "Success mode, next production execution". When the change suggestion effect determination table is [Success mode, next effect execution], character A is 10%, character B is 20%, character C is 30%, character D is 40%, and character E is 0%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability.

In the change pattern determined at the time of winning the start, the effect control CPU 120 shows in FIG. 11-17 when the change suggestion effect executed the nth time is a successful mode and the change suggestion effect executed the n + 1th time is not executed. Select the table of "Success mode, no next production execution". When the change suggestion effect determination table is [Success mode, no next effect execution], character A is 5%, character B is 15%, character C is 30%, character D is 45%, and character E is 5%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability.

In the change pattern determined at the time of winning the start, the effect control CPU 120 shows in FIG. 11-17 when the nth change suggestion effect is a failure mode and the n + 1th change suggestion effect is executed. Select the table of [Failure mode, next production execution]. When the change suggestion effect determination table is [Failure mode, next effect execution], character A is 37%, character B is 32%, character C is 30%, character D is 1%, and character E is 0%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability.

In the change pattern determined at the time of winning the start, the effect control CPU 120 shows in FIG. 11-17 when the change suggestion effect executed at the nth time is a failure mode and the change suggestion effect is not executed at the n + 1th time. Select the table of [Failure mode, no next production execution]. When the change suggestion effect determination table is [Failure mode, no next effect execution], character A is 35%, character B is 30%, character C is 30%, character D is 5%, and character E is 0%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability.

The effect control CPU 120 determines the type of change suggestion effect for each change suggestion effect based on the change suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 11-17. Therefore, when the nth and n + 1th change suggestion effects are executed, for example, the character A is selected in the nth change suggestion effect, and all the characters A to E are selected in the n + 1th change suggestion effect. May be selected. That is, when the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears at the nth time is executed, the change suggestion effect B in which the character B different from the character A appears at the n + 1th time may be executed, while n + 1 There is a possibility that the change suggestion effect A in which the same character A appears at the nth time is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the change suggestion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-17, the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears has a low probability of becoming a successful mode, but the probability that the next change suggestion effect is executed is high, and the change suggestion effect in which the character D appears. D has a high probability of becoming a successful mode, but has a low probability of executing the next change suggestion effect. Further, the change suggestion effect E in which the character E appears has a 100% probability of being a successful mode, but the probability that the next change suggestion effect is executed is 0%. Therefore, for the player, when the character A is displayed on the screen, the expectation that the display mode of the active display will change is low, but the expectation that the next change suggestion effect will be executed is high. When the character D is displayed on the screen, the expectation that the display mode of the active display will change is high, but the expectation that the next change suggestion effect will be executed is low, and the character E is displayed on the screen. In that case, the display mode of the active display always changes, but the next change suggestion effect is not executed (the change suggestion effect this time is the last).

In this way, the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes to a mode with a high expectation for big hits differs depending on the type of character appearing in the production, so the player pays attention to which type of character appears. Will be done. Further, since the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of the character appearing in the effect, the player pays attention to which type of character appears.

In addition to the effect types shown in FIGS. 11-17, for example, an effect type may be provided in which the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes is low and the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed is also low. An effect type may be provided in which the display mode of the display changes at a high rate and the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed is also high.

(Specific examples of active change production and change suggestion production)
Next, specific examples of the active change effect and the change suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-18 to 11-20. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 11-18, 11-19 (9) to (12), and 11-20, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the final display mode is the gold mode when the start prize is won. This is an example in which it is decided that the mode at the time of active shift is the normal mode, and when the variable display based on the start winning prize is started, the change pattern of the active display is decided to be the change pattern 018. .. Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 11-18 and 11-19 (9), (10), (20) to (22), the effect control CPU 120 displays the final display mode in green when the start prize is won. An example in which it is decided that the mode at the time of active shift is the normal mode, and when the variable display based on the start winning prize is started, the change pattern of the active display is decided to be the change pattern 014. Is.

In this example, based on the change pattern 018, it is determined to execute the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears for the first change suggestion effect, and the second change suggestion effect is executed. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect A of the success mode, it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B in which the character B appears for the second change suggestion effect, and the third change suggestion effect is executed. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B of the success mode based on the above, and it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect C in which the character C appears for the third change suggestion effect, and the fourth time. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect C of the success mode based on the change suggestion effect of, and to execute the change suggestion effect D in which the character D appears for the fourth change suggestion effect. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect D of the success mode based on the decision and the execution of the fifth change suggestion effect, and the character E appears in the fifth change suggestion effect. It is assumed that it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect E.

In FIG. 11-18 (1), the active display 30TM003 (white circle display) in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the image display device 5 executes a variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols. Indicates the state of.

The effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect A of the success mode in response to the execution timing of the first change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (1), a character A appears from the right side of the screen, and an effect image in which the character A performs an action of throwing a ball toward the active display 30TM003 is displayed, followed by FIG. As shown in -18 (2), an effect image showing that the ball thrown by the character A hits the active display 30TM003 is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the active display 30TM003 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. This effect image is an image reminiscent of the explosion of the active display. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (3), the active display 30TM003a (white triangle display) of a special aspect is displayed in the active display area 30TM103 in response to the completion of the first change suggestion effect. ..

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect B of the success mode in accordance with the execution timing of the second change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (4), a character B appears from the left side of the screen, and an effect image in which the character B performs an action of throwing a ball toward the active display 30TM003a is displayed, followed by FIG. As shown in -18 (5), an effect image showing that the ball thrown by the character B hits the active display 30TM003a is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the special mode active display 30TM003a is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (6), the active display 30TM003b (blue circle display) in the blue mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103 in response to the completion of the second change suggestion effect. To.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect C of the success mode in accordance with the execution timing of the third change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (7), a character C appears from the right side of the screen, and an effect image in which the character C performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003b is displayed, and then, As shown in FIG. 11-18 (8), an effect image showing that the ball thrown by the character C hits the active display 30TM003b is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the active display 30TM003b in the blue aspect is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (9), the active display 30TM003d (green circle display) in the green mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103 in response to the completion of the third change suggestion effect. Green.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect D of the success mode in accordance with the execution timing of the fourth change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (10), a character D appears from the left side of the screen, and an effect image in which the character D performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003d is displayed, followed by an effect image. As shown in FIG. 11-19 (11), an effect image showing that the ball thrown by the character D hits the active display 30TM003d is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the green mode active display 30TM003d is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (12), the active display 30TM003c (red circle display) in the red aspect is displayed in the active display area 30TM103 in response to the completion of the fourth change suggestion effect. To.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect E of the success mode in accordance with the execution timing of the fifth change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (13), a crack image (screen crack image 30TM200) in which the transparent member (glass plate or the like) constituting the screen of the image display device 5 is cracked is displayed. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (14), a crack image (screen crack image 30TM200) in which the range of the crack is expanded is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (15), an image (screen crack image 30TM210) in which the transparent member constituting the screen of the image display device 5 is cracked is displayed, and the character E appears from the center of the screen. An effect image is displayed in which the character E performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003c. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (16), an effect image showing that the ball thrown by the character E hits the active display 30TM003c is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the active display 30TM003c in the red aspect is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (17), the active display 30TM003e (golden circle display) in the golden mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103 in response to the completion of the fifth change suggestion effect. To.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (18), the screen crack image 30TM210 displayed in the image display device 5 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 11-20 (19), the left symbol display area and the right symbol are displayed. A reach state is established in which the same decorative symbol ("7" in this example) is stopped in the display area, and the characters "reach !!" are displayed at the bottom of the screen (the area overlapping the active display area 30TM103). The production is executed. Here, as described above, at the timing when the reach is established, the active display 30TM003e in the gold mode is hidden, and the square frame showing the active display area 30TM103 is also hidden. The hidden information will not be displayed until the variable display of the notice target is completed.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 11-18 and 11-19 (9), (10), (20) to (22), the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode to the green mode when the start prize is won. This is an example in which it is decided that the mode at the time of active shift is the normal mode, and when the variable display based on the start winning prize is started, the change pattern of the active display is decided to be the change pattern 014. ..

In this example, based on the change pattern 014, it is determined to execute the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears for the first change suggestion effect, and the second change suggestion effect is executed. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect A of the success mode, it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B in which the character B appears for the second change suggestion effect, and the third change suggestion effect is executed. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B of the success mode based on the above, and it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect C in which the character C appears for the third change suggestion effect, and the fourth time. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect C of the success mode based on the change suggestion effect of, and to execute the change suggestion effect D in which the character D appears for the fourth change suggestion effect. It is assumed that the decision is made and that the change suggestion effect D of the failure mode is executed based on the fact that the fifth change suggestion effect is not executed.

The effect examples (first change suggestion effect to third change suggestion effect) shown in FIGS. 11-18 (1) to 11-19 (9) are the same as the effect example of the change pattern 018 described above. Will be omitted, and examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 11-19 (10) and (20) to (22) will be described.

The effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect D of the failure mode in accordance with the execution timing of the fourth change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (10), a character D appears from the left side of the screen, and an effect image in which the character D performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003d is displayed, followed by an effect image. As shown in FIG. 11-19 (20), an effect image showing that the ball thrown by the character D did not hit the active display 30TM003d is displayed. At this time, the active display 30TM003d in the green mode is continuously displayed in the active display area 30TM103, the above-mentioned effect image (active display 30TM003G) is not displayed, and instead, the character D throws and does not hit. An effect image is displayed in which the ball rolls toward the lower right of the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (21), when the fourth change suggestion effect is completed, the active display 30TM003d in the green mode is continuously displayed in the active display area 30TM103. That is, the display mode of the active display does not change from before the execution of the fourth change suggestion effect (after the end of the third change suggestion effect).

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (22), a reach state is established in which the same decorative symbol (“4” in this example) is stopped in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area, and “reach !! The character "" is displayed at the bottom of the screen (the area overlapping the active display area 30TM103), and the reach effect is executed. Here, since the active display area 30TM103 is hidden at the timing when the reach state is established as described above, the active display 30TM003d in the green mode is not displayed until the variable display of the notice target is completed.

As shown in FIGS. 11-18 (1) to 11-20 (19), the effect control CPU 120 is in a state where the image display device 5 is continuously executing the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols. , The change suggestion effect is executed a predetermined number of times (1 to 5 times) according to the change pattern. Then, when the execution of the change suggestion effect a predetermined number of times is completed, the same decorative symbol is stopped in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area, and the reach state is established. That is, during the period in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect a predetermined number of times, the image display device 5 temporarily stops the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right, changes the direction of the variation display, and changes the reach state. It doesn't hold. According to such a configuration, the mode of the variation display of the decorative symbol does not change during the period in which the change suggestion effect is executed a predetermined number of times according to the change pattern, so that the change suggestion effect can be more noticed.

Although FIG. 11-16 shows a change pattern in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is not continuous, the change pattern is not limited to such a form, and a change pattern in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is continuous may be provided. .. Further, a change pattern may be provided in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed more than the change suggestion effect of the success mode. For example, a change pattern may be provided in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed three times in a row and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed twice in succession. Further, although the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed once or more, an effect pattern may be provided in which the display mode of the active display does not change because the change suggestion effect of the success mode is not executed even once.

In the example shown in FIGS. 11-16 and the like, the display mode of the active display does not change when the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed, and the active display is always displayed when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed. An example in which the display mode changes is shown, but not limited to such a form, when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, it is active at a higher rate than when the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed. Any configuration may be used as long as the display mode of the display changes. For example, an effect pattern in which the display mode of the active display does not change even when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed may be provided, and the change of the failure mode may be provided. Even when the suggestion effect is executed, an effect pattern that changes the display mode of the active display may be provided.

In the example shown in FIGS. 11-16 and the like, when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the active display is a display mode in which the expectation of big hit is one step higher (from the normal mode to the special mode, from the special mode. An example of changing from a blue mode, a blue mode to a green mode, a green mode to a red mode, and a red mode to a gold mode) has been shown. May provide a change pattern in which the display mode of the active display changes from a display mode in which the expectation of a big hit is two or more steps higher (for example, from a normal mode to a green mode, from a blue mode to a golden mode, etc.). Further, the rate at which the display mode changes in two or more stages may be different depending on the type of change suggestion effect to be executed (for example, the type of the character that appears). For example, the change suggestion effect in which the character A appears. When is executed, the rate at which the display mode changes by two or more steps is low, and when the change suggestion effect in which the character B appears is executed, the rate at which the display mode changes by two or more steps is high. Is also good. Further, when the change suggestion effect in which the character C appears is executed, the display mode may be changed in three stages without fail.

In the above embodiment, the change suggestion effect may be executed at the timing before the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. Specifically, when the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed based on the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous variation that revariates after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped is executed one or more times, before the temporary stop of the decorative symbol The change suggestion effect of the success mode may be executed. For example, when n temporary stops are executed, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed before each temporary stop (a total of n times of the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuously executed), and then. By executing the change suggestion effect of the failure mode, it may be suggested that the n + 1th temporary stop is not executed. When the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed based on the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous variation is not executed even once, the effect pattern in which only the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed and the change suggestion effect of the success mode is not executed. May be provided. Further, when the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed based on the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous variation is executed a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, n + 1 times), the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuously performed n + 1 times. An effect pattern may be provided that is executed and does not execute the change suggestion effect of the failure mode.

In such a configuration, the change suggestion effect is started (character appears) when the decorative symbol is not temporarily stopped, and the change suggestion effect is ended before the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (character). Takes an action to change the display mode of the active display). For example, immediately after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the character A appears and takes an action to change the display mode of the active display from the normal mode to the special mode, and then the first temporary stop is performed for the first time. After the re-variation of is started, character B appears and takes an action, the display mode of the active display changes from the special mode to the blue mode, and then the second temporary stop is performed and the second re-variation occurs. After the start, the character C may appear and take an action so that the display mode of the active display changes from the blue mode to the green mode. In this way, by making sure that the execution period of one change suggestion effect and the temporary stop period of the decorative symbol (that is, the period for changing the variation mode of the decorative symbol) do not overlap, the change suggestion effect can be focused on. At the same time, it is possible not to reduce the effect of the effect when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped.

When executing an effect of changing the variable display direction of the decorative symbol from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction, the change suggestion effect is started while the decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the vertical direction (character appears). , It is preferable to end the change suggestion effect (the character takes an action to change the display mode of the active display) before changing the variable display direction of the decorative pattern to the horizontal direction. For example, immediately after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the first character appears and takes an action, the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode to the blue mode, and then the variable display direction of the decorative symbol changes from the vertical direction. After changing in the horizontal direction, the next character may appear and take an action so that the display mode of the active display changes from the blue mode to the red mode. In this way, by preventing the execution period of one change suggestion effect from overlapping with the timing at which the change display direction of the decorative symbol changes, the change suggestion effect can be noticed and the change display of the decorative symbol can be displayed. It is possible to prevent the effect of the effect when the direction is changed from being lowered.

In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the change suggestion effect is an effect suggesting that the display mode of the active display changes, but the change suggestion effect is not limited to such a form, and the change suggestion effect is a display mode of the hold display. It may be a production that suggests that For example, the change pattern shown in FIGS. 11-16 may be used as a change pattern when changing the display mode of the hold display, and when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the hold display is changed. , When the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed, the display mode of the hold display may not be changed.

In the above embodiment, in both the success mode change suggestion effect and the failure mode change suggestion effect, the appearing character acts on the same action (active display or hold display, for example, a ball). An example of performing an action (throwing action) is shown, but not limited to such a form, in the change suggestion effect of the success mode, the appearing character performs an action for changing the display mode of the active display or the hold display. , In the change suggestion effect of the failure mode, the appearing character may not perform an action for changing the display mode of the active display or the hold display. It should be noted that the action performed by the appearing character may be different between the change suggestion effect of the success mode and the change suggestion effect of the failure mode. For example, in the change suggestion effect of the success mode, the active display or the hold display to be changed may be displayed. The action of throwing the ball in the direction of (active display or hold display) is performed, and in the failure mode change suggestion effect, the action of throwing the ball in a direction different from the active display or hold display (active display or hold display) is performed. It is also possible to perform a production that does not work).

In the above embodiment, the greater the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode executed within the predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the establishment of the reach state, the more the next change suggestion effect is executed within the predetermined period. The higher the ratio of the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect executed within the predetermined period, the higher the expectation of big hit is shown. .. However, the predetermined period is not limited to this, and from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the temporary suspension of the decorative symbol (a combination of decorative symbols or a pseudo-continuous symbol in which re-variation (pseudo-ream) is performed after the temporary stop). It may be a period, or it may be a period from the temporary suspension of the decorative symbol to the temporary suspension of the decorative symbol after the re-variation of the decorative symbol (that is, the period between the pseudo-reams). The predetermined period may be a period from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the first stop of any of the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right, and all the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol. It may be a period until the confirmation is stopped.

In the above embodiment, when the change suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, a plurality of patterns may exist from the end of one change suggestion effect to the start of the next change suggestion effect. For example, when the interval from the end of one change suggestion effect to the start of the next change suggestion effect is long, the ratio of the next change suggestion effect to the success mode is higher than when the interval is short, and the jackpot expectation level. May be high. Further, when the change suggestion effect is executed many times, the interval may be gradually shortened, and the jackpot expectation may be gradually increased accordingly. According to such a form, when the player finishes the change suggestion effect of 1, whether or not the next change suggestion effect is executed and also the interval until the next change suggestion effect is started. You can become interested and improve your interests.

In the above embodiment, the rate of changing the display mode of the active display may be different depending on the current set values (1 to 6) for the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value is high (4 to 6), the proportion of the active display displayed in a mode different from the normal mode is higher than when the set value is low (1 to 3). You may do so. Further, the number of changes in the display color of the active display is larger (for example, 3 times or more) when the set value is high (4 to 6) than when the set value is low (1 to 3). The rate at which the pattern is selected may be high, that is, the rate at which the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed and the rate at which the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuous may be high. Further, compared with the case where the set value is low (1 to 3), the case where the set value is high (4 to 6) is a change suggestion effect of a specific type (for example, an effect in which a character X having a low appearance frequency appears). May be made to be executed at a higher rate.

[Other examples of power-on processing]
Next, another example regarding the power-on processing will be described.
12-1 to 12-3 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed by the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, and FIGS. 9-11 to 9-13 and 9 -11 and 9-43 to 9-44, and the processes corresponding to the processes shown in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2. However, among the processes shown in FIGS. 9-11 and the like, some processes (for example, the processes shown in FIG. 9-11) are not shown.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM4010). This process is the same as the process shown in step S21TM1330 of FIG. 9-13 and step S21TM2130 of FIG. 9-43, and performs a parity check as a data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value, for example, 0 to 5. Is confirmed (step S21TM4020). In this example, as the setting values stored in the setting value storage area, 6 numbers of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are set as regular values, and 6 levels of setting values having different jackpot probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, and the setting in this example. The value 2 corresponds to the set value 3 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, the set value 3 in this example corresponds to the set value 4 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, and the set value 4 in this example is described above. It corresponds to the set value 5 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like, and the set value 5 in this example corresponds to the set value 6 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above.

Here, in this example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is shipped from the game machine maker (before it is installed in the game hall), the value having the lowest jackpot probability among the above-mentioned regular values is stored in the set value storage area. It is assumed that (0 in this example) is stored. If the data in the set value storage area is corrupted, it may not be a regular value. If the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), it is confirmed whether or not the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting changing flag is set when the mode shifts to the setting change mode described later (step S21TM4580), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM4720).

If the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not it is decided to execute RAM clear (initialization of the gaming state), and if the value is 1, it is determined that RAM clear is executed. It shows that it was done. In this example, the RAM clear is not actually executed when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the processing related to the setting change mode is completed. Will be done.

The area where the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power is cut off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not retained, and the value of the RAM clear flag at the time of power restoration is 0 (the initial value is not set). Note that the notification that the game state is initialized may be performed before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and as will be described later, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. It may be done.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4060.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening. A detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected are output from the sensor 21TM300 to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected. When it recognizes that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, the game control microcomputer 100 is notified that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, so that the game control microcomputer 100 side. , The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

The gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opening state of the glass door frame 3a, which is a detection signal indicating that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, for the game control microcomputer 100. When the configuration is such that a detection signal indicating that is output (that is, when the game control microcomputer 100 includes the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300), the game control microcomputer 100 has these. By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). .. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the process proceeds to the process after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 12-2. When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the set value can be confirmed and changed, and when the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode, the set value can be confirmed.

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), and the power is not cut off during the setting change (YES). The set value is changed and / on the condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060) and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070) in step S21TM4030). Or it can be confirmed. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) described later without being controlled by the mode.

In the present embodiment, in order to make it possible to confirm the set value (setting confirmation mode) although the change of the set value is not permitted, (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2) ) Two conditions are required that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. When it is confirmed by the determination process of step S21TM4060 and step S21TM4070 that all of the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, the CPU 103 is in a state where the set value can be confirmed (setting confirmation). It is possible to shift to mode). Further, in addition to these conditions (1) and (2), the RAM clear flag is set based on the determination that (3) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES). As will be described later, it is possible to shift to a state in which the set value can be changed (setting change mode) on condition that the setting value has been changed.

As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the gaming board 2, and must be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. I can't. If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, there is an abnormality in the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, or something is wrong. There is a possibility that the set value is being confirmed or changed by means. In such a state, it is inappropriate to allow confirmation or change of the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode. And it is not controlled by any of the setting change modes.

In the present embodiment, as the condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although it is controllable, it is not limited to such a form, and even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode It may not be controlled by any of the above.

On the other hand, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4060 (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. When it is in the closed state, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of the setting command) described later without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, when it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and is not controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Move to (Send setting command).

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4120. Further, in the check of the value stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4020), if the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103 , Step S21TM4120. Further, in the check of the setting changing flag (step S21TM4030), if it is confirmed that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4120.

Here, even if a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is damaged, it is determined as NO in step S21TM4010. Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. That is, if there is a possibility that the value stored in the set value storage area is inappropriate, the setting is changed based on the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) being satisfied. It will be controlled by the mode. Further, even if the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010) in the data check of the backup RAM area (YES in step S21TM4010), the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area. (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the condition that the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. Further, when the setting change mode is controlled when the power is cut off last time, the setting change mode is controlled based on the condition of the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. It will be.

In step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4120), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130). ..

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processes after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 12-2 are executed.

On the other hand, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4120 (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. In the closed state, in step S21TM4130, the lock switch 21TM051 is not in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4130), and in step S21TM4140, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state. (NO in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 does not execute the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal. The indicated set value abnormality error command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value abnormality error command, the image display device 5 notifies that the set value may be abnormal. For example, the message "The setting value may be abnormal" is displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 shifts the image display device 5 to the setting change mode when the power is turned off (the power switch 21TM055 is turned off) and then turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on). The notification prompts the user to perform an operation for changing the set value (determine the set value). For example, the message "Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode" is displayed. It should be noted that the same notification may be performed by the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined loop process (repetition of steps S21TM420 to step S21TM4220) until the power is turned off.

In this loop processing, after the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4200), the character "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, so that "the set value is not a normal value (0 to 5)". Although there is a possibility, the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode (that all are determined to be YES in steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140) is not satisfied and the transition to the setting change mode has not been performed. " Notify (step S21TM4210). Then, the security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21TM4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information on a plurality of gaming machines, a card unit or a ringing lamp device provided corresponding to the gaming machine, etc.). Will be done.

During the loop processing period, the character "E" is displayed every 4 ms on the 7-segment display provided in the display monitor 21TM029. By providing a weight of 4 ms, it is possible to prevent excessive heat from staying in the 7-segment display and damaging the display. In addition, the security signal is continuously output during the loop processing period. By outputting the security signal to the outside, a predetermined event (in this example, the set value is a normal value (0 to 5)) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the input of the security signal in an external device such as a hall computer. ), But the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied and the transition to the setting change mode has not occurred) can be identified.

The loop processing in steps S21TM420 to S21TM4220 is continued until the power supply is stopped (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), when the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), and when the power is cut off during the setting change (NO). That is, if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on and YES is determined in step S21TM4030), the game should not be played in this state. Before shifting to the normal game processing (for example, the game control timer interrupt processing including the prize ball processing and the special symbol process processing shown in FIGS. 9-14), the set value of the set value storage area is fixed to a normal value. I need to let you. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to shift to the setting change mode.

In the present embodiment, in order to make the set value changeable (setting change mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. (3) Three conditions are required that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. When it is confirmed by the determination process of step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140 that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied, the CPU 103 is in a state where the set value can be changed ( It is possible to shift to the setting change mode).

If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value of the set value storage area can be fixed to a regular value. Therefore, it is not possible to shift to normal game processing. Therefore, if NO is determined in any of the determination processes of step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140, the process proceeds to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) described above.

If the process shifts to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), the normal game process cannot be performed. Therefore, the pachinko game machine 1 must be turned off and then turned on again. It doesn't become. In this way, if the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied, the power is turned off once, and all the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied when the next power is turned on. Then, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the setting value of the setting value storage area is fixed to a regular value.

When any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 predetermines the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also possible to urge the power to be turned off by emitting light in the power off instruction mode.

In the present embodiment, when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the setting value is not allowed to be changed, but the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode). , (1) The gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070).

However, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. Even when the two conditions of (YES in step S21TM4130) are satisfied, the setting confirmation mode is not controlled. Even when these conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, if it is determined in step S21TM4140 that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO), It is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Next, the processes related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3. In the process of FIG. 12-2, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value (any of 0 to 5 in this example) ( Step S21TM4510). If a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area (YES in step S21TM4510), the process proceeds to step S21TM4530. When a regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 has the lowest jackpot probability "0" as a regular value in the set value storage area. Is stored (step S21TM4520). Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4530.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a power cutoff process after performing a weight of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) (step S21TM4540). In the power cutoff process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a power cutoff signal based on a power cutoff including an unexpected power failure is input, and if a power cutoff signal is input, the power supply is supplied. Immediately before the operation becomes inoperable due to the stop, the power supply stop processing is executed. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. That is, in the power cutoff process, check data is stored in a predetermined backup area.

As a result, when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (when the iterative processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620 or the iterative processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 is being performed), the power supply is supplied. If a disconnection occurs, the data check will be properly executed in step S21TM4010 after the power is restored.

Next, the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display the value corresponding to the set value (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4550). Here, the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area. Since the clerk of the game hall usually recognizes the range of the set value as 1 to 6, if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed as it is on the display monitor 21TM029, the clerk of the game hall actually displays it. There is a risk of erroneously recognizing the set value of. Therefore, in this example, [value stored in the set value storage area + 1] is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as a set value. Next, the CPU 103 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is not executed after the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode) ends, the CPU 103 specifies that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled. The setting confirmation mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4650), and the process proceeds to step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is executed after the mode (here, the setting change mode) is completed, the CPU 103 changes the set value. Set the setting changing flag indicating that there is a possibility (step S21TM4580). Since the area in which the value of the setting changing flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting changing flag is retained even when the power is turned off. Therefore, if a power failure occurs while the setting change mode is being controlled, the value of the setting changing flag is 1 (set state) when the power is turned on next time.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command that specifies that the setting change mode has been controlled (step S21TM4590). The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the CPU 103 inputs the setting changeover switch information indicating whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and confirms whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

If the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4680. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and moves to step S21TM4680. Transition. The updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

Each time the clerk of the amusement park operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the set value stored in the set value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the regular setting value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area when the setting change mode is controlled (when the power is turned on or when the power is cut off last time) is 3. If there is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated in the order of 3 → 4 → 5 → 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 for each setting change operation, and the display monitor 21TM029 responds accordingly. The displayed information will be updated in the order of 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4.

Here, the display of the current setting value (step S21TM4550), the output of the security signal (step S21TM4560), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650) can be executed, but the setting change mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4590). ) And the state in which the update of the set value (step S21TM4620) cannot be executed corresponds to the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed or the set value cannot be changed. During the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode, the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 are repeatedly executed.

In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES is determined in step S21TM4070), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO is determined in step S21TM4040 and the RAM clear flag). Is still 0).

In addition, the current set value can be displayed (step S21TM4550) and the security signal can be output (step S21TM4560), and the setting change mode command can be transmitted (step S21TM4590) and the set value can be updated (step S21TM4620). The state corresponds to a setting change mode in which the set value can be confirmed and changed.

In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (determined as YES in step S21TM4070 or step S21TM4130), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140). It is determined and controlled based on (the RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150).

The setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits the setting confirmation mode command, it is possible to identify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted, and the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off should be set. , When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once when the setting change mode is controlled. Therefore, the CPU 103 should set the setting change mode command transmission flag which can identify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted when the setting change mode command is transmitted and which does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. , When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

In step S21TM4680, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), the weight of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) is performed again, and then the processes after step S21TM4540 are repeated. That is, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the control of the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the control of the setting change mode is continued.

In step S21TM4680, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (YES in step S21TM4680), the CPU 103 terminates the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and sets 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM4710). By setting a predetermined time as the value of the security signal timer, the value of the security signal timer is changed from the predetermined time to 0 ms in the information output process (step S21TM1670 in FIG. 9-14) when the normal game process is subsequently started. The security signal will be continuously output until it becomes. For example, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped when the value reaches 0 ms. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode has ended or the setting confirmation mode has ended.

That is, as shown in FIG. 12-4 (1), the output of the security signal is started corresponding to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4560), and the setting change mode and setting confirmation are started. Corresponding to the end of the control of any of the modes, the value of the security signal timer is set so that the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 sec has elapsed from the end of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Set (step S21TM4710).

Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 determines whether it is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled). It is being executed as a common process (without). Further, in step S21TM4710, the process of setting the remaining output period of the security signal is also determined regardless of whether it is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled). It is being executed as a common process. In this way, the security signal output control is simplified by sharing the security signal output start control and output end control between the case of being controlled in the setting change mode and the case of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode. , The control burden can be reduced.

In addition, the output of the security signal is started corresponding to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal is output in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By stopping, it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that the gaming machine may have been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Here, in step S21TM4710 immediately after the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the security signal is a common value (1000 ms) between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled. It is set in the timer. However, if both the output start control and the output end control of the security signal are shared between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting change mode is controlled, which mode is used on the external device side. It becomes difficult to grasp whether it is controlled.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-4 (2), when the setting change mode is controlled, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the security signal is once in step S21TM4710. After setting 1000 ms as the timer value, 30000 ms is reset (overwritten) as the security signal timer value in step S21TM1465 after clearing the RAM based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770 described later. There is. That is, after the remaining output period of the security signal is once set to 1 sec, the remaining output period of the security signal is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

When the signal output control shown above is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is as shown in FIG. 12-4 (2), and when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the setting confirmation mode ends. It is the timing when 1 sec has elapsed from the above, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the timing is 30 sec after the end of the setting change mode.

Specifically, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled (RAM is not cleared and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), the interrupt is interrupted and the game control timer is interrupted. In the process (for example, the information output process of step S21TM1670 shown in FIG. 9-14), the security signal output is continued until the value of the security signal timer changes from 1000 ms to 0 ms, and the setting change mode is controlled (for example). When the RAM is cleared and the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1 second to 30 seconds), the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt is permitted (for example, in FIG. 9-14). In the information output process of step S21TM1670 shown), the output of the security signal is continued until the value of the security signal timer changes from 30,000 ms to 0 ms. In addition, when it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, when it is controlled to the setting change mode, the value of the security signal timer is set for a predetermined time (1000 ms or 30000 ms) at the timing before shifting to the game control timer interrupt processing. ) To 0 ms, the output of the security signal may be continued, and after the output of the security signal is completed, the process may shift to the game control timer interrupt process.

In this way, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 sec depending on whether the control of the setting confirmation mode is finished or the control of the setting change mode is finished, and the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode. In this case, the security signal is continuously output until 30 sec elapses after the control of the setting change mode is completed. With such a configuration, while standardizing the output control of the security signal, the output period of the security signal can be different depending on whether the mode is controlled in the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode.

As a result, it is also possible to grasp whether the external device is controlled to the setting confirmation mode without executing the initialization process, or is controlled to the setting change mode by executing the initialization process. .. For example, if the output period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it can be specified that the setting confirmation mode is controlled without executing the initialization process, and if the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, the initial setting is performed. It is possible to estimate that the conversion process may have been executed and controlled to the setting change mode.

A security signal is also output when an error for which the game is stopped, such as a magnetic abnormality, is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. The security signal in this case is continuously output until the power of the gaming machine is turned off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in the backup area (however, the area cleared by the initialization process) of the RAM 102 based on the fact that the abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, it is assumed that the security signal is output for 4 minutes based on the fact that the abnormality detection flag is set when the power is restored.

Here, if the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is restored, the RAM clear is not executed (for example, step S21TM1410 shown in FIG. 9-13 is not executed), so that the value of the abnormality detection flag is initially set in the signal output process. It remains set without being converted, and it is possible to continuously output a security signal for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible not to limit the output period of the security signal to the period from the end of the control of the setting confirmation mode to the elapse of one second. On the other hand, if the setting change mode is controlled when the power is restored, RAM clear is executed (for example, step S21TM1410 shown in FIG. 9-13 is executed), so that in the subsequent signal output processing. The abnormality detection flag is cleared (it is unknown whether or not an abnormality was detected when the power was turned off), and as a result, the security signal output period ends the setting change mode. It is the period until 30 seconds elapse (the period according to the execution of RAM clear).

In the example shown in step S21TM4710 of FIG. 12-2, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer. The value of the security signal timer set to is at least a period during which the external device can recognize that the security signal has been output, and may be, for example, 50 ms or more. That is, a common 50 ms may be set as the value of the security signal timer when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

After the process of step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting changing flag (step S21TM4720). Here, if the power is cut off after that because the setting changing flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not set when the power is restored (NO in step S21TM4030). Become.

Next, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the set value (any of 0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area is set in the setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM4760). Even if neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 will be executed and the setting command will be transmitted.

Here, the player usually recognizes that the range of the set value is 1 to 6, and the value specified by the setting command (the value stored in the set value storage area) on the effect control CPU 120 side is used as it is as an image. If the display is displayed on the display device 5, the player may misunderstand the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 side recognizes the value obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) specified by the setting command as the set value (1 to 6), and sets the set values 1 to 6. In the range, the effect that suggests the set value is executed.

Not limited to such a form, the CPU 103 sets a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the set value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area in the setting command to control the effect. It may be transmitted to the CPU 120 for use. As a result, the range of the set value specified by the setting command becomes 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. On the effect control CPU 120 side, the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is displayed as it is on the image display device 5, or an effect suggesting the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is executed. By doing so, the set value can be appropriately notified or suggested. Further, it is not necessary for the effect control CPU 120 side to perform addition processing on the set value specified by the received setting command, and the control load on the effect control CPU 120 side can be reduced.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. In addition, it is possible to suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

Here, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770), the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), and the set value is a normal value (step). It is determined that S21TM4020 is YES), the power is not cut off during the setting change (NO in step S21TM4030), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040). ) Therefore, it is sufficient to execute the process at the time of power failure recovery without clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes the same processing as in steps S21TM1340 and subsequent steps shown in FIG. 9-13. Specifically, the processes of step S21TM1340 to step S21TM1370 and steps S21TM1480 to S21TM1540, that is, the process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal at the time of turning on the power are executed, and after the interrupt is permitted, FIG. 9- It suffices to shift to the game control timer interrupt processing (including special symbol process processing and the like) shown in 14. That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or when the control of the setting confirmation mode is completed, the CPU 103 performs RAM based on the value of the RAM clear flag being 0. Without executing clear, a backup command is transmitted as a command at the time of power failure recovery (step S21TM1370), and the process proceeds to the normal game process.

In the effect control CPU 120, based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of restoration), the restoration from the power failure was performed based on the data at the time of power supply stop (RAM clear is not performed). That) is recognized. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, the effect device recovers from the power failure based on the data when the power supply is stopped. It is possible to notify that (RAM clearing has not been performed).

On the other hand, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770) means that the RAM clear is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it is determined to execute the RAM clear. Therefore, it is sufficient to execute the process at the time of turning on the power accompanied by clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes the same process as after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear process) shown in FIG. 9-13. Specifically, steps S21TM1410 (RAM clear process) to step S21TM1460, a process of setting 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer described above (step S21TM1465), and a process of steps S21TM1480 to S21TM1540, that is, a backup RAM at power-on. The process when the data check result of the area is abnormal may be executed, and after the interrupt is permitted, the process may be shifted to the game control timer interrupt process (including the special symbol process process, etc.) shown in FIG. 9-14. ..

As shown in FIG. 12-3, the CPU 103 performs the RAM clear process based on the RAM clear flag being 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear processing, the data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, hold storage, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the initial value is obtained. Is set, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear process. In addition, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated value for each set value is not cleared. The value does not change before the RAM clearing process. Then, by displaying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029 or the like, it is notified that the game state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). By the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) is initialized to 0, but is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. It may be initialized to. Further, the entire area of the RAM 102 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is.

The reason why the set value stored in the set value storage area is not cleared in this RAM clear process is as follows: (a) If the setting change mode is not controlled, a regular value is set in the set value storage area when the power is turned on. It means that the value has been stored (YES in step S21TM4020), and (b) if the setting change mode is controlled, the value of the setting value storage area is set to 0 (step S21TM4520) or the setting change mode is in progress. This is because the regular value is stored by the operation (step S21TM4610 and step S21TM4620). Further, after the RAM clear processing, the setting change mode cannot be controlled, and there is no opportunity to change the value stored in the setting value storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the initialization table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization setting table in the work area (step S21TM1440). By the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively performing processing according to the control state. The initial value is set.

After executing step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the game control timer interrupt process described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command that specifies that the initialization process has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode ends) (step S21TM1460). In the effect control CPU 120, the initialization process is performed based on the reception of this initialization command (the RAM is cleared without the recovery from the power failure based on the data when the power supply is stopped). Recognize what was done). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, the game state and the like are initialized (when the power supply is stopped). It is possible to notify that the RAM has been cleared without recovering from the power failure based on the above data.

Next, the CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, the value (1 second) of the security signal timer set in step S21TM4710 after the end of the setting change mode is changed (overwritten) to the value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of RAM clear. become. Further, when the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, step S21TM4710 is not executed (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer). Without), the value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds, which corresponds to the RAM clear being executed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is not executed (including the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled), the process of this step S21TM1465 is not executed, so that the value of the security signal timer is 1 second set in step S21TM4710. There is up to.

Since the value of the security signal timer is set in this step S21TM1465 or the above-mentioned step S21TM4710, the security signal is output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt is permitted (FIG. 9-14). The information output process of step S21TM1670 shown), and thereafter, each time the game control timer interrupt process is executed by the interrupt permission, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the value of the security signal timer becomes 0. The output of the security signal will be stopped at the timing.

Then, the CPU 103 executes the setting process of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037 (see FIGS. 9-19 and 9-21 described above). Further, the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are set in a state in which communication can be executed.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). The CPU 103 makes settings for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, for example, by executing the process according to the random number circuit setting program.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every 2 ms.

Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S21TM1520) and the initial value random number update process (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt prohibition state is set (step S21TM1510), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enable state is set. Set (step S21TM1540). As a result, the game control timer interrupt process (FIG. 9-14) is shifted to the normal game process that can be executed. In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when it is not a big hit, and is for display. The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number for display. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number determines the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter). It is a random number to do. Game control processing that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also called the game device control process), the count value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number is one lap (normal symbol hit judgment random number taking). The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value.

In this example, when the RAM clear flag is determined to be 0 (YES) in step S21TM4770, the CPU 103 determines whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the process at the time of power failure recovery (process after step S21TM1340), but the process is not limited to this form. When it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES), the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass). (Depending on the state of the door frame 3a), the process may be shifted to the process at the time of power failure recovery (process after step S21TM1340).

Further, in this example, when the CPU 103 determines in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the process at the time of turning on the power (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)). Not limited to this, when the RAM clear flag is determined to be 1 (NO) in step S21TM4770, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed (game machine frame). 3 or depending on the state of the glass door frame 3a), the process at the time of turning on the power (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)) may be started.

As shown above, the clerk of the amusement park puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 into the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. It is possible to control it, and it is also possible to initialize the game state and the like (execute RAM clear). Further, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming state, etc. Is not initialized (NO is determined in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140 and the RAM clear flag is not set to 1). In this way, the clerk of the game hall can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also can select whether to initialize the game state or the like. There is.

As described above, if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting change mode was controlled when the power was turned off, so the setting value is in an unstable state. There is a possibility that the set value to be confirmed on the playground side is not stored in the set value storage area. In the example shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-3, the CPU 103 is in a game stopped state (step) without shifting to the normal game processing based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). It is possible to control from S21TM420 to step S21TM4220), and a security signal is output in response to the control to the game stop state (step S21TM4220).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from being started in a state where the set value is unstable (the game control timer interrupt process is executed), and when the power is turned on, the power is supplied. It is possible to notify the external device that the setting change mode was controlled when the interruption occurred.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-3, the CPU 103 has a condition (YES) for shifting to the setting change mode based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). When step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 are all YES) is not satisfied, a set value error error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190), and a display monitor is displayed in the game stop state (loop processing of steps S21TM420 to step S21TM4220). An error display for displaying the character "E" is performed on 21TM029 (step S21TM4210).

In the example shown in FIG. 12-5, by displaying the letter "E" on each of the 7-segment displays 21TM029A to 21TM029D constituting the display monitor 21TM029, an abnormality occurs in the clerk of the amusement park (in the setting change mode). (There is a possibility that the power supply was cut off while it was being controlled) is clearly notified. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting value abnormality error command displays the message "Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode" on the image display device 5, thereby displaying the game hall. Operation to change the set value by shifting to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on) after the power is turned off (power switch 21TM055 is turned off). (Confirm the set value).

In this example, (a) when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is set. It is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), (iii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140). If YES) is determined, the setting change mode is controlled. As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is not executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("The power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). Please move to the setting change mode. ") Will not be performed either.

Here, in the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590), the image display device 5 has controlled the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052). ), It is possible to notify that the set value can be changed. For example, the message "In the setting change mode" or the message "Please change the setting value by performing the setting change operation" can be displayed on the image display device 5. As a result, the pachinko / pachislot clerk can grasp that the setting change mode is controlled, and by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area By switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state after changing to the planned set value, the set value can be fixed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal gaming process.

On the other hand, (b) when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, among the above (i) to (iii). If any of the above conditions is not satisfied, the game is stopped (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 loop processing) after the setting value error error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190) without being controlled by the setting change mode. .. As a result, an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and a message display on the effect control board 12 side ("The power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). Please move to the setting change mode. ") Will also be performed.

In this way, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("The power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). If this is also done, the condition for shifting to the setting change mode after the power is restored is the condition of the gaming machine, even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. It will be notified that the state is not established. In this case, the clerk of the game hall, etc. knows that the game is not controlled in the setting change mode and is in the game stop state (it is necessary to turn on the power again to control the setting change mode). It is possible. Therefore, after the power is turned off once, the power is turned on again by operating so that all the conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. Then, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to the planned setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. By switching to the state, the set value can be fixed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal gaming process.

In this way, when the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

Here, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied when the power is restored (a), an error display (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is displayed on the main board 11 side. It will automatically shift to the setting change mode without being disturbed, and it is possible to avoid unnecessary error display and prompt the user to change the setting value appropriately.

On the other hand, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is restored (b), the mode cannot be switched to the setting change mode when the power is restored even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. Since it is in the state, it is forcibly controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM420 to step S21TM4220), and the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) It will be done. As a result, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in an unstable state in which the set value is not fixed, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

When the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are all satisfied, and the transition condition (i) is satisfied. )-(Iii) may not be satisfied, and different commands may be sent as commands indicating that the set value may be abnormal.

For example, if the transition condition is satisfied, it is a command indicating that the setting value may be abnormal, and the mode has been shifted to the setting change mode (or the transition condition is satisfied). On the production control CPU 120 that received this command, the message "The setting value may be abnormal" and the message "It is automatically controlled to the setting change mode" are displayed as images. It is preferable to display it on the device 5. On the other hand, if the transition condition is not satisfied, the setting value error error command in step S21TM4190 may be transmitted as described above.

After the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game processing is started, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is operated when both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. A lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120 according to the fact (from the OFF state to the ON state), and (2) the setting changeover switch (clear switch). ) 21TM052 is operated (from the OFF state to the ON state), and the setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-38 (2), the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) is set based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command. Even though neither the change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, it is possible to identify that the operation for changing the set value has been performed and notify the fact. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "lock switch operation has been detected." In addition, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." Is executed. As a result, the clerk of the amusement park clearly understands that the operation for changing the set value has been performed even though it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and is illegal. It is possible to confirm whether or not is performed.

Not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game processing is started. The lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. In this way, during the period when the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not confirmed. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the game control microcomputer 100.

(Modified example of processing at power-on)
In the example shown in FIG. 12-1, if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120). ), (Ii) The lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140). Only when it was confirmed that the RAM clear flag was set to 1 (step S21TM4150), the mode was changed to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570).

Not limited to such a form, as shown in FIG. 12-6, when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), the three conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied. The RAM clear flag may be set to 1 (step S21TM4150) and the mode may be shifted to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570) without confirming whether or not it is satisfied.

In the process shown in FIG. 12-6, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010) and the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting changing flag is set. If this is the case (YES in step S21TM4030), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without determining whether the conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied, and the setting is changed. The portion controlled by the mode (NO in step S21TM4570) and not controlled in the game stopped state (process corresponding to the loop process of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) is different from the process shown in FIG. 12-1. The other parts are the same as the processes shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-3.

Even in such a form, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 and the setting is changed to the setting change mode based on the setting changing flag being set when the power is turned on. It is possible to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power is cut off during the change.

In the example shown in FIG. 12-6, when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. It is controlled to the setting change mode based on the three conditions that the state is in the state and the (iii) clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (determined as NO in step S21TM4570). (The setting value of the setting value storage area can be changed), whereas when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii) Regardless of whether or not the three conditions are satisfied, the setting change mode is forcibly controlled.

In this way, if a power failure occurs while the setting change mode is being controlled, the three conditions (i) to (iii) are based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set when the power is restored. By automatically controlling the setting change mode regardless of whether or not is satisfied, the workability for fixing the set value can be improved.

Here, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting is made even if the condition (ii) that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130) is not satisfied. It will be controlled to the change mode. As a result, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 while the lock switch 21TM051 remains OFF. (Step S21TM461-10 in FIG. 12-2).

As described above, the condition for terminating the setting change mode is to switch the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state (determine YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, the clerk of the amusement park who has performed the operation of changing the set value temporarily turns the lock switch 21TM051 from the OFF state if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state in order to confirm the set value and end the setting change mode. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (YES is determined in step S21TM4680).

In this way, the condition for starting the control of the setting change mode depending on whether the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) or the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). By making the conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode (the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) common, the conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode are clarified. We are trying to properly shift to normal game processing.

Here, even if the lock switch 21TM051 is urged to be turned ON when the setting change mode is controlled based on the setting changing flag being set (YES in step S21TM4030). good. For example, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and transmits a setting value error error command (in step S21TM4190 described above). The corresponding process is executed), and the effect control CPU 120 that receives the set value error error command (step S21TM4110) says, "Turn on the lock switch once, and then switch it off after changing the set value." The message may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In the processes shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-3 and 12-6, it is not possible to shift to the normal game process when the setting changing flag is set. Therefore, when the pachinko machine maker ships the pachinko game machine 1 (before installation in the game hall), the setting changing flag is set in advance, and then the game hall side goes through the setting change mode. Unless the set value is changed and the setting change mode is terminated, the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be played. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game hall, it is possible to ensure that the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the setting change mode to perform the setting change operation and take measures to determine the set value.

(Set value storage control when the power is cut off while changing the set value)
Next, the set value storage control when a power failure occurs while changing the set value will be described with reference to FIG. 12-7. In the example shown in FIG. 12-2 and FIG. 10-2 described above, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is stored by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode. It will change itself.

First, regarding the control when the power is cut off before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the end of the setting change mode) by the operation of changing the set value during the setting change mode, FIG. This will be described using -7 (1).

As shown in order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. In this example, when the power is turned on, "0" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. Next, as shown in order 2, the set value "0" stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read as the setting change mode is started, and the read set value is set to 1. "1" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in order 3, the set value stored in the set value storage area is "0" based on the operation of the first setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode. Is changed to "1", and "2", which is obtained by adding 1 to the changed set value, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON. Further, as shown in order 4, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is "1" based on the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode. Is changed to "2", and "3", which is obtained by adding 1 to the changed set value, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in order 5, it is assumed that the power supply is cut off while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state in the setting change mode, that is, before the operation for ending the setting change mode is performed. At this time, the set value "2" after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is stored in the set value storage area. In the power off state, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as it is.

Next, as shown in order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. When the power is turned on, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This set value "2" is a value stored in the set value storage area when a power failure occurs during the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 7, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read as the setting change mode is started, and the read set value is set to 1. "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Since the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on in order 6, when the control shown in FIG. 12-6 described above is applied, even if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (or cleared). Even if the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), it will be automatically controlled to the setting change mode. Therefore, the state of the lock switch 21TM051 in the order 6 and the order 7 may be an OFF state.

In this way, if the set value is changed in the setting change mode and the power is cut off without turning off the lock switch 21TM051 (without ending the setting change mode), the power is restored at the time of power restoration. , The set value after the change in the previous setting change mode is held in the set value storage area. Therefore, when the power is restored, the planned setting value may have already been set. In this case, the pachinko / pachislot clerk terminates the setting change mode without performing an operation to change the setting value again. Since the gaming machine may be shifted to the normal gaming process, workability can be improved.

Next, regarding the control when the power is cut off after the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode ends) by the operation of changing the set value during the setting change mode. This will be described with reference to FIG. 12-7 (2).

The order 1 to order 4 are the same as the example shown in FIG. 12-7 (1), and the description thereof will be omitted. Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, so that the setting change mode ends. As a result, the set value "2" after the operation of the second setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is performed is fixed as the final set value. At this time, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area, and "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 by adding 1 to the confirmed set value.

After that, as shown in order 6, it is assumed that the operation of turning off the power switch 21TM055 is performed and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as it is.

Next, as shown in order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. When the power is turned on, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This setting value "2" is a value finally stored in the setting value storage area at the end of the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 8, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read as the setting change mode is started, and the read set value is set to 1. "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

As shown in FIGS. 12-7 (1) and 12-7, when the power supply is cut off while the setting change mode is controlled, and when the power supply is stopped after the setting change mode control is completed. In either case, when the power is restored, the set value after being changed according to the setting change operation in the previous setting change mode, that is, the set value stored in the set value storage area immediately before the power is turned off, is , It is a valid setting value (setting value stored in the setting storage area when the power is restored).

In addition to the storage control of the set value shown in FIG. 12-7, the storage control of the set value shown in FIG. 9-37 may be applied. That is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area when controlled in the setting change mode is copied to the setting information temporary storage area, and the setting changeover switch (clear switch) is used when the setting change mode is controlled. When 21TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area, and the setting change mode is terminated (lock switch 21TM051 is turned on). Based on the operation of switching from the state to the OFF state), the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored (overwritten) in the setting value storage area to confirm the setting value. You may. In this case, the set value to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the set value (0 to 5) stored in the set information temporary storage area. As the set value stored in is changed, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 also changes.

With such a configuration, the setting is controlled even when the setting change mode is performed when the power is turned on (when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed). If the power is cut off without completing the operation to end the change mode (without switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state), the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is the power supply. It means that it has not been changed since it was turned on (before the setting change operation was performed in the setting change mode). That is, in the power supply stop state, the set value stored in the set value storage area at the time of the previous power-on is still held. Therefore, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on last time. It becomes a value according to the set value that was set.

In this way, it is possible to appropriately set the setting value when the power is cut off while the setting change mode is controlled. Further, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode is not ended, the change of the setting value can be restricted.

The control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode shown in the above embodiment is provided for a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5), and for a gaming machine having a different jackpot probability depending on the setting values. It is applicable, but not limited to this, although a plurality of set values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is common regardless of the set values (for example, for all of the set values 0 to 5). It can also be applied to gaming machines (with a jackpot probability of 1/300).

[Explanation of feature 35TM]
Next, a gaming machine including the feature portion 35TM will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-1 to 13-20. The gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 includes one image display device, but the gaming machine may be configured to include a plurality of image display devices. In the example of FIG. 13-1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a main liquid crystal display 35TM200 as a first image display device and a sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 as a second image display device. Further, as the movable body 32 described above, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420, which are decorative bodies having light transmission, are provided.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with the two image display devices shown in FIG. 13-1, the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, which is the first image display device, corresponds to the image display device 5 shown in FIG. It is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. That is, the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 displays information that can be displayed by the image display device 5 described above. For example, a background image of a decorative pattern is displayed, and variable display of the decorative pattern is executed. In addition, an effect image such as a notice effect accompanying the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed. Further, the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 displays a hold display and an active display (variable display compatible display).

Further, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, which is the second image display device, is provided below the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. A first logo panel 35TM410 and a second logo panel 35TM420 at the downward moving end are arranged on the front side (player side) of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. The sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 displays an image for changing the mode (for example, emission color) of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 having light transmission, an image imitating a 7-segment display, and the like. It is possible.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the remaining time until the suggestion effect (for example, temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol) is executed by the image imitating the 7-segment display, and the jackpot expectation degree (for example, the victory expectation in the battle effect). It is possible to notify the player of a numerical value indicating the degree), an elapsed time since the start of the suggestion effect (for example, a music reach effect for playing a musical piece when the reach state is established), and the like. The numerical values shown by the images imitating these 7-segment displays are images related to the effect (including the variable display of the decorative pattern) executed by the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, and are executed by the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. It is an image related to the production time.

The first logo panel 35TM410 is driven in the vertical direction by the first logo panel drive mechanism 35TM510, and the second logo panel 35TM420 is driven in the vertical direction by the second logo panel drive mechanism 35TM520. Hereinafter, a logo panel composed of a main liquid crystal display 35TM200, a sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a first logo panel 35TM410, a first logo panel drive mechanism 35TM510, a second logo panel 35TM420, a second logo panel drive mechanism 35TM520, and the like. The drive mechanism 35TM001 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-2 to 13-4.

(Logo panel drive mechanism)
13-2 shows the logo panel drive mechanism 35TM001, FIG. 13-2 (a) is a front view of the logo panel drive mechanism 35TM001, and FIG. 13-2 (b) is P of FIG. 13-2 (a). It is an arrow view. Further, FIG. 13-3 is a view taken along the line Q of FIG. 13-2 (a). As shown in FIGS. 13-1 to 13-3, the logo panel drive mechanism 35TM001 is arranged near the center of the game area in the game board 2. FIG. 13-2 (a) shows a state in which both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are located at the downward moving end and overlap with the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front-rear direction. ing.

As shown in FIGS. 13-2 (b) and 13-3, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is below the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and on the front side (player side) of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. It is arranged. Both the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 have a rectangular front view, and the width and height of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 are larger than the width and height of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

The first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are arranged side by side in parallel on the left and right sides at the downward moving end, separated from the front surface of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by the same distance. The first logo panel 35TM410 is arranged on the left side of the front surface of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and the second logo panel 35TM420 is arranged on the right side of the front surface of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. That is, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are arranged at positions where they overlap with the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front-rear direction.

The width and height when the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are arranged in parallel are substantially the same as the width and height of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Therefore, from the player's point of view, when the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are at the downward moving end, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is covered by the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420. It looks like there is.

The first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin such as acrylic or polycarbonate. The outline of the character information "FEV" and the outline of the character information "ER!" Are formed on the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420, respectively, by shaping the unevenness. For example, in a transparent synthetic resin plate, the character part (the part surrounded by the outline of the character) is formed thinly, and the other part is formed thick, so that the translucency of the character part becomes transparent to the other part. It is configured to be higher than light.

In addition, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, a contour member made of a material such as a colored and opaque synthetic resin on a transparent synthetic resin plate and formed according to the contour of characters. May be attached. In addition, the first logo panel is made of a plurality of materials having different translucency so that the translucency of the material of the character part (the part surrounded by the outline of the character) is higher than the translucency of the material of the other part. 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 may be formed.

In this way, by making the translucency of the character portion higher than that of the other portions, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 (first logo) located behind the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 When the panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are moved to the upper production position, among the information displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200) located behind the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420). Positions corresponding to the character parts of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 (areas surrounded by the outline of "FEV", areas surrounded by the outline of "ER!") (Positions facing each area) The information displayed in is more visible than the information displayed at the position corresponding to the other part.

The first logo panel 35TM410 can be moved in the vertical direction shown in FIG. 13-2 (a) by the first logo panel drive mechanism 35TM510. Further, the second logo panel 35TM420 can be moved in the vertical direction shown in FIG. 13-2 (a) by the second logo panel drive mechanism 35TM520. The first logo panel drive mechanism 35TM510 and the second logo panel drive mechanism 35TM520 have the same structure and are arranged symmetrically in the left-right direction in FIG. 13-2 (a).

The first logo panel drive mechanism 35TM510 is composed of a first rack 35TM511, a first pinion 35TM512, a first motor 35TM513, a first support plate 35TM514, and the like. The second logo panel drive mechanism 35TM520 is composed of a second rack 35TM521, a second pinion 35TM522, a second motor 35TM523, a second support plate 35TM524, and the like. The first rack 35TM511 is fixed to the left side surface of the first logo panel 35TM410, and the second rack 35TM521 is fixed to the right side surface of the second logo panel 35TM420. The first rack 35TM511 and the second rack 35TM521 are formed in an elongated prismatic shape in the vertical direction in FIG. 13-2 (a).

The first support plate 35TM514 and the second support plate 35TM524 are formed in the shape of a rectangular plate long in the vertical direction in FIG. 13-2 (a). Guided by the first guide 35TM515 integrally formed on the front surface of the first support plate 35TM514, the first rack 35TM511 can move in the vertical direction shown in FIG. 13-2 (a). Similarly, the second rack 35TM521 can be moved in the vertical direction shown in FIG. 13-2 (a) by being guided by the second guide 35TM525 integrally formed on the front surface of the second support plate 35TM524.

The first motor 35TM513 and the second motor 35TM523 are attached to the back surfaces of the first support plate 35TM514 and the second support plate 35TM524, respectively. The first pinion 35TM512 fixed to the output shaft of the first motor 35TM513 meshes with the first rack tooth 35TM511A formed on the left side surface of the first rack 35TM511. Similarly, the second pinion 35TM522 fixed to the output shaft of the second motor 35TM523 meshes with the second rack tooth 35TM521A formed on the right side surface of the second rack 35TM521.

In this way, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 as movable bodies are connected to the effect control board 12, and the operation of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 is the effect control board. It is controlled by 12 (CPU 120 for effect control).

Specifically, the first motor 35TM513 for driving the first logo panel 35TM410 and the origin detection sensor 35TM519 for detecting whether or not the first logo panel 35TM410 is located at the downward moving end, that is, the origin position. (Photo sensor), the second motor 35TM523 for driving the second logo panel 35TM420, and the origin detection sensor 35TM529 for detecting whether or not the second logo panel 35TM420 is located at the downward moving end, that is, the origin position. (Photosensor) is connected, and by controlling the operation of the first motor 35TM513 and the second motor 35TM523, the operation of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 can be controlled by the effect control board 12 (effect control). CPU 120) can be individually controlled, and whether or not the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are located at the origin position (initial position) is determined by the effect control board 12 (effect). The control CPU 120) can detect it.

When the effect control CPU 120 rotates the first motor 35TM513, the first logo panel 35TM410 fixed to the first rack 35TM511 moves in the vertical direction shown in FIG. 13-2 (a). Similarly, when the effect control CPU 120 rotates the second motor 35TM523, the second logo panel 35TM420 fixed to the second rack 35TM521 moves in the vertical direction shown in FIG. 13-2 (a).

The first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 can be independently moved in the vertical direction shown in FIG. 13-2 (a), and both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 can be moved at the same time. It is possible to move it upward or downward in FIG. 13-2 (a).

A plate-shaped first contact member 35TM516 and a second contact member 35TM526 are fixed to the lower ends of the first rack 35TM511 and the second rack 35TM521, respectively. The first lower end stopper 35TM517 is fixed to the lower end of the front surface of the first support plate 35TM514, and the first upper end stopper 35TM518 is fixed to the upper end side of the front surface of the first support plate 35TM514. Similarly, the second lower end stopper 35TM527 is fixed to the lower end of the front surface of the second support plate 35TM524, and the second upper end stopper 35TM528 is fixed to the upper end side of the front surface of the second support plate 35TM524.

When the first logo panel 35TM410 moves upward in FIG. 13-2 (a), the first contact member 35TM516 comes into contact with the first upper end stopper 35TM518 at the upward moving end of the first logo panel 35TM410, and the first The logo panel 35TM410 stops at the correct production position at the upward moving end. When the first logo panel 35TM410 moves downward in FIG. 13-2 (a), the first contact member 35TM516 comes into contact with the first lower end stopper 35TM517 at the downward moving end of the first logo panel 35TM410, and the first The logo panel 35TM410 stops at the exact origin position (also referred to as the initial position or retracted position) of the downward moving end. Whether or not the first logo panel 35TM410 is at the origin position is detected by the origin detection sensor 35TM519 (photo sensor).

Similarly, when the second logo panel 35TM420 moves upward in FIG. 13-2 (a), the second contact member 35TM526 comes into contact with the second upper end stopper 35TM528 at the upward moving end of the second logo panel 35TM420. , The second logo panel 35TM420 stops at the exact production position of the upward moving end. When the second logo panel 35TM420 moves downward in FIG. 13-2 (a), the second contact member 35TM526 comes into contact with the second lower end stopper 35TM527 at the downward moving end of the second logo panel 35TM420, and the second The logo panel 35TM420 stops at the exact origin position (also referred to as the initial position or retracted position) of the downward moving end. Whether or not the second logo panel 35TM420 is at the origin position is detected by the origin detection sensor 35TM529 (photo sensor).

In the state of FIG. 13-2 (a), both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are arranged at the origin positions where they overlap the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front-rear direction, and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 has visibility. On the other hand, the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is in a state where the player can visually recognize the whole. However, since the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are made of a translucent material, the player can display the sub liquid crystal via the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420. It is possible to visually recognize the information of the device 35TM300.

That is, the modes of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the origin position change according to the display image of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. At this time, the character parts of "FEV" and "ER!", That is, the parts where the contours for the production are formed, are more visible than the other parts, so that the player can display the sub liquid crystal more clearly. The display image of the device 35TM300 can be visually recognized, and the change of the image displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 can be grasped more clearly.

FIG. 13-4 is a front view showing a state in which both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are simultaneously moved to positions where they overlap the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in the front-rear direction. That is, in FIG. 13-4, both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are simultaneously moved to the effect position which is the upward moving end of FIG. 13-4, and the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo are moved. The panel 35TM420 is arranged at a position where it overlaps with the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in the front-rear direction. At this time, the visibility of the lower part of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is reduced, and the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved as a whole. The player can clearly see the information displayed on the entire sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

Further, in this state, both modes of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the effect position change according to the display image of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (particularly the portion displayed at the lower part). become. At this time, with respect to the character part of "FEV" in the first logo panel 35TM410 and the character part of "ER!" In the second logo panel 35TM420, the player is more clearly main than the other parts. The display image of the liquid crystal display 35TM200 can be visually recognized, and the change of the image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 can be grasped more clearly.

Further, although not shown, the first logo panel 35TM410 may be independently moved to a position where it overlaps the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front. That is, the first logo panel 35TM410 is moved to the effect position which is the moving end in the upward direction, and the first logo panel 35TM410 is arranged at a position where it overlaps with the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in the front-rear direction. At this time, with respect to the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the visibility of the lower left portion is in a reduced state, and with respect to the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the visibility of the left half is improved, while the visibility of the right side is improved. The visibility of half is reduced. While the player can clearly see the information displayed on the left half of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, it is difficult for the player to clearly see the information displayed on the right half.

Further, in this state, the mode of the first logo panel 35TM410 at the effect position changes according to the display image of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (particularly the portion displayed at the lower left). Further, the mode of the second logo panel 35TM420 at the origin position changes according to the display image of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 (particularly the portion displayed on the right half). At this time, with respect to the character portion of "FEV" in the first logo panel 35TM410, the player can more clearly visually recognize the display image of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 as compared with the other portions. It is possible to clearly grasp the change in the image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. Regarding the character part of "ER!" In the second logo panel 35TM420, the player can more clearly see the display image of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 as compared with the other parts, and more clearly. It is possible to grasp the change of the image displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

Similarly, although not shown, the second logo panel 35TM420 may be independently moved to a position where it overlaps the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front. That is, the second logo panel 35TM420 is moved to the effect position which is the moving end in the upward direction, and the second logo panel 35TM420 is arranged at a position where it overlaps with the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in the front-rear direction. At this time, with respect to the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the visibility of the lower right portion is reduced, and with respect to the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the visibility of the right half is improved, while the visibility is improved on the left side. The visibility of half is reduced. While the player can clearly see the information displayed on the right half of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, it is difficult to clearly see the information displayed on the left half.

Further, in this state, the mode of the second logo panel 35TM420 at the effect position changes according to the display image of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (particularly the portion displayed in the lower right portion). Further, the mode of the first logo panel 35TM410 at the origin position changes according to the display image of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 (particularly the portion displayed on the left half). At this time, with respect to the character portion of "ER!" Of the second logo panel 35TM420, the player can more clearly visually recognize the display image of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 as compared with the other portions. It is possible to more clearly grasp the change in the image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. Regarding the character part of "FEV" in the first logo panel 35TM410, the player can more clearly see the display image of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 as compared with the other parts, and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 can be visually recognized more clearly. It is possible to grasp the change of the image displayed on the liquid crystal display 35TM300.

As shown in FIGS. 13-2 to 13-4, the logo panel drive mechanism 35TM001 provides both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 between the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. At the same time, they can be moved together or independently. That is, it is possible to provide a plurality of patterns for moving the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420, and it is possible to provide a plurality of patterns for changing the visibility of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Since it is possible, it is possible to diversify the production and improve the interest.

Further, as the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 move from the origin position to the effect position, the screen visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved and the screen visibility of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is lowered. To do. On the other hand, as the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 move from the effect position to the origin position (return to the origin position), the screen visibility of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is improved, and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 Screen visibility is reduced.

In this way, the visibility of the different display means of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 changes according to the displacement of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420, which are the decorative bodies. It is possible to relate the displacement of the display means to the visibility of each display means, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

(Pseudo-continuous production)
As described above, the variation pattern is determined when the variation display of the special symbol is started by the game control microcomputer 100 (the variation pattern setting process shown in S111 of FIG. 5). Here, when the variation pattern for executing the pseudo-continuous effect is determined one or more times, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the variation pattern command that specifies the variation pattern is decorated on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 based on the variation pattern. During the variable display period of the symbol, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once or more.

Pseudo-continuous effect means that in each display area of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol within the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the time when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped and the display result is derived and displayed. This is an effect in which the decorative design is temporarily stopped and then changed and displayed again. By executing the pseudo-continuous effect, it is as if the variation display of the special symbol is executed once, that is, within the variation display period of the decorative symbol based on the variation pattern command of 1 corresponding to the hold storage of 1. It is possible to make it appear as if the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed multiple times.

In the pseudo-continuous effect shown in the present embodiment, the decorative symbols consisting of numbers are temporarily stopped in the display area of the left symbol and the display area of the right symbol, and then the characters "NEXT" are displayed in the display area of the middle symbol. (In this example, the pseudo-continuous symbol 35TM600 displayed as "NEXT" shown in FIGS. 13-9 (5) and 13-10 (10)) is temporarily stopped, and then left. The variable display of the decorative symbol in each display area of the symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is restarted (so-called re-variation is performed). Here, the "state in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped" is a state in which the decorative symbol does not stop completely and moves slightly up and down, but is not limited to this, and a state in which the decorative symbol is swinging. It may be in a state in which the decorative symbol is repeatedly enlarged / reduced, or in a state in which the decorative symbol has a different form (deformed) from that at the time of the final stop (when the symbol is confirmed).

(Countdown production)
In the present embodiment, when the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 performs a variable display of a decorative symbol based on a variable pattern accompanied by a pseudo-continuous effect, the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops in the display area of the middle symbol (re-variation occurs). It is possible to execute the countdown effect of notifying the remaining time (until it is notified that it will be) on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Here, as will be described later, when the countdown effect is executed, the pseudo-continuous effect is always executed, but the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed without the countdown effect being executed.

In the countdown effect in the present embodiment, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the sub-liquid crystal is displayed at the timing when the remaining time until the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops in the display area of the middle symbol is 3 seconds. "3" is displayed on the display 35TM300, "2" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 when the remaining time is 2 seconds, and "2" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 when the remaining time is 1 second. "1" is displayed, and "0" is displayed at the timing when the remaining time becomes 0 seconds (the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops in the display area of the middle symbol). The remaining time until the temporary stop of the decorative symbol in the countdown effect is displayed by an image imitating a 7-segment display.

In this way, as the time (seconds) displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the countdown effect, first, "3", which is set as an initial value, is displayed. After that, as the countdown operation is performed, the time (number of seconds) displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 decreases by 1 every second, and at the timing when the final value "0" is reached. The pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops in the display area of the middle symbol. That is, it is notified that the re-variation is executed.

If the variation display is executed based on the variation pattern accompanied by a plurality of pseudo-continuous effects and it is decided to execute the countdown effect, the countdown effect is corresponding to each pseudo-continuous effect. Will be executed. That is, the countdown effect of the same number of times as the pseudo continuous effect is executed within the variation display period of one decorative symbol based on one variation pattern (holding memory).

In this example, the initial value of the countdown effect is "3" regardless of the fluctuation pattern and the display result. As a result, when "3" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300, the player immediately starts a countdown until a suggestion effect (pseudo-continuous effect in this example) having a high expectation of a big hit is executed. It is possible to grasp that.

(Expectation notice production)
Further, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined when the variation display of the special symbol is started by the game control microcomputer 100 (variation pattern setting process shown in S111 of FIG. 5). At that time, a fluctuation pattern accompanied by super reach may be determined. For example, in the fluctuation pattern accompanied by super reach, after the reach state is established on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, a battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character battle is executed (FIGS. 13-11 (13) and (18)). If the final display result is a big hit (when the big hit symbol is fixed and stopped), a victory effect is executed in which the ally character wins the enemy character, and if the final display result is out of order (the missed symbol is fixed). (When stopping), a defeat effect is executed in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character.

The expectation degree notice effect in the present embodiment is an effect of notifying the victory expectation degree (that is, the jackpot expectation degree) in which the ally character wins the enemy character in the battle effect. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17), the numerical bar 35TM610 is displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 after the reach state is established (after the start of the battle effect), and the entire width of the numerical bar 35TM610 is displayed. The ratio of the range of the colored part to the target (0 to 100%) indicates the degree of expectation of victory (the degree of expectation of big hit). The winning expectation indicated by the numerical bar 35TM610 is updated by 10 every 5 seconds after the initial value is indicated, and finally reaches the final value. When the winning expectation indicated by the numerical bar 35TM610 reaches the final value, the winning expectation indicated by the numerical bar 35TM610 is not updated even after 5 seconds have passed from that timing.

(Count-up production)
In the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a count-up effect of displaying the victory expectation degree by a numerical value (numerical value) in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in correspondence with the expectation degree notice effect executed by the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. .. Here, as will be described later, when the count-up effect is executed, the expectation notice effect is always executed, but when the expectation notice effect is executed without executing the count-up effect. There is also.

In the count-up effect, the winning expectation degree indicated by the numerical value bar 35TM610 displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 as a two-digit numerical value (number). Therefore, the winning expectation (numerical value) displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is updated by 10 every 5 seconds after the initial value is shown, and finally reaches the final value. When the winning expectation (numerical value) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 reaches the final value, the winning expectation (numerical value) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is not updated even after 5 seconds have passed from that timing. ..

In this way, the winning expectation indicated by the numerical bar 35TM610 on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the winning expectation indicated by the numerical value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 match, and the winning expectation indicated by the numerical bar 35TM610 is the same. Corresponding to the change from the initial value to the final value, the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 also changes from the initial value to the final value.

The numerical value as the victory expectation degree displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is displayed by an image imitating the 7-segment display as in the case of the countdown effect. However, unlike the case of the countdown effect described above, a plurality of initial values and final values of the countup effect are provided respectively, and the jackpot expectation degree is determined according to the combination of these initial values and final values (that is, the change pattern). It is different. Further, the display mode is changed according to the winning expectation (numerical value) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. In this example, the winning expectation (numerical value) is in the range of "50" to "70". If it is, it is displayed in blue, and if it is in the range of "80" to "100", it is displayed in red. Further, when the winning expectation (numerical value) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 reaches the final value, the player is notified that the winning expectation has reached the final value by blinking the numerical value. I am trying to do it.

In this way, as the winning expectation degree displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the count-up effect, first, a value (50 to 90 in this example) defined as an initial value is displayed. After that, the count-up operation is performed based on the determined change pattern (number of changes), so that the winning expectation displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 increases by 10 every 5 seconds, and finally. The final display mode is reached when the value (60 to 100 in this example) is reached. That is, the final winning expectation (big hit expectation) is notified by the blinking numerical value.

(Production decision processing at the start of fluctuation)
As shown in FIG. 5, in the special symbol normal process (step S110) of the special symbol process process (step S25), the CPU 103 displays the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the random number value for determining the display result. Whether it is a "big hit" or "missing", and the type of big hit when it is a "big hit" are determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S111), the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types by using the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the preliminary determination result of the display result.

In the present embodiment, when the predetermined display result is "off", the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern based on the deviation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13-6 (A). In this example, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode and the display result is out of reach, and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode and the super reach effect (battle effect). ) Is executed, and the fluctuation pattern of the out-of-super reach is provided. As the fluctuation pattern of this super reach loss, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss (without pseudo-ream) in which the pseudo-ream effect is not executed and the fluctuation of the super-reach loss (pseudo-ream once) in which the pseudo-ream effect is executed only once. A pattern and a variation pattern of out of super reach (pseudo-ream twice) in which the pseudo-ream effect is executed twice are provided.

In the example of FIG. 13-6 (A), the fluctuation pattern of non-reach out-of-reach is determined at a rate of 90%, and the fluctuation pattern of super-reach out of reach (no pseudo-ream) is determined at a rate of 5%, and the rate of 4%. Is determined to be a fluctuation pattern of super reach loss (1 pseudo-ream), and is determined to be a fluctuation pattern of super reach loss (2 pseudo-ream) at a rate of 1%.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the predetermined display result is "big hit", the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13-6 (B). In this example, as the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot in which the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the super reach effect (battle effect) is executed, the super reach jackpot (without pseudo-ream) in which the pseudo-ream effect is not executed is performed. The fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot (pseudo-ream 1 time) in which the pseudo-ream effect is executed only once, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot (pseudo-ream 2 times) in which the pseudo-ream effect is executed twice. , Are provided.

In the example of FIG. 13-6 (B), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot (without pseudo-ream) is determined at a rate of 10%, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach jackpot (one pseudo-ream) is determined at a rate of 40%. Then, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot (twice pseudo-ream) will be determined at a rate of 50%.

As described above, when the fluctuation pattern of super reach is selected, the rate of big hits is higher than that when the fluctuation pattern of super reach is not selected. Further, in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, the rate of big hits is higher when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed than when the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed, and further, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed only once. The rate of big hits is higher when the pseudo-continuous production is executed twice than when it is executed twice. That is, the jackpot expectation in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach has a relationship of super reach (no pseudo-ream) <super reach (pseudo-ream 1 time) <super reach (pseudo-ream 2 times).

In this example, the pseudo-continuous production may be executed up to twice, but the pseudo-continuous production is not limited to such a form, and the pseudo-continuous production may be executed three or more times. You may. Further, the number of pseudo continuous effects that can be selected only when a big hit occurs may be provided. For example, when the pseudo continuous effect is executed four times, a big hit always occurs, that is, a super reach big hit (pseudo). It is possible that the fluctuation pattern of (4 times in a row) is provided, but the fluctuation pattern of the out-of-super reach (4 times in a row) is not provided.

When starting the variation display of the special symbol, the CPU 103 includes a display result specification command for specifying the display result, a variation pattern specification command for specifying the variation pattern, and a hold storage number subtraction specification command (first hold storage number subtraction designation). The command or the second hold storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

The effect control CPU 120 is a hold storage number subtraction designation command (first hold) that specifies that the hold storage number has been subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is started. Storage number subtraction specification command or second hold storage number subtraction specification command), display result specification command to specify the display result (big hit or miss, big hit type when it becomes a big hit), and the fluctuation time and effect contents of the special symbol (big hit or miss, big hit type) Based on the fact that a set of commands called a variation pattern command for specifying (reach, pseudo-ream, etc.) is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the variation display of the special symbol is executed, and the special symbol is displayed. It is possible to specify the fluctuation time and the content of the production (reach, pseudo-ream, etc.). Further, the effect control CPU 120 receives a special symbol (first special symbol) from the game control microcomputer 100 when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the display result is confirmed. It is possible to identify that the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol) is completed and the display result is derived.

FIG. 13-5 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation. The effect control CPU 120 executes this variation start effect determination process in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-mentioned one set of commands accompanying the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the display result designation is the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol. An effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) to be executed based on a command and a variation pattern specification command is set, and a decorative pattern based on the specified variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed during the variation display is determined by the effect determination process at the start of the variation shown in FIG. 13-5.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the expectation notice effect is executed based on the execution ratio determination table (see FIGS. 13-6 (C) and 13-6 (D)) of the expectation notice effect (step S35TM1010). ..

FIG. 13-6 (C) shows the execution rate of the expectation notice effect when the display result is out of order, and is a determination value for determining whether or not the expectation notice effect is executed for each of the deviation patterns. Is assigned. When the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach out of reach", the effect control CPU 120 determines that the expectation notice effect is not executed at a rate of 100%. Further, when the fluctuation pattern is "out of super reach (no pseudo-ream)", it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 90%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 10%. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is "out of super reach (one pseudo-ream)", it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 80%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 20%. .. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is "out of super reach (twice pseudo-ream)", it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 70%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 30%. ..

FIG. 13-6 (D) shows the execution ratio of the expectation notice effect when the display result is a big hit, and is a determination value for determining whether or not the expectation notice effect is executed for each of the fluctuation patterns for big hits. Is assigned. When the fluctuation pattern is "super reach jackpot (no pseudo-ream)", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 40%, and executes it at a rate of 60%. To decide. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is "super reach jackpot (one pseudo-ream)", it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 30%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 70%. .. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is "super reach jackpot (twice pseudo-ream)", it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 20%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 80%. ..

In this way, in the case of super reach, the rate at which the expectation notice effect is executed is higher than in the case of not super reach, and in the case of super reach, the more times the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the higher the rate. The rate at which the expectation notice effect is executed increases. As described above, the greater the number of times the pseudo-continuous production is executed, the higher the expectation of a big hit. Therefore, when the expectation notice effect is executed, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when the expectation notice effect is not executed. Is high.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the expectation notice effect (YES in step S35TM1020), the final display mode (final value) of the expectation notice effect is displayed in the final display of the expectation notice effect. It is determined based on the mode determination table (see FIG. 13-6 (E)) (step S35TM1030). On the other hand, when it is decided not to execute the expectation degree advance notice effect (NO in step S35TM1020), the process proceeds to step S35TM1090 described later.

FIG. 13-6 (E) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the final display mode of the expectation degree notice effect. As shown in FIG. 13-6 (E), in this embodiment, "60", "70", "80", "90", and "60", "70", "80", "90", and "60", "70", "80", "90", and Any numerical value of "100" can be determined, and a determination value is assigned to each of these numerical values.

As shown in FIG. 13-6 (E), when the display result is "missing" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "missing"), the final expectation notice effect is produced. The display mode is "60" at a rate of 40%, "70" at a rate of 30%, "80" at a rate of 20%, "90" at a rate of 10%, and "90" at a rate of 0%. It becomes "100". On the other hand, when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "big hit"), the final display mode of the expectation notice effect is "big hit" at a rate of 9%. It becomes "60", 15% becomes "70", 30% becomes "80", 45% becomes "90", and 1% becomes "100".

As described above, the final display mode of the expectation degree notice effect becomes a big hit as the victory expectation degree (the ratio of the range of the colored portion to the entire width of the numerical value bar 35TM610) indicated by the numerical value bar 35TM610 becomes larger. The ratio is high, and the jackpot expectation is in the relationship of "60" <"70" <"80" <"90" <"100". Further, when the final display mode of the expectation notice effect is "100", it is confirmed that the jackpot will be a big hit.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 bases the display mode change pattern and the initial value of the expectation notice effect on the display mode change pattern determination table of the expectation notice effect (see FIGS. 13-6 (F) and 13-6 (G)). (Step S35TM1040).

13-6 (F) and 13-6 (G) are explanatory views showing a specific example of a change pattern determination table for determining a display mode change pattern of the expectation level advance notice effect. In this embodiment, when it is determined that the expectation notice effect is executed and the final display mode of the expectation notice effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode. One of the initial values (first display mode) is determined. In this example, any one of "50", "60", "70", "80", and "90" can be determined as the initial value of the expectation degree advance notice effect, and each of these initial values can be determined. On the other hand, judgment values are assigned to each.

As shown in FIG. 13-6 (F), when the display result is "missing" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the display result specifying command is "missing"), the determined expectation degree notice effect is produced. When the final display mode is "60", the initial value is determined to be "50" at a rate of 100% (the number of changes is one). That is, when the final display mode is "60", there is no change pattern other than the change pattern that changes from the minimum initial value "50" to the final value "60", so the ratio is 100%. The initial value is determined to be "50".

In addition, when the final display mode of the determined expectation notice effect is "70", the initial value is determined to be "50" at a rate of 40% (the number of changes is 2), and the initial value is set at a rate of 60%. The value is determined to be "60" (1 change). In addition, when the final display mode of the determined expectation notice effect is "80", the initial value is determined to be "50" at a rate of 20% (the number of changes is 3), and the initial value is 30%. The value is determined to be "60" (number of changes twice), and the initial value is determined to be "70" at a rate of 50% (number of changes once). Further, when the final display mode of the determined expectation notice effect is "90", the initial value is determined to be "50" at a rate of 10% (the number of changes is 4), and the initial value is set at a rate of 20%. The value is determined to be "60" (number of changes 3 times), the initial value is determined to be "70" at a rate of 30% (number of changes 2 times), and the initial value is determined to be "80" at a rate of 40%. (1 change).

As shown in FIG. 13-6 (G), when the display result is a "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the display result specification command is a "big hit"), the determined expectation degree notice effect is produced. When the final display mode is "60", the initial value is determined to be "50" at a rate of 100% (the number of changes is one). That is, when the final display mode is "60", there is no change pattern other than the change pattern that changes from the minimum initial value "50" to the final value "60", so the ratio is 100%. The initial value is determined to be "50".

In addition, when the final display mode of the determined expectation notice effect is "70", the initial value is determined to be "50" at a rate of 60% (the number of changes is 2), and the initial value is set at a rate of 40%. The value is determined to be "60" (1 change). In addition, when the final display mode of the determined expectation notice effect is "80", the initial value is determined to be "50" at a rate of 50% (the number of changes is 3), and the initial value is 30%. The value is determined to be "60" (number of changes twice), and the initial value is determined to be "70" at a rate of 20% (number of changes once). In addition, when the final display mode of the determined expectation notice effect is "90", the initial value is determined to be "50" at a rate of 40% (the number of changes is 4), and the initial value is 30%. The value is determined to be "60" (number of changes 3 times), the initial value is determined to be "70" at a rate of 20% (number of changes 2 times), and the initial value is determined to be "80" at a rate of 10%. (1 change). In addition, when the final display mode of the determined expectation notice effect is "100", the initial value is determined to be "50" at a rate of 35% (the number of changes is 5), and the initial value is 30%. The value is determined to be "60" (4 changes), the initial value is determined to be "70" at a rate of 20% (3 changes), and the initial value is determined to be "80" at a rate of 10%. (2 changes) The initial value is determined to be "90" at a rate of 5% (1 change).

When the display mode change pattern and the initial value of the expectation degree advance notice effect are determined in this way, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the count-up effect corresponding to the execution of the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed (step S35TM1050). ). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the count-up effect is executed based on the table for determining whether or not the count-up effect is executed as shown in FIG. 13-7 (H).

As shown in FIG. 13-7 (H), in this embodiment, determination values are assigned so that the execution rate of the count-up effect differs depending on the display result. If the display result is "off" (that is, if the display result specified by the display result specification command is "off"), it is decided not to execute the count-up effect at a rate of 80%, and 20 Decide to do it at a rate of%. On the other hand, when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "big hit"), it is decided not to execute the count-up effect at a rate of 25%. , Decide to run at a rate of 75%.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, even when the expectation notice effect is executed, the count-up effect may be executed or the count-up effect may not be executed, and when the count-up effect is executed, the count-up effect may be executed. , The rate of big hits is higher than when the count-up effect is not executed. On the other hand, when the count-up effect is executed, the expectation notice effect is always executed.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the count-up effect (YES in step S35TM1060), the final display mode of the count-up effect is determined (step S35TM1070), and further, the display mode change of the count-up effect is changed. The pattern and initial values are determined (step S35TM1080). Then, the process proceeds to step S35TM1090. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the count-up effect (NO in step S35TM1060), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step S35TM1090 as it is.

Here, as described above, the ratio (0) of the range of the colored portion to the winning expectation (the entire width (100%)) indicated by the numerical bar 35TM610 in the expectation notice effect executed by the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. % ~ 100%)) and the winning expectation degree indicated by the numerical value in the count-up effect executed by the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 are in a state of matching. Therefore, the final value in the count-up effect is finally determined to be the same value as the victory expectation degree indicated by the numerical bar 35TM610 in the expectation degree notice effect, that is, the value determined in step S35TM1030 (step S35TM1070). Further, the change pattern of the victory expectation indicated as a numerical value in the count-up effect is determined to be the same pattern as the change pattern of the victory expectation indicated by the numerical bar 35TM610 in the expectation notice effect, that is, the pattern determined in step S35TM1040. (Step S35TM1080). Further, the initial value in the count-up effect is determined to be the same value as the victory expectation degree initially indicated by the numerical bar 35TM610 in the expectation degree notice effect, that is, the value determined in step S35TM1040 (step S35TM1080).

In this embodiment, the display mode of the expectation notice effect and the display mode of the count-up effect corresponding thereto are increased by 10 from the first display mode (initial value) to the final display mode (final value). Assuming that the initial value is "n" in the configuration, each change gradually changes to the final value such as "n + 10", "n + 20", "n + 30", and so on. Further, the change pattern of the expectation notice effect and the change pattern of the count-up effect corresponding to the change pattern are changed at least once (10) from the initial display mode (initial value), and the first When the display mode (initial value) is "n", the minimum value of the final display mode (final value) is "n + 10".

As shown in FIG. 13-6 (E), with respect to the expectation level notice effect and the corresponding count-up effect, the higher the final value of the victory expectation, the higher the jackpot expectation. Here, the jackpot expectation differs according to the initial value determined based on the final value of the victory expectation, that is, according to the change pattern and the number of changes. For example, as shown in FIGS. 13-6 (F) and 13-6 (G), when the final value of the winning expectation is "90" and the initial value is "50" (the number of changes is 4), the jackpot expectation is Is the highest, and when the initial value is "60" (number of changes 3 times), the jackpot expectation is the second highest, and when the initial value is "70" (number of changes 2), the jackpot expectation is 3. The highest is the highest, and when the initial value is "80" (the number of changes is one), the jackpot expectation is the lowest. In this way, when the final value of the winning expectation is "N (70≤N)", the jackpot expectation is the highest when the initial value is "50", and when the initial value is "N-10". However, the expectation for big hits is the lowest. That is, the greater the range of change from the initial value of the winning expectation (the greater the number of changes), the higher the jackpot expectation.

In this way, with regard to the expectation level notice effect and the corresponding count-up effect, the jackpot expectation level differs depending on the initial value and the change pattern (number of changes), so that the expectation level notice effect is provided on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. The player is assigned to the initial value and change pattern (number of changes) when the count-up effect is executed, and the initial value and change pattern (number of changes) when the count-up effect is executed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 correspondingly. It can be noticed.

In step S35TM1090, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern specified by the received variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern accompanied by a pseudo continuous effect. That is, it is confirmed whether or not the pseudo continuous effect is executed once or more during the variable display period of the decorative symbol to be executed. If the variation pattern does not involve a pseudo-continuous effect (YES in step S35TM1090), the effect determination process at the start of the variation ends. In the case of a variation pattern accompanied by a pseudo continuous effect (NO in step S35TM1090), whether or not to execute the countdown effect is determined (step S35TM1100), and the effect determination process at the start of the variation ends.

As shown in FIG. 13-7 (I), in this embodiment, determination values are assigned so that the execution rate of the countdown effect differs depending on the display result. If the display result is "off" (that is, if the display result specified by the display result specification command is "off"), it is decided not to execute the countdown effect at a rate of 55%, and 45%. Decide to run at the rate of. On the other hand, when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "big hit"), it is decided not to execute the countdown effect at a rate of 40%. Decide to run at a rate of 60%.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, even when the pseudo continuous effect is executed, the countdown effect may be executed or the countdown effect may not be executed, and when the countdown effect is executed, the countdown effect is performed. The rate of big hits is higher than when it is not executed. On the other hand, when the countdown effect is executed, the pseudo continuous effect is always executed.

As shown in FIGS. 13-7 (H) and 13-7 (I), when the count-up effect corresponding to the expectation notice effect is executed in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the countdown effect corresponding to the pseudo continuous effect is executed. Expectations for big hits are higher than when they are done. As a result, the player pays attention to which of the count-up effect and the count-down effect is executed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300, and improves the interest of the effect of updating the numerical value on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300. Can be made to.

Regarding the jackpot expectation, the jackpot expectation is highest when both the countdown effect and the countup effect are executed, and the countdown effect is not executed but the countup effect is executed, which is the second big hit. When the expectation is high and the countdown effect is executed but the countup effect is not executed, the jackpot expectation is the third highest, and when neither the countdown effect nor the countup effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is the lowest. It has become.

(Specific examples of countdown production and countup production)
Next, specific examples of the countdown effect and the countup effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-8 to 13-11. 13-8 is a time chart when both the countdown effect and the countup effect are executed, and FIGS. 13-9 to 13-11 are the main liquid crystals when both the countdown effect and the countup effect are executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image displayed on the display | display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

In the example shown below, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice is determined, the expectation notice effect is determined to be executed, and both the countdown effect and the countup effect are performed. It is assumed that the production is to be performed.

First, FIG. 13-9 (1) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is executing the variation display of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right (variation display started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 13-8). It shows. At this time, although nothing is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a background image related to the background image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 may be displayed. For example, when a part of a character is displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the other part of the character is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, so that the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 are displayed. The entire character is displayed in. The first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are located at origin positions that overlap the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front-rear direction.

At this time, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 arranged behind the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 is in a reduced state, but the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are transparent. By having the property, it is possible to visually recognize the screen of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (2), the effect control CPU 120 executes a variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. According to the timing (at the timing of T2A shown in FIG. 13-8), the timing is 3 seconds before the temporary stop timing of the first pseudo-continuous symbol determined based on the fluctuation pattern. Then, the first countdown effect is started by displaying the initial value of the countdown effect (in this example, “3” in the white aspect) on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

Then, both the decorative bodies of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the origin position are moved to the effect position at the same time (T2A to T2B shown in FIGS. 13-8). That is, the character portion of "FEV" and the character portion of "ER!" Are not separated, but are integrally displaced from the origin position to the effect position. As a result, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved. On the other hand, since both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 were displaced to the production position where they overlap the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in the front-rear direction, the visibility of the lower part of the screen of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 deteriorated. It is in a state.

Next, at a timing 1 second after the timing of T2A in FIG. 13-8 (timing of T3 in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120 uses the main liquid crystal display as shown in FIG. 13-9 (3). In the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the 35TM200, a countdown operation is performed to reduce the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 1 when the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. This is performed, and the updated value (in this example, "2" in the white mode) is displayed.

Next, at the timing when 1 second has elapsed from the timing of T3 in FIG. 13-8 (timing of T4 in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120 uses the main liquid crystal display as shown in FIG. 13-9 (4). In the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the 35TM200, a countdown operation is performed to reduce the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 1 when the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. This is performed, and the updated value (in this example, "1" in the white aspect) is displayed.

Next, at the timing when 1 second has elapsed from the timing of T4 in FIG. 13-8 (timing of T5 in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120 uses the main liquid crystal display as shown in FIG. 13-9 (5). A state in which a decorative symbol (in this example, the number symbol "2") is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5L of the 35TM200, and a decorative symbol (in this example, the number symbol "4") is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5R. Then, the pseudo-continuous symbol 35TM600 is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5C. In addition, a countdown operation is performed to reduce the value displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 1 in accordance with the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol 35TM600 is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5C, and the final value after the update (in this example, A white aspect of "0") is displayed.

Then, both the decorative bodies of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the production position are simultaneously moved to the origin position (T6A to T6B shown in FIGS. 13-8). That is, the character portion of "FEV" and the character portion of "ER!" Are not separated, but are integrally displaced from the effect position to the origin position. As a result, the visibility of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is improved. On the other hand, both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displaced to the origin positions where they overlap with the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front-rear direction, so that the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is deteriorated. ing.

Next, at the timing 1 second after the timing of T5 in FIG. 13-8 (timing of T6B in FIG. 13-8), as shown in FIG. 13-9 (6), the symbol display area 5L of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. , In the symbol display area 5C and the symbol display area 5R, the first re-variation display of the decorative symbol is executed, and the first countdown effect is ended. In this example, the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 (in this example, “0” in the white aspect) is erased, and the value related to the countdown effect is returned to the state where it is not displayed. At this time, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are at origin positions that overlap the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front-rear direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (7), the effect control CPU 120 executes a variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. According to the timing (at the timing of T7A shown in FIG. 13-8), the timing is 3 seconds before the temporary stop timing of the first pseudo-continuous symbol determined based on the fluctuation pattern. Then, the second countdown effect is started by displaying the initial value of the countdown effect (in this example, “3” in the white aspect) on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

Then, both the decorative bodies of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the origin position are moved to the effect position at the same time (T7A to T7B shown in FIGS. 13-8). That is, the character portion of "FEV" and the character portion of "ER!" Are not separated, but are integrally displaced from the origin position to the effect position. As a result, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved. On the other hand, since both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 were displaced to the production position where they overlap the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in the front-rear direction, the visibility of the lower part of the screen of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 deteriorated. It is in a state.

Next, at a timing 1 second after the timing of T7A in FIG. 13-8 (timing of T8 in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120 uses the main liquid crystal display as shown in FIG. 13-10 (8). In the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the 35TM200, a countdown operation for decrementing the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 1 while executing the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. This is performed, and the updated value (in this example, "2" in the white aspect) is displayed.

Next, at the timing when 1 second has elapsed from the timing of T8 in FIG. 13-8 (timing of T9 in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120 uses the main liquid crystal display as shown in FIG. 13-10 (9). In the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the 35TM200, a countdown operation is performed to reduce the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed. This is performed, and the updated value (in this example, "1" in the white aspect) is displayed.

Next, at the timing when 1 second has elapsed from the timing of T9 in FIG. 13-8 (timing of T10 in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120 uses the main liquid crystal display as shown in FIG. 13-10 (10). A state in which a decorative symbol (in this example, the number symbol "3") is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5L of the 35TM200, and a decorative symbol (in this example, the number symbol "5") is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5R. Then, the pseudo-continuous symbol 35TM600 is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5C. In addition, a countdown operation is performed to reduce the value displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 1 in accordance with the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol 35TM600 is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5C, and the final value after the update (in this example, A white aspect of "0") is displayed.

Then, both the decorative bodies of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the production position are moved to the origin position at the same time (T11A to T11B shown in FIGS. 13-8). That is, the character portion of "FEV" and the character portion of "ER!" Are not separated, but are integrally displaced from the effect position to the origin position. As a result, the visibility of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is improved. On the other hand, both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displaced to the origin positions where they overlap with the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front-rear direction, so that the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is deteriorated. ing.

Next, at the timing 1 second after the timing of T10 in FIG. 13-8 (timing of T11B in FIG. 13-8), FIG. 13-10 (11) shows the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. In the area 5C and the symbol display area 5R, the second re-variation display of the decorative symbol is executed, and the second countdown effect is ended. In this example, the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 (in this example, “0” in the white aspect) is erased, and the value related to the countdown effect is returned to the state where it is not displayed. At this time, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are at origin positions that overlap the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front-rear direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (12), the effect control CPU 120 sets "7" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 at the timing when the reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established. The decorative symbol of "" is stopped and displayed to bring it into a reach state, and the characters "reach !!" are displayed on the upper part of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (timing of T12 in FIG. 13-8).

Then, after the reach state is established, the effect control CPU 120 executes the battle effect according to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, as shown in FIGS. 13-11 (13). Here, along with the execution of the battle effect, the ally character 35TM605 and the enemy character 35TM606 are displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (timing of T13 in FIG. 13-8).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 arrives at the timing immediately after the battle effect is started based on the fluctuation pattern (timing of T14A in FIG. 13-8), as shown in FIG. 13-11 (14). And also execute the count-up effect. That is, with the start of the expectation notice production, the battle production is temporarily suspended to hide the ally character 35TM605 and the enemy character 35TM606, and the characters "victory expectation" and the characters "victory expectation" are displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. , The numerical bar 35TM610 is displayed, and as the count-up effect is started, the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is displayed with the determined initial value.

In this example, it is assumed that the initial value of the expectation notice effect and the count-up effect is determined to be 70, and the final value is determined to be 90 (that is, the change pattern of two changes is determined). Based on this, initially, the ratio of the colored portion in the numerical bar 35TM610 is "70"% of the entire bar, and "70" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. The numerical value displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is in the range of "50" to "70", and the numerical value "70" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 in a blue mode.

At the same time that the effect control CPU 120 starts the count-up effect, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are moved from the origin position to the effect position (T14A to T14B). As a result, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved, and attention is paid to the initial value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 as the count-up effect is executed, and the change pattern from the initial value to the final value. Can be made to. The timing for moving the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 from the origin position to the effect position to improve the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is before the initial value is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. It may be after the initial value is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

Next, at a timing 5 seconds after the timing of T14A in FIG. 13-8 (timing of T15 in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120 is displayed on the numerical bar 35TM610 as shown in FIG. 13-11 (15). A count-up operation that updates the proportion occupied by the colored part from "70"% of the entire bar to "80"% and increases the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 10 from "70" to "80". (First change). The numerical value of "80" is displayed in the red mode on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 according to the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the range of "80" to "100". ..

Next, at a timing 5 seconds after the timing of T15 in FIG. 13-8 (timing of T16 in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120 is displayed on the numerical bar 35TM610 as shown in FIG. 13-11 (16). A count-up operation that updates the proportion occupied by the colored part from "80"% of the entire bar to "90"% and increases the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 10 from "80" to "90". (Second change). The numerical value of "90" is displayed in the red mode on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 according to the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the range of "80" to "100". ..

Next, at a timing 5 seconds after the timing of T16 in FIG. 13-8 (timing of T17 in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120 is displayed on the numerical bar 35TM610 as shown in FIG. 13-11 (17). The display mode is not changed according to the ratio of the colored part reaching the final value (“90”% of the entire bar), and the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is the final value (“90”). The numerical value displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is blinked according to the fact that the value has reached ("90" is blinked in a red mode). As a result, the player is notified that the display mode of the expectation level advance notice effect and the count-up effect has reached the final display mode and no further update is performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 reaches the final value (“90”), it is not immediately notified that the final value has been reached (FIG. 13). In a mode (non-blinking mode) suggesting that there is a possibility of change for a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) for a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) (not immediately blinking mode at the timing of -8 (T16) and FIG. 13-11 (16)). It is displayed, and after that, it is notified that the final value has been reached (changed to a blinking mode at the timings of (T17) and 13-11 (17) of FIGS. 13-8). By doing so, the player cannot immediately grasp whether or not the numerical value displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is the final value, that is, whether or not there is room for further change. It is possible to maintain interest in the numerical values displayed on the liquid crystal display 35TM300.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 simultaneously moves both the decorative bodies of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the effect position to the origin position (T18A to T18B shown in FIGS. 13-8). That is, the character portion of "FEV" and the character portion of "ER!" Are not separated, but are integrally displaced from the effect position to the origin position. As a result, the visibility of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is improved. On the other hand, both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displaced to the origin positions where they overlap with the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front-rear direction, so that the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is deteriorated. ing.

Next, at the timing when 5 seconds have elapsed from the timing of T17 in FIG. 13-8 (timing of T18B in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120 performs the expected degree advance notice effect as shown in FIG. 13-11 (18). And the count-up effect is terminated, and the battle effect is resumed so that the ally character 35TM605 and the enemy character 35TM606 are displayed again. With the end of the expectation level notice effect, the characters "winning expectation" and the numerical bar 35TM610 are hidden on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, and the numerical value indicating the winning expectation is also hidden on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Here, as described above, in T18A to T18B of FIGS. 13-8, since both the decorative bodies of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displaced to the origin position, the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 The visibility is improved, and the player can concentrate on the battle production.

As described above, the countdown effect accompanied by the subtraction operation of the displayed numerical values shown in FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5) and 13-10 (7) to (10), and FIG. 13-11 (14). By making it possible to perform the count-up effect accompanied by the addition operation of the displayed numerical values shown in (17) on the common sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300, the numerical update operation executed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 can be performed. By diversifying the accompanying effects, it is possible to improve the interest of the effects performed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300.

In addition, as an effect that involves different types of update operations (subtraction, addition), a count-down effect and a count-up effect are provided. In each type of effect, numerical values are shown by an image imitating a 7-segment display. By executing such an effect on the common sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300, it is possible to have consistency as an effect, and a plurality of types of effects can be effectively used by effectively using the common display area. Can be executed.

Further, in this embodiment, the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 executes the pseudo-continuous effect, and the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 executes the countdown effect from 3 seconds before the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. Corresponding to the execution of the expectation notice effect on the liquid crystal display 35TM200, the count-up effect is executed at the same time as the expectation notice effect on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. In this way, a countdown effect is provided in response to the pseudo-continuous effect as one effect that suggests the jackpot expectation, and a count-up effect is provided in response to the expectation notice effect as the other effect that suggests the jackpot expectation. Is provided to clarify the correspondence between the productions.

In the present embodiment, as the operations executed by the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300, a countdown operation corresponding to the pseudo continuous effect and a countup operation corresponding to the expectation advance notice effect are provided. The former action causes the numerical value to decrease, and the latter action causes the numerical value to increase, which are completely contradictory actions. It is possible to clearly distinguish it from the corresponding production.

Further, in the count-down effect, "3" is displayed as an initial value 3 seconds before the pseudo-continuous symbol 35TM600 is temporarily stopped, and 1 is subtracted every 1 second, while in the count-up effect. This is an update method in which any of "50" to "90" is displayed as an initial value immediately after the start of the battle effect, and 10 is added every 5 seconds. In this way, by making the initial value of each effect executed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 and the change pattern different, the player can easily grasp which effect is being executed. Further, by making the subtraction cycle of the countdown effect (1 second in this example) different from the addition cycle of the countup effect (5 seconds in this example), the player executes any effect. It is possible to easily grasp whether or not it is.

Even if the sound effects output from the speakers 8L and 8R when the countdown effect is executed and the sound effects output from the speakers 8L and 8R when the countup effect is executed are made different. It is possible to make the light emitting mode of the game effect lamp 9 when the countdown effect is executed different from the light emitting mode of the game effect lamp 9 when the countup effect is executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the numerical range "0 to 3" in the countdown effect and the numerical range "50 to 100" in the countup effect do not overlap, the effect being executed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is performed. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding about the above. Not limited to such a form, the numerical range in the countdown effect and the numerical range in the countup effect may partially overlap. For example, the countdown effect may be subtracted from the initial value "10". Alternatively, the count-up effect may be added from the initial value "10". According to this, when the initial value is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, it is possible to pay attention to which effect is executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the countdown effect, the numerical value is displayed in a white mode regardless of the numerical range. On the other hand, in the count-up effect, the numerical value is displayed in a blue mode (“50” to “70”) or a red mode (“80” to “100”) according to the numerical range, and the final value is set as a blinking mode. .. In this way, by making the display mode of the numerical value during the countdown effect different from the display mode of the numerical value during the countdown effect, the difference between the countdown effect and the countup effect can be further clarified.

Further, in this embodiment, the countdown effect is executed in the periods of T2A to T6B and T7A to T11B in FIG. 13-8 within one fluctuation display period, and the period of T14A to T18B in FIG. 13-8. Then, the count-up effect is being executed. In this way, the countdown effect and the countup effect are executed at different timings so that the execution period of the countdown effect and the execution period of the countup effect do not overlap (when one effect is executed, the other one is executed). By not executing the effect), it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming complicated and to execute both the countdown effect and the countup effect in a common area (in this example, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300).

Further, in this embodiment, in the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 different from the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in which the count-up effect is executed, the numerical value bar 35TM610 is displayed in a manner matching the numerical value displayed in the count-up effect. Will be. That is, the numerical value displayed in the count-up effect and the ratio occupied by the colored portion in the numerical value bar 35TM610 match. In this way, the effect of the effect can be further enhanced by displaying the degree of expectation of victory, which is common effect information, in different modes using different indicators such as the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 and the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. it can.

(1) In the above embodiment, an example in which the countdown effect and the countup effect are executed as the effects related to the display result of the variable display during execution is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. A countdown effect or a countup effect may be executed as a look-ahead notice effect related to the display result of the non-variable display. Specifically, based on the determination result at the time of starting prize, the remaining number of fluctuation display times until the fluctuation display (target fluctuation) based on the starting prize is executed is determined for each execution of the fluctuation display on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. It is also possible to execute an effect that counts down to. In addition, based on the judgment result at the time of the start winning, the jackpot expectation of the target fluctuation is determined for each execution of the fluctuation display on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by the time the fluctuation display (target fluctuation) based on the start winning is executed. It is also possible to execute an effect that counts up to. As in these examples, the countdown effect and the countup effect may be executed over a plurality of fluctuations.

(2) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the pseudo-continuous symbol, which is a decorative symbol suggesting that the decorative symbol is re-variated, is temporarily stopped when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. Not limited to such a form, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, a predetermined decorative symbol (for example, a decorative symbol consisting of numbers) that can appear or can be fixedly stopped even when the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed. The combination of decorative symbols (for example, the combination in which the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are "2", "4", and "6") may be temporarily stopped.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, an example is shown in which the left symbol and the right symbol are first temporarily stopped, and then the middle symbol is temporarily stopped. Not limited to this, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol may be temporarily stopped at the same time.

(3) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the initial value of the countdown effect is always "3" (the countdown effect is started 3 seconds before the pseudo-continuous symbol 35TM600 is temporarily stopped). Not limited to the form, a plurality of initial values may be selectable at different ratios according to the fluctuation pattern or the display result. For example, when the number of executions of the pseudo-ream is 1, the ratio of "3" as the initial value is 80% and the ratio of "5" as the initial value is 20% in the first countdown effect. When the number of executions of the pseudo-ream is 2, the ratio of "3" as the initial value is 20% and the ratio of "5" as the initial value is 80% in the first countdown effect. You may. In addition, when the display result is out of order, the ratio of "3" as the initial value is 80% and the ratio of "5" as the initial value is 20% in the countdown effect, but when the display result is a big hit. In the countdown effect, the ratio of "3" as the initial value may be 20%, and the ratio of "5" as the initial value may be 80%.

(4) In the above embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach accompanied by the two pseudo-continuous effects is determined and when it is decided to execute the countdown effect, the two pseudo-continuous effects are performed. An example is shown in which the countdown effect corresponding to each is executed (the countdown effect is executed the same number of times as the pseudo-continuous effect), but the superreach with two pseudo-continuous effects is not limited to this form. When the variable pattern is determined, there is an effect pattern in which the countdown effect is executed for one pseudo-continuous effect, but the countdown effect is not executed for the other pseudo-continuous effect. You can do it.

(5) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the pseudo-ream effect is always executed when the countdown effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-ream is not limited to this, even when the countdown effect is executed. The effect may not be executed. Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the expectation notice effect is always executed when the count-up effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the count-up effect is executed. It is also possible that the expectation notice effect may not be executed.

(6) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the effect control CPU 120 displays the numerical value of the countdown effect and the numerical value of the countup effect on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 with an image imitating a 7-segment display. Not limited to such a form, an actual 7-segment display is provided in place of the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300, and the light emission control of the 7-segment display is performed to obtain a numerical value for a countdown effect and a numerical value for a countup effect. May be displayed (light emission).

(7) In the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300, the effect control CPU 120 has a remaining number of fluctuations that can be controlled in a time-saving state (time-saving number) and a remaining number of fluctuations that can be controlled in a probable change state (ST (special time) number). , The number of rounds in the jackpot game state can be displayed. The period during which the information (numerical value) related to the game state is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is a countdown effect or count-up compared to the period during which the information (numerical value) related to the game state is not displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300. The rate at which the effect is executed may be low. According to such a configuration, the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 restricts the simultaneous display of the numerical value of the countdown effect or the numerical value of the countup effect and the information (numerical value) regarding the game state, and is more suitable for the player. The important latter can be notified with priority.

(8) In the above embodiment, the countdown effect is executed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in response to the pseudo-continuous notice effect as the first suggestion effect executed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, and the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. An example is shown in which a count-up effect is executed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 in response to the expected degree notice effect as the second suggestion effect to be executed. Not limited to such a form, the countdown effect is executed in response to the first suggestion effect, and the countdown effect is executed in response to the second suggestion effect (for example, the remaining time until the expectation notice effect is counted down). You may do it. On the contrary, the count-up effect may be executed in response to the second suggestion effect, and the count-up effect may be executed in response to the first suggestion effect. As described above, the numerical update operation corresponding to the first suggestion effect and the numerical update operation corresponding to the second suggestion effect may be common operations.

In addition, there are cases where the countdown effect is executed in response to the first suggestion effect and cases where the countdown effect is executed, and cases where the countup effect is executed in response to the second suggestion effect and cases where the countdown effect is executed. The production may be executed in some cases. In this way, it may be possible to execute an effect with different types of actions corresponding to a common suggestion effect.

(9) In the above embodiment, both the countdown effect and the countup effect are sub-display devices different from the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in which the pseudo-continuous effect as the suggestion effect and the expectation notice effect are executed. An example of execution on the liquid crystal display 35TM300 has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and one or both of the countdown effect and the countup effect is the pseudo-continuous effect and the expectation notice effect, which are suggestive effects. It may be executed in the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 to be executed.

(10) In the above embodiment, in the countdown effect, the remaining time until the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped is subtracted and updated, but the remaining time until another effect is executed is subtracted and updated. For example, the remaining time until the movable accessory such as the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 may be operated may be subtracted and updated. Further, in the above embodiment, in the count-up effect, an example of adding and updating a numerical value related to the jackpot expectation degree is shown, but a numerical value related to another index may be added and updated. The elapsed time from the movement of the movable accessory such as the 1 logo panel 35TM410 and the 2nd logo panel 35TM420 to the effect position may be added and updated.

(Example of slot machine)
In the above embodiment, it is possible to execute a countdown effect for subtracting numerical values and a countup effect for adding numerical values, and it is possible to execute the countdown effect and the countup effect on a sub liquid crystal display which is a common area. Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been illustrated as a similar gaming machine, the gaming machine having such a configuration is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be a slot machine.

The slot machine includes a variable display device having a plurality of reels (for example, three reels, a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) on which a plurality of types of symbols as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral portion. The player sets the number of bets (1 to 3 medals), and each reel starts rotating by operating the start lever, and the player operates the stop button provided corresponding to each reel. Therefore, the rotation is stopped within a predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing. Then, a prize is generated according to the display result derived when the rotation of all the reels is stopped (or according to the internal lottery result regardless of the display result).

There are various types of winning roles, such as small roles, special roles, and replay roles. Here, in the winning of the small winning combination, the player can obtain the profit that a fixed number of medals are paid out for each type of the small winning combination. By winning a special role, the player can obtain the benefit of being transferred from the next game to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a regular bonus (RB) or a big bonus (BB). Winning a replay role can benefit from the ability to play the next game without consuming new medals to set the number of bets.

In such a slot machine, after the end of the bonus, as an advantageous state for the player, it is possible to play the game while suppressing the decrease in the value for the game by increasing the winning probability of the re-game combination more than usual. There is a device that controls the possible replay time (referred to as RT) and terminates RT when the termination conditions including winning a predetermined fall winning combination are satisfied. In addition, there is a case in which the effect state can be controlled at the assist time (referred to as AT) which is the notification period during which the navigation effect (for example, guiding the push order) for notifying the internal lottery result can be executed. Further, the state in which the game state is RT and the production state is controlled by AT is also referred to as an assist replay time (ART). The main control unit sets a flag corresponding to each game state, a winning combination, etc., and executes processing (including transmission of an effect control command to the sub control unit) corresponding to the set flag. The game is controlled.

The combination lottery, AT lottery, RT lottery, and ART lottery, and the additional lottery for the number of ATs, RTs, and ARTs are stored in the RAM, for example, at the start of the game (immediately after the start switch is operated). It is performed based on the game state indicated by the current game state flag, and the winning flag of the winning combination is stored. Whether or not the winning combination is actually established is determined by the winning flag stored in the RAM, the operation timing of the stop button, and the like.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment includes a main liquid crystal display 35TM200 as a first display device and a sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 as a second display device, and also includes a movable body 32. As a result, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420, which are decorative bodies having light transmission, were provided, but similarly, the slot machine also has a main liquid crystal display as a first display device and a second display device. A sub-liquid crystal display as a display device may be provided, and a first logo panel and a second logo panel, which are decorative bodies having light transmission, may be provided as movable bodies.

In such a slot machine, the sub control unit can control the remaining number of times that can be controlled to the AT state (AT number of times), the remaining number of times that can be controlled to the RT state (RT number of times), and the ART state on the sub liquid crystal display. It is possible to display the remaining number of times (ART number of times) and the like. During the period when the information (numerical value) related to the game state is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display, the countdown effect or the countup effect is performed more than the period when the information (numerical value) related to the game state is not displayed on the sub liquid crystal display. The rate of execution may be low. According to such a configuration, it is more important for the player to limit the simultaneous display of the numerical value of the countdown effect or the numerical value of the countup effect and the information (numerical value) regarding the game state on the sub liquid crystal display. The latter can be notified with priority.

(Examples of related effects related to the execution status of suggested effects)
Next, an example of executing a related effect related to the execution status of the suggestion effect suggesting that the jackpot game state is controlled will be described. In the example shown below, a music reach effect and a cut-in notice effect can be executed as suggestive effects. In addition, the count display effect can be executed as a related effect related to the execution status of the music reach effect. In addition, a timer effect can be executed as an effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect. Hereinafter, each of these effects will be specifically described.

(Music reach production)
The music reach effect is an effect that can be executed when the variation pattern of the super reach is selected as the variation pattern, and is a suggestion effect that can be executed as one type of the super reach effect after the reach state is established. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 13-15 (3) to (6) and 13-19 (3) to 13-20 (12), which will be described later, music is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At the same time, it is an effect of displaying an image of a mode corresponding to the reproduction time of the music on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200.

In the present embodiment, on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, an image of characters (A to C) corresponding to the reproduction time of the music and an image of musical notes (35TM700 to 35TM720) corresponding to the reproduction time of the music are displayed. In the first stage of the music reach production (the period of music playback time of 1 to 15 seconds), one character (character A) and one kind of note (note 35TM700) are displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. In the second stage of music reach production (music playback time is 16 to 30 seconds), two characters (character A and character B) and two types of notes (note 35TM700, note) are displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. 35TM710) is displayed, and in the third stage of the music reach production (the period of music playback time of 31 to 60 seconds), three characters (character A, character B, character C) and three characters (character A, character B, character C) are displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. Three types of notes (note 35TM700, note 35TM710, note 35TM720) are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 13-13, which will be described later, the music reach effect is when it ends in the first stage, when it ends in the second stage, and when it ends in the third stage (when the music is output to the end). ), And it is decided in advance to which stage to proceed according to the display result and the fluctuation pattern. When the music reach production progresses to the second stage, the jackpot expectation is higher than when it ends in the first stage, and when it progresses to the third stage, the jackpot expectation is higher than when it finishes in the second stage. Is high. As the relationship between the final number of stages of music reach production and the degree of expectation of big hits, the relationship of 1st stage <2nd stage <3rd stage is established.

The timing at which the playback of the music related to the music reach production is started is the timing that is equal to the music playback time before the fixed stop timing of the decorative symbol. Therefore, when the music reach production ends in the first stage, the music is started to be played 15 seconds before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, and the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped at the timing when the musical music is played for 15 seconds. Will be done. In addition, when the music reach production ends in the second stage, the musical composition starts playing 30 seconds before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, and the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped at the timing when the musical piece is played for 30 seconds. Will be done. In addition, when the music reach production ends in the third stage (when the music is played to the end), the music starts to be played 60 seconds before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, and the music is played for 60 seconds. The decorative design will be fixed and stopped at the timing when the music is played (the timing when the music is played to the end).

With such an effect configuration, the player expects that when the reproduction of the music related to the music reach effect is started, the music is played for as long as possible before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped.

(Counting display production)
The counting display effect is an effect related to the execution status of the music reach effect, and is shown in FIGS. 13-15 (3) to (6) and 13-19 (4) to 13-20 (12), which will be described later. As shown, it is an effect of displaying the reproduction time of the music in the music reach effect on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Specifically, it is an effect of displaying the elapsed time (seconds) from the start of playback of the music on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and displays the playback seconds (1 to 60) with an image imitating a 7-segment display. I am trying to do it.

The initial value displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the counting display effect is "1", and the numerical value displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is added and updated by 1 every second. As described above, in the counting display effect, the operation of adding and updating the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 1 every second is performed. As a result, the player is notified of the playback time of the music in the music reach production. Therefore, the final value of the count display effect when the music reach effect ends in the first stage is "15", and the final value of the count display effect when the music reach effect ends in the second stage is "30". When the music reach effect progresses to the third stage, the final value of the count display effect is "60".

With such an effect configuration, the player can clearly grasp the playback period after the music is started. By understanding that the longer the music playback period is, the higher the jackpot expectation is, it is expected that the numerical value (music playback time) displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 will increase as much as possible. ..

The display mode of the numerical value (reproduction time) may be different depending on the range of the numerical value (reproduction time) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. For example, the numerical value is displayed in blue in the range of 1 to 15. It may be displayed, the numerical value displayed in red in the range of 16 to 30, and the numerical value displayed in red in the range of 31 to 60 may be further blinked.

(Cut-in notice production)
The cut-in notice effect is an effect that suggests that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. As shown in FIG. 13-20 (10) described later, when another effect such as a super reach effect (music reach effect) is being executed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the effect is higher than that of the other effect being executed. It is a notice effect executed in a display mode having a high priority. As the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect, there are a plurality of effect modes (“CHANGE” and “extreme heat”) in which the displayed characters are different, and the ratio of each effect mode selected according to the display result is different (Fig.). See 13-13 (F)).

From the player's point of view, when an image related to another suggestive effect or the like is displayed, suddenly, a display mode having a higher priority than the image related to the other suggestive effect or the like (the display layer is higher and others). Since the cut-in image (which appears to be displayed on the front side of the image related to the suggestion effect) is displayed, it is attracted to the screen change when the cut-in notice effect is executed. In addition, he / she will be interested in which of the plurality of production modes the cut-in notice effect is executed.

(Timer production)
The timer effect is an effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect, and is an effect of displaying the remaining time (seconds) until the cut-in notice effect is executed in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. As shown in FIGS. 13-19 (6) to 13-20 (9) described later, the cut-in notice effect is executed as the timer effect (a cut-in image of "CHANGE" or "extreme heat" is displayed. It starts at the timing of 3 seconds before, and first, "3" is displayed as an initial value in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. The numerical value displayed in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is subtracted and updated by 1 every second, and the cut-in image is displayed at the timing when it becomes "0".

As described above, the timer effect is an effect executed in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, which is different from the display area (sub liquid crystal display 35TM300) in which the count display effect is executed, and is different from the count display effect. As an operation, it is an effect of subtracting the remaining time until the start of the suggestion effect (countdown operation until the cut-in notice effect is executed). In this embodiment, when the cut-in notice effect is executed, the timer effect is also executed.

(Production decision processing at the start of fluctuation)
As shown in FIG. 5, in the special symbol normal process (step S110) of the special symbol process process (step S25), the CPU 103 displays the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the random number value for determining the display result. Whether it is a "big hit" or "missing", and the type of big hit when it is a "big hit" are determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S111), the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types by using the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the preliminary determination result of the display result.

In the present embodiment, when the predetermined display result is "off", the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern based on the deviation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13-13 (A). In this example, the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern in which the decorative symbol variation display mode is not the reach mode and the display result is off, and the normal reach in which the decorative symbol variation display mode is the reach mode and the display result is off. The variation pattern of the deviation and the variation pattern of the super reach deviation in which the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach aspect and the display result is missed when the super reach effect is executed are provided.

In the example of FIG. 13-13 (A), a non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern is determined at a rate of 90%, a normal reach out-of-reach variation pattern is determined at an 8% rate, and a super reach out-of-reach variation is determined at a rate of 2%. It will be decided by the pattern.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the predetermined display result is "big hit", the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13-13 (B). In this example, the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot in which the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach aspect and the display result is the jackpot, and the variation display aspect of the decoration symbol are the reach aspect and the super reach effect is executed to display the display result. The fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot, which is a jackpot, is provided.

In the example of FIG. 13-13 (B), the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot is determined at a rate of 5%, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot is determined at a rate of 95%.

As described above, when the fluctuation pattern of super reach is selected, the rate of big hits is higher than that when the fluctuation pattern of super reach is not selected. That is, the jackpot expectation in the fluctuation pattern of this embodiment has a relationship of normal reach <super reach.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 13-13 (A) and 13-13 (A) and (B), non-reach, normal reach, and super reach are provided as fluctuation patterns. As shown in (B), as the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, a super reach without a pseudo-ream effect (no pseudo-ream) and a super reach with one pseudo-ream effect (1 pseudo-ream), and a plurality of times. It is also possible to provide a super reach (twice a pseudo-ream) accompanied by a pseudo-ream effect.

As described above, when the CPU 103 starts the variation display of the special symbol, the display result specification command for specifying the display result, the variation pattern specification command for specifying the variation pattern, and the hold storage number subtraction specification command (first). The hold storage number subtraction designation command or the second hold storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

The effect control CPU 120 is a hold storage number subtraction designation command (first hold) that specifies that the hold storage number has been subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is started. Storage number subtraction specification command or second hold storage number subtraction specification command), display result specification command to specify the display result (big hit or miss, big hit type when it becomes a big hit), and the fluctuation time and effect contents of the special symbol (big hit or miss, big hit type) Based on the fact that a set of commands called a variation pattern command for specifying (reach, pseudo-ream, etc.) is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the variation display of the special symbol is executed, and the special symbol is displayed. It is possible to specify the fluctuation time and the content of the production (reach, pseudo-ream, etc.). Further, the effect control CPU 120 receives a special symbol (first special symbol) from the game control microcomputer 100 when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the display result is confirmed. It is possible to identify that the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol) is completed and the display result is derived.

FIG. 13-12 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation. This change start effect determination process is different from the process shown in FIG. 13-5, and determines whether or not the music reach effect, the count display effect, the cut-in notice effect, and the timer effect are executed and the execution mode.

The effect control CPU 120 executes this variation start effect determination process in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-mentioned one set of commands accompanying the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the display result designation is the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol. An effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) to be executed based on a command and a variation pattern specification command is set, and a decorative pattern based on the specified variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed during the variation display is determined by the variation start effect determination process shown in FIGS. 13-12.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the music reach effect is executed and the final stage when the music reach effect is executed in the final stage determination table of the music reach effect (FIGS. 13-13 (C) and (D)). It is determined based on (see step S35TM2010).

FIG. 13-13 (C) shows the execution ratio of the music reach effect when the display result is out of alignment, and is a determination for determining whether or not the music reach effect is executed and the final stage for each of the deviation patterns. A value has been assigned. The effect control CPU 120 determines that the music reach effect is not executed at a rate of 100% when the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach out". Further, when the fluctuation pattern is "out of normal reach", it is decided not to execute the music reach effect at a rate of 100%. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is "out of super reach", it is decided not to execute the music reach production at a rate of 40%, and it is decided to execute the music reach production up to the first stage at a rate of 30%. Then, it is decided to execute up to the second stage of the music reach production at a rate of 20%, and to execute up to the third stage of the music reach production at a rate of 10%.

FIG. 13-13 (D) shows the execution ratio of the music reach effect when the display result is a big hit, and is a determination for determining whether or not the music reach effect is executed and the final stage for each of the fluctuation patterns for the big hit. A value has been assigned. The effect control CPU 120 determines that the music reach effect is not executed at a rate of 100% when the fluctuation pattern is "normal reach jackpot". In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is "super reach jackpot", it is decided not to execute the music reach production at a rate of 20%, and it is decided to execute the music reach production up to the first stage at a rate of 10%. Then, it is decided to execute up to the second stage of the music reach production at a rate of 30%, and to execute up to the third stage of the music reach production at a rate of 40%.

In this way, the final stage of the music reach production is the second stage (the playback period of the music) rather than the case where the final stage of the music reach production is the first stage (when the playback period of the music is up to 15 seconds). (When is up to 30 seconds) has a higher expectation of a big hit. Further, the final stage of the music reach production is the third stage (the playback period of the music is 60) rather than the case where the final stage of the music reach production is the second stage (when the playback period of the music is up to 30 seconds). The expectation of a big hit is higher in seconds (when the music is played to the end). That is, regarding the reliability (big hit expectation) of the music reach production, the relationship of the first stage <second stage <third stage is established.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the music reach effect (YES in step S35TM2020), the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the count display effect (step S35TM2030). On the other hand, when it is decided not to execute the music reach effect (NO in step S35TM2020), it is decided not to execute the count display effect (step S35TM2040).

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the count display effect at a rate of 100% when the music reach effect is executed, and 100 when the music reach effect is not executed. The count display effect is not executed at a rate of%.

Here, the numerical update period in the count display effect matches the music playback period in the music reach effect. Therefore, when it is decided to end the music reach effect in the first stage, the final value in the counting display effect is determined to be "15", and when it is decided to end the music reach effect in the second stage. Determines the final value in the count display effect to be "30", and if it is determined to end the music reach effect in the third stage, determines the final value in the count display effect to "60". In this way, the final value of the counting display effect is determined based on the final stage of the music reach effect.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect based on the execution ratio determination table of the cut-in notice effect (see FIG. 13-13 (E)) (step S35TM2050).

FIG. 13-13 (E) is a table showing the execution ratio of the cut-in notice effect, and a determination value for determining whether or not the cut-in notice effect is executed is assigned according to whether or not the count display effect is executed. There is. When the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the count display effect, it decides not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 45% but to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 55%. Further, when the count display effect is executed, it is decided not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 98%, but to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 2%.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the cut-in notice effect (YES in step S35TM2060), the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect is set to the effect mode determination table of the cut-in notice effect (FIG. 13). -13 (F)) (see step S35TM2070). On the other hand, if it is decided not to execute the cut-in notice effect (NO in step S35TM2060), the process ends as it is.

As shown in FIG. 13-13 (F), in this embodiment, determination values are assigned so that the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect differs depending on the display result. When the display result is "off" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "off"), the effect mode (characters of the cut-in image) of the cut-in notice effect is 80%. The ratio of the above is the first aspect "CHANGE", and the ratio of 20% is the second aspect "extreme heat". On the other hand, when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the display result specification command is "big hit"), the effect mode (characters of the cut-in image) of the cut-in notice effect is , 20% becomes the first aspect "CHANGE", and 80% becomes the second aspect "extreme heat".

Next, the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the timer effect in response to the cut-in notice effect (step S35TM2080), and ends the process as it is.

In this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect, it is determined to execute the timer effect at a rate of 100%. Therefore, the execution rate of the timer effect is shown in FIG. 13-13 (E). It matches the execution ratio of the cut-in notice effect shown. As shown in FIG. 13-13 (E), when the count display effect is executed, the rate at which the cut-in notice effect is executed is lower than when the count display effect is not executed. That is, when the count display effect is executed, the rate at which the timer effect is executed is lower than when the count display effect is not executed.

In the present embodiment, when both the counting display effect and the timer effect are executed, the execution period of the counting display effect and the execution period of the timer effect overlap (the timer effect occurs during the execution of the counting display effect). Therefore, the operation of adding and updating the playback time of the music and the operation of subtracting and updating the remaining time until the cut-in image is displayed are performed in parallel at the same time. As a result, the production may be complicated and the player may be confused. In the present embodiment, when the count display effect is executed, the execution ratio of the timer effect is lower than that when the count display effect is not executed, so that both effects can be achieved while diversifying the effects. By limiting the simultaneous execution, the complexity of the production is reduced.

(Specific example of counting display production corresponding to music reach production)
Next, a specific example of the counting display effect corresponding to the music reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-14 and 13-15. 13-14 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the count display effect corresponding to the music reach effect is executed and the timer effect is not executed, and FIG. 13-15 corresponds to the music reach effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 when the count display effect is executed and the timer effect is not executed.

In the example shown below, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stage of the music reach effect as the third stage based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, and sets the numerical value of the music playback time correspondingly to the third stage. It is determined that the count display effect for updating up to 60 is executed, while the cut-in notice effect and the timer effect are not executed.

First, FIG. 13-15 (1) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is executing the variation display of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right (variation display started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 13-14). It shows. At this time, although nothing is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a background image related to the background image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 may be displayed. For example, when a part of a character is displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the other part of the character is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, so that the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 are displayed. The entire character is displayed in. The first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are located at origin positions that overlap the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front-rear direction.

At this time, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 arranged behind the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 is in a reduced state, but the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are transparent. By having the property, it is possible to visually recognize the screen of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (2), the effect control CPU 120 sets the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 to "7" at the timing when the reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established. The decorative symbol of "" is stopped and displayed to bring it into a reach state, and the characters "reach !!" are displayed on the upper part of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (timing of T2 in FIGS. 13-14).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the music reach effect in response to the establishment of the reach state. FIG. 13-15 (3) shows a state in which the first stage of the music reach effect (music reach effect started at the timing of T3 in FIG. 13-14) is being executed. The effect control CPU 120 starts playing the music at the start timing of the music reach effect, and displays the character A, the note 35TM700, and the characters "Music Reach START !!" on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 as the first stage effect. Display it. With the start of the music reach production, music is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

The effect control CPU 120 starts the count display effect at the timing when the music reproduction is started, and displays "1" as the initial value of the count display effect on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Then, during music reproduction, the numerical value displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is incremented by 1 every second. Here, at the timing when the music reach production is started, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are located in front of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 (on the player side), so that the player can use the sub liquid crystal. It is difficult to visually recognize the music playback time displayed on the display 35TM300.

During the period of the first stage of music reach production (the period of music playback time of 1 to 15 seconds), the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are located in front of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 (on the player side). Since the state of being in the state continues, the player remains in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the music reproduction time displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300. However, although the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 arranged behind the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 is in a reduced state, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are transparent. It is possible to visually recognize the music reproduction time displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300. In the example shown in FIG. 13-15 (3), since it is possible to visually recognize that the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is "8", the player can see the music playback time (FIG. 13-14). It is possible to know that the elapsed time from the timing of T3 shown) is 8 seconds.

Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 16 seconds (the timing of T4A shown in FIGS. 13-14), the effect control CPU 120 performs the second stage of the music reach effect as shown in FIG. 13-15 (4). Move to. In the second stage, the music is continuously reproduced (the portion of the music after 16 seconds is reproduced), and the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 displays the characters A and B, and the notes 35TM700 and the notes 35TM710. That is, with the transition from the first stage to the second stage, the types of characters and the types of notes to be displayed are increased while playing the continuation of the same music.

Further, as the music reach effect reaches the second stage, the effect control CPU 120 moves both the decorative bodies of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the origin position to the effect position at the same time. (T4A to T4B shown in FIGS. 13-14). That is, the character portion of "FEV" and the character portion of "ER!" Are not separated, but are integrally displaced from the origin position to the effect position. As a result, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved, and the visibility of the counting display effect is improved. On the other hand, since both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 were displaced to the production position where they overlap the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in the front-rear direction, the visibility of the lower part of the screen of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 deteriorated. It is in a state.

During the second stage of the music reach production (the period in which the music playback time is 16 to 30 seconds), the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 do not exist in front of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and the counting display production is performed. The visibility of the is improved as compared with the case of the first stage. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the numerical value (music playback time) of the counting display effect, and can grasp the music playback time more clearly. In the example shown in FIG. 13-15 (4), "16" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 when the music reproduction time reaches 16 seconds. The numerical value of the count display effect is updated according to the progress of the second stage (16 to 30 seconds) of the music effect.

Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 31 seconds (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 13-14), the effect control CPU 120 performs the third stage of the music reach effect as shown in FIG. 13-15 (5). Move to. In the third stage, the music is continuously played (the part after 31 seconds of the music is played), and the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is displayed with the characters A, B, and C, and the notes 35TM700 and the notes 35TM710. And the note 35TM720 is displayed. That is, with the transition from the second stage to the third stage, the types of characters and the types of notes to be displayed are increased while playing the continuation of the same music.

During the period when the music reach production is in the third stage (the period in which the music playback time is 31 to 60 seconds), the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 do not exist in front of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and the counting display production is performed. The visibility of the is improved as compared with the case of the first stage. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the numerical value (music playback time) of the counting display effect, and can grasp the music playback time more clearly. In the example shown in FIG. 13-15 (5), "31" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 when the music reproduction time reaches 31 seconds. The numerical value of the count display effect is updated according to the progress of the third stage (31 to 60 seconds) of the music effect.

Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 60 seconds (the timing of T6 shown in FIGS. 13-14), the music is reproduced until the end, and the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped when the reproduction of the music is completed. In the example shown in FIG. 13-15 (6), the effect control CPU 120 is a combination of a symbol display area 5L, a symbol display area 5C, and a decorative symbol whose display result is a big hit in the symbol display area 5R (in this example, "777") is stopped and displayed. In addition, the occurrence of a big hit is notified by displaying the characters "Big hit !!" on the upper part of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays "60" as the final value of the count display effect (final playback time of the music in the music reach effect) on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

The effect control CPU 120 simultaneously moves both the decorative bodies of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the effect position to the origin position at the end of the music reach effect and the count display effect (FIG. 13-). T7A to T7B shown in 18. As a result, while the final value of the counting display effect (“60” in this example) is still displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the visibility of the final value is displayed on the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel. It will be reduced by 35TM420. After that, the effect control CPU 120 erases the final value (“60” in this example) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

As shown above, during the period in which the effect control CPU 120 is executing the first stage (1 second to 15 seconds) of the music reach effect, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are sub-liquid crystals. Since it is located at the origin position where it overlaps with the display 35TM300 in the front-rear direction, the visibility of the counting display effect (the period in which the numerical value is 1 to 15) displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is deteriorated. On the other hand, during the period in which the effect control CPU 120 is executing the second stage (16 seconds to 30 seconds) and the third stage (31 seconds to 60 seconds) of the music reach effect, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second The logo panel 35TM420 is in an effect position that does not overlap the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front-rear direction in front view, and the visibility of the counting display effect (period of numerical values 16 to 60) displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved. doing.

In this way, it is possible to switch the visibility of the counting display effect by improving or lowering the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 with the displacement of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420. There is. As a result, it is possible to easily change only the visibility of the counting display effect executed by the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 while performing a constant addition operation according to the music reproduction time.

When the music reach effect shifts from the first stage to the second stage, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 move to the effect position to improve the visibility of the counting display effect on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Since it is improved, it is emphasized that the music reach production has shifted from the first stage to the second stage, that is, it has entered a period in which the expectation of a big hit is higher, and the interest can be improved.

On the other hand, if the music reach effect is in the first stage, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are in the effect position, and the visibility of the counting display effect on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved. Then, even though the jackpot expectation is still low, the numerical value (1 to 15) of the counting display effect will be clearly recognized by the player. As a result, the interest of the music reach production and the counting display production is reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the music reach production ends in the first stage, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are used during the period in which the first stage of the music reach production is executed. By setting the position at the origin position, the visibility of the counting display effect on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is lowered, and the deterioration of the interest is suppressed.

In the present embodiment, when the music reach effect is executed, the count display effect is executed at a rate of 100%, but the present invention is not limited to such a form and is finally executed in the music reach effect. Depending on the number, the execution ratio of the count display effect may be different. For example, when the music reach effect ends in the first stage, the count display effect is not executed at a rate of 100%, and when the music reach effect is executed up to the second stage or the third stage, 100%. The count display effect may be executed at the rate of. Here, when the music reach effect is executed up to the second stage or the third stage, the count display effect is started at the timing when the music reach shifts to the second stage (that is, addition from the initial value "16"). Perform the update operation). With such a configuration, during the period when the second stage or the third stage of the music reach effect is executed, the music reproduction displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is performed by executing the count display effect. It is possible to visually recognize the time (16 to), but during the period when the first stage of the music reach effect is being executed, the music playback time is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 because the count display effect is not executed. Because it is not done, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-17 (G) described later, when the music reach effect is executed up to the second stage, the corresponding counting display effect starts from the first stage (initial value “1”). It may be started from the second stage (initial value "16"). Further, when the music reach effect is executed up to the third stage, the corresponding count display effect is started from the first stage (initial value "1") and the second stage (initial value "16"). There may be a case where it is started from the third stage (initial value "31") and a case where it is started from the third stage (initial value "31"). With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the counting display effect is started and improve the interest.

As described above, as the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, a super reach without a pseudo-continuous effect, a super reach with one pseudo-continuous effect, and a super reach with two pseudo-continuous effects are provided. You may do so. Then, the jackpot expectation in this case should be in the relationship of super reach (no pseudo-ream) <super reach (pseudo-ream 1 time) <super reach (pseudo-ream 2 times). In the case of such an effect configuration, when the pseudo-ream effect is executed (when the super reach of one pseudo-ream or two pseudo-ream is selected), the pseudo-ream effect is not executed (pseudo-ream). It is preferable that the music reach effect and the count display effect are executed up to the second stage or the third stage at a higher rate than when the super reach without is selected).

In addition, when the pseudo-ream effect is executed a plurality of times (when the super reach of two pseudo-reams is selected), when the pseudo-ream effect is executed only once (the super reach of one pseudo-ream is selected). The rate at which the music reach effect and the count display effect are executed up to the second stage or the third stage may be higher than when the music reach effect and the count display effect are performed. With such an effect configuration, the player is interested in whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect is executed and whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect is executed a plurality of times, and the interest is improved. be able to.

(Another example of the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation)
FIG. 13-16 is a flowchart showing another example of the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation. In this variation start effect determination process, unlike the process shown in FIGS. 13-12, when the music reach effect is executed, the timing for starting the count display effect according to the determined final number of stages of the music reach effect. It is possible to make different.

Specifically, in the process shown in FIG. 13-12, when the music reach effect is executed, the count display effect is always executed from the first stage of the music reach effect (the initial value of the count display effect is Although it was always set to "1"), in the process shown in FIGS. 13-16, when the music reach effect is executed and the count display effect is started from the second stage (sub liquid crystal display). When the initial value displayed on the 35TM300 is "16") and the counting display effect is started from the third stage (when the initial value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is "31") (See FIG. 13-17 (G)).

Further, the execution ratios of the cut-in notice effect and the timer effect are set to be higher when the count display effect is executed than when the count display effect is not executed (FIG. 13-17 (H). )). Therefore, the ratio of the countdown operation until the start of the cut-in notice effect in the timer effect and the update operation of the music reproduction time in the count display effect are executed in parallel at a high rate.

The effect control CPU 120 executes this variation start effect determination process in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a set of commands accompanying the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the display result specification command displays the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol. And the effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) to be executed based on the variation pattern specification command, and the variation of the decorative pattern based on the specified variation pattern. The effect to be executed during the display is determined by the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation shown in FIGS. 13-16.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the music reach effect is executed and the final stage based on the final stage determination table of the music reach effect (see FIGS. 13-13 (C) and 13 (D)) (step S35TM3010). ).

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the music reach effect (YES in step S35TM3020), the execution start stage determination table of the count display effect (FIG. 13-17) determines whether or not the count display effect is executed. (See (G))) based on (step S35TM2030). On the other hand, when it is decided not to execute the music reach effect (NO in step S35TM3020), it is decided not to execute the count display effect (step S35TM3040).

FIG. 13-17 (G) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the execution start stage determination table of the count display effect, and is the execution start stage of the count display effect for each of the final stages of the determined music reach effect. Judgment values are assigned to determine. When the final stage of the music reach effect is the first stage, the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the count display effect from the first stage of the music reach effect at a rate of 1% (sub liquid crystal display). It is decided to display "1" as an initial value on the 35TM300), and it is decided not to execute the counting display effect at a rate of 99%.

If the final stage of the music reach effect is the second stage, it is decided to execute the count display effect from the first stage of the music reach effect at a rate of 3% (initial value for the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300). It was decided to display "1" as the initial value), and it was decided to execute the counting display effect from the second stage of the music reach effect at a rate of 25% ("16" was set as the initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Decided to display), and decided not to execute the counting display effect at a rate of 72%.

If the final stage of the music reach effect is the third stage, it is decided to execute the count display effect from the first stage of the music reach effect at a rate of 5% (initial value for the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300). It was decided to display "1" as the initial value), and it was decided to execute the counting display effect from the second stage of the music reach effect at a rate of 30% ("16" was set as the initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Decided to display), decided to execute the counting display effect from the third stage of the music reach effect at a rate of 60% (decided to display "31" as the initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. However, it is decided not to execute the counting display effect at a rate of 5%.

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the counting display effect is started from the first stage of the music reach effect, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 displays "1" as an initial value, and then the music reach effect is performed. The addition operation according to the music playback time is continued up to the final value according to the final stage (“15” in the first stage, “30” in the second stage, “60” in the third stage). Will be. Further, when it is decided that the counting display effect is started from the second stage of the music reach effect, "16" is displayed as an initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and then according to the final stage of the music reach effect. The addition operation according to the music reproduction time is continued until the final value (“30” in the second stage, “60” in the third stage). Further, when it is decided that the counting display effect is started from the third stage of the music reach effect, "31" is displayed as an initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and then according to the final stage of the music reach effect. The addition operation according to the music reproduction time is continued until the final value (“60” in the third stage).

Here, as shown in FIG. 13-17 (G), when the final stage of the music reach effect is the second stage, the count display effect is not executed at a rate of 72%, and (i) at a rate of 3%. The count display effect is executed from the first stage of the music reach effect, and (ii) the count display effect is executed from the second stage of the music reach effect at a rate of 25%. That is, the ratio of the count display effect being executed in the first stage of the music reach effect is 3% of (i), whereas the ratio of the count display effect being executed in the second stage of the music reach effect. Is 28% of (i) + (ii). Further, when the final stage of the music reach effect is the third stage, the count display effect is not executed at a rate of 5%, and the count display effect is executed from the first stage of the music reach effect at a rate of (iii) 5%. Then, the count display effect is executed from the second stage of the music reach effect at a rate of (iV) 30%, and the count display effect is executed from the third stage of the music reach effect at a rate of (V) 60%. That is, the ratio of the count display effect being executed in the first stage of the music reach effect is 5% of (iii), whereas the ratio of the count display effect being executed in the second stage of the music reach effect. Is 35% of (iii) + (iV), and the ratio of the count display effect being executed in the third stage of the music reach effect is 95% of (iii) + (iV) + (V).

According to the ratio shown in FIG. 13-17 (G), the ratio of executing the count display effect when the music reach effect is the first stage is the lowest, and the count display is performed when the music reach effect is the second stage. The ratio of executing the effect is the next lowest, and the ratio of executing the count display effect is the highest when the music reach effect is in the third stage.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect based on the execution ratio determination table of the cut-in notice effect (see FIG. 13-17 (H)) (step S35TM3050).

FIG. 13-17 (H) is a table showing the execution ratio of the cut-in notice effect, and a determination value for determining whether or not the cut-in notice effect is executed is assigned according to whether or not the count display effect is executed. There is. When the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the count display effect, it decides not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 95% but to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 5%. Further, when the count display effect is executed, it is decided not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 40%, but to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 60%.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the cut-in notice effect (YES in step S35TM3060), the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect is set to the effect mode determination table of the cut-in notice effect (FIG. 13). It is determined based on (see -13 (F)) (step S35TM3070), it is determined to execute the timer effect (step S35TM3080), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is decided not to execute the cut-in notice effect (NO in step S35TM3060), the process ends as it is.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-13 (C) and 13-13 (D), the relationship between the final stage of the music reach production and the jackpot expectation is "first stage" <"second stage" <" Since it is the "third stage", the player expects that the music reproduction time is as long as possible, that is, the numerical value of the music reproduction time displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is as long as possible. Further, as shown in FIG. 13-17 (G), the rate at which the counting display effect is executed is higher in the case where the music reach effect is in the second stage than in the case where the music reach effect is in the first stage. It is higher, and the ratio of the count display effect being executed is higher in the case where the music reach effect is in the third stage than in the case where the music reach effect is in the second stage. Therefore, the player is also interested in the timing at which the counting display effect is executed.

In this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect, the timer effect is executed at a rate of 100%, so that the execution rate of the timer effect matches the execution rate of the cut-in notice effect. .. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-17 (H), the rate at which the cut-in notice effect is executed is higher when the count display effect is executed than when the count display effect is not executed. .. That is, when the count display effect is executed, the ratio of the timer effect being executed is higher than when the count display effect is not executed. In this way, by increasing the execution ratio of the timer effect when the count display effect is being executed, the count display effect and the timer effect can be related to each other, and the interest can be improved.

(Variation example of counting display effect and timer effect)
Next, modifications of the counting display effect and the timer effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-18, 13-19, and 13-20. 13-18 is a time chart when the counting display effect corresponding to the music reach effect is executed and the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect is executed. FIGS. 13-19 and 13-20 are shown in FIGS. 13-19 and 13-20. An example of the effect image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 when the count display effect corresponding to the music reach effect is executed and the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect is executed is shown. It is explanatory drawing.

In the example shown below, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stage of the music reach effect as the third stage based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, and counts and displays the effect in the first stage of the music reach effect. It was decided to execute the count display effect in the second and third stages of the music reach effect without executing, and the cut-in notice effect and timer effect of the first aspect during the execution of the third stage of the music reach effect. Suppose you decide to do.

First, FIG. 13-19 (1) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is executing the variation display of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right (variation display started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 13-18). It shows. At this time, although nothing is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a background image related to the background image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 may be displayed. For example, when a part of a character is displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the other part of the character is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, so that the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 are displayed. The entire character is displayed in. The first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are located at origin positions that overlap the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front-rear direction.

At this time, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 arranged behind the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 is in a reduced state, but the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are transparent. By having the property, it is possible to visually recognize the screen of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. However, at this point in time, since the counting display effect has not yet been executed, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is in a state where no numerical value is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (2), the effect control CPU 120 sets "7" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 at the timing when the reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established. The decorative symbol of "" is stopped and displayed to bring it into a reach state, and the characters "reach !!" are displayed on the upper part of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (timing of T2 in FIG. 13-18).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the music reach effect in response to the establishment of the reach state. FIG. 13-19 (3) shows a state in which the first stage of the music reach effect (music reach effect started at the timing of T3 in FIG. 13-18) is being executed. The effect control CPU 120 starts playing the music at the start timing of the music reach effect, and displays the character A, the note 35TM700, and the characters "Music Reach START !!" on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 as the first stage effect. Display it. With the start of the music reach production, music is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Since the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the count display effect on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 during the period (T3 to T4A in FIGS. 13-18) when the first stage of the music reach effect is executed, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 does not execute the count display effect during this period. The music playback time is not displayed on the display 35TM300, and the update operation is not performed.

Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 16 seconds (the timing of T4A shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 performs the second stage of the music reach effect as shown in FIG. 13-19 (4). Move to. In the second stage, the music is continuously reproduced (the portion of the music after 16 seconds is reproduced), and the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 displays the characters A and B, and the notes 35TM700 and the notes 35TM710. That is, with the transition from the first stage to the second stage, the types of characters and the types of notes to be displayed are increased while playing the continuation of the same music.

The effect control CPU 120 starts the count display effect at the timing when the music reach effect is in the second stage (the timing when the 16-second transition part of the music is reproduced), and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 starts the count display effect. "16" is displayed as the initial value of. Then, during music reproduction, the numerical value displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 is incremented by 1 every second. Here, as will be described later, at the timing when the second stage of the music reach production is started, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are located in front of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 (on the player side). Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the music reproduction time displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300.

Further, as the music reach effect reaches the second stage, the effect control CPU 120 moves both the decorative bodies of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the origin position to the effect position at the same time. (T4A to T4B shown in FIGS. 13-18). That is, the character portion of "FEV" and the character portion of "ER!" Are not separated, but are integrally displaced from the origin position to the effect position. As a result, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved, and the visibility of the counting display effect is improved. On the other hand, since both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 were displaced to the production position where they overlap the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in the front-rear direction, the visibility of the lower part of the screen of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 deteriorated. It is in a state.

Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 31 seconds (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 performs the third stage of the music reach effect as shown in FIG. 13-19 (5). Move to. In the third stage, the music is continuously played (the part after 31 seconds of the music is played), and the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is displayed with the characters A, B, and C, and the notes 35TM700 and the notes 35TM710. And the note 35TM720 is displayed. That is, with the transition from the second stage to the third stage, the types of characters and the types of notes to be displayed are increased while playing the continuation of the same music.

During the period when the music reach production is in the third stage (the period in which the music playback time is 31 to 60 seconds), the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 do not exist in front of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and the counting display production is performed. The visibility of the is improved as compared with the case of the first stage. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the numerical value (music playback time) of the counting display effect, and can grasp the music playback time more clearly. In the example shown in FIG. 13-19 (5), "31" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 when the music reproduction time reaches 31 seconds. The numerical value of the count display effect is updated according to the progress of the third stage (31 to 60 seconds) of the music effect.

Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 42 seconds (the timing of T6 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in notice effect as shown in FIG. 13-19 (6). Based on the remaining time (number of seconds) up to 3 seconds, the timer effect is executed, and the timer image 35TM620 (in this example, the initial value "3") is displayed in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. (Numerical image of) is displayed. At this time, "42" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 as the numerical value of the counting display effect when the music reproduction time reaches 42 seconds.

Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 43 seconds (the timing of T7 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in notice effect as shown in FIG. 13-20 (7). The timer image 35TM620 (in this example, "2") is updated in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 by continuing the timer effect based on the remaining time (seconds) until the time is 2 seconds. Image) is displayed. At this time, "43" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 as the numerical value of the counting display effect when the music reproduction time reaches 43 seconds.

Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 44 seconds (the timing of T8 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in notice effect as shown in FIG. 13-20 (8). The timer image 35TM620 (in this example, the numerical value of "1") is updated in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 by continuing the timer effect based on the remaining time (seconds) until the time is 1 second. Image) is displayed. At this time, "44" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 as the numerical value of the counting display effect when the music reproduction time reaches 44 seconds.

Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 45 seconds (the timing of T9 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in notice effect as shown in FIG. 13-20 (9). Based on the fact that the remaining time (seconds) is 0 seconds, the timer image 35TM620 (in this example, the final value "" is updated in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 by continuing the timer effect. A numerical image of "0") is displayed. At this time, "45" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 as the numerical value of the counting display effect when the music reproduction time reaches 45 seconds.

The effect control CPU 120 adjusts to the execution timing of the cut-in advance notice effect (the timing at which the numerical value of the timer image in the lower left region of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is updated from "1" to "0"). Is executed, and the cut-in image 35TM800 (in this example, the cut-in image "CHANGE" of the first aspect) of the display mode having a higher priority than the effect image of the music reach effect is displayed on the upper part of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. ..

Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 46 seconds (the timing of T10 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 ends the timer effect according to the execution of the cut-in notice effect, and main The display of the timer image 35TM620 (in this example, the numerical image of "0" which is the final value) displayed in the lower left area of the liquid crystal display 35TM200 is terminated. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the cut-in notice effect, and the cut-in image 35TM800 (a cut-in image 35TM800 in a display mode having a higher priority than the effect image of the music reach effect is placed on the upper part of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 In this example, the cut-in image "CHANGE") of the first aspect is continuously displayed. As a numerical value of the counting display effect, "46" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 according to the music reproduction time reaching 46 seconds.

Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 47 seconds (the timing of T11 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 continues the cut-in notice effect as shown in FIG. 13-20 (10). The cut-in image 35TM800 (in this example, the cut-in image "CHANGE" of the first aspect) of the display mode having a higher priority than the effect image of the music reach effect is displayed on the upper part of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. It is displayed continuously. At this time, "47" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 as the numerical value of the counting display effect when the music reproduction time reaches 47 seconds.

Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 48 seconds (the timing of T12 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 ends the cut-in notice effect as shown in FIG. 13-20 (11). , Display of the cut-in image 35TM800 (in this example, the cut-in image "CHANGE" of the first aspect) displayed on the upper part of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in a display mode having a higher priority than the effect image of the music reach effect. To finish. As a result, the characters A, B, and C displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, as well as the note 35TM700, the note 35TM710, and the note 35TM720 can be visually recognized again. At this time, "48" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 as the numerical value of the counting display effect when the music reproduction time reaches 48 seconds.

Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 60 seconds (the timing of T13 shown in FIGS. 13-18), the music is reproduced until the end, and the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped when the reproduction of the music is completed. In the example shown in FIG. 13-20 (12), the effect control CPU 120 is a combination of a symbol display area 5L, a symbol display area 5C, and a decorative symbol whose display result is a big hit in the symbol display area 5R (in this example, "777") is stopped and displayed. In addition, the occurrence of a big hit is notified by displaying the characters "Big hit !!" on the upper part of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays "60" as the final value of the count display effect (final playback time of the music in the music reach effect) on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

The effect control CPU 120 simultaneously moves both the decorative bodies of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the effect position to the origin position at the end of the music reach effect and the count display effect (FIG. 13-). T14A to T14B shown in 18. As a result, while the final value of the counting display effect (“60” in this example) is still displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the visibility of the final value is displayed on the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel. It will be reduced by 35TM420. After that, the effect control CPU 120 erases the final value (“60” in this example) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

The effect control CPU 120 displaces the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 to the origin position during the period during which the first stage of the music reach effect is being executed, and executes the second stage of the music reach effect. During this period, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displaced to the effect position. Further, the effect control CPU 120 lowers the execution ratio of the count display effect during the period during which the first stage of the music reach effect is executed, while the period during which the second stage of the music reach effect is executed is The execution rate of the count display effect is higher than the period during which the first stage of the music reach effect is executed.

Therefore, during the period during which the second stage of the music reach effect is being executed, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved, and the ratio of the effect information of the counting display effect displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is also improved. doing. Therefore, it is emphasized that the music reach production has shifted to the second stage, and the interest can be improved. On the other hand, regardless of whether or not the music reach production ends in the first stage, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is lowered during the period when the first stage of the music reach production is executed, and the sub The proportion of the effect information of the counting display effect displayed on the liquid crystal display 35TM300 is also decreasing. Therefore, it is not emphasized that it is the first stage (1 second to 15 seconds) in which the expectation of big hit is low although the counting display effect is executed, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the interest.

(1) In the above embodiment, an example in which the count display effect and the timer effect are executed as the effects related to the display result of the variable display during execution is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. A count display effect or a timer effect may be executed as a look-ahead notice effect related to the display result of the non-variable display. Specifically, a special background image different from the normal background image is displayed over a plurality of times until the variation display (target variation) based on the start prize is executed based on the judgment result at the time of the start prize. It may be possible to execute a zone effect that displays. Then, the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 may add and update the execution period of the zone effect (the number of fluctuations in the special background image) to execute the count display effect. In addition, based on the determination result at the time of starting prize, the timer effect of subtracting and updating the remaining time until the fluctuation display (target fluctuation) based on the starting prize is executed is executed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Is also good. As in these examples, the counting display effect and the timer effect may be executed over a plurality of fluctuations.

(2) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the initial number of seconds of the timer effect is always "3" (the timer effect is started 3 seconds before the cut-in image 35TM800 is displayed). It is also possible to select a plurality of initial seconds at different ratios depending on the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect or the display result. For example, when the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect is the first mode, the ratio of "3" as the initial value is 80% and the ratio of "5" as the initial value is 20% in the timer effect. When the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect is the second mode, the ratio of "3" as the initial value is 20% and the ratio of "5" as the initial value is 80% in the timer effect. You may. In addition, when the display result is out of order, the ratio of "3" as the initial value is 80% and the ratio of "5" as the initial value is 20% in the timer effect, but when the display result is a big hit. In the timer effect, the ratio of "3" as the initial value may be 20%, and the ratio of "5" as the initial value may be 80%.

(3) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the music reach effect is always executed when the count display effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the count display effect is executed. The music reach effect may not be executed in some cases. Further, in the above embodiment, the timer effect is always executed when the cut-in notice effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the cut-in notice effect is executed. The timer effect may not be executed. Further, in the above embodiment, the cut-in notice effect is always executed when the timer effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cut-in is performed even when the timer effect is executed. The advance notice effect may not be executed.

(4) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the effect control CPU 120 displays the numerical value of the count display effect on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 with an image imitating a 7-segment display. Not limited to this, even if an actual 7-segment display is provided in place of the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 and the light emission of the 7-segment display is controlled, the numerical value of the counting display effect is displayed (light-emitting). good.

(5) In the above embodiment, the counting display effect is executed by the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, while the timer effect is executed by the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. On the contrary, the counting display is performed. The effect may be executed by the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, while the timer effect may be executed by the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Further, both the counting display effect and the timer effect may be executed by the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, and both the counting display effect and the timer effect may be executed by the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

(6) In the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the effect control CPU 120 has a remaining number of fluctuations that can be controlled in a time-saving state (time-saving number) and a remaining number of fluctuations that can be controlled in a probable change state (ST (special time) number). , The number of rounds in the jackpot game state can be displayed. During the period when the information (numerical value) related to the game state is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the counting display effect is executed more than the period when the information (numerical value) related to the game state is not displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. It is also possible to make the ratio to be low. According to such a configuration, the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 limits the simultaneous display of the numerical value of the counting display effect and the information (numerical value) regarding the game state, and gives priority to the latter, which is more important for the player. Can be notified.

(7) In the above embodiment, in the timer effect, the remaining time until the cut-in notice effect is executed is subtracted and updated, but the remaining time until another effect is executed is subtracted and updated. For example, the remaining time until the movable accessory such as the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 may be operated may be subtracted and updated. Further, in the above embodiment, in the counting display effect, an example of adding and updating the playback time of the music, which is a numerical value related to the execution status of the effect, is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the first logo panel 35TM410 and The elapsed time from the movement of the movable accessory such as the second logo panel 35TM420 to the effect position may be added and updated.

(8) In the above embodiment, as an effect corresponding to the execution of the suggestion effect suggesting that the jackpot game state is controlled, a timer effect that performs a countdown operation that gradually reduces the displayed numerical value is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as an effect corresponding to the execution of the suggestion effect, an update effect that performs an update operation for updating the display mode of the display body (object displayed on the screen) may be executed. Specifically, the addition operation of gradually expanding the display area of the display body (or gradually increasing the number of display bodies), or the stepwise reduction of the display area of the display body (or of the display body). It is also possible to execute an update effect that performs a subtraction operation (the number is gradually reduced).

As an example, an update effect that performs an addition operation that gradually expands the display area of the meter displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 or the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 may be executed, and the display area of the meter is maximized. When the mode is 100%, the display area of the meter is gradually increased and updated from 0% (initial value) to 10%, 20%, ..., And when it reaches 100%, a suggestion effect is produced. Is executed, and if the update is stopped before reaching 100% (for example, 80%), the suggestion effect may not be executed (the execution rate of the suggestion effect is low).

(9) Further, when a plurality of types of suggestion effects are provided, an update effect corresponding to each type of suggestion effect may be executed. For example, as the first suggestion effect, a first cut-in notice effect that can be executed immediately after the reach state is established is provided, and as a second suggestion effect, a second cut-in notice effect that can be executed immediately before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped is provided. When is provided, the first update effect is executed to update the numerical value or meter indicating the possibility (expectation degree) that the first cut-in notice effect is executed, and the second cut-in notice effect is executed. It is also possible to execute the second update effect that performs the operation of updating the numerical value or the meter indicating the possibility (expectation degree).

In this case, the first update effect and the second update effect may be executed in parallel at the same time. For example, the possibility (expectation) shown by the first update effect reaches 100% immediately after the reach state is established (while, at this point, the possibility (expectation) shown by the second update effect is still 20%. In response to this, the first cut-in notice effect is executed, and the first update effect ends according to the execution of the first cut-in notice effect (the displayed numerical value or meter is erased). After that, the possibility (expectation) indicated by the second update effect reaches 100% at the timing immediately before the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and the second cut-in notice effect is executed in response to this, and the second cut is performed. The second update effect may be terminated (the displayed numerical value or meter is erased) according to the execution of the in-notice effect.

(10) In the above embodiment, the numerical value (seconds) or the display color of the display body (meter) related to the count display effect related to the execution status of the suggestive effect, or the numerical value related to the update effect corresponding to the execution of the suggestive effect ( The display color of the display body (meter) may be determined at a different ratio depending on the display result. For example, when the display result is a big hit, the display color is determined to be red at a higher rate than when the display result is a big hit, and when the display result is a big hit, it is higher than when the display result is a big hit. The display color may be determined to be blue in proportion. In addition, when the display result is a big hit, a plurality of display bodies to be displayed are determined at a higher rate than when the display result is out of order (the types of counting display effect and update effect to be executed are determined to be multiple types. ), When the display result is out of order, one display body is determined to be displayed at a higher rate than when the display result is a big hit (the number of types of counting display effect and update effect to be executed is one type. It may be decided).

(11) In the above embodiment, an example of displaying the playback time (number of seconds of playback) of the music is shown as an production related to the execution status of the music reach production, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the entire music The ratio of the playback period up to the present time (the period from the start of the music to the present time) to the playback period (the period from the beginning to the end of the music) may be displayed. For example, when the playback period of the entire music is 60 seconds, the playback ratio is gradually updated such as 10%, 20%, ..., Every time the playback time of the music elapses for 6 seconds. The playback ratio may reach 100% at the timing when the music is played to the end (the timing when 60 seconds have passed from the start of playback of the music). The reproduction time (number of reproduction seconds) or reproduction ratio of the music may be displayed by a display body other than the numerical value (for example, the meter described above).

(12) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-17 (G), an example in which the counting display effect is continued until the final stage of the determined music reach effect is completed is shown. The count display effect may be terminated before the final stage of the determined music reach effect is completed. For example, when the final stage of the determined music reach effect is the second stage and the count display effect is started from the first stage (initial value 1), the count display effect is ended only in the first stage (final). It may end with a value of 15). Further, when the final stage of the determined music reach effect is the third stage and the count display effect is started from the first stage (initial value 1), the count display effect is ended only in the first stage (final). It may be terminated at a value of 15), or the counting display effect may be terminated at the second stage (finished at a final value of 30). Further, when the final stage of the predetermined music reach effect is the third stage and the count display effect is started from the second stage (initial value 16), the count display effect is ended only in the second stage (). It may end at the final value of 30). Even in such a form, the execution rate of the counting display effect is highest when the music reach effect is in the third stage, second highest when it is in the second stage, and in the first stage. Try to be the lowest at some point.

(Example of slot machine)
In the above embodiment, as a gaming machine capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting that it is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, and executing a count display effect and a timer effect related to the execution status of the suggestion effect. Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been illustrated, the gaming machine having such an effect configuration is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be a slot machine.

Further, as described above, the slot machine also includes a main liquid crystal display as a first image display device and a sub liquid crystal display as a second image display device, and also has light transmission as a movable body. A first logo panel and a second logo panel, which are decorative bodies having the above, may be provided.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the music reach effect and the cut-in notice effect can be executed as the suggestion effect, but in the slot machine, the reel lock effect may be executed as the suggestion effect. The reel lock effect is that when the start lever is operated, the reel is not driven by normal control (for example, a method of rotating forward), but is driven by special control (for example, a method of rotating backward and / or a method of vibrating). It is a production to make you. For example, the reel lock effect is composed of three stages from the first stage to the third stage. In the first stage of the reel lock effect, the reel is vibrated at a low speed, and in the second stage of the reel lock effect, After the first stage, the reel is vibrated at a medium speed, and in the third stage of the reel lock effect, the reel is vibrated at a high speed after the first and second stages.

In the slot machine having such an effect configuration, the sub control unit may execute the count display effect on the sub liquid crystal display during the period during which the reel lock effect is being executed. Here, during the period when the sub control unit is executing the first stage of the reel lock effect, the first logo panel and the second logo panel are at the origin position where they overlap the sub liquid crystal display in front and back in front view. The visibility of the counting display effect on the sub liquid crystal display is reduced. On the other hand, during the period when the second and third stages of the reel lock effect are being executed, the first logo panel and the second logo panel are in the effect position where they do not overlap with the sub liquid crystal display in front and back. The visibility of the counting display effect on the sub liquid crystal display is improved. According to such a configuration, when the reel lock effect is the first stage, it is more difficult to recognize the count display effect than when the reel lock effect is the second stage and the third stage. It can be suppressed.

Further, in the slot machine having such an effect configuration, the sub control unit may make the ratio of the count display effect executed on the sub liquid crystal display different depending on the stage of the reel lock effect (for example,). Similar to the relationship between the stage of the music reach effect and the execution start timing of the count display effect shown in FIG. 13-17 (G)). Further, the execution ratio of the timer effect may be different depending on whether or not the count display effect is executed (for example, whether or not the count display effect is executed and the cut-in shown in FIG. 13-17 (H)). Similar to the relationship with the execution rate of the notice production). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by making the counting display effect and the timer effect in the slot machine related to each other.

[Explanation of feature 01TM]
Next, the gaming machine provided with the feature unit 01TM will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-1 to 14-24. The gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 has an image display device 5 provided near the center of the gaming area on the gaming board 2, but the image display device 5 is provided on the back side of the gaming board 2 and the game is played. As a configuration in which a movable body for production is provided at a position on the back side of the board 2 and on the front side of the image display device 5 (the position between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 in the front-rear direction). Is also good.

The movable body 01TM050 shown in FIG. 14-5 has a rotating disk provided so as to be rotatable and a motor for rotating the rotating disk, and is tilted in a laterally tilted position (FIG. 14-5 (8)). ) And the standing position (position shown in FIG. 14-5 (9)) standing vertically (the position shown in FIG. 14-5 (9)). The movable body 01TM050 configured in this way is located in the tilted position when the turntable is in the initial driving state. Then, the rotating disk is rotated clockwise in the front view by the motor, so that it rotates about 90 degrees clockwise in the front view around the rotation axis and operates to the upright position. Further, by driving the motor in the reverse direction, the motor operates from the upright position to the tilted position. An effect in which these operations are executed is referred to as a movable body operation effect.

When starting the variation display of the special symbol, the CPU 103 includes a display result specification command for specifying the display result, a variation pattern specification command for specifying the variation pattern, and a hold storage number subtraction specification command (first hold storage number subtraction designation). The command or the second hold storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

The effect control CPU 120 is a hold storage number subtraction designation command (first hold) that specifies that the hold storage number has been subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is started. Storage number subtraction specification command or second hold storage number subtraction specification command), display result specification command to specify the display result (big hit or miss, big hit type when it becomes a big hit), and the fluctuation time and effect contents of the special symbol (big hit or miss, big hit type) Based on the fact that a set of commands called a variation pattern specification command for specifying (reach, pseudo-ream, etc.) is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the variation display of the special symbol is executed, and the special symbol is executed. It is possible to specify the fluctuation time and the content of the production (reach, pseudo-ream, etc.). Further, the effect control CPU 120 receives a special symbol (first special symbol) from the game control microcomputer 100 when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the display result is confirmed. It is possible to identify that the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol) is completed and the display result is derived.

FIG. 14-1 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation. The effect control CPU 120 executes this variation start effect determination process in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-mentioned one set of commands accompanying the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the display result designation is the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol. An effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) to be executed based on a command and a variation pattern specification command is set, and a decorative pattern based on the specified variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed during the variation display is determined by the effect determination process at the start of the variation shown in FIG. 14-1.

In the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect and the effect mode based on the cut-in notice effect determination table (see FIG. 14-2 (F)). (Step S01TM1010). In the cut-in notice effect, a predetermined cut-in image is displayed with a higher priority than the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the decorative symbol and is superimposed so that the player can see it in the foreground). It is a notice effect to be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 14-2 (F), in the cut-in notice effect determination table, determination values for determining whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect and the effect mode are assigned according to the display result. If the display result is "off" (that is, if the display result specified by the display result specification command is "off"), it is decided not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 60%, and 30 It was decided to execute the cut-in notice effect of the first aspect (characters of "CHANGE ??") at a rate of%, and the cut-in notice of the second aspect (characters of "CHANGE ?!") at a rate of 10%. Decide to perform the production. On the other hand, if the display result is a "big hit" (that is, if the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "big hit"), it is decided not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 30%. However, it was decided to perform the cut-in notice effect of the first aspect (characters of "CHANGE ??") at a rate of 20%, and at a rate of 50% of the second aspect (characters of "CHANGE !!"). Decided to perform a cut-in notice effect.

In this way, when the cut-in notice effect is executed, the proportion of big hits is higher than when the cut-in notice effect is not executed, and the cut-in notice effect of the second aspect (characters of "CHANGE !!") is high. Is executed, the rate of big hits is higher than when the cut-in notice effect of the first aspect (characters of "CHANGE ??") is executed. Therefore, the player is interested in whether or not the cut-in notice effect is executed, and is also interested in the effect mode when the cut-in notice effect is executed.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the execution ratio and the execution mode of the cut-in notice effect are determined based on the display result specified by the display result designation command, but the present embodiment is not limited to such a form. The execution rate and execution mode of the cut-in notice effect may be determined based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. For example, the cut-in notice effect may be executed only when the variation pattern accompanied by reach is specified, or the cut-in notice effect may be executed only when the variation pattern accompanied by pseudo-ream is specified.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display based on the final display mode determination table of the active display (see FIG. 14-2 (A)) (step S01TM1020). Here, as described above, the active display is a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) being executed, and in this example, the active display of the quadrangle provided at the lower center of the effect screen. It can be displayed in the area. In addition, the hold display is a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) that has not been executed, and the hold display corresponding to the first hold storage is the lower left part of the effect screen (active when viewed from the player). It can be displayed in the first hold display area provided on the left side of the display area), and the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage is provided in the lower right part of the effect screen (on the right side of the active display area when viewed from the player). It can be displayed in the second hold display area. The final display mode of the active display is the final display mode of the active display during the variable display of the corresponding decorative symbol (special symbol).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14-4 and 14-5 described later, the active display and the hold display can be displayed when the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, and the variable pattern can be displayed. It can be displayed even when the corresponding super reach effect (for example, the battle effect described later) is being executed.

FIG. 14-2 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table of the active display. As shown in FIG. 14-2 (A), in this embodiment, one of a normal mode, a blue mode, and a red mode can be determined as the final display mode of the active display, and each of these modes can be determined. Judgment values are assigned to each aspect.

As shown in FIG. 14-2 (A), when the display result is "off" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "off"), it is based on the variation pattern specification command. The final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display of the decorative pattern executed is the normal mode (white circle display) at a rate of 90% and the blue mode (blue circle display) at a rate of 8%. It becomes a red aspect (red circle display) at a rate of 2%. In addition, when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "big hit"), the variation display of the decorative symbol executed based on the variation pattern specification command is displayed. The final display mode of the corresponding active display is a normal mode (white circle display) at a rate of 5%, a blue mode (blue circle display) at a rate of 30%, and a red mode (blue circle display) at a rate of 65%. It becomes a red circle display).

In this way, when the final display mode of the active display is the red mode, the jackpot ratio is the highest, and when the final display mode of the active display is the blue mode, the jackpot ratio is the second. When the final display mode of the active display is the normal mode, the rate of big hits is the lowest. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 14-2 (A), with respect to the display mode of the active display, the expectation that the big hit will be increased in the order of the normal mode <blue mode <red mode.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines a change pattern relating to the display mode of the active display based on the change pattern determination table of the active display (see FIGS. 14-2 (B) and 14-2 (C)) (step S01TM1030).

14-2 (B) and 14-2 (C) are explanatory views showing a specific example of the change pattern of the active display. As shown in FIGS. 14-2 (B) and 14-2 (C), in this embodiment, the display mode of the active display is changed from the display mode at the time of active shift to the final display mode (display mode determined in step S01TM1020). As a change pattern to be made, a plurality of change patterns are provided. Here, the display mode at the time of active shift is that the corresponding display (round object) corresponding to the variable display is the first hold display when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started (or started). This is the display mode of the active display (that is, the initial display mode of the active display) when the area or the second reserved display area is shifted to the active display area.

As the change pattern of the active display, the change pattern 101 in which the active display during the active shift is the normal mode, and then the active display does not change and the final display mode remains the normal mode, and the active display during the active shift are the normal modes. Then, the change pattern 102 in which the active display changes and the final display mode becomes the blue mode, and the active display at the time of active shift is the blue mode, and then the active display does not change and the final display mode remains the blue mode. The change pattern 103 is the normal mode, the active display during the active shift is the normal mode, and then the active display is changed so that the final display mode is the red mode, and the active display during the active shift is the blue mode. After that, the change pattern 105 in which the active display changes and the final display mode becomes the red mode, and the active display at the time of active shift is the red mode, and then the active display does not change and the final display mode remains the red mode. There is a change pattern 106.

In the present embodiment, the hold display is a white round object, and does not change to another mode (for example, a blue circle or a red circle) at the stage of hold display. Then, when the variable display corresponding to the hold display is started, the white round object displayed as the hold display in the hold display area is shifted to the active display area, and (1) the object is When the display mode does not change from the white circle (change patterns 101, 102, 104), (2) when the display mode of the object changes to the blue circle (change patterns 103, 105), and (3) the object. There are cases where the display mode of the object changes to a red circle (change pattern 106).

As shown in FIG. 14-2 (B), when the display result is "off" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "off"), the change pattern of the active display is , (1) When the final display mode of the active display determined in step S01TM1020 is the normal mode, the change pattern 101 is formed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the final display mode of the active display determined in step S01TM1020. Is a blue mode, a change pattern 102 is formed at a rate of 30%, a change pattern 103 is formed at a rate of 70%, and (3) a case where the final display mode of the active display determined in step S01TM1020 is a red mode. The change pattern 104 is 10%, the change pattern 105 is 20%, and the change pattern 106 is 70%.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14-2 (C), when the display result is a "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "big hit"), the start winning prize ( The change pattern of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the new first hold storage) is (1) 100% when the final display mode of the active display determined in step S01TM1020 is the normal mode. When the change pattern 101 is obtained, and (2) the final display mode of the active display determined in step S01TM1020 is the blue mode, the change pattern 102 is formed at a rate of 70%, and the change pattern 103 is formed at a rate of 30%. 3) When the final display mode of the active display determined in step S01TM1020 is the red mode, the change pattern 104 is formed at a rate of 80%, the change pattern 105 is formed at a rate of 15%, and the change pattern is changed at a rate of 5%. It becomes 106.

As shown in FIGS. 14-2 (B) and 14-2 (C), with respect to the change pattern of the active display, when the final display mode is the blue mode, it is expected that the change pattern 103 <change pattern 102 will be a big hit. When the degree is high and the final display mode is the red mode, the expectation that the jackpot will be a big hit is high in the order of change pattern 104 <change pattern 103 <change pattern 102. As described above, the change pattern in which the display mode changes from the active display during the active shift has a higher rate of becoming a big hit than the change pattern in which the display mode does not change from the active display during the active shift. Further, when the change width from the active shift is large (the normal mode and the final display mode are the red mode during the active shift), the change width from the active shift is small (the blue mode is the active shift). The rate of big hits is higher than (when the final display mode is the red mode).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the change suggestion effect is executed and the effect type when the change suggestion effect is executed based on the change suggestion effect determination table (see FIGS. 14-2 (D) and (E)). (Step S01TM1040), and the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation is completed. The change suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the display mode of the active display changes, and is an effect that has an effect on the active display. The change suggestion effect includes the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect shown below.

In the first change suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 14-5 (8) to (10) described later, the movable body 01TM050 is moved from the tilted position to the standing position while the active display 01TM001 is displayed in the center of the screen. Make it work. As a result, the active display 01TM001 displayed in the center of the screen and the movable body 01TM050 in the standing position overlap each other in the front-rear direction. That is, the first change suggestion effect is an effect in which the movable body 01TM050 acts on the active display 01TM001, and at the same time, it is an effect that suggests that the display mode of the active display 01TM001 changes (change effect is executed). There is. Further, when the movable body 01TM050 is in the upright position, the flame effect image 01TM160 is displayed around the active display 01TM001 (around the area overlapping the movable body 01TM050 in the front-rear direction in the screen). That is, the first change suggestion effect is an effect in which the flame effect acts on the active display 01TM001, and at the same time, it is an effect that suggests that the display mode of the active display 01TM001 changes (change effect is executed). ..

In the second change suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 14-5 (13) to (16) described later, a character appears from the right side of the screen, and the character performs an action of throwing a ball toward the active display 01TM001. After the image is displayed, an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character hits the active display 01TM001 is displayed. That is, the second change suggestion effect is an effect in which the ball thrown by the character acts on the active display 01TM001, and also an effect suggesting that the display mode of the active display 01TM001 changes (change effect is executed). It has become.

As described above, by making it possible to execute a plurality of types of effects as the effects acting on the active display 01TM001, it is possible to further improve the interest in changing the display mode of the active display 01TM001.

14-2 (D) and 14-2 (E) are explanatory views showing a specific example of the change suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIGS. 14-2 (D) and 14-2 (E), in this embodiment, whether or not to execute the change suggestion effect and the change suggestion effect are performed according to the change pattern determined in step S01TM1030. When executing, it is possible to determine whether to execute the first change suggestion effect or the second change suggestion effect, and a determination value is assigned to each determination item.

As shown in FIG. 14-2 (D), when the display result is "missing" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "missing"), (1) in step S01TM1030. When the determined change pattern of the active display is the change pattern 101 (normal → normal), it is decided to execute the second change suggestion effect at a rate of 5%, and the first change suggestion is performed at a rate of 95%. It is decided not to execute either the production or the second change suggestion production. Further, (2) when the change pattern of the active display determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 102 (normal → blue), it is decided to execute the first change suggestion effect at a rate of 5%, and 95 It is decided to execute the second change suggestion effect at a rate of%. Further, (3) when the change pattern of the active display determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 103 (blue → blue), it is decided to execute the second change suggestion effect at a rate of 20%, and 80 It is decided that neither the first change suggestion effect nor the second change suggestion effect is executed at a rate of%. Further, (4) when the change pattern of the active display determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 104 (normal → red), it is decided to execute the first change suggestion effect at a rate of 10%, and 90 It is decided to execute the second change suggestion effect at a rate of%. Further, (5) when the change pattern of the active display determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 105 (blue → red), it is decided to execute the first change suggestion effect at a rate of 15%, and 85 It is decided to execute the second change suggestion effect at a rate of%. (6) When the change pattern of the active display determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 106 (red → red), either the first change suggestion effect or the second change suggestion effect is performed at a rate of 100%. Decide not to perform the production.

As shown in FIG. 14-2 (E), when the display result is a "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "big hit"), (1) in step S01TM1030. When the determined change pattern of the active display is the change pattern 101 (normal → normal), it is decided to execute the second change suggestion effect at a rate of 80%, and the first change suggestion is performed at a rate of 20%. It is decided not to execute either the production or the second change suggestion production. Further, (2) when the change pattern of the active display determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 102 (normal → blue), it is decided to execute the first change suggestion effect at a rate of 70%, and 30 It is decided to execute the second change suggestion effect at a rate of%. Further, (3) when the change pattern of the active display determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 103 (blue → blue), it is decided to execute the second change suggestion effect at a rate of 60%, and 40 It is decided that neither the first change suggestion effect nor the second change suggestion effect is executed at a rate of%. Further, (4) when the change pattern of the active display determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 104 (normal → red), it is determined to execute the first change suggestion effect at a rate of 90%. It is decided to execute the second change suggestion effect at a rate of%. Further, (5) when the change pattern of the active display determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 105 (blue → red), it is decided to execute the first change suggestion effect at a rate of 80%, and 20 It is decided to execute the second change suggestion effect at a rate of%. (6) When the change pattern of the active display determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 106 (red → red), either the first change suggestion effect or the second change suggestion effect is performed at a rate of 100%. Decide not to perform the production.

As described above, the change pattern in which the display mode of the active display changes has a higher expectation of big hit than the change pattern in which the display mode of the active display does not change. Then, as shown in FIGS. 14-2 (D) and 14-2 (E), with respect to the change patterns (102, 104, and 105) in which the display mode of the active display changes, when the display result is "off". , The ratio of selecting the second change suggestion effect is higher than that of the first change suggestion effect, and when the display result is "big hit", the ratio of selecting the first change suggestion effect rather than the second change suggestion effect. Is high. Therefore, when the first change suggestion effect is executed and the display mode of the active display is changed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the second change suggestion effect is executed and the display mode of the active display is changed. In this way, there is an interest in which effect is executed because the ratio of big hits differs between the case where the first change suggestion effect is executed and the case where the second change suggestion effect is executed. Can be made.

Further, regarding the change patterns (102, 104, and 105) in which the display mode of the active display changes from the time of the active shift, it is possible to decide to execute the first change suggestion effect, and execute the second change suggestion effect. In particular, with respect to the change patterns (101, 103, and 106) in which the display mode of the active display does not change from the time of the active shift, it is not decided to execute the first change suggestion effect. It is possible to decide to execute the second change suggestion effect. That is, when the first change suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the active display always changes, but when the second change suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the active display may not change. In this way, which effect is executed because the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes differs between the case where the first change suggestion effect is executed and the case where the second change suggestion effect is executed. You can be interested in crabs.

(Specific examples of the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect)
Next, specific examples of the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-3, 14-4, and 14-5. FIG. 14-3 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the first change suggestion effect or the second change suggestion effect is executed, and FIGS. 14-4 and 14-5 are the first change suggestion effect. Alternatively, it is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the second change suggestion effect is executed.

In the example shown below, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the fact that the display result specified by the display result designation command is a "big hit" and the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a "super reach jackpot". In addition to executing the variable display of the decorative pattern, the battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character battle is executed as a super reach effect. Then, the occurrence of a big hit is notified by executing a victory effect in which the ally character finally wins.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the cut-in notice effect of the second mode (“CHANGE !!”) in step S01TM1010, and sets the final display mode of the active display to the red mode in step S01TM1020. It is assumed that it is decided that the change pattern of the active display is the change pattern 104 (normal → red) in step S01TM1030. In the following, an example of the case where it is decided to execute the first change suggestion effect in step S01TM1040 is shown in FIGS. 14-5 (8) to (12), and the second change suggestion effect is executed in step S01TM1040. An example of the determined case is shown in FIGS. 14-5 (13) to (17).

First, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (1), the effect control CPU 120 has the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area of the image display device 5 in a state where the first reserved storage number is 2. In 5R, the variation display of the decorative symbol (the variation display started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 14-3) is executed. At this time, in the small symbol display area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area 5r of the image display device 5, the variation display of the small symbol (variation display started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 14-3). Is running. Further, in the active display area 01TM003, the active display 01TM001 (white circle display) in the normal mode is displayed, and in the hold display area 01TM004, two hold displays 01TM002 (white circle display) in the normal mode are displayed. Has been done.

In this embodiment, a symbol displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5, which is smaller than the decorative symbol and indicates whether or not the decorative symbol is variablely displayed and the display result of the decorative symbol, is referred to as a small symbol. Refer to. The variable display of the small symbol can be executed in parallel with the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the stop display of the small symbol can also be executed in parallel with the stop display of the decorative symbol. Then, the areas where the small symbols are variablely displayed and stopped are designated as the small symbol display area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area 5r from the left.

As described above, as the variation display of the effect symbol executed in response to the variation display of the special symbol, there are the variation display of the decorative symbol and the variation display of the small symbol. The effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the variation display of the special symbol is started, and based on the fact that the variation display of the decorative symbol and the variation display of the small symbol are started. Is started at the same timing, and when the variation display of the special symbol is completed (when the special symbol is confirmed and stopped), the decoration is based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100. The variable display of the symbol and the variable display of the small symbol are terminated at the same timing (the decorative symbol and the small symbol are fixed and stopped at the same timing).

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (2), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. In this state (at the timing of T2 shown in FIG. 14-3), the operation promotion display 01TM031 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed. The operation promotion display 01TM031 includes an image imitating the push button 31B and a downward arrow displayed above the image imitating the push button 31B, and is a display prompting the user to press the push button 31B. It has become. The first operation promotion display displayed here is an operation promotion display in a normal mode corresponding to the cut-in notice effect. At this time, the variation display of the small symbol is continued in the small symbol display area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (3), the effect control CPU 120 responds to the operation of the push button 31B while the operation promotion display 01TM031 is displayed (T3 shown in FIG. 14-3). (At the timing of), the cut-in notice effect of the second aspect is executed, and the cut-in image 01TM040 (“CHANGE !!”) is displayed on the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (4), the effect control CPU 120 has a timing (FIG. 14-) in which a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the cut-in image 01TM040 (“CHANGE !!”) is displayed. At the timing of T4 shown in 3), the cut-in image 01TM040 (“CHANGE !!”) is erased, and the cut-in notice effect of the second aspect is ended.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (5), the effect control CPU 120 sets "7" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established. The decorative symbol of is stopped and displayed to bring it into a reach state, and the characters "reach !!" are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 (timing of T5 in FIG. 14-3). At this time, in the small symbol display area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area 5r, the variable display of the small symbol is continued. That is, the small symbol is also stopped in the small symbol display area 5l corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the small symbol display area 5r corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. It is continuously displayed in a variable manner without being displayed.

Then, after the reach state is established, the effect control CPU 120 executes the battle effect according to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (6). Here, as the battle effect is executed, the ally character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110 are displayed on the image display device 5 (timing of T6 in FIG. 14-3).

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (7), the effect control CPU 120 displays the operation promotion display 01TM031A during the execution of the battle effect (at the timing of T7 shown in FIG. 14-3). The second operation promotion display displayed here is a special mode of operation promotion display corresponding to the change suggestion effect, and is an image imitating the push button 31B wrapped in flame and an image imitating the push button 31B. A downward arrow displayed above is included, and it is a display prompting to press the push button 31B. The operation promotion display 01TM031A in a special mode has a display mode having a higher priority than the image related to the decorative pattern and the battle effect (a mode in which the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in front of the other effect images). Is displayed.

The effect control CPU 120 is determined in step S01TM1040 described above in response to the operation of the push button 31B while the operation promotion display 01TM031A of the special mode is displayed (at the timing of T8 shown in FIG. 14-3). Either the first change suggestion effect or the second change suggestion effect is executed. If it is decided to execute the first change suggestion effect, the process proceeds to FIG. 14-5 (8), and if it is decided to execute the second change suggestion effect, FIG. 14-5 is performed. Proceed to (13).

(Example when executing the first change suggestion effect)
When the effect control CPU 120 is determined to execute the first change suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 14-5 (8), the push button 31B is operated at the timing (shown in FIG. 14-3). (At the timing of T8), the first change suggestion effect is executed. In the present embodiment, the blackout effect is executed when the first change suggestion effect is started. The blackout effect is an effect of reducing the visibility of a predetermined image and making it difficult to see by displaying the darkened image 01TM150 as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. In the present embodiment, when the blackout effect is executed, the decorative pattern and the reach effect image (including the image related to the battle effect) become difficult to see.

Here, as shown in FIG. 14-5 (8), when the blackout effect is executed, the decorative symbol, which is one of the effect symbols, becomes difficult to see, but the small symbol, which is the other effect symbol, becomes difficult to see. It remains visible. That is, while the visibility of the decorative symbol of "7" that was stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R and the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed in the symbol display area 5C is reduced, the small symbol is displayed. The visibility of the small symbols that are variablely displayed in the area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area 5r is not deteriorated.

As shown in FIG. 14-4, when the blackout effect is not executed, the decorative symbol is displayed larger than the small symbol and is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the center of the screen. It is possible to make the visibility of the decorative symbol higher than the visibility of the small symbol, but in the difficult-to-see state where the blackout effect is executed, the visibility of the small symbol is higher than the visibility of the decorative symbol. Become. As a result, it is possible for the player to appropriately grasp that the variable display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) is continued while enhancing the effect of the effect by changing the visibility of the decorative symbol and the image related to the battle effect. Is.

In the present embodiment, the darkened image 01TM150 that covers the entire display screen is displayed in order to reduce the visibility of the predetermined image. However, by displaying the darkened image 01TM150, the darkened image 01TM150 is displayed more than the darkened image 01TM150. A predetermined image having a low priority (an image in which the display layer is lower and is visible behind the dark image 01TM150 when viewed from the player) becomes completely invisible (that is, the layer transparency of the dark image 01TM150 is 0%). A predetermined image having a lower display priority than the darkened image 01TM150 is difficult to see, but is slightly visible (that is, the layer transparency of the darkened image 01TM150 is not 0%). You may do so.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example of displaying a covered image (darkening image 01TM150) covering the entire display screen is shown, but a covered image covering only a part of the display screen (for example, only the central portion) is displayed. As a result, the visibility of only a part of the display screen may be reduced. Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the predetermined image is made difficult to see by displaying the darkened image 01TM150, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire screen is made to emit white light (displays only a white image). As a result, the predetermined image may be in a difficult-to-see state, or the predetermined image may be in a difficult-to-see state by changing the aspect ratio of the predetermined image irregularly. In addition, a character or the like is displayed as a background image of the decorative pattern (an image in which the display priority is lower than the decorative pattern, the display layer is lower than the decorative pattern, and the image is visible to the player behind the decorative pattern). In this case, the visibility of the character or the like as the background image is also lowered by displaying the covered image (darkened image 01TM150 or the like).

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14-5 (8) and the like, the hold display and the active display can be visually recognized even in a visually difficult state, and a quadrangular image showing the active display area 01TM003. (So-called interface image) is also visible, but it is not limited to such a form, and it is a corresponding display that changes the display mode in a difficult-to-see state (a corresponding display that is a target of a change effect, and is active in this example. The visibility may be reduced for the corresponding display (hold display 01TM002 in this example) other than the display 01TM001), and the visibility is also reduced for the quadrangular image (so-called interface image) showing the active display area 01TM003. You may let it.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-5 (8), the effect control CPU 120 has the active display 01TM001 (white circle display) in the normal mode displayed in the active display area 01TM003 while continuing the difficult-to-see state. Is moved above the active display area 01TM003 to the center of the screen, and the active display 01TM001 (white circle display) in the normal mode is enlarged and displayed. This improves the visibility of the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) that is the target of the first change suggestion effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-5 (9), the effect control CPU 120 executes a movable body operation effect of operating the movable body 01TM050 from the tilted position to the upright position while maintaining the difficult-to-see state (FIG. 14). Along with T9A to T9B) shown in -3, an effect effect is executed in which the flame effect image 01TM160 is superimposed and displayed on the darkened image 01TM150 around the enlarged active display 01TM001. Since the flame effect image 01TM160 is an image having a higher display priority than the darkening image 01TM150 (the display layer is higher), it appears to the player that it is displayed in front of the darkening image 01TM150.

Here, since the active display 01TM001 enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen and the movable body 01TM050 in the standing position have a positional relationship of overlapping in the front-rear direction, the visibility of the active display 01TM001 is temporarily lowered. (Timing of T9B shown in FIG. 14-3). Then, the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the active display 01TM001 to a normal mode (white circle) within the period when the visibility of the active display 01TM001 is reduced (within the period of T9B to T10A shown in FIG. 14-3). A change effect that changes from the shape display) to the red mode (red circle display) is executed.

Further, since the flame effect image 01TM160 is displayed around the active display 01TM001, the flame effect image 01TM160 can be visually recognized even when the movable body 01TM050 is in the upright position as shown in FIG. 14-5 (9). is there. As a result, a visual effect is produced as if the movable body 01TM050 in the upright position is covered with flames. In this way, by displaying the flame effect image 01TM160 at a position corresponding to the movable body 01TM050 in the standing position, the effect can be enhanced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-5 (10), the effect control CPU 120 changed the display mode of the active display 01TM001 from the normal mode (white circle display) to the red mode (red circle display). Accordingly, the operation of returning the movable body 01TM050 in the upright position to the tilted position is executed (T10A to T10B shown in FIGS. 14-3). As a result, the movement effect of the movable body is completed, and the visibility of the active display 01TM001 enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen is improved again. The display mode of the active display 01TM001 at this time has changed to a red mode (red circle display) different from the display mode (normal mode (white circle display)) before the execution of the movable body motion effect.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 reduces the red mode active display 01TM001 enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen to return it to its original size, and moves it to the lower active display area 01TM003. That is, the visibility of the active display 01TM001 is lowered to return to the visibility before the first change suggestion effect and the blackout effect are executed. As a result, the active display 01TM001, which has changed from the normal mode to the red mode, is displayed in the active display area 01TM003. Then, by ending the display of the blackout image 01TM150, the difficult-to-see state is released, and the visibility of the predetermined image (the decorative pattern and the image related to the battle effect) is restored (the timing of T11 shown in FIG. 14-3). As a result, the first change suggestion effect ends, and the change effect executed in response to the first change suggestion effect and the blackout effect executed in response to the first change suggestion effect end. Become.

As shown in FIG. 14-5 (11), the restored visibility makes it easier to visually recognize a predetermined image (decorative pattern and an image related to the battle effect), and the player can see the battle effect again. Here, the effect control CPU 120 also fluctuates during the period during which the blackout effect is executed (the period from T8 to T11 shown in FIG. 14-3 and the period from (8) to (10) shown in FIG. 14-4). The display control of the battle effect corresponding to the pattern is continuously executed, and during this period, the display control related to the middle part of the battle effect (the part shown in (13) to (15) of FIGS. 14-5 described later) is performed. It is running continuously.

Then, when the blackout effect is completed, the battle effect can be visually recognized from the part corresponding to the display control of the battle effect at that timing. In this example, from the final part of the battle effect shown in FIG. 14-5 (11). The battle production is visible. Even after the blackout effect is completed, the small symbol display area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area 5r of the image display device 5 continue to display the variation of the small symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-5 (12), the effect control CPU 120 has a decorative symbol whose display result is a big hit in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (at the timing of T12 shown in FIG. 14-3). (In this example, "777") is stopped and displayed, and the combination of numbers constituting the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed ("777" in this example) is stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. Display it. Then, the ally character 01TM100 executes a victory effect to win the enemy character 01TM110, and the characters "victory !!" are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 to notify the occurrence of a big hit.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in response to receiving the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100 at the timing of T13 shown in FIG. 14-3. The combination of decorative symbols (“777”) is fixedly stopped, and the combination of small symbols (“777”) stopped and displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r is fixedly stopped. As a result, the variation display of the decorative symbol and the variation display of the small symbol corresponding to the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot are completed.

As shown above, when the first change suggestion effect is executed, the decorative pattern and the image related to the super reach effect, which have been easily visible on the image display device 5, become difficult to see due to the blackout effect. On the other hand, the active display 01TM001, which is the target of the change effect, moves to the center of the screen and is enlarged and displayed, so that the visibility of the active display 01TM001, which is the target of the change effect, is improved. In that state, it is suggested that the movable body 01TM050 acts on the active display 01TM001 by executing the movable body motion effect of operating the movable body 01TM050 from the tilted position to the standing position, and the display mode of the active display 01TM001 changes. To do. Then, a change effect for changing the display mode of the active display 01TM001 is executed while the movable body 01TM050 is in the upright position.

In this way, the first change suggestion effect accompanied by the movable body motion effect acting on the corresponding display (active display 01TM001), which is the target of the change effect, with the predetermined image (decorative pattern and the image related to the super reach effect) in a difficult-to-see state. By executing this, the player can pay attention to the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) that is the target of the change effect, and the interest of the first change suggestion effect and the change effect can be improved.

In addition, before executing the change effect, the visibility of the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) that is the target of the change effect is made higher than the predetermined image (image related to the decorative pattern and the super reach effect), so that the change effect can be produced. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the target corresponding display (active display 01TM001) and improve the interest of the change production.

In the present embodiment, by executing the movable body motion effect, the movable body 01TM050 in the standing position and the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) to be the target of the change effect are in a positional relationship in which they overlap in the front-rear direction. The visibility of the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) that is the target of the change effect is temporarily lowered before the change effect is executed. In this way, by reducing the visibility of the corresponding display (active display 01TM001), which is suggested to change, before the corresponding display changes, the change is made unexpected and the interest is further enhanced. Can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14-2 (D) and 14-2 (E), the display mode of the active display always changes when the first change suggestion effect is executed, but the second change. When the suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the active display may not change. Here, the blackout effect is always executed when the first change suggestion effect is executed, whereas the blackout effect is not executed when the second change suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, when the effect of acting on the active display 01TM001 is executed after the predetermined image (the image related to the decorative pattern and the super reach effect) is in a difficult-to-see state, the predetermined image is acted on the active display 01TM001 without making it difficult to see. The rate of change in the display mode of the active display 01TM001 is higher than that in the case where the effect is executed. Therefore, the player becomes interested in the visibility of the predetermined image when the effect acting on the active display 01TM001 is executed, and the interest of the change suggestion effect can be further improved.

(Example when executing the second change suggestion effect)
When the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the second change suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 performs the second change suggestion effect at the timing when the push button 31B is operated (at the timing of T8 shown in FIG. 14-3). Execute. In the present embodiment, unlike the case of the first change suggestion effect, the blackout effect is not executed when the second change suggestion effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 14-5 (13), in the second change suggestion effect, the character A appears at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, in the image display device 5, the visibility of the predetermined image (the decorative pattern and the image related to the battle effect) is not lowered because the blackout effect is not executed, and it is easy to visually recognize the battle effect. Therefore, the player can see the middle part of the battle production. At this time, in the small symbol display area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area 5r, the variable display of the small symbol is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-5 (14), in the second change suggestion effect, an effect image in which the character A performs an action of throwing a ball toward the active display 01TM001 (white circle display) in the normal mode is displayed. (Timing of T9A shown in FIG. 14-3).

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-5 (15), in the second change suggestion effect, an effect image showing that the ball thrown by the character A hits the active display 01TM001 (white circle display) in the normal mode is displayed. It is displayed (timing of T10A shown in FIG. 14-3). At this time, an effect image (active display 01TM001G) different from the displayed normal mode active display 01TM001 (white circle display) is displayed in the active display area 01TM003. This effect image is an image reminiscent of the explosion of the active display 01TM001.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-5 (16), the effect control CPU 120 hides the effect image (active display 01TM001G) displayed in the active display area 01TM003, and activates the active display area 01TM003 in a red mode. Display 01TM001 is displayed (timing of T11 shown in FIG. 14-3). As a result, the second change suggestion effect ends, and the change effect executed in response to the second change suggestion effect ends.

By executing the second change suggestion effect in this way, the ball thrown by the character A acts on the active display 01TM001, and the change effect that changes the display mode of the active display 01TM001 from the normal mode to the red mode is executed. Will be done. The battle effect is continuously visible even after the end of the second change suggestion effect, and the player can see the battle, which is a continuation of the middle part of the battle effect (Figs. 14-5 (13) to (15)). You can continue to see the final part of the production (Fig. 14-5 (16)). Even after the end of the second change suggestion effect, the variation display of the small symbol is continued in the small symbol display area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-5 (17), the effect control CPU 120 has a decorative symbol whose display result is a big hit in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (at the timing of T12 shown in FIG. 14-3). (In this example, "777") is stopped and displayed, and the combination of numbers constituting the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed ("777" in this example) is stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. Display it. Then, the ally character 01TM100 executes a victory effect to win the enemy character 01TM110, and the characters "victory !!" are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 to notify the occurrence of a big hit.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in response to receiving the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100 at the timing of T13 shown in FIG. 14-3. The combination of decorative symbols (“777”) is fixedly stopped, and the combination of small symbols (“777”) stopped and displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r is fixedly stopped. As a result, the variation display of the decorative symbol and the variation display of the small symbol corresponding to the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot are completed.

The second change suggestion effect shown above is a second change suggestion effect of a success mode that can be executed when the display mode of the active display 01TM001 changes. In the second change suggestion effect of this success mode, when the effect image (active display 01TM001G) is displayed in the active display area 01TM003, the display mode of the active display 01TM001 is displayed as the effect image (active display 01TM001G). It changes from the display mode before the image. On the other hand, the second change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed when the display mode of the active display 01TM001 does not change, and as shown in FIG. 14-5 (14), the character A is the active display area 01TM003. Although the effect image of throwing the ball toward the active display 01TM001 is displayed, the effect image (active display 01TM001G) is not displayed in the active display area 01TM003 after that, and as a result, it is displayed in the active display area 01TM003. The display mode of the active display 01TM001 is not changed.

As shown above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the battle effect as the super reach effect according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command being the variation pattern of the super reach. During the fluctuation display period of the decorative symbol (and small symbol) based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, the start timing and end timing of the battle effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern are predetermined, and the execution period of the battle effect is other. It is constant regardless of the execution status of the effect (for example, the first change suggestion effect, the second change suggestion effect, etc.). Therefore, in the variation display of the decorative symbol (and small symbol) based on the variation pattern, the execution period of the battle effect and the execution period of another effect (for example, the first change suggestion effect, the second change suggestion effect, etc.) overlap. If so, the visibility of the battle effect may be reduced by other effects.

In this example, when the first change suggestion effect is executed, during the period in which the execution period of the battle effect and the execution period of the blackout effect overlap (the period shown in T8 to T11 of FIG. 14-3), The battle effect becomes difficult to see (the period shown in FIGS. 14-5 (8) to (10)). Since this period corresponds to the period during which the middle part of the battle production is being executed, the player cannot see the middle part of the battle production. However, it is possible to see the final part of the battle production that is executed after the execution period of the blackout production is over. On the other hand, when the second change suggestion effect is executed, the blackout effect is not executed, and the execution period of the battle effect and the execution period of the blackout effect do not overlap. It becomes possible to see through the middle part and the final part.

As described above, the execution period of the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect (the period from T8 to T11 shown in FIG. 14-3) is shorter than the execution period of the battle effect, and the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect and the execution period are both shorter. The second change suggestion effect is started after the start of the battle effect, and ends before the end of the battle effect (before the execution of the victory effect). As a result, regardless of the execution status of other effects (first change suggestion effect and second change suggestion effect), the player can at least perform the early part of the battle effect, the final part of the battle effect, and the notification part of the display result ( It is possible to see the victory effect or the defeat effect). That is, even if the effect control CPU 120 does not adjust the execution period, start timing, or end timing of the battle effect according to the execution status of other effects, the game is that the battle effect is started at least by the early part of the battle effect. It is possible to let the player grasp the final stage part and the notification part (winning effect or defeating effect) of the display result, which are important parts in the battle effect.

Further, in this embodiment, as an effect of urging the operation of the push button 31B, an effect of displaying the operation promotion display 01TM031 (see FIG. 14-4 (2)) in the normal mode and the operation promotion display 01TM031A in the special mode (see FIG. 14-4 (2)) are displayed. It is possible to perform an effect of displaying (see FIG. 14-4 (7)). The operation promotion display 01TM031 in the normal mode is displayed immediately after the start of the variable display, and when the push button 31B is operated while the operation promotion display 01TM031 in the normal mode is displayed, the first mode ("CHANGE ??" ”) Or the cut-in notice effect of the second aspect (“CHANGE !!”) is executed. On the other hand, the operation promotion display 01TM031A in the special mode is displayed after the reach state is established (during the execution of the super reach effect), and when the push button 31B is operated while the operation promotion display 01TM031A in the special mode is displayed. Is executed as the first change suggestion effect or the second change suggestion effect.

In this way, the operation promotion display is performed, and as the operation effect executed by operating the push button 31B in response to the operation promotion display, the cut-in notice effect, the first change suggestion effect, and the second change suggestion are performed. There is a production. Here, when either the first change suggestion effect or the second change suggestion effect is executed and the cut-in notice effect is not executed, both the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect are executed. The rate of big hits is higher than when the cut-in notice effect is executed without. As a result, the player is interested in which of the operation suggestion effect (first change suggestion effect or second change suggestion effect) and the cut-in notice effect is executed when the push button 31B is operated. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the operation production.

Further, as described above, when the first change suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) which is the target of the change effect is different from that when the second change suggestion effect is executed. The rate of change is high, and the rate of big hits is high. Therefore, when the player operates the push button 31B in response to the display of the operation promotion display 01TM031A in the special mode, which of the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect is executed. Will pay attention to.

The operation effect is not limited to the effect shown in the above embodiment, and for example, a special background image (active display, hold display) that acts on the corresponding display (active display, hold display) of the background image of the decorative pattern from the normal background image ( For example, it may be a zone effect that changes from the upper part of the corresponding display to a background image in which a lightning strike toward the corresponding display is displayed), and a large number of characters (characters of the same type or characters of a plurality of types) form a group. It may be a group notice effect that crosses the entire screen including the area where the corresponding display (active display, hold display) is displayed.

(Variant example)
In the above embodiment, in the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect, the effect acting on the active display 01TM001 (first change suggestion effect: the effect that the movable body 01TM050 acts on the active display 01TM001 and the flame effect are actively displayed. An example is shown in which the effect of acting on 01TM001 and the second change suggestion effect: the effect of the ball thrown by the character hitting the active display 01TM001) are executed, but the effect is not limited to such a form and acts on the active display 01TM001. The effect of changing the display mode of the active display 01TM001 may be executed without executing the effect. For example, as in the third change suggestion effect shown below, after the visibility of the active display 01TM001 is improved more than usual, the display mode of the active display 01TM001 is not accompanied by an effect acting on the active display 01TM001. May be changed.

(Third change suggestion production)
A specific example of such a third change suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-6 and 14-7. FIG. 14-6 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the third change suggestion effect is executed, and FIG. 14-7 shows the image display device 5 when the third change suggestion effect is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the display effect image.

In the example shown below, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the fact that the display result specified by the display result designation command is a "big hit" and the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a "super reach jackpot". In addition to executing the variable display of the decorative pattern, the battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character battle is executed as a super reach effect. Then, the occurrence of a big hit is notified by executing a victory effect in which the ally character finally wins.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the cut-in notice effect of the second mode (“CHANGE !!”) in step S01TM1010, and sets the final display mode of the active display to the red mode in step S01TM1020. It is assumed that it is decided that the change pattern of the active display is the change pattern 104 (normal → red) in step S01TM1030. In the following, an example will be described in the case where it is decided to execute the third change suggestion effect in step S01TM1040.

When the third change suggestion effect is executed, as in the case where the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect are executed in the period of T1 to T7 shown in FIG. 14-6, FIG. 14-4 The effect control shown in FIGS. 14-4 (7) (the same effect control as in the periods T1 to T7 shown in FIG. 14-3) is executed. Then, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the operation of the push button 31B while the operation promotion display 01TM031A of the special aspect is displayed (at the timing of T8 shown in FIG. 14-6), and the step S01TM1040 described above. The third change suggestion effect determined in is executed.

When the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the third change suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 14-7 (18), the push button 31B is operated at the timing (shown in FIG. 14-6). (At the timing of T8), the third change suggestion effect is executed. In the present embodiment, the blackout effect is executed when the third change suggestion effect is started. That is, by displaying the darkened image 01TM150 as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5, the visibility of the predetermined image is lowered and the visible state is made difficult to see. In the present embodiment, when the blackout effect is executed, the decorative pattern and the reach effect image (including the image related to the battle effect) become difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-7 (18), the effect control CPU 120 has the active display 01TM001 (white circle display) in the normal mode displayed in the active display area 01TM003 while continuing the difficult-to-see state. Is moved above the active display area 01TM003 to the center of the screen, and the active display 01TM001 (white circle display) in the normal mode is enlarged and displayed. This improves the visibility of the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) that is the target of the third change suggestion effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-7 (19), the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the active display 01TM001 from the normal mode (white circle display) to the red mode (red circle display) ( (Timing of T9 shown in FIG. 14-8).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 reduces the red mode active display 01TM001 enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen to return it to its original size, and moves it to the lower active display area 01TM003. That is, the visibility of the active display 01TM001 is lowered to return to the visibility before the third change suggestion effect and the blackout effect are executed. As a result, the active display 01TM001, which has changed from the normal mode to the red mode, is displayed in the active display area 01TM003. Then, by ending the display of the blackout image 01TM150, the difficult-to-see state is released, and the visibility of the predetermined image (the decorative pattern and the image related to the battle effect) is restored (the timing of T10 shown in FIG. 14-6). As a result, the third change suggestion effect ends, and the change effect executed in response to the third change suggestion effect and the blackout effect executed in response to the third change suggestion effect end. Become.

As shown in FIG. 14-7 (20), the restoration of visibility makes it easier to visually recognize a predetermined image (decorative pattern and an image related to the battle effect), and the player can see the battle effect again. Here, the effect control CPU 120 also fluctuates during the period during which the blackout effect is executed (the period T8 to T10 shown in FIG. 14-6 and the period (18) to (19) shown in FIG. 14-7). The display control of the battle effect corresponding to the pattern is continuously executed, and during this period, the display control related to the middle part of the battle effect (the part shown in (13) to (15) of FIG. 14-5 described above) is performed. It is running continuously.

Then, when the blackout effect is completed, the battle effect can be visually recognized from the part corresponding to the display control of the battle effect at that timing. In this example, from the final part of the battle effect shown in FIG. 14-7 (20). The battle production is visible. Even after the blackout effect is completed, the small symbol display area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area 5r of the image display device 5 continue to display the variation of the small symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-7 (21), the effect control CPU 120 has a decorative symbol whose display result is a big hit in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (at the timing of T11 shown in FIG. 14-6). (In this example, "777") is stopped and displayed, and the combination of numbers constituting the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed ("777" in this example) is stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. Display it. Then, the ally character 01TM100 executes a victory effect to win the enemy character 01TM110, and the characters "victory !!" are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 to notify the occurrence of a big hit.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in response to receiving the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100 at the timing of T12 shown in FIG. 14-6. The combination of decorative symbols (“777”) is fixedly stopped, and the combination of small symbols (“777”) stopped and displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r is fixedly stopped. As a result, the variation display of the decorative symbol and the variation display of the small symbol corresponding to the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot are completed.

As shown above, when the third change suggestion effect is executed, the decorative pattern and the image related to the super reach effect, which have been easily visible on the image display device 5, become difficult to see due to the blackout effect. On the other hand, the display mode of the active display 01TM001 is in a state where the visibility of the active display 01TM001, which is the target of the change effect, is improved by moving the active display 01TM001, which is the target of the change effect, to the center of the screen and enlarging the display. Will change.

That is, before the execution of the third change suggestion effect, the visibility of the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) that is the target of the change effect is lower than the visibility of the predetermined image (image related to the super reach effect), but the third change suggestion is performed. In the production, by making the visibility of the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) that is the target of the change effect higher than the visibility of the predetermined image (image related to the super reach effect), the corresponding display (active display) that is the target of the change effect. It is possible to draw the player's attention to 01TM001) and improve the interest of the change production.

(Other variants)
(1) In the above embodiment, an example in which the first change suggestion effect, the second change suggestion effect, and the third change suggestion effect are executed as the effect related to the active display corresponding to the variable display during execution is shown. However, not limited to such a form, as a look-ahead notice effect related to the hold display corresponding to the variable display that has not been executed, the same as the first change suggestion effect, the second change suggestion effect, and the third change suggestion effect. You may make the production of. That is, based on the judgment result at the time of the start winning, the change pattern of the hold display and the type of the change suggestion effect are determined, and the change display (target change) based on the start prize is executed a plurality of times. Among them, the first change suggestion effect, the second change suggestion effect, or the third change suggestion effect may be executed for the hold display corresponding to the change display (target variation) based on the start winning prize.

(2) In the above embodiment, an example in which the display mode of the corresponding display (active display) corresponding to 1 variable display changes once has been described, but the corresponding display corresponding to 1 variable display (2) A change pattern may be provided in which the display mode of (active display or hold display) changes a plurality of times. For example, when the number of reserved memories becomes 2 due to the start winning, the second hold display corresponding to the start prize is displayed in the normal mode, and then with the first hold display shift (hold 2 → hold 1). ), The first change suggestion effect or the second change suggestion effect for the first hold display corresponding to the start winning is executed, the first hold display changes from the normal mode to the blue mode, and then. Along with the second hold display shift (hold 1 → hold 0), the first change suggestion effect or the second change suggestion effect for the active display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize is executed, and the said The active display may change from a blue mode to a red mode.

In this way, the change suggestion effect may be executed a plurality of times for the corresponding display (hold display or active display) corresponding to the variation display of 1. For example, the second change suggestion effect is executed in response to the first change effect (change from the normal mode to the blue mode), and the second change effect is performed in response to the second change effect (change from the blue mode to the red mode). 1 Change suggestion effect may be executed. In addition, for the corresponding display (hold display or active display) corresponding to the variation display of 1, the second change suggestion effect of the failure mode is first executed as the first change suggestion effect, and the display mode of the corresponding display is usually changed. The mode may not be changed, and then the first change suggestion effect may be executed as the second change suggestion effect to change the display mode of the corresponding display from the normal mode to the red mode.

(3) In the above embodiment, a blackout effect is executed as the change suggestion effect (first change suggestion effect, third change suggestion effect) is executed, and a decorative pattern and a reach effect image (image related to the battle effect) are executed. Although it becomes difficult to see (including), the visibility of both the corresponding display (for example, active display) that is the target of the change suggestion effect and the corresponding display (for example, the hold display) that is not the target of the change suggestion effect is reduced. Although an example is shown in which the image is not shown, the visibility of the corresponding display (for example, active display 01TM001) that is the target of the change suggestion effect does not decrease when the blackout effect is executed, but the change suggestion effect is not performed. The visibility of the corresponding display (for example, the hold display 01TM002) that is not the target of the above may be reduced to make it difficult to see.

(4) In the above embodiment, when the first change suggestion effect is executed, the blackout effect is always executed (at a rate of 100%), but the first embodiment is not limited to such an embodiment. Even when the change suggestion effect is executed, the blackout effect may not be executed. For example, in the case of executing the first change suggestion effect, if the display result is out of alignment, the blackout effect is executed at a rate of 30%, and if the display result is a big hit, the blackout effect is performed at a rate of 80%. You may execute it with. Further, even when the blackout effect is executed, the first change suggestion effect may not be executed.

(5) In addition, a plurality of modes may be provided as the mode of the blackout effect. For example, the visibility is relatively low even in the difficult-to-see state, and the display priority is lower than that of the darkened image through the darkened image (it seems to be displayed in the back to the player). The blackout effect of the first aspect in which a darkened image having a rate of 50% is superimposed and displayed, and the degree of visual difficulty is relatively high even in a difficult-to-see state, and the display priority is lower than that of the darkened image via the darkened image (game). A second aspect of blackout effect, in which a darkened image having a layer transmittance of 0% that is transparent to the display layer (which appears to be displayed in the back to the person) is superimposed and displayed, may be provided. Then, when the display result is a big hit, the blackout effect of the second aspect, which is more difficult to see than when the display result is out of order, may be executed. In addition, when the display mode of the corresponding display (active display, hold display) changes, the blackout effect of the second mode, which is more difficult to see than when the display mode of the corresponding display does not change, is executed. You may do so.

(6) In the above embodiment, the blackout effect is executed along with the execution of the first change suggestion effect, and the visibility of the predetermined image (decorative pattern and reach effect image (including the image related to the battle effect)) is improved. An example of lowering the image has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and as the first change suggestion effect is started, an effect of enlarging and displaying a predetermined image is executed to improve the visibility of the predetermined image. You can do it. For example, before the first change suggestion effect is executed, the visibility of the predetermined image is higher than the visibility of the corresponding display (hold display, active display) that is the target of the first change suggestion effect, and the first When the change suggestion effect is executed, the predetermined image is enlarged and displayed (the visibility is further improved), and the visibility of the predetermined image is higher than the visibility of the corresponding display that is the target of the first change suggestion effect. Maintain the state, and in that state, execute the movable body motion effect (end the first change suggestion effect) to change the display mode of the corresponding display that is the target of the first change suggestion effect. You may.

Further, as the first change suggestion effect is executed, a blackout effect is executed to temporarily reduce the visibility of the predetermined image, and then an effect of enlarging and displaying the predetermined image is executed to visually recognize the predetermined image. The property may be improved, and the effect of enlarging and displaying the predetermined image is executed along with the execution of the first change suggestion effect to improve the visibility of the predetermined image, and then the blackout effect is executed. Therefore, the visibility of the predetermined image may be reduced.

(Example of a pachinko machine that executes a probability change fall determination)
As a pachinko gaming machine, in a state where the gaming state is controlled to a high probability state, a probability change fall determination is executed as to whether or not to shift the game state to a low probability state, and the game state is based on the result of the probability change fall determination. There is a pachinko machine that shifts to a low-accuracy state. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-4, it is possible to apply a configuration in which the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value set, as shown in FIG. 9-4, to the pachinko gaming machine 1 that executes such a probability change fall determination. is there. Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine in which the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value and the probability variation fall determination is executed will be described.

In such a pachinko gaming machine, when a start winning prize (winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) occurs, a random number for probabilistic fall determination is extracted, and a special based on the starting winning prize is extracted in a highly accurate state. When the fluctuation display of the symbol is executed, it is determined whether or not to end the high-accuracy state based on the random number for determining the probability-changing fall (whether or not there is a so-called probability-changing fall), and the high-accuracy state is determined based on the judgment result. I'm trying to finish it. Specifically, when the CPU 103 detects that the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening has won a prize in the switch process shown in step S21 of FIG. 4, it extracts a random number for probable change fall determination and high. Whether or not to end the high probability state based on the random number for the probability change fall determination when the variation display of the special symbol based on the winning is started in the probability state (in the special symbol normal processing shown in step S110 of FIG. 5). Is executed, the high probability state is terminated based on the judgment result, and the state shifts to the low probability state.

In this probabilistic fall determination, it is determined to be either "no probable change fall" or "with probable change fall" by the judgment using the random number for probabilistic fall judgment, and it is highly accurate based on the determination that "no probable change fall". The state is continued, and the high probability state ends based on the determination that "there is a probability change fall". The CPU 103 transmits a probability variation fall determination result designation command indicating the presence or absence of the probability variation fall determination in the probability variation fall determination to the effect control CPU 120.

FIG. 14-8 is a diagram showing an example of a display result determination table referred to in the low probability state. As shown in FIGS. 14-8 (A) to 14-8, a display result determination table corresponding to each set value (1 to 6) is provided, and the CPU 103 uses the set set value (1 to 6). The jackpot judgment is executed by referring to the display result judgment table corresponding to any of).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage is.

The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 which is a random number value for determining the special figure display result is set. In each display result judgment table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value for a big hit is set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 14-8 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 at the time of non-probability change (low probability) is used, the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, When the first special symbol is the target of variable display, the probability (1/300) is lower than when the set values are "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". ) To win a big hit. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 at the time of non-probability change (at low probability) is used, the variation special figure designation buffer is the first. Is designed to win a big hit with a higher probability (1/290) than when the set value is "1". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/290) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 at the time of non-probability change (at low probability) is used, the variation special figure designation buffer is the first. Is designed to win a big hit with a higher probability (1/280) than when the set values are "1" and "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (D), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 4 at the time of non-probability change (at low probability) is used, the variation special figure designation buffer is the first. Is designed to win a big hit with a higher probability (1/270) than when the set values are "1", "2", and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/270) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (E), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 at the time of non-probability change (at low probability) is used, the variation special figure designation buffer is the first. Is designed to win a big hit with a higher probability (1/260) than when the set values are "1", "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/260) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (F), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 6 at the time of non-probability change (at low probability) is used, the variation special figure designation buffer is the first. Is designed to win a big hit with a higher probability (1/250) than when the set values are "1", "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at the time when the variable display is to be started in the low accuracy state, and the value of MR1 is shown in FIGS. 14-8 (A) to 14-8 (A). When it matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit shown in F), it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the winning of the big hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 14-8 (A) to 14-8 (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design.

Next, after the display result becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state (big hit), and after the big hit game state, it is controlled to the high accuracy and high base state. The CPU 103 determines the display result in the state of being controlled to the high probability and high base state based on the display result determination table (FIGS. 14-9 (A) to (F)) at the time of probability change (high probability) described later. decide.

FIG. 14-9 is a diagram showing an example of a display result determination table referred to in the high accuracy state. As shown in FIGS. 14-9 (A) to 14-9 (F), a display result determination table corresponding to each set value (1 to 6) is provided, and the CPU 103 uses the set set value (1 to 6). The jackpot judgment is executed by referring to the display result judgment table corresponding to any of).

As shown in FIG. 14-9 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 at the time of probability change (high probability) is used, the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first. 1 When a special symbol is targeted for variable display, the probability is lower than when the set values are "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6" (1/60). It is supposed to win a big hit. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/60) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-9 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 at the time of probability change (high probability) is used, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first. , The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/58) than when the set value is "1". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/58) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-9 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 at the time of probability change (high probability) is used, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first. , The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/56) than when the set values are "1" and "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/56) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-9 (D), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 4 at the time of probability change (high probability) is used, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first. , The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/54) than when the set values are "1", "2", and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/54) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-9 (E), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 at the time of probability change (high probability) is used, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first. , The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/52) than when the set values are "1", "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/52) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-9 (F), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 6 at the time of probability change (high probability) is used, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first. , The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/50) than when the set values are "1", "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/50) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at the time when the variable display is to be started in the high accuracy state, and the value of MR1 is shown in FIGS. 14-9 (A) to 14-9 (A). When it matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit shown in F), it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the winning of the big hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 14-9 (A) to 14-9 (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit.

Further, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 14-8 and 14-9 to determine whether or not to make a big hit, but the big hit determination table is separately used. The jackpot may be determined by using a common table for the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. ..

In the present embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The set value that can be set in may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

In the present embodiment, after the jackpot game state ends, the game is controlled to a high accuracy and high base state. Then, in the probability variation fall determination executed when the variation display of the special symbol is started in the high accuracy high base state, if it is determined that there is no probability variation fall, the high accuracy high base state continues and the "probability variation" is executed. If it is determined that there is a fall, the state shifts to a low probability state (low probability high base state or low probability low base state). The random number for determining the probability change fall is a random number extracted at the time of starting winning (at the timing when the first starting port switch 22A or the second starting port switch 22B is turned on), and the starting winning prize is in the high accuracy and high base state. When the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the above is started, the probability variation fall determination is executed based on the random number for the probability variation fall determination corresponding to the start winning prize.

FIG. 14-10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a probability variation fall determination table. The probability variation fall determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a probability variation fall determination value to be compared with a random number for the probability variation fall determination is set. The probability change fall determination table is a table referred to in the high probability state, and is referred to for determining "with probability change fall" or "without probability change fall" based on a random number for probability change fall determination.

As shown in FIG. 14-10, in the probability change fall determination, the probability change fall is won with a probability of 1/80. That is, it is determined that there is a probabilistic fall with a probability of 1/80, and that there is no probabilistic fall with a probability of 79/80.

That is, when the CPU 103 is about to start the fluctuation display in the high probability state, the random number value for the probability change fall determination is any one of the probability change fall determination values corresponding to "there is a probability change fall" shown in FIG. 14-10. If it matches, it is decided to end the high accuracy state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a start winning prize (winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) occurs, a random number for determining the probability change fall is extracted, and the starting winning prize is obtained in the highly accurate state. When the variation display of the special symbol based on is executed, it is determined whether or not to end the high accuracy state based on the random number for the probability change fall judgment (whether or not there is a so-called probability change fall), and the high accuracy is based on the judgment result. I am trying to end the state. That is, when it is determined that "there is a probability change fall" in the probability change fall determination at the timing when the fluctuation display is about to be started in the high probability state, the state shifts from the high probability state to the low probability state. Therefore, since the determination probability change fall determination is performed before the jackpot determination, it is possible to prevent the jackpot from occurring too continuously (preventing so-called consecutive villas).

Here, with respect to the jackpot determination described above, as shown in FIGS. 14-8 and 14-9, a display result determination table corresponding to the currently set set value (any of 1 to 6) is selected. The display result determination table is referred to, but the common probability variation fall determination table (FIG. 14-10) is referred to for the probability variation fall determination regardless of the currently set set value. That is, when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the special symbol in a highly accurate state (in the special symbol normal processing shown in step S110 of FIG. 5), the jackpot determination is a display result corresponding to the set set value. The judgment table is selected and executed based on the selected display result judgment table, but the probability change fall judgment is executed based on the common probability change fall judgment table regardless of the set value. As a result, the ratio of ending the high accuracy state is a common ratio (1/80 in this example) regardless of the set value.

By doing so, it is possible to suppress the amount of information (number of tables) required for executing the probability change fall determination, and it is possible to effectively utilize the storage capacity of the ROM 101. In the high probability state, the probability of probability change fall is constant regardless of the set value, but as shown in FIG. 14-9, the higher the set value, the higher the jackpot probability. The probability of being judged as a "big hit" in the big hit judgment before being judged as "big hit" is also high. As a result, big hits are likely to occur continuously (so-called consecutive villas are likely to occur).

Next, the game flow in the pachinko gaming machine that executes the probability change fall determination will be described. In the example of the game flow shown below, when a big hit occurs, it is controlled to the high accuracy high base state after the end of the big hit game state, and the probability change fall determination is executed when the fluctuation display is started in the high accuracy high base state. .. Here, by the time the 100th variation display is started without the display result of the variation display executed in the high accuracy and high base state becoming a "big hit", (1) corresponding to the 100th variation display. When it is determined that "there is a probable change fall" in any of the executed probabilistic fall judgments, the fluctuation display corresponding to the probable change fall judgment (any fluctuation display from the first to the 100th time) is low from the start. It is controlled to the high accuracy base state, maintained in the low accuracy high base state until the end of the 100th variation display, and then controlled to the low accuracy low base state.

On the other hand, (2) If it is not determined that "there is a probability change fall" in any of the probability change fall judgments executed in response to the fluctuation display up to the 100th time, the probability is high until at least the 100th change display is completed. When it is maintained in a high base state and it is determined that there is a "probability change fall" in the probability change fall judgment executed corresponding to the 101st and subsequent fluctuation displays, the probability change is low from the start of the fluctuation display corresponding to the probability change fall judgment. Controlled to a low base state.

FIG. 14-11 (A) corresponds to the case where “there is a probability change fall” is determined by the probability change fall determination within 100 rotations after being controlled to the high accuracy high base state after the big hit game state (corresponding to (1) above). Case) is an explanatory diagram showing the game flow, and FIG. 14-11 (B) shows that “there is a probability change fall” in the probability change fall determination after 101 rotations after being controlled to the high accuracy high base state after the big hit game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the game flow at the time of determination (the case corresponding to the above (2)). In this way, when the probability variation fall determination executed in the high accuracy high base state determines that "there is a probability variation fall", the game flow is changed according to the number of fluctuations displayed after being controlled to the high accuracy high base state. Different, the referenced variation pattern table is also different.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the game state are provided, and the effect control CPU 120 can control the effect mode corresponding to the current game state among the plurality of effect modes. Specifically, in the normal state (low accuracy low base state), it is possible to control the normal mode in which the character is not displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the high base state (high accuracy high base state or low accuracy high base state). Then, as shown in FIGS. 14-16, 14-19 and 14-20, which will be described later, the ally character 01TM100 can be controlled to the battle RUSH mode in which the ally character 01TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen as the background image of the decorative pattern. ing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-16, 14-19 and 14-20, in the battle RUSH mode, the characters "Battle RUSH" and "remaining x times" (x = 0 to 100) are displayed in the upper left part of the screen. , Or?) Characters are displayed, suggesting the remaining number of variable display times that can be executed in the battle RUSH mode. Here, "100 times remaining" is displayed in the first fluctuation display executed after the jackpot game state, and then "99 times remaining" and "98 remaining" each time the fluctuation display is executed without the occurrence of a jackpot. The suggested remaining fluctuation display times are subtracted and updated by 1 such as "times" and "remaining 97 times". The remaining variation display number thus suggested is the minimum variation display number (so-called guaranteed remaining time reduction number) that can be executed without a big hit in the battle RUSH mode (high base state). It can be said that.

Then, when the 100th variation display is executed without the occurrence of a jackpot after shifting to the battle RUSH mode (after the jackpot game state ends), "0 remaining times" is displayed (FIGS. 14-16). (10) and FIG. 14-19 (3)). When the 100th variation display is executed and the low accuracy and high base state is reached (in any of the probability variation fall judgments executed in response to the previous variation display including the 100th variation display, " If it is determined that there is a probable change fall), the battle RUSH mode (high base state) ends at this 100th change display (see Fig. 14-17 (14)), and from the next change display. It shifts to the normal mode (low accuracy low base state).

On the other hand, when the 100th variation display is executed without the occurrence of a jackpot after the transition to the battle RUSH mode (after the end of the jackpot game state), the value is high when the 100th variation display is executed. When the accuracy base state is maintained (when none of the probability variation fall judgments executed in response to the fluctuation display up to that point including the 100th variation display is determined as "probability variation fall") , The battle RUSH mode continues, and the characters "remaining? Times" are displayed in the upper left part of the screen in the variation display after the 101st time (see FIG. 14-19 (7)). This is because when it is determined that there is a "probability change fall" in the probability change fall judgment executed in response to the 101st and subsequent fluctuation displays, the game state shifts to the low probability low base state in the fluctuation display. This is because the minimum number of variable display times (so-called guaranteed remaining time reduction number) that can be executed without a big hit in the battle RUSH mode (high base state) is uncertain. Then, when it is determined that "there is a probabilistic fall" in the probabilistic fall determination executed corresponding to the 101st and subsequent fluctuation displays, the RUSH mode is terminated by this fluctuation display, and the normal mode is started from the next fluctuation display. Move to.

(When the probability change falls within 100 fluctuations after the transition to the high accuracy high base state)
As shown in FIG. 14-11 (A), when the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy low base state) and the effect mode is controlled to the normal mode, the fluctuation display is started and the fluctuation is changed. When the display result of the display is "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state, after the big hit game state is finished, the game state is controlled to the high accuracy high base state, and the production mode is controlled to the battle RUSH mode. It will be.

Then, the CPU 103 executes the probability change fall determination when the fluctuation display is started in the state where the game state is controlled to the high accuracy and high base state.

Here, in the high-accuracy high-base state, the CPU 103 falls when the variation display to be executed is the variation display within the 99th time after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the high-accuracy high-base state). Based on the judgment that "there is no probable change fall" and the display result is "out of place", the probability change fall for non-winning loss at the time of high accuracy and high base shown in FIG. 14-12 (A) The fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table. In this example, the variation pattern of "non-reach loss" in which the display result is out of reach without the variation display mode of the decorative symbol being the reach mode, and the "normal reach loss" in which the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode. The fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach Off (Battle Draw)" is provided, in which the fluctuation display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode and the battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character ends in a draw is executed. Has been done. In the example of FIG. 14-12 (A), the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach out of reach" is determined at a rate of 90%, the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach out of reach" is determined at a rate of 8%, and "non-reach out of reach" at a rate of 2%. It is determined by the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach Off (Battle Draw)".

Further, the CPU 103 determines the probability change / fall when the fluctuation display to be executed from now on in the high accuracy / high base state is the fluctuation display within the 99th time after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the high accuracy / high base state). Based on the judgment of "no probable change fall" and the judgment of the display result as "big hit", the change for big hit for probable change fall non-winning at the time of high probability high base shown in FIG. 14-12 (B). The fluctuation pattern is determined based on the pattern determination table. In this example, the variation pattern of "normal reach jackpot" in which the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode, and the battle effect in which the ally character wins the enemy character in the reach mode in the variation display mode of the decoration symbol are executed. A fluctuation pattern of "super reach jackpot (battle victory)" is provided. In the example of FIG. 14-12 (B), the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach jackpot" is determined at a rate of 5%, and the fluctuation pattern of "super reach jackpot (battle victory)" is determined at a rate of 95%.

The CPU 103 includes the hold storage number subtraction specification command, the display result specification command, and the variation pattern specification command, as well as the probability change / fall determination result specification command that specifies "no probability change / fall" in one set of commands, and transmits the command to the effect control CPU 120. To do. The effect control CPU 120 that has received one set of commands is based on the fact that the variation display of the decorative symbol to be executed is the variation display within the 100th time after the transition to the battle RUSH mode (after the end of the big hit game state). , Continue the battle RUSH mode.

On the other hand, the CPU 103 determines the probability change / fall when the fluctuation display to be executed from now on in the high accuracy / high base state is the fluctuation display within the 99th time after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the high accuracy / high base state). Based on the determination that "there is a probable change fall" and the display result is "out of place", the change is made based on the out-of-order change pattern determination table for probable change fall winning shown in FIG. 14-12 (C). Determine the pattern. In this example, the current setting value depends on the battle effect in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode and the battle between the ally character and the enemy character ends in a draw, and the display mode of the characters displayed at the timing when the reach state is established. There is a variation pattern of "super reach loss (battle draw) + setting suggestion effect" in which the first setting suggestion effect is executed. In the example of FIG. 14-12 (C), the fluctuation pattern of "super reach loss (battle draw) + setting suggestion effect" is determined at a rate of 100%.

Further, the CPU 103 determines the probability change / fall when the fluctuation display to be executed from now on in the high accuracy / high base state is the fluctuation display within the 99th time after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the high accuracy / high base state). Based on the determination that "there is a probability change fall" and the display result is "big hit", the fluctuation is based on the change pattern determination table for the big hit for the probability change fall winning shown in FIG. 14-12 (D). Determine the pattern. In this example, a variation pattern of "super reach jackpot (battle victory)" is provided in which the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the battle effect in which the ally character wins the enemy character is executed. In the example of FIG. 14-12 (D), the fluctuation pattern of "super reach jackpot (battle victory)" is determined at a rate of 100%.

The CPU 103 includes a probability change fall determination result specification command for specifying "probability change fall" together with a hold storage number subtraction specification command, a display result specification command, and a fluctuation pattern specification command in one set of commands, and transmits the effect control CPU 120. To do. The effect control CPU 120 that has received one set of commands is based on the fact that the variation display of the decorative symbol to be executed is the variation display within the 100th time after the transition to the battle RUSH mode (after the end of the big hit game state). , Continue the battle RUSH mode.

The CPU 103 shifts the gaming state to the low probability high base state at the timing when the variation display is started, based on the determination that "there is a probability change fall" in the probability change fall determination.

The CPU 103 sets the display result as "missing" when the fluctuation display to be executed from now on in the low accuracy high base state is the fluctuation display within the 99th time after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the high base state). Based on the determination, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the deviation pattern determination table at the time of low accuracy and high base shown in FIG. 14-12 (E). In this example, the variation pattern of "non-reach loss" in which the display result is out of reach without the variation display mode of the decorative symbol being the reach mode, and the "normal reach loss" in which the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode. The fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach Off (Battle Draw)" is provided, in which the fluctuation display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode and the battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character ends in a draw is executed. Has been done. In the example of FIG. 14-12 (E), the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach out of reach" is determined at a rate of 95%, the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach out of reach" is determined at a rate of 3%, and "non-reach out of reach" at a rate of 2%. It is determined by the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach Off (Battle Draw)".

Further, in the low accuracy high base state, when the fluctuation display to be executed from now on is the fluctuation display within the 99th time after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the high base state), the CPU 103 displays the display result as "big hit". Based on the determination, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the jackpot variation pattern determination table at the time of low accuracy and high base shown in FIG. 14-12 (F). In this example, the variation pattern of "normal reach jackpot" in which the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode, and the battle effect in which the ally character wins the enemy character in the reach mode in the variation display mode of the decoration symbol are executed. A fluctuation pattern of "super reach jackpot (battle victory)" is provided. In the example of FIG. 14-12 (F), the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach jackpot" is determined at a rate of 2%, and the fluctuation pattern of "super reach jackpot (battle victory)" is determined at a rate of 98%.

The effect control CPU 120 that has received one set of commands is based on the fact that the variation display of the decorative symbol to be executed is the variation display within the 100th time after the transition to the battle RUSH mode (after the end of the big hit game state). , Continue the battle RUSH mode.

As described above, the CPU 103 is in a high base state (high accuracy high base state or low) from the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the high base state) to the 100th fluctuation display executed without the occurrence of the next big hit. I am trying to continue the accuracy base state). Here, when the 100th variation display is started, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table dedicated to the 100th variation display.

The CPU 103 determines that the display result is "off" when the fluctuation display to be executed from now on in the low accuracy high base state is the 100th fluctuation display after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the high base state). Based on the above, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the deviation pattern determination table for the 100th time shown in FIG. 14-12 (G). In this example, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode, and the current setting value is suggested by the battle effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character and the display mode of the characters displayed at the timing when the reach state is established. 1 The current setting value is suggested by the display mode of the battle RUSH end image displayed at the timing when the battle production ends (the timing after the ally character is notified that the enemy character has been defeated). 2 There is a variation pattern of "super reach loss (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect" in which the setting suggestion effect is executed. In the example of FIG. 14-12 (G), the fluctuation pattern of "super reach loss (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect" is determined at a rate of 100%.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the setting suggestion effect that suggests the current set value based on the determination that "there is a probability change fall" in the probability change fall determination. Even if the high probability state is changed to the low probability state, if a high setting is suggested in the setting suggestion effect, a positive element and a supplementary element for the continuation of the game can be given to the player, and the setting is related to the probability change fall judgment. It is possible to improve the interest in performing the suggestion effect.

Further, the CPU 103 sets the display result as "big hit" when the fluctuation display to be executed from now on in the low accuracy high base state is the 100th fluctuation display after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the high base state). Based on the determination, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table for the 100th jackpot dedicated to the 100th time shown in FIG. 14-12 (H). In this example, a variation pattern of "super reach jackpot (battle victory)" is provided in which the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the battle effect in which the ally character wins the enemy character is executed. In the example of FIG. 14-12 (H), the fluctuation pattern of "super reach jackpot (battle victory)" is determined at a rate of 100%.

The effect control CPU 120 that has received one set of commands is based on the fact that the variation display of the decorative symbol to be executed is the variation display within the 100th time after the transition to the battle RUSH mode (after the end of the big hit game state). , Continue the battle RUSH mode.

In the high-accuracy high-base state, the CPU 103 determines that the variation display to be executed is the 100th variation display after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the high-accuracy high-base state). Based on the determination that "there is a probable change and fall" and the display result is determined to be "off", the variation pattern is determined based on the 100th out-of-order variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14-12 (G). decide.

Further, when the fluctuation display to be executed from now on in the high-accuracy high-base state is the 100th variation display after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the high-accuracy high-base state), the CPU 103 determines the probability variation / fall. Based on the determination that "there is a probable change and fall" and the display result is determined as "big hit", the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the 100th-time dedicated big hit fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14-12 (H). decide.

The CPU 103 includes a probability change fall determination result specification command for specifying "probability change fall" together with a hold storage number subtraction specification command, a display result specification command, and a fluctuation pattern specification command in one set of commands, and transmits the effect control CPU 120. To do. The effect control CPU 120 that has received one set of commands is based on the fact that the variation display of the decorative symbol to be executed is the variation display within the 100th time after the transition to the battle RUSH mode (after the end of the big hit game state). , Continue the battle RUSH mode.

The CPU 103 shifts the gaming state to the low probability high base state at the timing when the variation display is started, based on the determination that "there is a probability change fall" in the probability change fall determination.

Then, the CPU 103 ends the low accuracy high base state in response to the end of the 100th variation display after the jackpot game state ends (after controlling to the high base state). As a result, the next variation display (101st time after the end of the big hit game state) will be executed in the normal state (low probability low base state). Further, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the battle RUSH mode in response to the completion of the 100th variation display after the transition to the battle RUSH mode (after the jackpot game state ends). As a result, the next variation display (101st time after the end of the jackpot game state) will be executed in the normal mode.

(When the probability change falls after 101 fluctuation after the transition to the high accuracy high base state)
As shown in FIG. 14-11 (B), the probability change falls from the time when the high accuracy high base state is controlled after the end of the big hit game state to the time when the 100th variation display is executed without the occurrence of the next big hit. If it is not determined in the determination that "there is a probability change fall", the game control and the effect control are performed by the methods shown below.

When the fluctuation display to be executed from now on in the high accuracy high base state is the 100th fluctuation display after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the high accuracy high base state), the CPU 103 determines "probability change" in the probability change fall determination. Based on the determination of "no fall" and the determination of the display result as "off", the variation pattern is determined based on the 100th deviation variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14-13 (I). .. In this example, a variation pattern of "super reach loss (battle draw)" is provided in which the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the battle effect in which the battle between the ally character and the enemy character ends in a draw is executed. .. In the example of FIG. 14-13 (I), the fluctuation pattern of "super reach loss (battle draw)" is determined at a rate of 100%.

Further, when the fluctuation display to be executed from now on in the high-accuracy high-base state is the 100th variation display after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the high-accuracy high-base state), the CPU 103 determines the probability variation / fall. Based on the determination of "no probable change and fall" and the determination of the display result as "big hit", the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the 100th jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14-13 (J). decide. In this example, a variation pattern of "super reach jackpot (battle victory)" is provided in which the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the battle effect in which the ally character wins the enemy character is executed. In the example of FIG. 14-13 (J), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot (battle victory) is determined at a rate of 100%.

The CPU 103 includes the hold storage number subtraction specification command, the display result specification command, and the variation pattern specification command, as well as the probability change / fall determination result specification command that specifies "no probability change / fall" in one set of commands, and transmits the command to the effect control CPU 120. To do. The effect control CPU 120 that has received one set of commands is based on the fact that the variation display of the decorative symbol to be executed is the variation display within the 100th time after the transition to the battle RUSH mode (after the end of the big hit game state). , Continue the battle RUSH mode.

In the high-accuracy high-base state, the CPU 103 determines that the variation display to be executed from now on is the 101st and subsequent variation displays after the end of the jackpot game state (after the transition to the high-accuracy high-base state). Based on the judgment that "there is no probable change and fall" and the display result is "out of place", the change pattern is determined based on the out-of-order change pattern determination table for the 101st and subsequent times shown in FIG. 14-13 (K). decide. In this example, a "non-reach out-of-reach" variation pattern is provided in which the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is not the reach mode and the display result is out of order. In the example of FIG. 14-13 (K), the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach out of reach" is determined at a rate of 100%.

Further, the CPU 103 determines the probability change / fall when the fluctuation display to be executed from now on in the high accuracy high base state is the 101st and subsequent fluctuation displays after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the high accuracy high base state). Based on the determination of "no probable change and fall" and the determination of the display result as "big hit", the fluctuation is based on the change pattern determination table for the 101st and subsequent times shown in FIG. 14-13 (L). Determine the pattern. In this example, a variation pattern of "super reach jackpot (battle victory)" is provided in which the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the battle effect in which the ally character wins the enemy character is executed. In the example of FIG. 14-13 (L), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot (battle victory) is determined at a rate of 100%.

The CPU 103 includes the hold storage number subtraction specification command, the display result specification command, and the variation pattern specification command, as well as the probability change / fall determination result specification command that specifies "no probability change / fall" in one set of commands, and transmits the command to the effect control CPU 120. To do. In the effect control CPU 120 that has received one set of commands, the variation display of the decorative symbol to be executed is the variation display after the 101st time after the transition to the battle RUSH mode (after the end of the big hit game state). Based on the receipt of the probabilistic fall determination result specification command that specifies "no fall", the battle RUSH mode is continued even after the variation display of the decorative symbol is completed.

In the high-accuracy high-base state, the CPU 103 determines that the variation display to be executed from now on is the 101st and subsequent variation displays after the end of the jackpot game state (after the transition to the high-accuracy high-base state). Based on the determination that "there is a probability variation fall" and the display result is "outlier", the variation pattern is determined based on the deviation pattern determination table for the probability variation fall winning shown in FIG. 14-13 (M). decide. In this example, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode, and the current setting value is suggested by the battle effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character and the display mode of the characters displayed at the timing when the reach state is established. 1 Setting suggestion effect and the second setting that suggests the current setting value according to the display mode of the battle RUSH end image displayed at the timing when the battle effect ends (the timing when it is notified that the ally character has been defeated by the enemy character). There is a variation pattern of "super reach loss (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect" in which the suggestion effect is executed. In the example of FIG. 14-13 (M), the fluctuation pattern of "super reach loss (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect" is determined at a rate of 100%.

Further, the CPU 103 determines the probability change / fall when the fluctuation display to be executed from now on in the high accuracy / high base state is the 101st and subsequent fluctuation displays after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the high accuracy / high base state). Based on the determination that "there is a probabilistic fall" and the display result is "big hit", the fluctuation is based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table for the probabilistic fall winning shown in FIG. 14-13 (N). Determine the pattern. In this example, a variation pattern of "super reach jackpot (battle victory)" is provided in which the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the battle effect in which the ally character wins the enemy character is executed. In the example of FIG. 14-13 (N), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot (battle victory) is determined at a rate of 100%.

The CPU 103 shifts the gaming state to the low probability low base state at the timing when the variation display is started, based on the determination that "there is a probability change fall" in the probability change fall determination.

The CPU 103 includes a probability change fall determination result specification command for specifying "probability change fall" together with a hold storage number subtraction specification command, a display result specification command, and a fluctuation pattern specification command in one set of commands, and transmits the effect control CPU 120. To do. In the effect control CPU 120 that has received one set of commands, the variation display of the decorative symbol to be executed from now on is the variation display after the 101st time after the transition to the battle RUSH mode (after the end of the big hit game state), and " Based on the receipt of the probability variation fall determination result specification command that specifies "with probability variation fall", the battle RUSH mode is terminated when the variation display of the decorative symbol is completed.

That is, when the next variation display is started, the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state), and the effect mode is the normal mode.

In this way, in the high-accuracy and high-base state, as shown in FIG. 14-12 (A), when the display result is determined to be "off", super reach (battle effect) is executed at a rate of 2%. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14-12 (B), when the display result is determined to be a "big hit", super reach (battle effect) is executed at a rate of 95%. That is, the rate at which the super reach (battle effect) is executed when the jackpot game state is controlled is higher than the rate at which the super reach (battle effect) is executed when the jackpot game state is not controlled.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-12 (C) and 14-12 (C) and 14-13 (M) and (N), when the probability variation fall determination is determined to be "probability variation fall", 100 While super reach (battle production) is being executed at a rate of%, as shown in FIGS. 14-12 (A) and (B), when it is determined that there is no probable change fall in the probable change fall judgment, , Super reach (battle production) is executed at a rate of 2% when the display result is "missing" and 95% when the display result is "big hit". That is, the rate at which super reach (battle effect) is executed when it is determined that there is a probability change fall in the probability change fall judgment is the ratio of super reach (battle effect) when it is determined that there is no probability change fall in the probability change fall judgment. ) Is higher than the rate at which it is executed.

Therefore, when the super reach (battle effect) is executed, the player can recognize that the ratio of the advantageous state to the player is high, and the ratio of the probability change fall that is disadvantageous to the player is high. It is also recognizable that it is expensive. By executing the super reach (battle production) in this way, both favorable and unfavorable events for the player are suggested, so that the player's super reach (battle production) You can further improve your interest.

Furthermore, even if the event that triggered the execution of the super reach (battle effect) is the occurrence of a probabilistic fall, the first setting suggestion effect is performed during the execution of the variation display that is the target of the probabilistic fall determination. Is executed, and the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are executed during the execution of the variable display at which the high base state ends, so that the player grasps the setting of the gaming machine currently playing the game. Alternatively, since it is possible to make a guess, it is possible to reduce the discouragement of the player due to the occurrence of a probable change fall.

(Setting suggestion production)
As described above, from the end of the jackpot game state to the execution of the 99th variation display, the display result judgment is determined to be "off", and the probability change fall judgment is determined to be "probability change fall". Based on, as the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display corresponding to the probability change fall judgment, the fluctuation pattern of "super reach loss (battle draw) + setting suggestion effect" accompanied by the battle effect to be a draw and the first setting suggestion effect is selected. (See FIG. 14-12 (C)). The effect control CPU 120 executes the first setting suggestion effect based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command in which the variation pattern of "super reach loss (battle draw) + setting suggestion effect" is specified.

Further, as described above, when the 100th variation display is executed after the jackpot game state is completed, the probability variation fall determination is "probability variation fall" for the variation display up to the 100th time including the 100th variation display. Based on the judgment of "Yes", when the 100th variation display is executed, the battle production that will be defeated and the first The variation pattern of "super reach loss (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect" accompanied by the setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect is selected. The effect control CPU 120 performs the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect based on the reception of the variation pattern specification command in which the variation pattern of "super reach loss (battle draw) + setting suggestion effect" is specified. Execute.

In this way, the first setting suggestion effect executed in the variation display determined to be "probability variation fall" in the probability variation fall determination or the 100th variation display after the jackpot game state ends is shown in FIG. 14 described later. As shown in -16 (6) and the like, the currently set value is suggested by the mode of the characters displayed when the reach state is established. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-14 (A), the number of fluctuation display times when it is determined in the probability variation fall determination that "there is a probability variation fall" is (1) a high accuracy high base state (battle RUSH mode). If it is 50 times or less after being controlled to, the character to be displayed in the first setting suggestion effect is determined to be "reach !!", and (2) it is controlled to the high accuracy and high base state (battle RUSH mode). If the number of times is 51 or more, the character to be displayed in the first setting suggestion effect is determined to be "REACH".

Here, in (1), when the characters "reach !!" are displayed, if the current setting value is any of 1 to 3, the characters "reach !!" are displayed in blue. If the current set value is any of 4 to 6, the characters "reach !!" are displayed in red. Therefore, when the character "reach !!" is in the blue mode, it is suggested that the set value is any of "1", "2", and "3", and the character "reach !!" When is in the red mode, it suggests that the set value is any of "4", "5", and "6". That is, when the blue mode is "reach !!", the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is 33% (1/3), and when the red mode is "reach !!", the setting suggestion effect is produced. The reliability of is 33% (1/3).

Further, in (2), when the characters "REACH" are displayed, if the current setting value is any of 1 to 4, the characters "REACH" are displayed in a blue mode and the current setting. When the value is any of 3 to 6, the characters "REACH" are displayed in a red mode. Therefore, when the character "REACH" is in the blue mode, it is suggested that the set value is any one of "1", "2", "3", and "4", and the character "REACH" When is in the red form, it suggests that the set value is any of "3", "4", "5", and "6". That is, in the case of "REACH" in the blue aspect, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is 25% (1/4), and in the case of "REACH" in the red aspect, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is 25% (1/4). It is 25% (1/4). When the set value is "3" or "4", the display mode of the character "REACH" is assigned to the blue mode or the red mode at a rate of 50%.

Further, the second setting suggestion effect executed in the 100th variation display after the jackpot game state ends is the timing (ally character) at which the battle effect ends, as shown in FIGS. 14-17 (14) described later. The currently set value is suggested by the display mode (background, number of stars) of the battle RUSH end image displayed at the timing (timing when it is notified that the enemy character has been defeated). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-14 (B), the number of fluctuations displayed when the probability variation fall determination is determined to be "probability variation fall" is (1) high accuracy and high base state (battle RUSH mode). If it is 30 times or less after being controlled to, the background to be displayed in the second setting suggestion effect is determined to be "full moon background", and (2) after being controlled to the high accuracy and high base state (battle RUSH mode). If it is 31 times or more and 60 times or less, the background to be displayed in the second setting suggestion effect is determined to be "half moon background", and (3) 61 times after being controlled to the high accuracy and high base state (battle RUSH mode). In the above case, the background to be displayed in the second setting suggestion effect is determined to be "crescent background". The number of stars displayed in the second setting suggestion effect suggests a set value, and 1 to 6 stars are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5.

Here, in (1), when the "full moon background" is displayed, if the current setting value is "p (p = 1 to 6)", p stars are displayed. Therefore, when the number of stars is 1, it is suggested that the set value is "1", and when the number of stars is 2, it is suggested that the set value is "2". If the number of stars is 3, it suggests that the set value is "3", and if the number of stars is 4, it suggests that the set value is "4". If the number of stars is 5, it suggests that the set value is "5", and if the number of stars is 6, it suggests that the set value is "6". There is. That is, when the "full moon background" is displayed, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is 100%.

Further, in (2), when the "half moon background" is displayed, if the current setting value is "q (q = 1 to 6)", q-1 or q stars are displayed. Let me. Therefore, when the number of stars is 1, it is suggested that the set value is "2" or "1", and when the number of stars is 2, the set value is "3" or "2". If the number of stars is 3, the setting value is "4" or "3", and if the number of stars is 4, the setting value is set. The value suggests that it is "5" or "4", and if the number of stars is 5, it suggests that the set value is "6" or "5", and the number of stars. When there are 6, it is suggested that the set value is "1" or "6". That is, when the "half-moon background" is displayed, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is 50%.

Further, in (3), when the "crescent background" is displayed, if the current set value is "r (r = 1 to 6)", r-1, r, or r + 1 Display the stars. Therefore, when the number of stars is 1, it is suggested that the set value is "2", "1", or "6", and when the number of stars is 2, the set value is "2". It suggests that it is "3", "2", or "1", and if the number of stars is 3, it suggests that the set value is "4", "3", or "2". If the number of stars is 4, it suggests that the set value is "5", "4", or "3", and if the number of stars is 5, the set value is set. Suggests that it is "6", "5", or "4", and if the number of stars is 6, the set value should be "1", "6", or "5". It suggests. That is, when the "crescent background" is displayed, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is 33%.

In the present embodiment, when the actual set value is 1, q-1 = 0 may be set in the above (2), and r-1 = 0 may be set in the above (3). If the number of stars to be displayed is set to 0 in these cases, it contradicts the set value range (1 to 6). Therefore, when q-1 = 0 in (2) and when r-1 = 0 in (3), the number of stars to be displayed is set to 6. Further, in the present embodiment, when the actual set value is 6, r + 1 = 7 may be set in the above (3). If the number of stars to be displayed in this case is 7, it contradicts the set value range (1 to 6). Therefore, when r + 1 = 7 in (3), the number of stars actually displayed is 1.

In the first setting suggestion effect, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect increases in the order of "REACH" <"reach !!". That is, the first setting executed in [when the number of fluctuation displays determined to be "probable change fall" in the probability change fall determination is 51 or more after being controlled to the high probability high base state (battle RUSH mode)]. Rather than the suggestion effect, it is executed in [when the number of fluctuation display times determined as "probability change fall" in the probability change fall judgment is 50 times or less after being controlled to the high probability high base state (battle RUSH mode)]. 1 The reliability of the suggested setting value is higher in the setting suggestion effect. In this way, the first setting suggestion that the reliability differs depending on the timing (the number of fluctuation displays after being controlled to the high accuracy high base state (battle RUSH mode)) when it is determined that "there is a probability variation fall" in the probability variation fall determination. Since the effect can be executed, it is possible to relate the timing of the probable change fall and the reliability of the first setting suggestion effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the first setting suggestion effect.

Similarly, in the second setting suggestion effect, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is higher in the order of crescent background <half moon background <full moon background. That is, the second setting to be executed [when the number of fluctuation displays determined as "probability change fall" in the probability change fall determination is 61 times or more after being controlled to the high probability high base state (battle RUSH mode)]. Rather than suggestive effect, [when the number of fluctuation displays determined as "probability change fall" in the probability change fall judgment is 31 or more and 60 times or less after being controlled to the high probability high base state (battle RUSH mode)] The second setting suggestion effect to be executed has a higher reliability of the suggested set value, and moreover, [the number of fluctuation display times determined to be "probability change fall" in the probability change fall judgment is higher. When the number of times is 30 or less after being controlled in the base state (battle RUSH mode)], the reliability of the suggested setting value is higher in the second setting suggestion effect. In this way, the second setting suggestion that the reliability differs depending on the timing (the number of fluctuation displays after being controlled to the high accuracy high base state (battle RUSH mode)) when it is determined that "there is a probability variation fall" in the probability variation fall determination. Since the effect can be executed, it is possible to relate the timing of the probable change fall and the reliability of the second setting suggestion effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the second setting suggestion effect.

Here, the reliability of the first setting suggestion effect is 25% or 33%, while the reliability of the second setting suggestion effect is 33%, 50%, or 100%. Therefore, the highest reliability 33% in the first setting suggestion effect and the lowest reliability 33% in the second setting suggestion effect match, and the second setting suggestion effect is better than the first setting suggestion effect. The reliability will be high. The first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are effects that can be executed in one variation display based on a common variation pattern. In this case, the timing after the first setting suggestion effect is executed. The second setting suggestion effect will be executed. In this way, when the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are executed in one variation display, the second setting suggestion effect with high reliability is executed after the first setting suggestion effect. By setting, the player's interest in the setting suggestion effect can be maintained.

In this embodiment, when the second setting suggestion effect is executed, the first setting suggestion effect is always executed at a timing earlier than that, but the present embodiment is limited to such an embodiment. Instead, even if the second setting suggestion effect is executed, the first setting suggestion effect may not be executed. Further, the second setting suggestion effect may be executed before the first setting suggestion effect is executed.

(Example of production when the probability changes and falls within 100 rotations)
Next, regarding an example of the production when it is determined that there is a "probability change fall" in the probability change fall judgment within 100 rotations after being controlled to the high accuracy high base state (battle RUSH mode) after the end of the big hit game state, FIG. 14- 15, FIG. 14-16, and FIG. 14-17 will be described. 14-15 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect, and FIGS. 14-16 and 14-17 show the first setting suggestion effect and the first setting suggestion effect. 2 It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image related to the setting suggestion effect.

In the example shown below, it is assumed that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to "6". The CPU 103 notifies the effect control CPU 120 of the set value by transmitting a command for designating the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The setting value notified by this command is the setting value at power-on if it is not controlled to the setting change mode that can change the setting value at power-on, and if it is controlled to the setting change mode at power-on. This is the setting value at the end of the setting change mode.

First, as shown in FIG. 14-16 (1), it is assumed that the effect control CPU 120 executes the 19th variation display after being controlled to the high accuracy and high base state (battle RUSH mode). In this example, in the state where the second reserved storage number is 0, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed (T1 shown in FIGS. 14-15) in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. The fluctuation display started at the timing of) is being executed. Further, in the active display area 01TM003, the active display 01TM001 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 displays the ally character 01TM100 in the central portion of the image display device 5 and "battle" in the upper left portion of the image display device 5 in response to controlling the effect mode to the battle RUSH mode. The characters "RUSH" are displayed. Further, in correspondence with the 19th variation display after the currently executing variation display is controlled to the high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode), the upper left portion of the image display device 5 ("" The characters "81 times remaining" are displayed below (below "Battle RUSH").

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-16 (2), when the decorative symbol variation display is being executed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. It is assumed that a new start winning prize is generated in the winning ball device 6B (at the timing of T2 shown in 14-15), and the second reserved memory number becomes 1. At this time, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that the number of second reserved storages has increased to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 newly displays the second hold display 01TM005 in the second hold display area 01TM006 based on the reception of the command indicating that the second hold storage number has increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-16 (3), the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol “2” and a symbol in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 in a state where the second reserved storage number is 1. The decorative symbol "4" is fixedly stopped in the area 5C, and the decorative symbol "6" is fixedly stopped in the symbol display area 5R. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped (timing of T3 shown in FIGS. 14-15).

Next, when the CPU 103 executes the 20th variation display after controlling to the high accuracy and high base state based on the second reserved storage number being 1, the probability variation fall determination is "there is a probability variation fall". It is assumed that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of "super reach loss (battle draw) + setting suggestion effect" based on the judgment and the judgment that the display result is "off". Then, the CPU 103 is a set including a variation pattern specification command for designating the variation pattern "super reach loss (battle draw) + setting suggestion effect" and a probability variation fall determination result specification command for specifying "probability variation fall". The command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Then, the game state is shifted to the low accuracy and high base state at the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol is started.

Based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern specification command that specifies "super reach loss (battle draw) + setting suggestion effect", the variation display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, and the ally character and the enemy character Recognize that the battle effect in which the battle with the player ends in a draw and the first setting suggestion effect that suggests the current setting value according to the display mode of the characters displayed at the timing when the reach state is established should be executed. Then, the mode of the first setting suggestion effect is determined based on the number of fluctuation display times (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode) after being controlled to the high accuracy and high base state.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 determines that there is a probable change fall within 50 times (20 times in this example) after being controlled to the high accuracy and high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode). Based on the judgment, the character to be displayed in the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the 20th fluctuation display judged as "probability change and fall" is determined to be "reach !!", and the set value is "6". Based on the fact that it is set to "", it is assumed that the characters "reach !!" are decided to be in the red mode. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-16 (4), the effect control CPU 120 has the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5C of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. In the symbol display area 5R, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started (timing of T4 shown in FIGS. 14-15).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 01TM001 displayed in the active display area 01TM003 and displays it in the second hold display area 01TM006 as the second hold storage number becomes 0. The second hold display 01TM005 is shifted to the active display area 01TM003. Further, in correspondence with the 20th variation display after the currently executing variation display is controlled to the high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode), the upper left portion of the image display device 5 ("" The characters "80 times remaining" are displayed below (below "Battle RUSH").

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-16 (5), when the decorative symbol variation display is being executed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. It is assumed that a new start winning prize is generated in the winning ball device 6B (at the timing of T5 shown in 14-15), and the second reserved memory number becomes 1. At this time, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that the number of second reserved storages has increased to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 newly displays the second hold display 01TM005 in the second hold display area 01TM006 based on the reception of the command indicating that the second hold storage number has increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-16 (6), the effect control CPU 120 sets "4" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established. The decorative pattern of is stopped and displayed to reach the reach state. Then, at the timing when the reach state is established, the first setting suggestion effect of displaying the characters "reach !!" in the red mode on the upper part of the image display device 5 is executed (timing of T6 shown in FIGS. 14-15).

When the reach state is established in the battle RUSH mode, the player understands that the characters "reach !!" are displayed in the red mode, so that there is a possibility that the player may have fallen in the variable display. In addition, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 currently playing a game may be in the range of 4 to 6, and the suggested set value (4 to 6) is close to the actual set value. To understand that (high reliability). In this way, although it is disappointing to the player that the effect suggesting that the probable change has occurred is executed in the fluctuation display in which the probable change has occurred, there is a possibility that the set value is high (4 to 6). Therefore, the decrease in motivation to play is suppressed. In addition, since the remaining number of variable display times that can be executed in the battle RUSH mode is relatively large (80 times), the player will play with motivation to somehow generate a big hit with the remaining number of times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-16 (7), the effect control CPU 120 ends the first setting suggestion effect and starts the battle effect, which is an effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (FIG. 14-). (Timing of T7 shown in 15). Along with the execution of this battle effect, the image display device 5 displays the ally character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-16 (8), the effect control CPU 120 "draws" on the upper part of the image display device 5 while displaying the ally character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110 on the image display device 5. Is displayed (timing of T8 shown in FIGS. 14-15). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 ends the battle effect, and decorates the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 with a decorative symbol "4", the symbol display area 5C with a decorative symbol "5", and the symbol display area 5R with a decorative symbol "5". The symbol "4" is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped (timing of T9 shown in FIGS. 14-15).

Next, based on the fact that the second reserved storage number is 1, the CPU 103 determines that the display result is "off" when executing the 21st variation display after controlling to the high base state. Therefore, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a “non-reach out of reach” fluctuation pattern. Then, the CPU 103 transmits a set of commands including a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern "non-reach out" to the effect control CPU 120. This 21st variation display is executed in a low accuracy and high base state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-16 (9), the effect control CPU 120 has the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5C of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. In the symbol display area 5R, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started (timing of T10 shown in FIGS. 14-15).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 01TM001 displayed in the active display area 01TM003 and displays it in the second hold display area 01TM006 as the second hold storage number becomes 0. The second hold display 01TM005 is shifted to the active display area 01TM003. Further, in correspondence with the 21st variation display after the currently executing variation display is controlled to the high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode), the upper left portion of the image display device 5 ("" The characters "79 times remaining" are displayed below (below "Battle RUSH").

After that, it is assumed that the display result is continuously "off" from the control to the high base state until the 99th variation display is executed. The gaming state during this period is a low accuracy and high base state.

Next, based on the fact that the second reserved storage number is 3, the CPU 103 determines that the display result is "off" when executing the 100th variation display after controlling to the high base state. Therefore, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of "super reach loss (battle defeat) + setting suggestion production". Then, the CPU 103 transmits a set of commands including a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern "super reach loss (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect" to the effect control CPU 120. This 100th variation display is executed in a low accuracy and high base state.

Based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern specification command that specifies "super reach loss (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect", the variation display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, and the ally character becomes the enemy character. The first setting suggestion effect that suggests the current setting value by the display mode of the characters displayed at the timing when the reach state is established, and the timing when the battle effect ends (the ally character is defeated by the enemy character) It is recognized that the second setting suggestion effect suggesting the current set value should be executed according to the display mode of the battle RUSH end image displayed at the timing when it is notified that the command has been performed. Then, the mode of the first setting suggestion effect and the mode of the second setting suggestion effect are determined based on the number of fluctuations displayed after being controlled to the high base state (after being controlled to the battle RUSH mode).

At this time, regarding the first setting suggestion effect, the first setting suggestion was executed in response to the fluctuation display (the 20th fluctuation display after being controlled to the high accuracy and high base state) that was determined to have "probability change and fall". It is decided in the same manner as the production.

The effect control CPU 120 is determined to have "probability change fall" by the probability change fall determination within 30 times (20 times in this example) after being controlled to the high accuracy and high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode). Based on this, in the second setting suggestion effect corresponding to the 100th fluctuation display in the high base state, it is decided that the background is "full moon background" and the set value is set to "6". Based on this, it is assumed that the number of stars to be displayed is decided to be 6. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-16 (10), the effect control CPU 120 has the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5C of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. In the symbol display area 5R, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started (timing of T11 shown in FIGS. 14-15).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 01TM001 displayed in the active display area 01TM003 and displays it in the second hold display area 01TM006 as the second hold storage number becomes 2. The first second hold display 01TM005 is shifted to the active display area 01TM003, and the second and subsequent second hold displays 01TM005 are shifted to the active display area 01TM003 side. Further, the upper left portion of the image display device 5 (""" corresponds to the fact that the fluctuation display currently being executed is the 100th fluctuation display after being controlled to the high base state (after being controlled to the battle RUSH mode). Below "Battle RUSH"), the characters "0 times remaining" are displayed. Since the player may be the last variable display executed in the high base state (battle RUSH mode), the player pays attention to the effect executed in the variable display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-17 (11), the effect control CPU 120 sets "2" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established. The decorative pattern of is stopped and displayed to reach the reach state. Then, at the timing when the reach state is established, the first setting suggestion effect of displaying the characters "reach !!" in the red mode on the upper part of the image display device 5 is executed (timing of T12 shown in FIGS. 14-15).

When the reach state is established in the battle RUSH mode, the player is executed in the high base state (battle RUSH mode) including the variation display because the characters "reach !!" are displayed in the red mode. It is understood that there is a possibility that the fluctuation display executed at a relatively early stage (1 to 50 rotations) among the fluctuation displays so far may have caused a probable change and fall. In addition, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 currently playing a game may be in the range of 4 to 6, and the suggested set value (4 to 6) is close to the actual set value. To understand that (high reliability). In this way, by making it possible to execute the first setting suggestion effect a plurality of times at different execution timings, it is assumed that the player is executing the first setting suggestion when the variable display in which the probable change has occurred is executed. Even if the effect is overlooked, the first setting suggestion effect to be executed again can be seen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-17 (12), the effect control CPU 120 ends the first setting suggestion effect and starts the battle effect, which is an effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (FIG. 14-). (Timing of T13 shown in 15). Along with the execution of this battle effect, the image display device 5 displays the ally character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110, and above the ally character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110 (upper part of the image display device 5), "RUSH ends if defeated. , If it is a draw, continue RUSH "is displayed. That is, when the battle effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed, the high base state ends this time (100th variable display), and the battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character ends in a draw. When executed, it is an effect to show the player that the high base state will continue from the next time onward (variable display after the 101st time).

For the player, although the probable fall has already been suggested at this point, the probable fall has not been notified, so the player has not yet been convinced of the probable fall. Therefore, it is not clear whether the high base state (low accuracy high base state) ends or the high base state (high accuracy high base state) continues. By suggesting that the high base state (high accuracy and high base state) continues in such a situation, the player can have a sense of expectation.

In this example, since the fluctuation display is executed based on the fluctuation pattern of "super reach loss (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect", as shown in FIG. 14-17 (13), the ally character 01TM100 is the enemy character. A battle effect defeated by 01TM110 is executed (timing of T14 shown in FIGS. 14-15). When the ally character 01TM100 is defeated by the enemy character 01TM110, the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol "2" in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol "3" in the symbol display area 5C, and a symbol display. The decorative pattern "2" is stopped and displayed in the area 5R. As a result, the player grasps that the display result becomes "off" and the high base state ends at the 100th variation display.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 14-17 (14), the effect control CPU 120 ends the battle effect and executes the second setting suggestion effect (timing of T15 shown in FIG. 14-15). As described above, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the fact that it is determined that there is a probable change fall within 30 times after being controlled to the high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode). Therefore, it is decided that the background is the "full moon background" and that the number of stars to be displayed is 6 based on the setting value being set to "6". Based on this determination, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image having a "full moon background" and a number of stars of "6" as the battle RUSH end image 01TM300 notifying that the battle RUSH mode has ended. .. The battle RUSH end image 01TM300 includes the characters "battle RUSH end" displayed in the center of the screen.

By looking at the battle RUSH end image 01TM300, the player grasps that the battle RUSH mode (high base state) has ended. Then, since the battle RUSH end image 01TM300 is a "full moon background" and the number of displayed stars is 6, it was executed in a high base state (battle RUSH mode) including the fluctuation display. Among the fluctuation displays so far, the fluctuation display executed at a relatively early stage (1 to 30 rotations) is used to grasp the probability change and fall. Further, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 currently playing a game is 6, and the suggested setting value (6) is an actual setting value (reliability is 100%). Grasp.

In this way, in the variable display where the high base state (battle RUSH mode) ends, the player is disappointed by being notified that the probable change has already fallen and is in the low probable state, but the suggested setting. Since the value is high (6), the decrease in motivation to play is suppressed. Although the player has finished the high base state (battle RUSH mode), he can expect the next big hit with a high probability, so he will continue to play with the motivation to generate the big hit.

Next, the CPU 103 ends the low accuracy high base state and ends the low accuracy low base state based on the end of the 100th variation display after the jackpot game state ends (after controlling to the high base state). It is controlled to (normal state) (timing of T16 shown in FIGS. 14-15). Further, the effect control CPU 120 ends the second setting suggestion effect, and has a decorative symbol "2" in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol "3" in the symbol display area 5C, and a symbol display area. The decorative pattern "2" is fixedly stopped on 5R. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

As shown above, the CPU 103 controls the high accuracy and high base state after the end of the big hit game state, and then determines that "there is a probability variation fall" in the probability variation fall determination, and then the variation corresponding to the probability variation fall determination. The game state is shifted to the low accuracy and high base state at the timing when the display is started. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the battle RUSH mode in response to the fact that the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the high accuracy and high base state after the jackpot game state ends. Even if it is specified, the battle RUSH mode is continued until the 100th fluctuation display is completed. In this way, by controlling the high-accuracy high-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state to a common production mode, the player can use only the background image of the decorative pattern and the reach production image (image related to the battle production). It becomes difficult to determine whether or not a probable change has fallen. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to play after a probable change and fall, and to increase interest in the setting suggestion effect.

(Example of production when the probability changes and falls after 101 rotations)
Next, regarding an example of production when it is determined that there is a "probability change fall" in the probability change fall judgment after 101 rotations after being controlled to the high accuracy high base state (battle RUSH mode) after the end of the big hit game state, FIG. 14- 18, FIG. 14-19, and FIG. 14-20 will be described. 14-18 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect, and FIGS. 14-19 and 14-20 show the first setting suggestion effect and the first setting suggestion effect. 2 It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image related to the setting suggestion effect. In the example shown below, it is assumed that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to "2".

First, as shown in FIG. 14-19 (1), it is assumed that the effect control CPU 120 executes the 99th variation display after being controlled to the high accuracy and high base state (battle RUSH mode). In this example, in the state where the second reserved storage number is 3, the decorative symbol variation display (T1 shown in FIGS. 14-18) in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. The fluctuation display started at the timing of) is being executed. Further, the active display area 01TM003 displays the active display 01TM001 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second hold display area 01TM006 displays three second hold displays 01TM005.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 displays the ally character 01TM100 in the central portion of the image display device 5 and "battle" in the upper left portion of the image display device 5 in response to controlling the effect mode to the battle RUSH mode. The characters "RUSH" are displayed. Further, in correspondence with the 99th variation display after the currently executing variation display is controlled to the high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode), the upper left portion of the image display device 5 ("" The word "1 time left" is displayed below "Battle RUSH".

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-19 (2), the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol “4” and the symbol in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 in a state where the second reserved storage number is 3. The decorative symbol "5" is fixedly stopped in the area 5C, and the decorative symbol "2" is fixedly stopped in the symbol display area 5R. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped (timing of T2 shown in FIGS. 14-18).

Next, the CPU 103 determines that the display result is "off" when the 100th variation display is executed after controlling to the high accuracy and high base state based on the second reserved storage number of 3. Based on the above, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of "super reach out (battle draw)". That is, based on the fact that "there is a probable change fall" is not determined by the probable change fall determination by the 100th change display, the fluctuation pattern without the setting suggestion effect is determined. Then, the CPU 103 transmits a set of commands including a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern "super reach loss (battle draw)" to the effect control CPU 120. This 100th variation display is executed in a high accuracy and high base state.

As shown in FIG. 14-19 (3), the effect control CPU 120 has the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. In the area 5R, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started (timing of T3 shown in FIGS. 14-18).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 01TM001 displayed in the active display area 01TM003 and displays it in the second hold display area 01TM006 as the second hold storage number becomes 2. The first second hold display 01TM005 is shifted to the active display area 01TM003, and the second and subsequent second hold displays 01TM005 are shifted to the active display area 01TM003 side. Further, the upper left portion of the image display device 5 (""" corresponds to the fact that the fluctuation display currently being executed is the 100th fluctuation display after being controlled to the high base state (after being controlled to the battle RUSH mode). Below "Battle RUSH"), the characters "0 times remaining" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-19 (4), the effect control CPU 120 sets "2" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established. The decorative pattern of is stopped and displayed to reach the reach state. Then, at the timing when the reach state is established, the characters "REACH" are displayed in blue on the upper part of the image display device 5 (timing of T4 shown in FIGS. 14-18).

Here, in the reach effect in the variation pattern without the setting suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the number of variation display times after controlling to the battle RUSH mode (after being controlled to the high accuracy and high base state). The character to be displayed is determined to be either "reach !!" or "REACH". Specifically, when it is 50 times or less after controlling to the battle RUSH mode, the character to be displayed is determined to be "reach !!", and when it is 51 times or more after controlling to the battle RUSH mode. Determines the character to be displayed as "REACH".

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines the display color (aspect) of the characters to be displayed based on the display result in the reach effect in the variation pattern without the setting suggestion effect. Specifically, when the display result is "missing", the display result is determined to be blue at a higher rate than when the display result is "big hit", and when the display result is "big hit", the display result is determined. The red aspect is determined at a higher rate than in the case of "off". Therefore, in the battle RUSH mode, it is difficult for the player to detect the presence or absence of a probable change fall only by looking at the characters displayed at the timing when the reach state is established.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-19 (5), the effect control CPU 120 starts a battle effect which is an effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 14-18). Along with the execution of this battle effect, the image display device 5 displays the ally character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110, and above the ally character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110 (upper part of the image display device 5), "RUSH ends if defeated. , If it is a draw, continue RUSH "is displayed. That is, when the battle effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed, the high base state ends this time (100th variable display), and the battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character ends in a draw. When executed, it is an effect to show the player that the high base state will continue from the next time onward (variable display after the 101st time).

In this example, since the fluctuation display is executed based on the fluctuation pattern of "super reach loss (battle draw)", as shown in FIG. 14-19 (6), the ally character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110 are drawn. The battle effect ending with is executed (timing of T6 shown in FIG. 14-18). At the timing when the ally character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110 are drawn, the effect control CPU 120 has a decorative symbol "2" in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol "3" in the symbol display area 5C, and a symbol. The decorative pattern "2" is stopped and displayed in the display area 5R. As a result, the player grasps that the display result becomes "off" and the high base state continues from the next time onward (the 101st and subsequent variable displays).

Next, the CPU 103 determines that the display result is "off" when executing the 101st variation display after controlling to the high accuracy and high base state based on the second reserved storage number of 2. Based on the above, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a “non-reach out of reach” fluctuation pattern. Then, the CPU 103 transmits a set of commands including a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern "non-reach out" to the effect control CPU 120. This 101st variation display is executed in a high accuracy and high base state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-19 (7), the effect control CPU 120 has the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5C of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. In the symbol display area 5R, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started (timing of T8 shown in FIGS. 14-18).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 01TM001 displayed in the active display area 01TM003 and displays it in the second hold display area 01TM006 as the second hold storage number becomes 1. The first second hold display 01TM005 that has been used is shifted to the active display area 01TM003, and the second and subsequent second hold displays 01TM005 are shifted to the active display area 01TM003 side. Further, in correspondence with the 101st variation display after the currently executing variation display is controlled to the high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode), as described above, the image display device 5 The characters "remaining? Times" are displayed in the upper left (below "Battle RUSH"). Since the player may be the last variable display executed in the high base state (battle RUSH mode) during the period when the characters "remaining? Times" are displayed, the effect executed in the variable display. Will pay attention to.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-19 (8), when the decorative symbol variation display is being executed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. It is assumed that a new start winning prize is generated in the winning ball device 6B (at the timing of T9 shown in 14-18), and the second reserved memory number becomes 2. At this time, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that the number of second reserved storages has increased to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 newly displays the second hold display 01TM005 in the second hold display area 01TM006 based on the reception of the command indicating that the second hold storage number has increased.

After that, it is assumed that the display result is continuously "off" from the control to the high base state until the 123rd variation display is executed. The game state during this period is a high accuracy and high base state.

Next, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 120 is executing the 124th variation display after being controlled to the high accuracy and high base state (battle RUSH mode). In this example, in the state where the second reserved storage number is 0, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed (T10 shown in FIGS. 14-18) in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. (Variation display started at the timing of) is being executed. Further, in the active display area 01TM003, the active display 01TM001 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-19 (9), when the decorative symbol variation display is being executed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. It is assumed that a new start winning prize is generated in the winning ball device 6B (at the timing of T11 shown in 14-18), and the second reserved memory number becomes 1. At this time, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that the number of second reserved storages has increased to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 newly displays the second hold display 01TM005 in the second hold display area 01TM006 based on the reception of the command indicating that the second hold storage number has increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-19 (10), the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol “5” and a symbol in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 in a state where the second reserved storage number is 1. The decorative symbol "1" is fixedly stopped in the area 5C, and the decorative symbol "2" is fixedly stopped in the symbol display area 5R. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped (timing of T12 shown in FIGS. 14-18).

Next, when the CPU 103 executes the 125th variation display after controlling to the high accuracy high base state based on the second reserved storage number being 1, the probability variation fall determination is "there is a probability variation fall". Based on the judgment and the judgment that the display result is "off", it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern is determined as the fluctuation pattern of "super reach loss (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect". Then, the CPU 103 is a set including a variation pattern specification command for designating the variation pattern "super reach loss (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect" and a probability variation fall determination result specification command for specifying "probability variation fall". The command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Then, the gaming state is shifted to the low probability low base state at the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol is started.

Based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern specification command that specifies "super reach loss (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect", the variation display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, and the ally character becomes the enemy character. The first setting suggestion effect that suggests the current setting value by the display mode of the characters displayed at the timing when the reach state is established, and the timing when the battle effect ends (the ally character is defeated by the enemy character) It recognizes that the second setting suggestion effect, which suggests the current set value, should be executed according to the display mode of the battle RUSH end image displayed at the timing when it is notified that the command has been performed. Then, the mode of the first setting suggestion effect and the mode of the second setting suggestion effect are determined based on the number of fluctuation display times (after the control to the battle RUSH mode) after being controlled to the high accuracy and high base state.

After being controlled to the high accuracy and high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode), the effect control CPU 120 is determined to have "probability change fall" in the probability change fall determination 61 times or later (125 times in this example). Based on this, the character to be displayed in the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the 125th variation display determined to be "probable change and fall" is determined to be "REACH", and the set value is set to "2". Based on the above, it is assumed that the characters "reach !!" are decided to be in the blue form. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines that "there is a probability change fall" in the probability change fall determination after 51 times (125 times in this example) after being controlled to the high accuracy and high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode). Based on what was done, in the second setting suggestion effect corresponding to the 125th fluctuation display in the high base state, it was decided that the background was "crescent background" and the set value was set to "2". It is assumed that the number of stars to be displayed is decided to be 3 based on the above.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-20 (11), the effect control CPU 120 has the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5C of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. In the symbol display area 5R, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started (timing of T13 shown in FIGS. 14-18).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 01TM001 displayed in the active display area 01TM003 and displays it in the second hold display area 01TM006 as the second hold storage number becomes 0. The second hold display 01TM005 is shifted to the active display area 01TM003. Further, in correspondence with the 125th variation display after the currently executing variation display is controlled to the high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode), the upper left portion of the image display device 5 ("" Below "Battle RUSH"), the characters "Remaining? Times" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-20 (12), when the decorative symbol variation display is being executed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. It is assumed that a new start winning prize is generated in the winning ball device 6B (at the timing of T14 shown in 14-18), and the second reserved memory number becomes 1. At this time, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that the number of second reserved storages has increased to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 newly displays the second hold display 01TM005 in the second hold display area 01TM006 based on the reception of the command indicating that the second hold storage number has increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-20 (13), the effect control CPU 120 sets "2" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established. The decorative pattern of is stopped and displayed to reach the reach state. Then, at the timing when the reach state is established, the first setting suggestion effect of displaying the characters "REACH" in the blue mode on the upper part of the image display device 5 is executed (timing of T15 shown in FIGS. 14-18).

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-20 (14), the effect control CPU 120 ends the first setting suggestion effect and starts the battle effect, which is an effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (FIG. 14-). (Timing of T16 shown in 18). Along with the execution of this battle effect, the image display device 5 displays the ally character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110, and above the ally character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110 (upper part of the image display device 5), "RUSH ends if defeated. , If you win, you will get a big hit !! ”is displayed. That is, when the battle effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed, the high base state ends this time (125th variable display), and the battle effect in which the ally character wins the enemy character is executed. Is a production that shows the player that the game is controlled to a big hit game state.

For the player, at this point in time, although the probabilistic fall has already been suggested by the first setting suggestion effect, the probabilistic fall has not been notified, so that the player has not yet been convinced of the probable fall. Therefore, it is not clear whether the high base state (high accuracy high base state) ends or the high base state (high accuracy high base state) continues. By suggesting that the high base state (high accuracy and high base state) continues in such a situation, the player can have a sense of expectation. In addition, by suggesting that the display result is a "big hit", it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

In this example, since the fluctuation display is executed based on the fluctuation pattern of "super reach loss (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect", as shown in FIG. 14-20 (15), the ally character 01TM100 is the enemy character. A battle effect defeated by 01TM110 is executed (timing of T17 shown in FIGS. 14-18). When the ally character 01TM100 is defeated by the enemy character 01TM110, the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol "2" in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol "3" in the symbol display area 5C, and a symbol display. The decorative pattern "2" is stopped and displayed in the area 5R. As a result, the player knows that the display result is "off" and that the high base state has ended at the 125th variation display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-20 (16), the effect control CPU 120 ends the battle effect and executes the second setting suggestion effect (timing of T18 shown in FIG. 14-18). As described above, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the fact that after being controlled to the high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode), it is determined that there is a "probability change fall" in the probability change fall determination 61 times or later. , The background is decided to be "crescent background", and the number of stars to be displayed is decided to be 3 based on the setting value being set to "2". Based on this determination, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image having a "crescent background" and a number of stars of "3" as the battle RUSH end image 01TM300 notifying that the battle RUSH mode has ended. .. The battle RUSH end image 01TM300 includes the characters "battle RUSH end" displayed in the center of the screen.

Next, the CPU 103 continuously controls the low accuracy low base state (normal state) based on the end of the 125th variation display after the jackpot game state ends (after controlling to the high base state). (Timing of T19 shown in FIGS. 14-18). Further, the effect control CPU 120 ends the second setting suggestion effect, and has a decorative symbol "2" in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol "3" in the symbol display area 5C, and a symbol display area. The decorative pattern "2" is fixedly stopped on 5R. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

As shown above, the CPU 103 determines the probability change fall determination based on the determination that "there is a probability change fall" in the 101st and subsequent probability change fall determinations after controlling to the high accuracy high base state after the jackpot game state ends. The game state is shifted to the low accuracy and low base state at the timing when the fluctuation display corresponding to the above is started. The effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the battle RUSH mode in response to being controlled to the high accuracy and high base state after the jackpot game state ends, and then specifies the probability change fall determination result corresponding to the 101st and subsequent fluctuation displays. The battle RUSH mode is continued until "probable change fall" is specified by the command, and the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are executed in the variable display specified as "probability change fall", and the battle RUSH mode is set. To finish. In this way, the setting suggestion effect is executed by enabling the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect to be executed in the variable display that triggered the transition of the gaming state from the high accuracy state to the low accuracy state. By diversifying the timing, it is possible to improve the interest of the gaming machine in which the probability change fall determination is executed.

As shown above, when the battle effect is executed in the 100th time or the 100th time or later variable display while being controlled to the battle RUSH mode corresponding to the high base state, (1) the ally character is the enemy character. If you win, the display result will be "big hit" and it will be controlled to the big hit game state. (2) If the battle between the ally character and the enemy character ends in a draw, the display result will be "missing" but the high base state (battle RUSH mode) Will continue, and (3) if the ally character is defeated by the enemy character, the display result will be "off" and the high base state (battle RUSH mode) will end. As a result, it is possible to raise interest in the battle effect executed in response to the fluctuation display of the 100th time and the 101st time and thereafter after being controlled to the battle RUSH mode.

(Modification example when the probability change falls within 100 fluctuations after the transition to the high accuracy high base state)
In the above-mentioned example, if it is determined that there is a "probability change fall" within 100 times after shifting to the high accuracy high base state (battle RUSH mode), the variation display determined that "there is a probability change fall" is displayed. Only the 1 setting suggestion effect is executed, the second setting suggestion effect is not executed, and both the 1st setting suggestion effect and the 2nd setting suggestion effect are executed at the 100th variation display when the high base state ends. Not limited to such a form, both the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect may be executed in the variable display determined as “there is a probable change / fall”.

Further, in the above-mentioned example, if it is determined that "there is a probability change fall" within 100 times after the transition to the high accuracy high base state (battle RUSH mode), the fluctuation display that is determined as "there is a probability change fall". Although it shifts to the low accuracy and high base state, the battle RUSH mode is continued as for the production mode. Not limited to this form, if it is determined that there is a "probability change fall" within 100 times after shifting to the high accuracy high base state (battle RUSH mode), the production mode is changed to the low accuracy high base state. You may change to another production mode that allows you to grasp the fact.

In the example shown below, if it is determined that there is a "probability change fall" within 99 times after shifting to the high accuracy high base state (battle RUSH mode), the variation display that is determined as "there is a probability change fall" is displayed. The first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are executed to control from the next fluctuation display to the 100th fluctuation display at a chance time at which it is possible to grasp that the base state is low accuracy and high. FIG. 14-21 is an explanatory diagram showing a game flow when it is determined that “there is a probability change fall” in the probability change fall determination within 99 times after being controlled to the high accuracy high base state.

Further, in the example of FIG. 14-21, a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the game state are provided, and the effect control CPU 120 can control the effect mode corresponding to the current game state among the plurality of effect modes. Is. Specifically, in the normal state (low accuracy low base state), it is possible to control the normal mode in which the character is not displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and in the high accuracy high base state, as described above, the background of the decorative pattern. As an image, the ally character 01TM100 can be controlled in the battle RUSH mode displayed in the center of the screen, and in the low accuracy and high base state, as shown in FIGS. 14-23 and 14-24 described later, the background image of the decorative pattern. As a result, it is possible to control the chance time when the cloud is displayed at the upper part of the screen and the ally character 01TM100 is displayed at the center of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 14-21 (C), the game state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy low base state), and when the effect mode is controlled to the normal mode, the fluctuation display is started and the fluctuation is changed. When the display result of the display is "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state, after the big hit game state is finished, the game state is controlled to the high accuracy high base state, and the production mode is controlled to the battle RUSH mode. It will be.

Then, the CPU 103 executes the probability change fall determination when the fluctuation display is started in the state where the game state is controlled to the high accuracy and high base state.

Here, in the high-accuracy high-base state, the CPU 103 falls when the variation display to be executed is the variation display within the 99th time after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the high-accuracy high-base state). Based on the judgment that "there is no probable change fall" and the display result is "out of place", the probability change fall for non-winning loss at the time of high accuracy and high base shown in FIG. 14-12 (A) The fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table.

Further, the CPU 103 determines the probability change / fall when the fluctuation display to be executed from now on in the high accuracy / high base state is the fluctuation display within the 99th time after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the high accuracy / high base state). Based on the judgment of "no probable change fall" and the judgment of the display result as "big hit", the change for big hit for probable change fall non-winning at the time of high probability high base shown in FIG. 14-12 (B). The fluctuation pattern is determined based on the pattern determination table.

The CPU 103 includes the hold storage number subtraction specification command, the display result specification command, and the variation pattern specification command, as well as the probability change / fall determination result specification command that specifies "no probability change / fall" in one set of commands, and transmits the command to the effect control CPU 120. To do. The effect control CPU 120 that has received one set of commands has not received the probability change fall determination result specification command that specifies "probability change fall" after the battle RUSH mode transition (after the end of the big hit game state). Continue the battle RUSH mode.

On the other hand, the CPU 103 determines the probability change / fall when the fluctuation display to be executed from now on in the high accuracy / high base state is the fluctuation display within the 99th time after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the high accuracy / high base state). The fluctuation pattern is determined based on the deviation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14-12 (G) based on the determination of "probability change and fall" and the determination of the display result as "off". .. In this example, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode, and the current setting value is suggested by the battle effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character and the display mode of the characters displayed at the timing when the reach state is established. 1 Setting suggestion effect and the second setting that suggests the current setting value according to the display mode of the battle RUSH end image displayed at the timing when the battle effect ends (the timing when it is notified that the ally character has been defeated by the enemy character). There is a variation pattern of "super reach loss (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect" in which the suggestion effect is executed. In the example of FIG. 14-12 (G), the fluctuation pattern of "super reach loss (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect" is determined at a rate of 100%.

Further, the CPU 103 determines the probability change / fall when the fluctuation display to be executed from now on in the high accuracy / high base state is the fluctuation display within the 99th time after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the high accuracy / high base state). Based on the determination that "there is a probability change fall" and the display result is "big hit", the fluctuation is based on the change pattern determination table for the big hit for the probability change fall winning shown in FIG. 14-12 (D). Determine the pattern.

The CPU 103 includes a probability change fall determination result specification command for specifying "probability change fall" together with a hold storage number subtraction specification command, a display result specification command, and a fluctuation pattern specification command in one set of commands, and transmits the effect control CPU 120. To do. The effect control CPU 120 that has received one set of commands has changed the battle RUSH mode this time based on the fact that it has received the probability change fall determination result specification command that specifies "there is a probability change fall" while being controlled to the battle RUSH mode. It ends with the fluctuation display of, and shifts to the chance time from the next fluctuation display.

The CPU 103 shifts the gaming state to the low probability high base state at the timing when the variation display is started, based on the determination that "there is a probability change fall" in the probability change fall determination.

The CPU 103 sets the display result as "missing" when the fluctuation display to be executed from now on in the low accuracy high base state is the fluctuation display within the 100th time after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the high base state). Based on the determination, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the deviation pattern determination table at the time of low accuracy and high base shown in FIG. 14-12 (E).

Further, in the low accuracy high base state, when the fluctuation display to be executed from now on is the fluctuation display within the 100th time after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the high base state), the CPU 103 displays the display result as "big hit". Based on the determination, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the jackpot variation pattern determination table at the time of low accuracy and high base shown in FIG. 14-12 (F).

Then, the CPU 103 ends the low accuracy high base state in response to the end of the 100th variation display after the jackpot game state ends (after controlling to the high base state). As a result, the next variation display (101st time after the end of the big hit game state) will be executed in the normal state (low probability low base state). Further, the effect control CPU 120 ends the chance time according to the end of the 100th variation display after the transition to the battle RUSH mode (after the jackpot game state ends). As a result, the next variation display (101st time after the end of the jackpot game state) will be executed in the normal mode.

14-22 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect, and FIGS. 14-23 and 14-24 show the first setting suggestion effect and the first setting suggestion effect. 2 It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect image which is related to the setting suggestion effect. In the example shown below, it is assumed that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to "6".

First, as shown in FIG. 14-23 (1), it is assumed that the effect control CPU 120 executes the 19th variation display after being controlled to the high accuracy and high base state (battle RUSH mode). In this example, in the state where the second reserved storage number is 0, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed (T1 shown in FIGS. 14-22) in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. (Variation display started at the timing of) is being executed. Further, in the active display area 01TM003, the active display 01TM001 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 displays the ally character 01TM100 in the central portion of the image display device 5 and "battle" in the upper left portion of the image display device 5 in response to controlling the effect mode to the battle RUSH mode. The characters "RUSH" are displayed. Further, in correspondence with the 19th variation display after the currently executing variation display is controlled to the high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode), the upper left portion of the image display device 5 ("" The characters "81 times remaining" are displayed below (below "Battle RUSH").

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-23 (2), when the decorative symbol variation display is being executed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. It is assumed that a new start winning prize is generated in the winning ball device 6B (at the timing of T2 shown in 14-22), and the second reserved memory number becomes 1. At this time, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that the number of second reserved storages has increased to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 newly displays the second hold display 01TM005 in the second hold display area 01TM006 based on the reception of the command indicating that the second hold storage number has increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-23 (3), the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol “2” and a symbol in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 in a state where the second reserved storage number is 1. The decorative symbol "4" is fixedly stopped in the area 5C, and the decorative symbol "6" is fixedly stopped in the symbol display area 5R. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped (timing of T3 shown in FIGS. 14-22).

Next, when the CPU 103 executes the 20th variation display after controlling to the high accuracy high base state based on the second reserved storage number being 1, the probability variation fall determination is "there is a probability variation fall". Based on the judgment and the judgment that the display result is "off", it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern is determined as the fluctuation pattern of "super reach loss (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect". Then, the CPU 103 is a set including a variation pattern specification command for designating the variation pattern "super reach loss (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect" and a probability variation fall determination result specification command for specifying "probability variation fall". The command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Then, the game state is shifted to the low accuracy and high base state at the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol is started.

Based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern specification command that specifies "super reach loss (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect", the variation display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, and the ally character becomes the enemy character. The first setting suggestion effect that suggests the current setting value by the display mode of the characters displayed at the timing when the reach state is established, and the timing when the battle effect ends (the ally character is defeated by the enemy character) It recognizes that the second setting suggestion effect, which suggests the current set value, should be executed according to the display mode of the battle RUSH end image displayed at the timing when it is notified that the command has been performed. Then, the mode of the first setting suggestion effect and the mode of the second setting suggestion effect are determined based on the number of fluctuation display times (after the control to the battle RUSH mode) after being controlled to the high accuracy and high base state.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 determines that there is a probable change fall within 50 times (20 times in this example) after being controlled to the high accuracy and high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode). Based on the judgment, the character to be displayed in the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the 20th fluctuation display judged as "probability change and fall" is determined to be "reach !!", and the set value is "6". Based on the fact that it is set to "", it is assumed that the characters "reach !!" are decided to be in the red mode. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines that "there is a probability change fall" by the probability change fall determination within 30 times (20 times in this example) after being controlled to the high accuracy and high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode). Based on what was done, in the second setting suggestion effect corresponding to the 100th fluctuation display in the high base state, it was decided that the background was "full moon background" and the set value was set to "6". It is assumed that the number of stars to be displayed is decided to be 6 based on the above. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-23 (4), the effect control CPU 120 has the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5C of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. In the symbol display area 5R, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started (timing of T4 shown in FIGS. 14-22).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 that has received one set of commands including the probability change fall determination result specification command that specifies "probability change fall" executes the fluctuation display from the next time (21st time onward) in a low probability high base state. Based on this, it has been decided to end the battle RUSH mode in the variable display to be executed this time (20th time), and shift to the chance time in the variable display after the next time (21st time or later).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 01TM001 displayed in the active display area 01TM003 and displays it in the second hold display area 01TM006 as the second hold storage number becomes 0. The second hold display 01TM005 is shifted to the active display area 01TM003. Further, in correspondence with the 20th variation display after the currently executing variation display is controlled to the high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode), the upper left portion of the image display device 5 ("" The characters "80 times remaining" are displayed below (below "Battle RUSH").

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-23 (5), when the decorative symbol variation display is being executed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. It is assumed that a new start winning prize is generated in the winning ball device 6B (at the timing of T5 shown in 14-22), and the second reserved memory number becomes 1. At this time, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that the number of second reserved storages has increased to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 newly displays the second hold display 01TM005 in the second hold display area 01TM006 based on the reception of the command indicating that the second hold storage number has increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-23 (6), the effect control CPU 120 sets “4” in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established. The decorative pattern of is stopped and displayed to reach the reach state. Then, at the timing when the reach state is established, the first setting suggestion effect of displaying the characters "reach !!" in the red mode on the upper part of the image display device 5 is executed (timing of T6 shown in FIGS. 14-22).

When the reach state is established in the battle RUSH mode, the player understands that the characters "reach !!" are displayed in the red mode, so that there is a possibility that the player has fallen in the variable display. In addition, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 currently playing a game may be in the range of 4 to 6, and the suggested set value (4 to 6) is close to the actual set value. To understand that (high reliability). In this way, although it is disappointing to the player that the effect suggesting that the probable change has occurred is executed in the fluctuation display in which the probable change has occurred, there is a possibility that the set value is high (4 to 6). Therefore, the decrease in motivation to play is suppressed. In addition, since the remaining number of variable display times that can be executed in the battle RUSH mode is relatively large (80 times), the player will play with motivation to somehow generate a big hit with the remaining number of times.

As shown in FIG. 14-16 (7), the effect control CPU 120 ends the first setting suggestion effect and starts a battle effect that corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (see FIG. 14-22). Timing of T7 shown). Along with the execution of this battle effect, the image display device 5 displays the ally character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110, and above the ally character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110 (upper part of the image display device 5), "RUSH ends if defeated. , RUSH continues if it is a draw, big hit if it wins !! "is displayed. That is, if a battle effect in which a ally character is defeated by an enemy character is executed, the high-accuracy high-base state ends this time (19th variable display), and the battle between the ally character and the enemy character ends in a draw. When the production is executed, the high accuracy and high base state will continue from the next time onward (variable display after the 20th time), and when the battle production in which the ally character wins the enemy character is executed, the display result will be "Big hit". It is a production that shows the player that it will be.

For the player, although the probable fall has already been suggested at this point, the probable fall has not been notified, so the player has not yet been convinced of the probable fall. Therefore, it is not clear whether the high-accuracy high-base state ends or the high-accuracy high-base state continues. In such a situation, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation by suggesting that the high accuracy and high base state will continue.

In this example, since the fluctuation display is executed based on the fluctuation pattern of "super reach loss (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect", as shown in FIG. 14-23 (8), the ally character 01TM100 is the enemy character. A battle effect defeated by 01TM110 is executed (timing of T8 shown in FIGS. 14-22). When the ally character 01TM100 is defeated by the enemy character 01TM110, the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol "4" in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol "5" in the symbol display area 5C, and a symbol display. The decorative pattern "4" is stopped and displayed in the area 5R. As a result, the player grasps that the display result becomes "off" and the high accuracy state ends at the 20th variation display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-23 (8), the effect control CPU 120 ends the battle effect and executes the second setting suggestion effect (timing of T9 shown in FIG. 14-22). As described above, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the fact that it is determined that there is a probable change fall within 30 times after being controlled to the high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode). Therefore, it is decided that the background is the "full moon background" and that the number of stars to be displayed is 6 based on the setting value being set to "6". Based on this determination, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image having a "full moon background" and a number of stars of "6" as the battle RUSH end image 01TM300 notifying that the battle RUSH mode has ended. .. The battle RUSH end image 01TM300 includes the characters "battle RUSH end" displayed in the center of the screen.

By looking at the battle RUSH end image 01TM300, the player grasps that the battle RUSH mode (high accuracy and high base state) has ended. Then, since the battle RUSH end image 01TM300 is a "full moon background" and the number of displayed stars is 6, it was executed in a high base state (battle RUSH mode) including the fluctuation display. Among the fluctuation displays so far, the fluctuation display executed at a relatively early stage (1 to 30 rotations) is used to grasp the probability change and fall. Further, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 currently playing a game is 6, and the suggested setting value (6) is an actual setting value (reliability is 100%). Grasp.

In this way, in the variable display at which the high-accuracy high-base state (battle RUSH mode) ends, it is suggested that the player is disappointed by being notified that the probabilistic change has already fallen and is in the low-accuracy state. Since the set value is high (6), the decrease in motivation for playing is suppressed. Although the player has finished the high-accuracy high-base state (battle RUSH mode), he can expect the next big hit with a high probability, so he will continue to play with the motivation to generate the big hit.

Next, based on the fact that the second reserved storage number is 1, the CPU 103 determines that the display result is "off" when executing the 21st variation display after controlling to the high base state. Therefore, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a “non-reach out of reach” fluctuation pattern. Then, the CPU 103 transmits a set of commands including a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern "non-reach out" to the effect control CPU 120. This 21st variation display is executed in a low accuracy and high base state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-23 (10), the effect control CPU 120 has the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5C of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. In the symbol display area 5R, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started (timing of T11 shown in FIGS. 14-22).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 displays the chance time image 01TM400 related to the battle RUSH end image 01TM300 of the "full moon background" displayed in the second setting suggestion effect according to the effect mode being controlled to the chance time. In addition to displaying it as a background image, the ally character 01TM100 is displayed in the central portion of the image display device 5, and the characters "chance time" are displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5. Further, in correspondence with the 21st variation display after the currently executing variation display is controlled to the high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode), the upper left portion of the image display device 5 ("" The characters "79 times remaining" are displayed below (below "Battle RUSH").

After that, it is assumed that the display result is continuously "off" from the control to the high base state until the 99th variation display is executed. The gaming state during this period is a low accuracy and high base state.

Next, based on the fact that the second reserved storage number is 4, the CPU 103 determines that the display result is "off" when executing the 100th variation display after controlling to the high base state. Therefore, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a “non-reach out of reach” fluctuation pattern. Then, the CPU 103 transmits a set of commands including a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern "non-reach out" to the effect control CPU 120. This 100th variation display is executed in a low accuracy and high base state.

As shown in FIG. 14-24 (11), the effect control CPU 120 has the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. In the area 5R, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started (the variation display started at the timing of T12 shown in FIGS. 14-22).

Next, the CPU 103 ends the low-accuracy high-base state and ends the low-accuracy low-base state based on the end of the 100th variation display after the jackpot game state ends (after controlling to the high-base state). It is controlled to (normal state) (timing of T13 shown in FIGS. 14-22). Further, as shown in FIG. 14-24 (12), the effect control CPU 120 displays the characters "chance time end" in the central portion of the image display device 5, and also displays the character "chance time end" in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5. The decorative symbol "2", the decorative symbol "5" in the symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbol "3" in the symbol display area 5R are fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

As shown above, the CPU 103 controls the high accuracy and high base state after the end of the big hit game state, and then determines that "there is a probability variation fall" in the probability variation fall determination, and then the variation corresponding to the probability variation fall determination. The game state is shifted to the low accuracy and high base state at the timing when the display is started. Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the battle RUSH mode in response to the fact that the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the high accuracy and high base state after the jackpot game state ends, and then "there is a probability change fall" by the probability change fall determination result designation command. When is specified, the battle RUSH mode is terminated in the current variation display, and the chance time is controlled from the next variation display to the end of the 100th variation display. In this way, by controlling the high-accuracy high-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state to different production modes, the player can easily grasp that the probabilistic change has fallen.

In this way, if the probability change falls within 99 times after being controlled to the high accuracy high base state, the player shifts to the chance time from the next fluctuation display, so that the player is in the high accuracy high base state (battle RUSH mode). It is possible to recognize the probability change and fall at the number of fluctuation display after being controlled by. The smaller the number of fluctuations displayed when a probable change falls (the faster the probable change falls in battle RUSH mode), the shorter the period of the high probability state and the longer the period of the low probability state, so the player may lose the motivation to play. The first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are executed as the effect associated with the change display that has fallen. In the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect, the earlier the timing at which "there is a probability change fall" is determined in the probability change fall judgment (the number of fluctuations displayed after being controlled to the high probability high base state (battle RUSH mode)). (The smaller the number), the higher the reliability of the setting suggestion, so it is possible to promote the continuation of the game.

In the above embodiment, during the period controlled to the high base state (high accuracy high base state, low accuracy high base state), the change suggestion effect acting on the corresponding display (active display, hold display) as described above. After executing (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect, third change suggestion effect), it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display. Here, when the change suggestion effect is executed, the execution rate of the change effect may be different depending on whether or not the probability change has fallen (whether or not the state is in the low probability and high base state). Further, when the change suggestion effect is executed, the execution rate of the change effect may be changed according to the set value.

For example, in the case of the high accuracy high base state, the execution rate of the change effect when the change suggestion effect is executed is 90%, whereas in the low accuracy high base state, the change suggestion effect is executed. It is assumed that the execution rate of the change effect at the time is 50% (when the set value is 1 to 3) or 10% (when the set value is 4 to 6). That is, in the high accuracy high base state, the display mode of the corresponding display is likely to change when the change suggestion effect is executed, but in the low accuracy high base state, the display mode of the corresponding display is changed when the change suggestion effect is executed. Is hard to change. Further, in the low accuracy and high base state, when the change suggestion effect is executed, if the set value is low (when the set value is 1 to 3), the display mode of the corresponding display is relatively easy to change, but the setting. When the value is high (when the set value is 4 to 6), the display mode of the corresponding display is relatively difficult to change. According to such a configuration, during the period controlled to the low accuracy high base state where the ratio of big hits is low, it is difficult to execute the change effect even if the change suggestion effect is executed, so that the corresponding display is changed unnecessarily. While suppressing the feeling of expectation without letting it, it is possible to suggest that the setting is high because it is difficult to execute the change effect even if the change suggestion effect is executed, so it is possible to improve the motivation to continue the game. Can be done.

Further, in the above embodiment, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect may be different depending on the set value. For example, when the set setting value is high (in the case of 4 to 6), the setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when the set setting value is low (in the case of 1 to 3). You may. On the contrary, when the set value is low (1 to 3), the setting suggestion is higher than when the set value is high (4 to 6). You may try to perform the production.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9… Game effect lamp 10… General winning opening 11… Main board 12… Production control board 13… Voice control board 14… Lamp control board 15… Relay board 20… Ordinary symbol display 21… Gate switch 22A, 22B… Starting port Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuits 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that executes variable display
Display means and
Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production,
The effect executing means can execute a specific effect that suggests that the player is controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player by displaying a predetermined character.
In the display means, when the predetermined character is displayed, it is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.
Corresponding displays include a hold display corresponding to a variable display that has not been executed and a variable display compatible display corresponding to a variable display that has been executed.
In the display means, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first effect identification information and the second effect identification information corresponding to the variable display being executed.
As the period of the specific effect, the first period corresponding to the start of the specific effect, the second period after the first period, and the second period after the second period corresponding to the end of the specific effect. There are 3 periods,
The effect executing means can execute an action effect that acts on the variable display compatible display when the specific effect is being executed.
As the action effect, there are a first action effect and a second action effect .
The effect executing means is
In the second period, while reducing the visibility of the first effect identification information, the visibility of the second effect identification information is not reduced, and the visibility of the predetermined character is reduced, so that the first action is performed. Perform the production,
Wherein without reducing the visibility of a predetermined character to perform the second action effect in the second period,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the first action effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the second action effect is executed.

Images